I.
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................... I - 1
A.
Preface................................................................................................................. I - 1
B.
Reserved .............................................................................................................. I - 2
II.
GENERAL POLICIES AND STANDARDS .............................................................. II - 1
A.
Emergency Procedures ..................................................................................... II - 1
1.
Injuries ................................................................................................... II - 1
2.
Emergency Plan for Gas Leaks .............................................................. II - 1
3.
Fire Protection/evacuation Plan ............................................................. II - 2
4.
Chemical/biological Emergency Response ............................................ II - 2
5.
Security Threats ..................................................................................... II - 2
6.
Storms .................................................................................................... II - 3
7.
Radiation Emergency ............................................................................. II - 3
B.
Operational Safety & Loss Prevention Plan....................................................... II - 4
C.
Safety and Environmental Responsibilities ....................................................... II - 4
1.
Chancellor and Chancellor’s Staff ......................................................... II - 4
2.
Deans, Directors, and Department Heads ............................................. II - 4
3.
Professors and Other Supervisors .......................................................... II - 5
4.
Employees, Students and Visitors .......................................................... II - 5
D.
Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety ............................................ II - 5
1.
Scope ...................................................................................................... II - 5
2.
Duties: .................................................................................................. II - 6
3.
Services Available Through Office of
Occupational and Environmental Safety:............................................... II - 7
E.
University Safety Committee ............................................................................. II - 8
1.
Responsibilities ...................................................................................... II - 8
2.
Duties of the University Safety Committee ........................................... II - 8
F.
Standards ............................................................................................................ II - 9
G.
Louisiana Building Code for State Owned Buildings ........................................ II - 9
1.
Exit and Means of Egress .................................................................... II - 10
2.
Panic Hardware for Required Exits ..................................................... II - 10
3.
Locking or Obstructing Exits and Passageways .................................. II - 10
4.
Exit Signs ............................................................................................. II - 10
5.
Emergency Lighting ............................................................................. II - 11
6.
Fire Alarms .......................................................................................... II - 11
7.
Portable Fire Extinguishers .................................................................. II - 11
8.
Storage of Flammables in State Buildings ........................................... II - 12
9.
Evacuation Diagrams ........................................................................... II - 12
H.
Emergency Showers and Eyewash Stations .................................................... II - 12
1.
Procedures and Operation .................................................................... II - 12
2.
Portable Eye Wash Stations ................................................................. II - 13
i
III.
ADMINISTRATIVE ELEMENTS ............................................................................. III - 1
A.
Hazard Control ................................................................................................. III - 1
B.
Safety Meetings................................................................................................ III - 1
C.
Pre-fire Plan ..................................................................................................... III - 2
D.
Accident Reports .............................................................................................. III - 2
1.
Occupational Accident or Illness Report ............................................. III - 2
2.
Automobile Accident or Loss Notice................................................... III - 2
3.
Liability Accident Notice ..................................................................... III - 2
4.
LSU Police Reports.............................................................................. III - 2
5.
Verbal Reports ..................................................................................... III - 2
E.
Accident Investigations .................................................................................... III - 2
1.
Formal Investigations .......................................................................... III - 3
2.
Informal Investigations by Supervisors................................................ III - 3
3.
The Investigation Procedure ................................................................ III - 3
4.
Approval Process and Routing............................................................. III - 4
5.
Completing Items in the Action Plan ................................................... III - 4
F.
Job Safety Analysis .......................................................................................... III - 4
G.
Safety and Health Inspections and Reports ...................................................... III - 4
1.
Safety and Health Inspections ............................................................. III - 5
2.
Laboratory Inspections ......................................................................... III - 5
3.
Miscellaneous Inspections ................................................................... III - 6
IV.
SAFETY ...................................................................................................................... IV - 1
A.
Fire Safety in Dormitories
.......................................................................... IV - 1
1.
Fire Hazards on Campus ...................................................................... IV - 1
2.
Fire Safety Features.............................................................................. IV - 1
3.
Fire Prevention for Students ................................................................ IV - 2
4.
Fire Extinguishers ................................................................................ IV - 5
5.
Fire Drills ............................................................................................. IV - 6
6.
Guide for Fire-safe Christmas Decorations in Student Rooms ............ IV - 8
7.
Guide for Safe Christmas Decorations in Other Common Areas ........ IV - 9
B.
Electrical Safety ............................................................................................. IV - 10
1.
Electric Codes and Safety Standards.................................................. IV - 10
2.
Medical Services and First Aid .......................................................... IV - 10
3.
Employee Training ............................................................................. IV - 10
4.
General Electrical Safety Precautions ................................................ IV - 11
5.
Electrical Installations ........................................................................ IV - 17
6.
Special Rules for Power Distribution Circuits ................................... IV - 20
7.
High Voltage Testing ......................................................................... IV - 27
8.
Overhead Power Line Work ............................................................ IV - 27
9.
Underground Electrical Work ............................................................ IV - 28
10.
Power Substation Installations and Worker Rules ............................. IV - 29
11.
Additional Rules for Power House Workers ..................................... IV - 30
ii
12.
13.
14.
15.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Wiring in Wet Locations .................................................................... IV - 31
Use of Electrically Powered Equipment and Tools ........................... IV - 32
Ground Fault Circuit Protection......................................................... IV - 32
Extension Cords
See the Appendix for Guidelines on Extension Cord Use. ................ IV - 33
16.
Hazardous Locations .......................................................................... IV - 33
Stairs & Ladders............................................................................................. IV - 33
1.
General Requirements ....................................................................... IV - 33
2.
Stairways ........................................................................................... IV - 34
3.
Stairrails and Handrails ...................................................................... IV - 34
4.
Ladders .............................................................................................. IV - 35
5.
Portable Ladders ................................................................................ IV - 36
6.
Fixed Ladders ..................................................................................... IV - 36
7.
Cages for Fixed Ladders .................................................................... IV - 37
8.
Wells for Fixed Ladders ..................................................................... IV - 38
9.
Ladder Safety Devices and Related Support Systems
for Fixed Ladders ............................................................................... IV - 38
10.
Mounting Ladder Safety Devices for Fixed Ladders ......................... IV - 38
11.
Use of All Ladders ............................................................................ IV - 39
12.
Structural Defects............................................................................... IV - 40
13.
Glossary ............................................................................................. IV - 40
Scaffolds ........................................................................................................ IV - 41
1.
General Requirements for All Scaffolds ............................................ IV - 41
2.
Tube and Coupler Scaffolds............................................................... IV - 43
3.
Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds ...................................................... IV - 44
Material Handling .......................................................................................... IV - 45
1.
Lifting by Hand .................................................................................. IV - 45
2.
Handtrucks ......................................................................................... IV - 47
3.
Requirements for Heavy Construction Equipment ............................ IV - 48
4.
Fork Trucks ........................................................................................ IV - 49
5.
Hoists ................................................................................................. IV - 50
6.
Insulated Aerial Baskets..................................................................... IV - 51
7.
Hand Signals ...................................................................................... IV - 52
8.
Slings.................................................................................................. IV - 52
Confined Spaces............................................................................................. IV - 53
1.
Confined Space .................................................................................. IV - 53
2.
A Permit Required Confined Space ................................................... IV - 53
3.
Training .............................................................................................. IV - 53
4.
Hazards of Confined Spaces .............................................................. IV - 53
5.
Procedures .......................................................................................... IV - 54
Handling, Using, and Storing of Compressed Gas Cylinders ........................ IV - 55
1.
Handling Cylinders ............................................................................ IV - 55
2.
Using Cylinders.................................................................................. IV - 55
iii
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.
Storing Cylinders ............................................................................... IV - 57
Control of Hazardous Energy: Lockout/Tag out ............................................ IV - 58
1.
Purpose............................................................................................... IV - 58
2.
Definitions ......................................................................................... IV - 58
3.
Training ............................................................................................. IV - 58
4.
Preparation for Lock and Tag out Procedures ................................... IV - 59
5.
Routine Maintenance & Machine Adjustments ................................. IV - 59
6.
Locks, Hasps, and Tags ..................................................................... IV - 59
7.
Sop: General Lock and Tag out Procedures - Shutdowns.................. IV - 59
8.
Machine or Equipment Isolation ....................................................... IV - 60
9.
Lockout or Tagout Device Application.............................................. IV - 60
10.
Stored Energy..................................................................................... IV - 60
11.
Verification of Isolation .................................................................... IV - 60
12.
Extended Lockout - Tagout ............................................................... IV - 60
13.
Release from Lockout/tagout ............................................................ IV - 61
14.
LOTO Procedure for Electrical Plug-type Equipment ....................... IV - 61
15.
LOTO Procedures Involving More than One Employee ................... IV - 61
16.
Management's Removal of Lock and Tag Out .................................. IV - 61
17.
Contractors ......................................................................................... IV - 62
Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring ............................................................ IV - 62
Safety in Welding and Cutting Operations .................................................... IV - 65
1.
General ............................................................................................... IV - 65
2.
Protective Clothing and Equipment ................................................... IV - 65
3.
Eye Protection .................................................................................... IV - 65
4.
Work in Confined Spaces .................................................................. IV - 66
5.
Ventilation.......................................................................................... IV - 66
6.
Fire Prevention ................................................................................... IV - 66
7.
Gas Welding and Cutting ................................................................... IV - 67
8.
Electric Arc Welding ........................................................................ IV - 70
Safe Use of Hand Tools and Portable Power Tools ....................................... IV - 72
1.
Screwdrivers ...................................................................................... IV - 72
2.
Hammers ............................................................................................ IV - 72
3.
Punches .............................................................................................. IV - 73
4.
Chisels ................................................................................................ IV - 73
5.
Hacksaws .......................................................................................... IV - 73
6.
Files .................................................................................................... IV - 73
7.
Axes and Hatchets.............................................................................. IV - 73
8.
Knives ................................................................................................ IV - 73
9.
Crowbars ............................................................................................ IV - 74
10.
Shovels .............................................................................................. IV - 74
11.
Box and Socket Wrenches ................................................................. IV - 74
12.
Electric Saws ..................................................................................... IV - 74
13.
Portable Grinder ................................................................................. IV - 74
iv
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
14.
Air Hoses ........................................................................................... IV - 75
Safety Rules for Woodworking Machines ..................................................... IV - 75
1.
General ............................................................................................... IV - 75
2.
Housekeeping ..................................................................................... IV - 75
3.
Guards ................................................................................................ IV - 76
4.
Illumination ........................................................................................ IV - 76
5.
Inspection ........................................................................................... IV - 76
6.
Personal Protective Equipment .......................................................... IV - 76
7.
Code References for Woodworking Machines .................................. IV - 76
Guide to Woodworking.................................................................................. IV - 76
1.
Table Saw........................................................................................... IV - 76
2.
Radial Arm Saw ................................................................................. IV - 77
3.
Band Saw ........................................................................................... IV - 77
4.
Jointer/planer...................................................................................... IV - 77
6.
Wood Shaper ...................................................................................... IV - 77
7.
Sander ................................................................................................ IV - 78
8.
Lathe................................................................................................... IV - 78
9.
Circular Saw Blades for Cutting Wood ............................................. IV - 78
Machine Safeguarding Requirements ............................................................ IV - 79
1.
Flywheels ........................................................................................... IV - 79
2.
Machine Guards ................................................................................. IV - 79
3.
Gears, Sprockets, Friction Drives ...................................................... IV - 79
4.
Belt, Chain or Rope Drives ................................................................ IV - 80
5.
Shafting .............................................................................................. IV - 80
6.
Belt Conveyors ................................................................................... IV - 80
Grounds Maintenance ................................................................................... IV - 81
1.
Hand Tools ......................................................................................... IV - 81
2.
Gasoline Powered Equipment ............................................................ IV - 81
3.
Lawn Trimmers .................................................................................. IV - 82
4.
Power Lawn Mowers ......................................................................... IV - 82
5.
Riding Mowers................................................................................... IV - 82
6.
Garden Tractors: ................................................................................ IV - 83
7.
Pesticides............................................................................................ IV - 84
F.
Emergency Information: ................................................................... IV - 85
8.
Poison Ivy and Poison Oak ................................................................ IV - 85
Water Vessel Operation ................................................................................. IV - 87
1.
Inspection ........................................................................................... IV - 87
2.
Training .............................................................................................. IV - 87
3.
Accidents............................................................................................ IV - 87
4.
General ............................................................................................... IV - 87
5.
Water Vessel Safety Program ............................................................ IV - 87
Vehicle Operation .......................................................................................... IV - 88
1.
Inspection ........................................................................................... IV - 88
v
3.
4.
5.
6.
V.
Training .............................................................................................. IV - 88
Accidents............................................................................................ IV - 88
General ............................................................................................... IV - 88
Safe Drivers Program ......................................................................... IV - 88
INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ............................................................................................ V - 1
A.
Hazardous Material ........................................................................................... V - 1
1.
Hazardous Material Information ........................................................... V - 1
2.
Hazard Communication Program ......................................................... V - 1
3.
Hazardous Materials Definitions .......................................................... V - 3
4.
Chemical Handling and Storage ........................................................... V - 6
5.
Biohazard Control ................................................................................. V - 9
B.
Indoor Air Quality and Sanitation ................................................................... V - 20
1.
Indoor Air Quality Rules ..................................................................... V - 20
2.
Housekeeping ...................................................................................... V - 21
3.
HVAC Preventive Maintenance ......................................................... V - 21
4.
Basics for Handling Food Safely ........................................................ V - 22
C.
Safety Rules for the Laboratory ...................................................................... V - 24
1.
Chemical Hygiene Plan ....................................................................... V - 24
2.
Laboratory Ventilation ........................................................................ V - 24
3.
Refrigerators........................................................................................ V - 26
4.
Food and Beverage Consumption ....................................................... V - 26
D.
Asbestos .......................................................................................................... V - 26
1.
General ................................................................................................ V - 26
2.
Responsibilities ................................................................................... V - 27
E.
Illumination for Occupational Tasks............................................................... V - 28
1.
Background ......................................................................................... V - 28
2.
Definitions........................................................................................... V - 28
F.
Hot Environments ........................................................................................... V - 31
1.
Heat Cramps........................................................................................ V - 31
2.
Heat Exhaustion .................................................................................. V - 31
3.
Heat Stroke.......................................................................................... V - 31
4.
Heat Rashes ......................................................................................... V - 31
5.
Training ............................................................................................... V - 31
G.
Ergonomics ..................................................................................................... V - 32
1.
Why Are WMSDs a Problem? ........................................................... V - 32
2.
Rules to Prevent WMSDs .................................................................. V - 32
3.
Simple Solutions Often Work Best ..................................................... V - 32
4.
Contact OES for Assistance ................................................................ V - 32
I.
Respiratory Protection Program ...................................................................... V - 33
1.
General ................................................................................................ V - 33
2.
General Program Management - Responsibilities .............................. V - 33
3.
Voluntary Use ..................................................................................... V - 33
vi
J.
VI.
4.
Respirator Selection ............................................................................ V - 33
5.
Medical Evaluation ............................................................................. V - 33
Noise ............................................................................................................... V - 34
1.
Technical Information ......................................................................... V - 34
2.
Effects ................................................................................................. V - 34
3.
Standards ............................................................................................. V - 35
4.
Program Requirements for Occupational Noise Exposure ................. V - 35
PERSONAL PROTECTION PROGRAM .................................................................. VI - 1
A.
Eye Protection .................................................................................................. VI - 1
1.
General ................................................................................................. VI - 1
2.
Prescription Lens Wearers ................................................................... VI - 1
3.
Contact Lens Wearers .......................................................................... VI - 1
4.
Approval and Selection: ....................................................................... VI - 1
5.
Inspection and Maintenance................................................................. VI - 3
6.
Other .................................................................................................... VI - 3
B.
Hearing Protection ........................................................................................... VI - 3
1.
Employees/Students Covered .............................................................. VI - 3
2.
Approval and Selection ........................................................................ VI - 3
3.
Fitting ................................................................................................... VI - 4
4.
Inspection and Maintenance................................................................. VI - 4
5.
Other .................................................................................................... VI - 4
C.
Hand Protection ............................................................................................... VI - 4
1.
Employees/Students Covered .............................................................. VI - 4
2.
Approval and Selection ........................................................................ VI - 4
3.
Fitting ................................................................................................... VI - 4
4.
Inspection and Maintenance................................................................. VI - 4
5..
Glove Materials .................................................................................... VI - 4
D.
Respiratory Protection Program ....................................................................... VI - 6
1.
General Program Requirements ........................................................... VI - 6
2.
Rules for Respirator Program .............................................................. VI - 6
3.
Fit Testing ............................................................................................ VI - 6
4.
Rules for Maintenance, Care and Use of Respirators ......................... VI - 6
5.
Identification of Filters, Cartridges, and Canisters .............................. VI - 7
6.
Training and Information ..................................................................... VI - 7
E.
Fall Protection .................................................................................................. VI - 9
1.
Employees/students Covered ............................................................... VI - 9
2.
Approval and Selection ........................................................................ VI - 9
3.
Fitting ................................................................................................... VI - 9
4.
Inspection and Maintenance................................................................. VI - 9
5.
Classification of Safety Belts and Harnesses ....................................... VI - 9
F.
Foot Protection .............................................................................................. VI - 10
1.
Employees/Students Covered ............................................................ VI - 10
vii
G.
H.
I.
VII.
2.
Approval and Selection ...................................................................... VI - 10
3.
Inspection and Maintenance............................................................... VI - 10
Head Protection .............................................................................................. VI - 10
1.
Employees/Students Covered ............................................................ VI - 10
2.
Approval and Selection ...................................................................... VI - 10
3.
Fitting ................................................................................................. VI - 11
4.
Inspection and Maintenance............................................................... VI - 11
5.
Selection Chart for Head Protection for University Employees ........ VI - 11
Protective and Preventive Clothing ............................................................... VI - 12
1.
Employee/Students Covered .............................................................. VI - 12
2.
Approval and Selection ...................................................................... VI - 12
3.
Fitting ................................................................................................. VI - 12
4.
Inspection and Maintenance............................................................... VI - 12
5.
Preventive Clothing ........................................................................... VI - 12
Employees ...................................................................................................... VI - 12
Emergency Showers and Eye Wash Stations ................................................. VI - 12
ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAMS ........................................................................... VII - 1
A.
Hazardous Waste Management Guidelines .................................................... VII - 1
1.
Determine If the Material Is a “Hazardous Waste”............................. VII - 1
2.
Properly Label Waste Containers........................................................ VII - 3
3.
Keep Waste in Compatible Containers and Closed at All Times ....... VII - 3
4.
Store and Containerize Incompatible Waste Separately ..................... VII - 3
5.
Use Pollution Prevention Techniques to Reduce the Amount of Hazardous
Waste Generated ................................................................................. VII - 3
6.
Waste Collection Procedures .............................................................. VII - 3
B.
Hazardous Waste Management Facilities & Programs ................................... VII - 4
1.
The Hazardous Material Control Center (HMCC) ............................. VII - 4
2.
Biomedical Waste Management ......................................................... VII - 4
3.
Recycling Program .............................................................................. VII - 5
C.
Management of Asbestos Containing Materials ............................................. VII - 5
1.
Rules for the Proper Handling of Asbestos
Containing Material(ACM) ................................................................ VII - 5
2.
Construction Document Review and Contractor Notification ............ VII - 6
3.
Management Plans .............................................................................. VII - 6
4.
Employee Training .............................................................................. VII - 6
D.
Water Quality .................................................................................................. VII - 6
1.
Permit Management ............................................................................ VII - 7
E.
Radiation ......................................................................................................... VII - 7
VIII. APPENDIX ...................................................................................................................VIII - 1
A.
Hazard Communication Program ..................................................................VIII - 1
1.
Responsibilities ..................................................................................VIII - 1
viii
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.
General Program Information ...........................................................VIII - 2
3.
Hazardous Chemical Inventory .........................................................VIII - 2
4.
Labeling .............................................................................................VIII - 3
5.
Material Safety Data Sheets ...............................................................VIII - 5
6.
Training ............................................................................................VIII - 11
Hazard Communication--teaching Outline ..................................................VIII - 11
1.
Objectives ........................................................................................VIII - 11
2.
Modes of Entry into the Body: .........................................................VIII - 12
3.
Effects ..............................................................................................VIII - 12
4.
Recognizing the Hazard ...................................................................VIII - 12
5.
Material Safety Data Sheets .............................................................VIII - 12
6.
Review .............................................................................................VIII - 13
Incompatible Chemicals Partial Listing .......................................................VIII - 14
Storage of Flammable Liquids Classes IA, IB, IC .......................................VIII - 18
1.
Purpose.............................................................................................VIII - 18
2.
Scope ................................................................................................VIII - 18
3.
Definitions........................................................................................VIII - 18
4.
Standards ..........................................................................................VIII - 18
Biosafety Ventilation Equipment .................................................................VIII - 19
1.
The Class I Biological Safety Cabinet .............................................VIII - 20
2.
The Class II Biological Safety Cabinet ............................................VIII - 20
3.
The Class III Biological Safety Cabinet ...........................................VIII - 21
4.
Laminar Flow Clean Air Cabinet .....................................................VIII - 22
5.
Certification of Biological Safety Cabinets .....................................VIII - 22
Training - Heat-related Disorders ................................................................VIII - 22
1.
Heat Exhaustion ...............................................................................VIII - 22
2.
Heat Stroke .....................................................................................VIII - 23
Chemical Hygiene Plan ................................................................................VIII - 24
1.
Purpose.............................................................................................VIII - 24
2.
Scope ................................................................................................VIII - 24
3.
General Principles ............................................................................VIII - 24
4.
General Program Management ........................................................VIII - 25
5.
Basic Rules and Procedures for Working with Chemicals ..............VIII - 26
6.
Chemical Procurement, Distribution, and Storage...........................VIII - 31
7.
Environmental Monitoring .............................................................VIII - 32
8.
Housekeeping, Maintenance, and Inspections .................................VIII - 32
9.
Records ............................................................................................VIII - 33
10.
Signs and Labels ..............................................................................VIII - 33
11.
Information and Training Program ..................................................VIII - 33
12.
Waste Disposal Program ..................................................................VIII - 34
13.
Engineering Controls .......................................................................VIII - 34
Respiratory Protection Program ...................................................................VIII - 35
1.
Purpose.............................................................................................VIII - 35
ix
I.
J.
L.
M.
N.
2.
Scope ................................................................................................VIII - 36
3.
Definitions........................................................................................VIII - 36
4.
General Program Management ........................................................VIII - 37
5.
Voluntary Use ..................................................................................VIII - 38
6.
Respirator Selection .........................................................................VIII - 38
7.
Medical Evaluation ..........................................................................VIII - 39
8.
Fit Testing ........................................................................................VIII - 39
9.
Use of Respirators ............................................................................VIII - 39
10.
Maintenance and Care of Respirators ..............................................VIII - 40
11.
Breathing Air Quality and Use .......................................................VIII - 42
12.
Identification of Filters, Cartridges, and Canisters .........................VIII - 43
13.
Training and Information .................................................................VIII - 43
14.
Program Evaluation .........................................................................VIII - 44
15.
Recordkeeping .................................................................................VIII - 44
Respirator Appendix A ................................................................................VIII - 45
Respirator Appendix B–1 ...........................................................................VIII - 54
Respirator Appendix B–2 ...........................................................................VIII - 55
OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire .................................VIII - 56
Information for Employees Using Respirators When Not Required Under the
Standard ...........................................................................................VIII - 60
Scaffolding Appendix .................................................................................VIII - 61
1.
Outrigger Scaffold............................................................................VIII - 61
2.
Masons' Adjustable Multiple-point Suspension Scaffolds ..............VIII - 61
3.
Two-point Suspension Scaffolds (Swinging Scaffolds) ..................VIII - 62
4.
Stone Setters' Adjustable Multiple-point Suspension Scaffolds ......VIII - 64
5.
Single-Point Adjustable Suspension Scaffolds ................................VIII - 65
6.
Boatswain's Chairs ...........................................................................VIII - 65
7.
Carpenters' Bracket Scaffolds ..........................................................VIII - 65
8.
Bricklayers' Square Scaffolds ..........................................................VIII - 66
9.
Horse Scaffolds ................................................................................VIII - 67
10.
Needle Beam Scaffold .....................................................................VIII - 67
11.
Plasterers', Decorators', and Large Area Scaffolds ..........................VIII - 68
12.
Interior Hung Scaffolds ....................................................................VIII - 68
13.
Ladder-jack Scaffolds ......................................................................VIII - 68
14.
Window-jack Scaffolds ....................................................................VIII - 69
15.
Roofing Brackets..............................................................................VIII - 69
16.
Crawling Board or Chicken Ladders................................................VIII - 69
17.
Float or Ship Scaffolds.....................................................................VIII - 69
Basic Crane Hand Signals ............................................................................VIII - 71
Safe Driver Program ...................................................................................VIII - 74
Water Vessel Operator Safety Program .......................................................VIII - 76
Forms ...........................................................................................................VIII - 78
Safety Checklist for Labs Where Infectious Agents and Recombinant DNA
x
O.
P.
Research Is Performed ....................................................................VIII - 79
Building Inspection Checklist for Fire and General Safety .........................VIII - 84
Safety Checklist for Research Labs (Class A) .............................................VIII - 86
Construction and Fire Protection Requirements for Laboratory Units ........VIII - 90
Safety Checklist for Research and Teaching Labs (Class C) .......................VIII - 93
Confined Space Permit .............................................................................VIII - 97
Building Inspection Checklist for Fire Watch Personnel ...........................VIII - 101
Hazard Log .................................................................................................VIII - 103
Safety Checklist for Research and Teaching Labs (Class C) .....................VIII - 105
Exit Access/corridor Modification Request ...............................................VIII - 110
HAZMAT RESPONSE LEVELS ..............................................................VIII - 113
Occupational Safety and Loss Prevention Plan
VIII - 114
xi
I.
INTRODUCTION
A.
PREFACE
Safety and Environmental considerations are an important part of our daily lives. Not only for
our individual protection, but for the protection of others and the environment. In order to
maintain a high level of knowledge and awareness, each employee and faculty member is issued
a copy of this manual.
This safety manual is the guiding document of the University Safety Program. Each employee,
student and faculty member is responsible for adhering to the rules included herein. Student
workers are especially susceptible to accidents and environmental mistakes, and must be trained
and guided by knowledgeable faculty and staff.
Questions about the content of the manual should be directed to your supervisor or Safety and
Environmental representative.
1
B.
RESERVED
2
II.
GENERAL POLICIES AND STANDARDS
A.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The following procedures are provided for quick reference for emergency situations. Further
information can be obtained from LSU Police or OES. Emergency phone numbers should be on
or near the phone at all times.
1.
INJURIES
Accidental injury can occur at any time during the day or night, weekdays or weekends. As a
result, we must be prepared for such an event at all times. The following procedure is to be used
unless circumstances prevent one or more of the steps to be taken. The well being of the injured
always takes precedence over procedure, and may require that additional measures be taken.
a.
Call 911 and prevent further injury by avoiding personal exposure to injury and keeping others out
of the area
b.
Provide First Aid/CPR as necessary
c.
Assist emergency medical personnel
d.
Secure scene for accident investigation
e.
Prepare injury report and route to Risk Management and Safety
(Refer to LSU policy document PS 99 for detailed instructions on filling out injury reports.)
2. EMERGENCY PLAN FOR GAS LEAKS
Natural gas leaks are generally detected by the odor of the gas odorant. The odorant has an odor threshold
of from one to three parts per billion, and provides an excellent means of detection. LSU odorizes the gas
that is used in campus buildings served by the LSU gas lines. There are some fraternity and sorority
houses that are on Entergy gas lines, so it is important to know who the gas supplier is for your facility.
The following procedure should be used at any time a leak is suspected:
a.
Control ignition sources.
b.
Make sure that no one turns off or on an electrical appliance or light. Other sources of ignition
should be moved out of the area if possible. Pilot lights should be turned off if possible
c.
Contact Facility Services for gas personnel to assist in locating the leak, and notify Safety
d.
Turn off gas if location of shutoff valve is known
e.
Evacuate area and keep people out if leak may be significant
f.
Evaluation and guidance is provided by Facility Services and Safety
Additional reportable hazards include but are not limited to gas facility failures such as:
a.
Under-pressure in the system.
b.
Over-pressure in the system.
c.
Fire or explosion near or directly involving a pipeline facility.
1
d.
Damage to a major segment(s) of the system.
Additional information on gas leaks can be obtained from Facility Services (Energy Services.)
3.
FIRE PROTECTION/EVACUATION PLAN
Each building has an emergency evacuation plan that must be posted for employees and others to
follow during evacuation of the building in case of emergency. This plan must be kept legible
and up to date. New employees and others who are new to the building should be made aware of
the emergency plans for the building as part of their orientation. Emergency signals and alarms
as well as the proper response to an emergency must be explained to the persons involved. At
any time the system is changed or the plan modified, the occupants must be made aware of the
changes that may affect them.
Fire protection equipment and systems must not be modified or disabled such that the plan is no
longer valid. Covering smoke detectors, disabling alarms, or discharging fire extinguishers
without good reason is strictly prohibited. Fire extinguishers must not be obstructed or moved
such that they are not readily available in an emergency. Inspections and maintenance is
conducted by Facility Services, and they should be notified if an extinguisher is discharged or
missing.
4.
CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL EMERGENCY RESPONSE
Call Safety and Campus Police if person in charge cannot contain spill safely Note: If the spill
or release is an immediate danger to buildings and/or occupants, the Baton Rouge Hazmat Unit
will be called at the time of the spill to assure prompt and adequate response. Refer to the
appendix for the appropriate response level.
a.
Warn others on floors that may be affected, and evacuate floors if necessary.
b.
Begin preparation for evacuation of building if explosion or poisonous vapor or fumes are possible
c.
Follow guidance of Safety and LSU Police
d.
Do not enter an area that may be dangerous
For chemical or biological spills or hazardous waste disposal problems, the Occupational and
Environmental Safety Section has a Chemical/Biological Emergency Response Unit. This unit is
available on an immediate basis during normal hours, but may be delayed after hours as a callout
is required to mobilize the unit.
5. SECURITY THREATS
a.
Verbal Threats:
i.
Ask Questions: “when, where, what, why”
ii.
If on the telephone, try to get someone to call LSU Police on another line while you keep the
person on the line.
iii.
Follow guidance of the LSU Police
2
b.
Suspicious Packages
NOTE: DO NOT MOVE OR TOUCH SUSPICIOUS PACKAGES
c.
i.
Notify LSU Police Immediately
ii.
Notify department head, fellow workers, supervisor
iii.
Remain calm
Threatening Individuals
i.
Do not become confrontational
ii.
Observe the person closely and note clothing description, method of travel, any weapons
displayed or implied
iii.
Note whether verbal threats - physical threats are made
iv.
Notify LSU police immediately
v.
Notify department head, fellow workers, supervisor
vi.
Remain calm
6.
STORMS
LSU has an emergency plan for major storms that must be adhered to. The following general instructions
should be followed. General instructions include:
a.
Monitor local radio/TV broadcasts
b.
Adhere to travel warnings
c.
Be aware of the threat to your residence and work area and the route in between
d.
Know evacuation routes
e.
Be prepared to evacuate
f.
Follow advice presented in University announcements
g.
Remain calm
7.
RADIATION EMERGENCY
Radiation emergencies may occur due to incorrect handling of radioactive materials, improper disposal or
accidents. Most radiation sources on campus are not extremely hazardous, so care of injured personnel can
be carried our in a radiation emergency with little or no exposure potential to people involved. Use the
following outline in radiation emergencies:
a. Radioactive materials spills
b.
i.
Notify Radiation Safety
ii.
Keep all potentially contaminated persons in the general vicinity of the laboratory to minimize
the spread of contamination
iii.
Secure the laboratory
Fires and other laboratory upsets
3
c.
i.
Set off alarm if it is a fire emergency
ii.
Notify appropriate emergency personnel (LSU Police @911 and Campus Safety)
iii.
Notify the Radiation Safety Office
Injury to persons working with radioactive materials
i.
Handle the situation in the same manner as if it did not involve radioactive material
ii.
Notify the Radiation Safety Office
Note: The improper use of radiation signs and placards may lead to serious problems. Misuse or
improper use is against State regulations and can lead to serious delays in emergency response.
B.
OPERATIONAL SAFETY & LOSS PREVENTION PLAN
The master document addressing the sixteen point operational safety plan required by the ORM is
contained in the appendix.
C.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
CHANCELLOR AND CHANCELLOR’S STAFF
As chief administrator, the chancellor is responsible for overall direction of the campus safety and
environmental program. The chancellor is responsible for establishing policies, assuring that
implementation of the policies are facilitated through appropriated resources, and that rules and procedures
therein are adhered to by all university personnel and students. The chancellor may delegate certain safety
and environmental responsibilities to appropriate levels withing the university community.
2.
DEANS, DIRECTORS, AND DEPARTMENT HEADS
As key administrative elements in the organization of the campus community, deans, directors and
department heads implement safety and environmental programs within their respective organizations and
assure that implementation and enforcement is in place for all such programs. Other responsibilities
include:
a.
Appoint a safety committee within their organization where appropriate with duties, functions, and
responsibilities as detailed under "Safety Committees." A roster of Committee Officers is to be
submitted to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
b.
Provide for the conduct of periodic self-inspections in their area of responsibility utilizing the
appropriate inspection form as detailed under "Inspection Schedules and Reports."
c.
Provide for the immediate investigation of all accidents resulting in personal injury to personnel
for whom they are responsible and submit a report of the findings, utilizing the "Employer's
Report of Occupational Injury or Disease" form.
d.
Cooperate with the University Safety Committee when called upon to do so.
3.
PROFESSORS AND OTHER SUPERVISORS
As the key figures in the safety and environmental program, the immediate faculty/Principal
Investigators/Supervisors shall carry out instructions from their superiors and assure that safety and
environmental procedures are followed in everyday operations on campus. The following responsibilities
4
are also required:
a.
Have a working knowledge of all safety principles and safety rules applicable to their area of
responsibility.
b.
Conduct periodic self-inspections of their area of responsibility and submit appropriate inspection
reports as required.
c.
Conduct or have conducted safety meetings on a regular basis. The frequency of the meetings
shall be scheduled to fit the needs of their respective area of responsibility.
d.
Investigate all accidents or incidents that could have resulted in injury and/or property damage to
determine cause and prevent recurrence.
e.
Promote good housekeeping and proper safety performance.
f.
Insure that students/employees are schooled in the proper use and maintenance of supplied safety
equipment, including personal protective equipment, and supplied with same.
g.
Insure that the proper tools and equipment are selected for the job and are used correctly.
h.
Develop efficient material handling procedures to facilitate safe lifting, carrying, and storage of
same.
4.
EMPLOYEES, STUDENTS AND VISITORS
a.
Obey safety and environmental rules and regulations.
b.
Report to appropriate authorities unsafe conditions and procedures.
c.
Refrain from actions which could cause injury or damage to property due to their lack of training,
their condition, or the condition of the equipment.
d.
Look out for their coworkers and others to warn/stop actions on their part which could cause injury
or property damage.
D. OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
1. SCOPE
The Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety (OES) reports to the Executive Director, Public
Safety and Risk Management, who reports to the Associate Vice Chancellor, Business Affairs.
OES supports the safety and environmental program through consultation with, and assistance to, all levels
withing the campus organization; preparation and presentation of safety and environmental training;
development of safety and environmental rules, procedures and processes; and incident investigations with
recommendations to enhance safety and environmental procedures. OES is also charged with hazardous
materials collections and disposal.
The Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety is not charged with any responsibilities relating to
law enforcement, radiation, parking, traffic, and transportation.
2. DUTIES:
a.
The Director, Occupational and Environmental Safety duties include, but are not limited to, the
following:
5
b.
i.
Directs the implementation of the University Occupational and Environmental Safety Program
including: fire safety, inspections, accident investigations, Hazardous Waste Program,
occupational and environmental safety rules and procedures.
ii.
Develops and/or makes recommendations for safety/environmental policies as needed.
iii.
Serves as Chairman of the University Safety Committee.
iv.
Serves as the coordinator for federal, state, and local agencies regarding occupational and
environmental safety matters.
v.
Serves as the coordinator for insurance carriers regarding occupational and environmental
safety matters.
vi.
Directs OES staff, evaluates performance, and prescribes professional development activities
The Assistant Director, Occupational and Environmental Safety duties include but are not restricted
to the following:
i.
Oversees environmental testing and monitoring programs for environmentally hazardous areas
and processes and acts as the university contact point for environmental regulators.
ii.
Directs the Hazardous Waste Collection and Disposal Program
iii.
Makes safety/environmental inspections when deemed necessary by virtue of accident
frequency and/or obvious hazards.
iv.
Coordinates Fire Marshal interface for the campus
v.
Monitors environmental regulations and makes required adjustments in campus compliance
acitvities.
vi.
Supervises accident statistics and analysis program.
vii.
Assists the Director in the administration of the safety and environmental program and acts in
the absence of the Director as necessary.
c. The Safety and Environmental Training Officer duties include but are not restricted to the following:
d.
i.
Coordinates the campus safety and environmental training program
ii.
Administers programs related to sign age, labels and training materials
iii.
Participates as a member of the Emergency Response Unit (non-medical).
iv.
Develops accident data in keeping with OSHA and National Safety Council criteria, and
monitors trends in accidents.
v.
Researches federal and state standards and regulations relating to safety and environmental
areas.
The Safety and Health Officer acts as the industrial hygienist for the campus and performs the
following duties:
i.
Conducts indoor air quality surveys and evaluations as requested.
ii.
Advises and consults with campus administration, faculty and employees on industrial
hygiene matters.
iii.
Acts as expert in working with outside agencies and court proceedings related to campus
6
industrial hygiene programs and problems.
e.
f.
iv.
Participates as a member of the Emergency Response Unit (non-medical).
v.
Monitors federal and state standards and regulations relating to industrial hygiene.
vi.
Oversees the accumulation and cataloging of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) as an assist
to the Hazard Communication Program.
The Safety Program Coordinator
i.
Provides direct administration of the hazardous waste storage facility, including vehicles and
equipment.
ii.
Collects for disposal and transports hazardous wastes from the LSU system.
iii.
Provides emergency response to hazardous material incidents on campus.
iv.
Assists with incident investigations involving injuries.
v.
Performs environmental monitoring operations.
The Office Coordinator II duties include but are not restricted to the following:
i.
Coordinates and directs the maintenance of the office systems and records.
ii.
Processes documents in accordance with procedural requirements.
iii.
Prepares regular and special statistical reports.
iv.
Prepares and checks requisitions, special payrolls, expense accounts, and vouchers.
v.
Prepares and maintains budget records
f.
The Student Workers perform routine non-hazardous safety duties as assigned. Student workers
work under the direction of the Safety Officers and the Office Coordinator
3.
SERVICES AVAILABLE THROUGH OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND
ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY:
a.
Consultation and Studies--OES personnel will consult with any recognized entity or person
officially part of the University community regarding occupational and environmental safety on
campus. The consultation can be initiated by calling or writing the Office of Occupational and
Environmental Safety.
b.
Emergency Response-- OES maintains a non-medical Emergency Response Unit (ERU). The unit
will respond to chemical spills, fires, gas leaks, or potential emergencies. Details on how to activate
the ERU are covered in another section of the manual.
c.
Safety Training--OES personnel will present or assist in the presentation of various safety training
including: asbestos abatement procedures, fire protection and the use of fire extinguishers,
flammable liquid fire demonstrations, hazard communication, use of personal protective
equipment and self-contained breathing apparatus(SCBA). In addition, OES personnel can tailor a
training program for special subjects provided they are given appropriate lead time. Assistance is
available for development of safety meeting topics using the OES library or other resources. The list
of video tapes and other training aids and materials can be obtained from the OES Office. LSU is
also a member of the local safety council and, as such, has access to the council's film library. OES
will attempt to secure films for requesting departments upon request.
7
d.
Special Investigations/Inspections -- OES will make special accident investigations or inspections
on its own or upon request. Normally, formal accident investigations are made when serious
accidents are involved or the potential for serious consequences is present. Laboratory
certifications/inspections are available upon request and as required by University
procedures/policies.
e.
Environmental and Industrial Hygiene Monitoring -- OES will, upon request or when deemed
necessary, perform industrial hygiene testing and perform indoor air quality surveys. Where
considerable expense and resources are necessary for these evaluations, departments may be
requested to support the activity with partial or complete funding.
f.
Hazardous Waste Program. -- OES collects, transports, stores, and coordinates the proper disposal
of hazardous wastes generated by University activities. For information on radioactive materials
consult with Radiation Safety.
E.
UNIVERSITY SAFETY COMMITTEE
1.
RESPONSIBILITIES
The University Safety Committee is an advisory committee reporting to the Executive Director, Public
Safety and Risk Management. The Committee works in such a manner as to enlist cooperation of
members of the University community in the safety and environmental program at every level of
management within the University. The Director, Occupational and Environmental Safety serves as
Chairman of the Committee.
2.
DUTIES OF THE UNIVERSITY SAFETY COMMITTEE
The University Safety Committee shall assist the Safety Officer in reviewing safety problems, developing
means and methods for resolving the problems and in developing the necessary procedures for placing the
acceptable means into effect. Specifically, the Safety Committee shall:
a.
Assist in developing safety education/training programs designed to create and maintain an interest
in job safety.
b.
Assist the Director, Occupational and Environmental Safety in coordinating the efforts of the safety
committees organized within the various colleges, schools, and major activities of the University.
c.
Review reports of serious accidents or fires.
d.
Provide suggestions and recommendations to correct hazardous conditions and/or unsafe work
practices.
e.
Recommend those changes to existing practices or new practices to maximize protection for
campus safety and environment.
f.
Recommend physical or structural alterations required to eliminate or control hazards.
F.
STANDARDS
LSU has incorporated Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards in the University Safety and
Environmental Policy, PS 19.
OSHA standards incorporate by reference other standards adopted by standards-producing organizations.
It is, therefore, necessary for LSU to enforce those standards applicable to its operations. Some standards
8
producing organizations that are of considerable importance to us include:
1.
American Chemical Society (ACS)
2.
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
3.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
4.
American Society of Agriculture Engineers (ASAE)
5.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
6.
American Society of Safety Engineers(ASSE)
7.
American Welding Society (AWS)
8.
Compressed Gas Association (CGA)
9.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
10.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
11.
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
12.
Southern Building Code (SBC)
13.
Center for Disease Control (CDC)/ National Institutes of Health (NIH)
LSU is required to comply with regulations promulgated and enforced by such agencies as the Office of
the State Fire Marshal and the Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ), and is subject to enforcement
actions by these agencies.
G.
LOUISIANA BUILDING CODE FOR STATE OWNED BUILDINGS
Any new construction, alteration, addition, or renovation plans for state buildings shall be endorsed by and
follow rules and regulations promulgated by Facility Planning and Control.
Additionally, the plans shall be reviewed by the Office of the State Fire Marshal to assure compliance with
the National Fire Protection Association Life Safety Code 101 among other codes, local or otherwise.
Logically, such plans shall be reviewed by the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety prior to
submission to the Office of the State Fire Marshal.
In order to evaluate the state of an existing building, the building coordinator shall inspect, or have
inspected, the building on a quarterly basis using inspection report forms available at the OES office. A
copy of the inspection report shall be filed with OES.
Areas of considerable concern include exits and means of egress, panic hardware, locking or obstructing
exits and passageways, exit signs and exit ways, fire alarms, fire extinguishers, emergency lighting,
sprinkler systems, house-keeping and evacuation diagrams.
1.
EXIT AND MEANS OF EGRESS
Exits shall be so located and exit access shall be so arranged that exits are readily accessible at all times.
Where exits are not immediately accessible from an open floor area, safe and continuous passageway,
aisles or corridors shall be maintained leading directly to every exit and shall be so arranged as to provide
convenient access for each occupant to at least two exits by separate ways of travel.
In no case shall access to an exit be through kitchens, store-rooms, restrooms, closets, bedrooms, or similar
9
spaces or other rooms subject to locking (above does not apply specifically to dwellings or some
apartments--contact Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety for clarification).
Ways of exit access and the doors to the exits to which they lead shall be clearly recognizable. Hangings
or draperies shall not be placed over exit doors or otherwise located so as to conceal or obscure any exit.
Mirrors shall not be placed on exit doors. Mirrors shall not be placed so as to confuse the direction of exit.
2.
PANIC HARDWARE FOR REQUIRED EXITS
Panic hardware is required in some instances by code, and consists of a door latching assembly device
which releases the latch upon the application of a force in the direction of exit travel. Only approved panic
hard-ware shall be used.
Required panic hardware shall not be equipped with any locking or dogging device, set screw, or other
arrangement which can be used to prevent the release of the latch when pressure is applied to release bar
(for special locking arrangement, contact Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety).
3.
LOCKING OR OBSTRUCTING EXITS AND PASSAGEWAYS
A door shall be so arranged as to be readily opened by the occupant to provide egress at all times when the
building is occupied. A latch or other fastening device on a door shall be provided with a knob, handle,
panic bar, or other simple type of releasing device; the method of operation shall be obvious even in
darkness.
The minimum width of any corridor shall normally be 44 inches in the clear. (Passageways, doors, and
exits shall be free from obstructions.) IT IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED TO CHAIN AN EXIT DOOR
CLOSED IF A BUILDING IS OCCUPIED.
4.
EXIT SIGNS
Every required sign designating an exit or way of exit access shall be so located and of such size,
distinctive color, and design as to be readily visible and shall provide contrast with decorations,
furnishings, or equipment which impair visibility of an exit sign. There shall not be any brightly
illuminated sign, display, or objects in or near the line of vision to the required exit sign of such a character
as to detract attention from the exit sign.
Every exit sign shall be suitably illuminated by a reliable light source. Externally and internally,
illuminated signs shall be visible in the normal and emergency lighting mode.
A sign reading"EXIT" or similar designation with an arrow indicating the direction of the nearest
approved exit shall be placed in every location where the direction of travel to reach the nearest exit is not
immediately apparent.
5.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Illumination of means of egress shall be continuous during the time that the conditions of occupancy
require that the means of egress be available for use. Artificial lighting shall be employed at such places
and for such periods of time required to maintain the illumination. For the purposes of this requirement,
exit access shall include only designated stairs, aisles, corridors, ramps, escalators, and passageways
leading to an exit.
6.
FIRE ALARMS
10
a.
Activation of the protective system shall occur by any or all of the following means but not limited
thereto:
i.
Manual fire alarm initiation
ii.
Automatic heat detection
iii.
Automatic smoke detection
iv.
Extinguishing system operations
b.
Each manual fire alarm station on a system shall be accessible, unobstructed, visible, and of the
same general type.
c.
The general evacuation alarm shall operate throughout the entire building.
d.
Audible alarm indicating devices shall be of such character and so distributed as to be effectively
heard above the ambient noise level obtained under normal conditions of occupancy.
e.
The fire alarm and heat/smoke detection system shall be tested periodically and the results of the test
recorded.
7.
a.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Portable fire extinguishers shall be chosen for the class of fire expected. Class of fire refers to the
nature of the fuel involved as follows:
Class A--Fires involving ordinary combustible materials such as wood, cloth, rubber, and many
plastics.
Class B--Fires involving flammable or combustible liquids, flammable gases, and similar materials.
Class C--Fires involving electrical energy.
Class D--Fires involving certain combustible metals such as magnesium, titanium, sodium,
potassium, etc.
NOTE: The fire class shall be designated on the extinguisher itself.
b.
Extinguishers mounted in cabinets, wall recesses, or brackets shall be placed in such a manner that
the operating instructions shall face outward. Extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from
view, and cabinets housing extinguishers shall not be locked.
c.
Extinguishers shall be periodically checked and/or maintained, tagged, and dated.
d.
In general fire extinguishers must be mounted such that travel distance to an extinguisher does not
exceed 75 feet.
8.
STORAGE OF FLAMMABLES IN STATE BUILDINGS
Storage of flammable materials shall be made in fireproof containers. State buildings and public places of
assembly shall be regularly policed to clean up and place in fireproof containers all flammable materials.
All places of storage shall be arranged and maintained in such a manner that exit from said places and
access to said places for the purpose of fire fighting is not in any way impeded.
NOTE: Gasoline, paint, or other flammable liquids shall not be stored under stairwells or in halls, aisles,
corridors, or passageways.
9.
EVACUATION DIAGRAMS
11
Evacuation diagrams shall be placed on each floor on bulletin boards or areas where persons gather.
Diagrams shall indicate where those individuals are and the safest and most direct route out of the
building.
Periodic inspection of large assembly areas and unusual structures such as stadium press box, air supported
structures, or tents shall be performed by the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
NOTE: Test dates and inspection reports of emergency lights, alarm systems, and sprinkler systems can be
obtained from Facility Services.
H.
EMERGENCY SHOWERS AND EYEWASH STATIONS
1.
PROCEDURES AND OPERATION
a.
All chemistry laboratories and areas where faculty, staff, students, or visitors are exposed to harmful
chemicals shall be provided with safety showers and eyewash fountains. These facilities shall be
conveniently located and tested frequently, readily available, operable, and known to persons
concerned.
b.
The valve handle of safety showers and eyewash fountains shall be rigidly fixed and plainly labeled.
The valve shall open readily in either direction and remain open until intentionally closed. Water
flow pressure shall be sufficient to drench the subject rapidly or gently flow in the case of eyewash
fountains. The shower and eyewash fountain area shall be kept clear of obstructions. Water of
drinking purity shall only be used in safety showers and eyewash fountains.
c.
Emergency eyewash fountains shall deliver a gentle flow of clean, aerated water. A hand-held
eyewash spray with a five foot hose is more adaptable to unusual situations including head and body
splashes, but shall not be located where it can be contaminated by waste materials. It shall be
understood by all that eye protection is infinitely more important than eyewashes. For chemical
splashes, very complete irrigation is indicated. (A 15 minute flush is recommended.)
*
Immediately flush the eye with a copious amount of water under gentle pressure checking for
and removing contact lenses at once.
*
An eyewash fountain shall be used if available.
*
Forcibly hold the eye open to wash thoroughly behind the eyelids.
*
In the absence of an eyewash fountain, the injured shall be placed on his back and water
gently poured into the eye. The injured eye shall be held open.
*
The injured shall be given prompt medical attention, regardless of the severity of the injury.
*
Keep the eye immobilized with clean, wet, cold pads while trans-porting the injured to
medical attention.
d.
Neutralizing agents shall not be used for chemical burns to the eye. Experiments have indicated that
this type of treatment is likely to increase the eye damage.
e.
The emergency shower and eyewash fountains shall be tested on a regular basis and a record kept of
such tests.
2.
a.
PORTABLE EYE WASH STATIONS
Periodically inspect each station to make sure it is properly filled and ready to use. Check to see if
12
the unit is full. Change the water once a month with water of drinking purity. Test the unit's
operation monthly.
b.
The unit shall always be clearly visible and there shall be no obstructions to interfere with its use.
13
III. ADMINISTRATIVE ELEMENTS
A.
HAZARD CONTROL
Identified hazards shall be corrected or made safe in the most expedient method available at the
time. Reporting of hazards by all members of the university community, including visitors shall
be encouraged. Where a hazard has been identified, a means of tracking the corrective action to
completion shall be employed.
Hazards reported to Facility Services are tracked through the work control process. They are
treated with appropriate priority to assure that the hazards are corrected in a timely manner.
Hazards reported to others in the administration shall result in an active response to check out the
reported hazard, and to follow up with corrective action within the means of the recipient of the
report. Where the recipient cannot correct the hazard, the information shall be forwarded to
Facility Services or to the Occupational and Environmental Safety (OES) office where action
shall be initiated, and tracking employed to assure the condition is corrected.
Where temporary measures must be taken to guard against the hazardous condition, the person
receiving the report should assure that these measures are taken, or request Facility Services or
OES to follow up on the report to get these protective measures in place. LSU Police should be
notified in the event immediate assistance is required to control access to hazardous locations by
others.
Pocket pads for reporting hazards are available from the OES office.
B.
SAFETY MEETINGS
Safety meetings on a regular basis can be effective accident prevention tools. Meetings are
appropriate prior to and after the start of a new process/procedure--particularly if such
process/procedure deals with hazardous materials and/or equipment. This is particularly
important with regard to engineering and/or scientific endeavors.
Safety meetings should be on topics that are safety related, and have effect on the group
involved. They should provide for input from attendees with notes taken on suggestions. Ideally,
meetings for tradespeople should be held on a monthly basis with a presentation on a particular
subject followed by adequate discussion. It is generally accepted that short, to-the-point
meetings are best; it does not preclude that meetings directed toward a complex
process/procedure cannot be considerably longer.
Safety meetings for faculty and academic units should be held on a quarterly or semester
frequency. Minutes of all safety meetings shall be recorded and provided to the Dean, Director,
or Department Head as requested and kept on hand for a minimum of one year. Minutes should
include the attendance roster, the name of the person conducting the meeting, the date, subject of
the meeting and any suggestions arising from employees/attendees.
Prior to beginning a task, the person in charge shall be identified, and he or she shall conduct a
pre-job safety planning session. The hazards shall be identified and pointed out to crew members
1
along with the means to guard against those hazards. The person in charge shall assure that each
member of the crew understands their role in the job. An employee working alone shall consider
each step of the job, analyze hazards, and select appropriate procedures and equipment before
beginning the job.
OES will present safety meetings on request, or provide assistance to the person in charge of the
meeting.
C.
PRE-FIRE PLAN
Pre-fire plans are developed for buildings on campus to assist fire and emergency personnel in
response activities. An example of a pre-fire plan is shown in the appendix.
D.
ACCIDENT REPORTS
1.
OCCUPATIONAL ACCIDENT OR ILLNESS REPORT is to be used as the basic form
for reporting the accidents of employees. This report is mandatory; it is required by the State and
serves as the link between LSU and Risk Management. The Occupational Accident or Illness
Report shall be sent to Office of Personnel Services with a copy to the Office of Occupational
and Environmental Safety. The Department Head shall also keep a file copy.
2.
AUTOMOBILE ACCIDENT OR LOSS NOTICE is to be used when a University-owned
vehicle is involved. A copy of the report must be sent to the Director of Public Safety. The
Office of the Public Safety will forward a copy of the report to the Office of Occupational and
Environmental Safety.
3.
LIABILITY ACCIDENT NOTICE shall be filled out in the event any visitor is injured on
the Campus or in a University building. A copy of the report must be sent to the Executive
Director, Public Safety and Risk Management. The Office of Public Safety will forward a copy
of the report to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
4.
LSU POLICE REPORTS are made for incidents such as fire, explosions, chemical spills,
and other similar incidents where they are involved. Copies of these reports are forwarded to the
Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety. They provide notification and information that
can be used in accident investigations.
5.
VERBAL REPORTS are provided to various safety and environmental groups, such as
the LSU Police, Radiation Safety, and OES as required in Emergency Procedures.
E.
ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS
Accidents must be investigated to an appropriate degree. As a result we have two levels of
investigations, a formal and an informal investigation.
1.
FORMAL INVESTIGATIONS
2
a.
b.
Formal investigations are conducted for serious accidents. Both Safety and the Department involved
are participants in the investigation. The following incidents are the ones normally investigated in a
formal investigation:
i.
Lost time accidents (Lost time is missing the next tour of duty/work day.)
ii.
Serious accidents or near misses without lost time such as explosions, fires, chemical spills,
and electrical accidents
Once an accident is reported, a decision on the need to conduct a formal investigation is immediately
made by Department Director and OES. If either determines that a formal investigation is necessary,
it will be held. The following steps should be taken:
i.
Scene is secured
ii.
Preliminary scene visit is made and information and evidence is gathered
iii.
List of people to be interviewed is developed and interviews are conducted
iv.
Accident Investigation Report and Action Plan is developed by Department and OES and
routed to Department Executive Directors or Deans for approval and guidance on
implementation. (See investigations below)
2.
a.
b.
3.
INFORMAL INVESTIGATIONS BY SUPERVISORS
Since the supervisor is the person charged with preventing accidents in his/her work group, that
person should be actively involved in determining the causes and acting to correct the causes of
accidents. As such the supervisor is the proper person to investigate the following types of
accidents:
i.
Accidents which cause visit to the doctor with no lost time
ii.
Near misses that disrupt productivity but do not have potential for serious injury
The supervisor’s first duty is to assist the injured with obtaining medical attention. Supervisors are
required to accompany the person to the physician if possible to explain to the physician the
employee's job duties to allow proper determination as to the return to work restrictions. After this,
the supervisor carries out the following steps:
i.
The supervisor conducts an accident investigation as soon after the accident as practicable.
Participation by Occupational and Environmental Safety is not required, but an OES
representative is available to assist and participate if requested.
ii.
The supervisor must complete an Action Plan and submit it to his/her supervisor, with a copy
to the OES section. Even thought the investigation is informal, the action plan must include
"who, what, where and when" as these terms relate to the planned action.
THE INVESTIGATION PROCEDURE
Conducting the accident or incident investigation should follow an agenda which serves to assure
that all causes are uncovered. Generally, the inquiry should follow the plan outlined below:
a.
Obtain background information on the job, the circumstances, work assignment, etc
b.
Establish events and job steps leading up to the accident (Job Safety Analysis to be performed as
3
recommended by OES)
c.
Determine root causes of the accident
d.
Develop an Action Plan for prevention of recurrence:
4.
i.
What action is to be taken (include what, how, where)
ii.
Who is responsible to do this on each element
iii.
When will each step be completed
iv.
Arrangements to follow up and assure the action is taken (quality control)
APPROVAL PROCESS AND ROUTING
a.
The action plan should be reviewed by the department director or dean for approval.
b.
If disciplinary action is appropriate, human resources should be consulted for guidance.
c.
The accident investigation should be routed to the OES office. A copy should be filed in the
department of origin.
5.
COMPLETING ITEMS IN THE ACTION PLAN
a.
Departments are to complete action items and report completion to OES on informal investigations.
b.
On formal investigations, OES will track the action plan to completion with the cooperation of the
department involved
F.
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS
Job safety analysis (JSA) is a process where each step in a job or process is determined, hazards
identified in each step, and corrective or protective measures determined to counter the hazards.
Jobs or processes to have JSAs performed are identified by OES. The JSA may be performed by
the department supervisor or by OES with the assistance of the supervisor. OES is always
available for consultation and will provide a standard form on which to record the information.
After the JSA is completed, the information gathered will be shared with affected employees and
safety rules and procedures revised to accommodate the new plan as necessary. JSAs may be
posted in the work area, included in procedure manuals, and / or posted on the Internet web page.
Identification of jobs and processes that will be evaluated with a JSA will be done by OES
considering the severity of the activity, the trends discovered in accident/injury analysis, and
upon new equipment/procedures being introduced in the workplace.
G.
SAFETY AND HEALTH INSPECTIONS AND REPORTS
Note: Inspection report forms are provided for various inspection activities. These reports are
contained in the Appendix and are available from OES.
1. SAFETY AND HEALTH INSPECTIONS
a.
Building inspections by Building Coordinators or Residence Managers must be conducted quarterly
as a minimum.
4
b.
Inspections performed by OES personnel include inspections of high risk buildings/facilities,
updates for the air flow velocity of fume hoods/ductwork, emergency showers and eyewash stations,
and floor slip tests along with other inspections as necessary or as requested by university personnel.
Frequency of these inspections depends on policy/procedures.
c.
Inspections performed by individual laboratory and/or shop instructors, researchers, engineers, or
scientists in their specific area of responsibility should be performed at least once per semester.
Laboratory supervisors should be constantly on the lookout for violations of safety rules and unsafe
workplace conditions.
d.
Inspections made by Facility Services personnel include fire extinguishers, fire alarms, sprinkler
systems, smoke/heat detection systems, emergency lights, sentronic door closing systems, and fume
hoods. These inspection frequencies vary, depending on regulatory requirements and university
policy.
e.
Inspections by outside agencies such as DEQ, ORM, or the Office of the State Fire Marshal are
conducted at their discretion, or upon request from individuals inside and outside of the university.
NOTE: Inspectors who, in the normal course of inspection, find empty extinguishers, leaking
sprinkler heads/valves, broken smoke/heat detectors, etc., shall report same to Facility Services as
soon as possible for repair or replacement.
2.
LABORATORY INSPECTIONS
The OES inspections forms for the various labs outline the major areas of concern and provide guidance
on operating a safe and environmentally healthful laboratory.
a.
b.
Chemistry Laboratory Inspections
i.
The assignment of inspection personnel depends upon the type of inspection and the area to
be covered. Safety of assigned areas is inherently the responsibility of the supervisor. To
detect unsafe conditions, he/she may assign inspection duties to subordinates or use available
staff inspection groups. Safety Coordinators may be designated by departments to inspect
laboratories, as well as OES personnel and chemical hygiene officers and biosafety officers as
applicable.
ii.
To help with the inspection process, an inspection report form has been developed by OES
that indicates items construed to be important by both the National Institute of Health, the
American Chemical Society, OSHA and NFPA regarding safety in the chemistry laboratory.
iii.
It is important that the inspected area be identified by building name, department (chemistry,
biochemistry, chemical storage, etc.), floor on which it is located, and room number. Further,
the area shall be identified as used for teaching, research, both, or neither, as would be the
case in chemical storage and/or hazardous waste holding areas.
iv.
Once finalized, the report shall be turned over to the department head/chairperson and a copy
sent to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety. The department
head/chairperson shall review the report and respond to or implement corrective
recommendations.
Bio-science Laboratory Inspections
i.
The assignment of inspection personnel depends upon the type of inspection and area to be
5
covered. Safety of assigned areas is inherently the responsibility of the supervisor. To detect
unsafe conditions, he/she may assign inspection duties to subordinates or use available staff
inspection groups. In some circumstances involving high hazard experiments, a biosafety
officer must be involved.
c.
ii.
Health considerations include appropriate physical examinations for staff and research
personnel. Staff or research personnel with reduced immunologic competency (and pregnant
women) shall receive medical evaluation before starting or continuing oncogenic virus work
or other exposures which may impact their medical condition.
iii.
Inspections of Biosafety Level 3 Recombinant DNA research labs must be performed by the
Biosafety Officer. Such inspections are also recommended for labs performing work with
infectious agents.
iv.
To help with the inspection process, an inspection report form has been developed by OES
that includes items construed to be important by the National Institutes of Health, Centers for
Disease Control, American Chemical Society, NFPA, OSHA and the National Safety Council
regarding safety in the biological research or teaching laboratory. (See Appendix.)
v.
It is important that the inspected area be identified by building name, department (botany,
zoology, physiology, vet med, etc.), floor on which it is located, and room number.
Furthermore, the area shall be identified as used for teaching, research, both, or neither as
would be the case in chemical storage and/or hazardous waste holding areas.
vi.
Once finalized, the report shall be turned over to the department head/chairperson and a copy
sent to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety. The department
head/chairperson shall review the report and respond by taking measures necessary to comply
with recommendations.
Engineering Labs Inspections
Inspection of engineering labs should be performed using the OES inspection checklist. Some items
of particular concern in engineering labs are temporary electrical and
mechanical installations which may present safety hazards. Attention should
be given to orderly arrangements within the labs with unobstructed isles and
work areas. Housekeeping should always be noted and corrected where
deficiencies are found.
3.
a.
MISCELLANEOUS INSPECTIONS
Art Department (Labs, Shops, and Studios) Inspections
Inspection of Art Department facilities should be performed using the OES inspection checklist.
Some items of particular concern in studios, labs, and shops are the use of chemicals and organic
vapors which present fire and health hazards and cutting, welding, and grinding operations which
may present safety hazards. Attention should be given to orderly arrangements within the facilities
with unobstructed isles and work areas. Housekeeping should always be noted and corrected where
deficiencies are found.
b.
Facilities other than those listed above, such as theaters, recreational areas, and other academic areas
Inspection of these facilities should be performed using an OES inspection checklist or suitable
6
substitute.
7
IV. SAFETY
A. FIRE SAFETY IN DORMITORIES
1. FIRE HAZARDS ON CAMPUS
a.
Carelessness with cigarettes, matches, etc., accounts for the greatest number of residence hall fires.
b.
Candles can be dangerous. Leaving them burning unattended or too close to combustible materials
can lead to fires.
c.
Some decorations ignite easily and allow a fire to spread rapidly. These include holiday decorations,
large posters, filmy curtains, and flammables tacked to the ceiling.
d.
Accumulations of trash and newspapers, especially in corridors and stairwells, are a fire hazard.
Report such accumulations to a Resident Assistant.
e.
Common materials like paint, paint removers, hair spray, duplicator fluid, and thinners can be fire
hazards if they are handled or stored improperly.
f.
A cigarette or incense that falls on a stuffed chair, sofa, or mattress can smolder for hours, then
suddenly burst into flame. Always extinguish these before leaving room.
g.
Careless use of heat-producing appliances can start fires. Especially hazardous are:
i.
Hot plates left on and unattended or grease build up on coils.
ii.
Electric blankets left on when resident is not in bed.
iii.
Irons left on, lying down, unattended, or used on a bed.
iv.
Toaster ovens left on, with accumulated grease, or unattended.
v.
Hair dryers laid down while they are on or used to dry
vi.
Portable space heaters placed near combustibles like curtains or used to dry clothes.
clothes.
h.
Setting fires on purpose is a leading cause of campus fires. Arson is a serious crime that can result
in unnecessary deaths. Arsonists shall be prosecuted to the full extent of the law.
i.
False alarms are also a hazard. They create a mood of apathy so you may not react quickly enough
to save your life if there is a real fire. And if fire fighters are out on a false alarm, they will not be
available to fight a real fire. Individuals caught setting false alarms shall face disciplinary action and
possible prosecution.
2.
a.
b.
FIRE SAFETY FEATURES
Fire extinguishers are designed to fight small fires. Some important guidelines are:
i.
Find out where they are located and what kind of fires they are designed to fight.
ii.
Learn in advance how to operate them properly.
iii.
Do not block access to extinguishers.
iv.
Report all extinguishers that are missing, damaged, or have been discharged.
v.
Do not empty fire extinguishers as a prank.
Fire Alarms
1
c.
i.
Know where alarms are located.
ii.
Learn how to activate them.
iii.
If you hear a fire alarm, alert as many people in the building as possible and evacuate the
building.
Fire Doors
i.
Prevent fire and smoke from spreading and provide a safe escape route.
ii.
Keep fire doors closed at all times. Report any that need repair or have been propped open.
iii.
Do not block access to fire doors.
Note: Doors with automatic closers should remain open--they will close by themselves in the event
of fire.
d.
e.
f.
Fire Exits
i.
Know how to find them, even if it is dark and smoky.
ii.
Do not use them as porches or balconies.
iii.
Keep them free of obstructions such as plants, bicycles, storage boxes, etc.
Emergency Numbers
i.
Emergency numbers shall be clearly posted next to phones or on bulletin boards, etc., for
quick dialing.
ii.
In the event of fire or other emergency, call Campus Police at 911. If injury is involved, tell
the police; they will alert EMS and the Infirmary.
Smoke detectors alert while there is still time to escape. Remember, smoke is the greatest danger in
a fire.
i.
Check their location near your room.
ii.
Do not hang things over them or cover them up.
iii.
Test regularly, if authorized to do so.
3.
FIRE PREVENTION FOR STUDENTS
Follow all campus rules and take the following precautions:
a.
b.
Smoking
i.
Smoke only where permitted. Never smoke when drowsy, in bed, or near flammable liquids.
(A spark can cause an explosion.)
ii.
Store matches properly, not in bureau drawers or in pockets. Close matchbook cover before
striking.
iii.
Use safe ashtrays (not plastic or paper cups). Clean them often. Douse with water before
emptying into wastebaskets. Do not put ashes/cigarettes out on carpeted floors.
Housekeeping
i.
Do not pile books and magazines on radiators.
ii.
Store combustibles away from ignition sources.
2
c.
d.
e.
iii.
Empty wastebaskets often.
iv.
Keep exits clear of possessions and trash at all times.
v.
Store flammable liquids (including paint and paint remover) in proper metal containers. Store
aerosols properly. Store all in approved area, never inside your room.
vi.
Store incompatible chemicals with adequate separation.
Appliance Use
i.
Use appliances according to manufacturers recommendations.
ii.
Do not leave heat-producing appliances unattended. Unplug them when not in use, and let
them cool before storing. Do not cover ventilation openings on TVs, stereos, and radios.
iii.
Unplug all appliances before leaving on vacations.
iv.
Check appliances for damaged cords and circuits. Have faulty appliances repaired or discard
them.
v.
Do not overload circuits by plugging too many appliances into one outlet. Use heavy duty UL
approved extension cords to increase cord length, not to plug in more appliances.
vi.
Do not use hot plates, grills, or other appliances in your dormitory if they are prohibited.
vii.
Halogen lamps shall not be used in dormitory rooms.
Other Precautions
i.
Decorate for holidays or parties with flame-retardant or noncombustible materials. Remove
them before leaving for the holidays. Use artificial Christmas trees. Check lights for
damaged wires and loose connections. Unplug lights before leaving the room.
ii.
Never store motorcycles, mopeds, or gas cans indoors. Any spark--even from turning on a
light--can ignite gas vapors.
iii.
Use grills and hibachis only where permitted--never indoors, next to buildings, on fire
escapes, or on stairways. Do not leave them unattended while fire is burning.
iv.
Do not tamper with emergency equipment. Leave extinguishers and alarms alone except in a
fire emergency. Never disconnect a smoke detector.
v.
Report damaged or missing extinguishers, alarms, smoke detectors, or exit signs to a Resident
Assistant or to Facility Services.
vi.
Make a plan. Think about how you would exit from different areas of your residence
hall/classroom building.
1)
Decide on at least two exits (primary and alternate) from your room, classroom, etc.
2)
Count and remember the number of doors between the room and the exits.
3)
Take special note of the location of safety equipment and of exits in other buildings.
4)
Have an outside meeting place to get a head count.
Fire Drills
Fire and smoke drills are very important, especially in residence halls. If you know what to do, you
are less likely to panic. (Some drills may be held at night to practice escaping in the dark.) Take fire
drills seriously; they may save your life. Follow directions of the person in charge.
3
f.
In Case of Fire:
i.
Stay calm. Think out what you have to do. Then act because every second counts.
ii.
Sound alarm to warn others. Pull the alarm box. If there is none, shout and pound on doors
as you evacuate. Never ignore an alarm. (In buildings equipped with smoke detector systems,
the alarm will sound automatically--if it doesn't, pull the alarm!)
iii.
Call LSU Police (388-3231). They will immediately call the City Fire Department.
1)
Give full address clearly.
2)
Describe extent of fire.
3)
Answer any questions before you hang up.
iv.
If you are in your room when you hear an alarm, feel the door, from bottom to top (heat
rises).If it is hot, don't open it. Stay in your room.
v.
If it is cool, open it a crack--but be ready to slam it shut if you find smoke or flames. Leave if
corridor seems safe.
vi.
If you can exit:
1)
vii.
Take your key and walk to nearest exit if there is no smoke. If there is smoke or if it
is dark, crawl to exit, counting doors so you don't get lost.
2)
Close all doors behind you.
3)
Do not use elevators--they are deathtraps in a fire. Use the stairs; hold on to rail.
4)
Turn back if you encounter heavy smoke (it is deadly) and look for another exit.
5)
Stand clear of the building and out of the way of the fighters when you get outside.
Never go back into a burning building for any reason. Report to your meeting place.
If you are trapped in your room:
1)
Keep your door closed.
2)
Seal cracks around door with tape, clothes, sheets, etc.
3)
Open windows slightly, if there is no smoke outside. Open at top (to vent smoke) or
at bottom (to let in fresh air).
4)
Tie wet cloth over nose and mouth to aid breathing.
5)
Stay low, where air is fresher (smoke rises).
6)
Signal rescuers by waving a sheet or clothing out the window, or telephone for help.
7)
Do not jump if you are higher than two stories.
viii. If clothing catches fire--Stop, Drop, and Roll!
1) Do not run--it will fan the flames. Drop to the floor and roll out fire.
2) Drop and roll someone else on the ground. Use a rug, coat or blanket to smother flames.
3) Cool the burn with cold water. Get prompt medical attention.
4.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
4
a.
Types of Fires:
Class A--Ordinary combustibles such as wood, paper, cloth, some rubbers, and plastics.
Class B--Flammable liquids such as gasoline, oils, grease, tars, lacquer, and oil-based paints.
Class C--Energized electrical equipment such as fuse boxes, electrical outlets, circuit breakers,
wiring, appliances, and other machinery.
Class D--Combustible metals such as fires involving titanium, magnesium, lithium, potassium, or
sodium.
b.
Types of Fire Extinguishers:
i.
Fire extinguishers come in various shapes, sizes, colors, and types. They shall only be used
on the type of fire they are rated for. Before an emergency arises, it is recommended that all
employees/students read and understand the directions on the fire extinguisher(s) in their area.
ii.
A water extinguisher is designated by an "A" inside a green triangle on the label and is easily
recognized by A its silver container. This extinguisher is only to be used on Class A type
fires. CAUTION: Do not use on electrical fires.
iii.
A CO2 extinguisher is designated by a "B" in a red square and a "C" in a blue circle on the
label and is easily recognized by the large black discharge horn. B C This type of
extinguisher is only to be used on Class B and/or C type fires. CAUTION: Do not use in a
confined space.
iv.
Multi-Purpose and Ordinary Dry Chemical extinguishers are designated by an "A" inside a
green triangle, a "B" inside a red square, and a "C" inside a blue circle on the label
respectively. It is easily A B C recognized by its red container and/or piggy back
cartridge. This type of extinguisher is only to be used on Class B and/or C type fires, while
multi-purpose dry chemical can also be used on Class A type fires. CAUTION: Respiratory
irritant, if inhaled.
v.
Halon 1211 extinguishers are labeled by the same designations as a multi-purpose dry
chemical extinguisher, "ABC." Halon is usually packaged in a red A B Container similar to
a dry chemical extinguisher, but it is usually not recognizable until the label is read. This
extinguisher is for use on Class A, B, and C type fires. CAUTION: Do not use in a confined
space.
NOTE: A Halon 1211 or CO2 fire extinguisher is recommended for use in computer
rooms or in areas where electronic equipment is located. Dry chemical and water
extinguishers are not.
vi.
c.
A Combustible Metal fire extinguisher is designated D by a "D" inside a yellow star on the
label. This extinguisher is only for use on Class D type fires.
How to Use a Fire Extinguisher:
i.
The method described below is a standard application for how to use a fire extinguisher;
however, it is highly recommended that all employees/students read and understand the
directions on the fire extinguisher(s) in their area. This method does not apply to all portable
extinguishers.
ii.
To use extinguisher, remember P A S S.
Pull the pin. (Some may require pressing a puncture lever or releasing a lock hatch.)
5
Aim the extinguisher nozzle or cone at the base of the fire.
Squeeze or press the handle.
Sweep from side to side at the base of the fire until it appears to be out. With a water
extinguisher, place your finger over the nozzle to create a mist. Stop the extinguisher,
check the fire area, and (if necessary) continue your extinguishment efforts. Always
back away from a fire so you will not be caught off guard.
5.
FIRE DRILLS
a.
For persons to respond properly when a fire occurs, they shall know there is a fire (alarm), they shall
have adequate means of egress (escape), and they shall have a plan of action. A fire drill is needed
to test that plan of action.
b.
The purpose of the fire drill is to be able to anticipate what can happen during an actual emergency
and also to provide for prompt, effective action.
c.
The goals of the fire drill are to minimize loss of life and personal injury, to protect property with a
minimum of damage, and to restore normal operations as soon as possible.
d.
The fire drill also helps to minimize panic and confusion among the occupants who sometimes may
change rooms/dorms every semester.
e.
Unannounced fire drills shall take place at least once a semester, preferably between the hours of
9:00 p.m. and 12:00 midnight. Floor monitors for each dormitory shall fill in the short Fire Drill
form.
f.
Head Residents and Resident Managers have the primary responsibility for fire safety and the
development and execution of plans for fire drills and evacuation which include:
i.
Testing the alarm system the day prior to opening dormitories each semester or summer term.
Report problems to the Department of Residential Life so that they can be reported to
Physical Plant.
ii.
Maintaining flashlights in all buildings to be issued and signed out to the Fire Chief and
Sub-Chiefs.
iii.
Maintaining current fire drill procedures for each Resident Hall which includes:
1)
Location of fire alarm call boxes.
2)
Control panels.
3)
Explanation of alarm signals, if coded, and how to activate
general alarms.
4)
How to deactivate alarm and reset system.
5)
Evacuation routes and duties of fire squad members.
6)
List of fire squad members.
iv.
Explaining the purpose of the fire drills and procedures for residents to follow at house and
section meetings.
v.
Removing the building roster, room chart, and pass keys in the event of fire requiring
evacuation of the building.
vi.
Instructing the fire squad each semester of assigned duties. (Be sure Wardens are designated
6
to hold emergency exit doors open to admit residents re- entering the building after fire drills.)
g.
Head Residents and Resident Managers are to advise their House Council to select a Fire Chief early
in the semester. The Fire Chief (and Assistant Fire Chief in large buildings) is to work closely with
the Head Resident or Resident Manager to select and appoint Sub-Chiefs and Wardens.
h.
Sub-Chiefs are needed for each emergency exit and Wardens for at least each floor. Where floors
are physically separated, additional Wardens shall be selected. (Additional Wardens for each 8-10
rooms per floor may be selected to enhance the effectiveness of the fire squad.) In areas where
Resident Assistants serve, they are to be "senior" Wardens for their section.
i.
Upon completion of the fire squad, a meeting shall be held to explain procedures and plans for fires
and fire drills and to inform the squad of the location of alarm boxes, types of signals, location of
and how to use fire extinguishers, safe evacuation assembly points (at least 50-100 feet from the
building), procedure to use in accounting for students, all clear signals, and the squad's responsibility
to note problem areas for evaluation after fire drills. This meeting shall be held no later than five
days after the opening of the building to occupants.
j.
Duties for fire squad members are to:
i.
Locate and assist Head Residents when fire alarms sound.
ii.
Observe execution of fire drill evacuation.
iii.
Verify with Sub-Chiefs that building is clear.
iv.
Advise evacuated students when "all clear" is given for re-entry to the building.
v.
Meet with fire squad for drill evaluation.
vi.
Submit Fire Drill Report within 48 hours of drill.
k.
An Assistant Fire Chief must assist the Fire Chief in large buildings when it is impossible to observe
and contact groups assembled in back of buildings.
l.
Sub-chiefs shall:
m.
n.
6.
a.
i.
Verify with Warden that building is cleared and notify Fire Chief.
ii.
Supervise return of residents to building and assure that emergency doors are closed and
secure.
iii.
Meet with Fire Chief for evaluation of drill.
Wardens shall:
i.
Verify that assigned area residents follow evacuation procedures correctly.
ii.
Report to Sub-Chiefs that all residents are out, or that one may be trapped in building in the
event of an actual fire.
iii.
Submit Floor Fire Drill Report to Fire Chief within 24 hours of drill.
iv.
Meet with Fire Chief for evaluation of drill.
Fire Drill Report Forms can be found in the Appendix.
GUIDE FOR FIRE-SAFE CHRISTMAS DECORATIONS IN STUDENT ROOMS
Because Christmas decorations are an extreme fire hazard, the following limitations on decorations
7
are necessary:
i.
All decorations shall be fire resistant.
ii.
Natural Christmas trees are not permitted in Residence Halls. Because most Christmas trees
must be cut well in advance of use, they dry out to a considerable degree and are too
combustible for safe use.
iii.
The use of burning candles is very dangerous and is therefore prohibited.
iv.
Door decorations or foil shall be suspended from the edges of the door. Remember that tape
and other adhesives may cause damage on the door surfaces. Keep electrical decorations
away from the metal door frames; do not string lights so that the door could close on the
wiring.
v.
Check extension cords to insure that they do not have breaks in the insulation. Keep the use
of extension cords to a minimum. Use them only for a limited number of small lights, not for
appliances.
vi.
All decorations shall be removed prior to Christmas vacation to facilitate hall cleaning.
b.
From a fire safety viewpoint, metal/plastic trees are desirable because they are not combustible.
Illuminate metal trees with indirect lighting (remotely located spotlights or flood-lights). Defective
lighting sets placed on the tree may energize the tree with enough voltage to injure someone
touching it or cause a short circuit.
c.
Artificial trees labeled as made of non-burning materials may be used. Only approved cool bulbs
shall be used on lighting strings.
d.
When decorating rooms and room doors, use only noncombustible material such as foil, glass, or
metal. Do not use untreated cotton batting, flock, or paper as they ignite easily and burn
continuously. Approved for the door decorations are: (1) all foil wrapping paper, and (2) small
Christmas pictures applied to foil. Doors may be totally decorated if decoration or foil is suspended
from the edges of the door.
e.
No cut boughs shall be used in student rooms or on doors. Candles are permissible on dining room
tables but must not be used in student rooms or public areas. Placing cut tree boughs around a
burning candle is extremely dangerous. No exit from the individual floors or houses shall be
blocked by Christmas decorations.
f.
If a fire occurs, (1) clear everyone out of the building by pulling the evacuation (fire) alarm, (2) call
Campus Police at 911, and (3) contact an advisor. Fight the fire only if you can do so safely,
keeping an exit route open. Otherwise, close doors to confine the fire and exit out-of-doors.
7.
GUIDE FOR SAFE CHRISTMAS DECORATIONS IN OTHER COMMON AREAS
a.
Natural Trees
Due to their extreme fire hazard, natural trees are not allowed in residence halls.
b.
Artificial Trees
i.
Choose only those labeled as made of non-burning materials.
ii.
Use only approved cool bulbs in lighting strings.
iii.
Tree decorations shall be fire resistant.
8
iv.
v.
c.
d.
Illuminate metal trees with indirect lighting. Lighting sets placed on the tree may "charge" the
tree with enough voltage to burn or fatally injure someone touching it.
Lights shall be turned on only for parties. Conserve energy--do not leave lights on.
Decorations
i.
Carefully inspect any electrical decorations for frayed cords or exposed metal parts. Destroy
any which have defects.
ii.
Do not use extension cords.
iii.
Do not use burning candles. Candles (enclosed in glass) are permissible on dining room tables
but shall not be used in student rooms or public areas.
iv.
Do not use cotton batting, flock, and paper unless you are sure they are fire-resistance treated.
v.
Do not use boughs cut from natural trees.
vi.
Do provide plentiful and large ashtrays.
vii.
Do use decorations made of metal, glass, foil, etc.
If a fire occurs:
i.
Clear everyone out of the building and sound the evacuation (fire) alarm;
ii.
Call Campus Police at 911; and
iii.
Fight the fire only if there is no risk to your life. Otherwise leave the area, closing doors
behind you.
B.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
1.
ELECTRIC CODES AND SAFETY STANDARDS
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards form the basis of our electrical
safety rules. These standards apply to general industry and construction. OSHA draws its standards from
the National Electric Code (NEC), National Electric Safety Code (NESC) and from consensus bodies such
as ASTM and ANSI. All employees should be familiar with these requirements as they apply to their areas
of work.
2.
MEDICAL SERVICES AND FIRST AID
The Student Health Center and the Baton Rouge EMS unit provides emergency medical services and first
aid on campus. To enhance our services for electrical workers who may be exposed to electric shock
accidents, all electricians shall be trained in CPR and first aid treatment of severe shock and burn injuries.
3.
EMPLOYEE TRAINING
Employees in occupations listed in the following table are believed to face electrical hazard risk and are
required to be trained as shown.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Position
Electrical Safety
(Awareness)
9
Electrical Safety
(Basic)
Electrical Safety
(Advanced)
Outside Electricians
x
Inside Electricians
x
Craft Supervisors
x
Craft Mid Managers
x
Plumbers
x
Carpenter and Painters
x
Landscape Workers
x
Asbestos/Lead Abatement
x
Electrical engineers & technicians
x
Power plant operators
x
All employees other than those listed
above who may be exposed to electrical
hazards
x
NOTE: Other employees who also may reasonably be expected to face comparable risk of injury due to
electric shock or other electrical hazards must also be trained. The training required shall be of the
classroom or on-the-job type.
a.
Employees shall be trained in and familiar with the electrical safety-related work practices covered in
this manual that pertain to their respective job assignments. Training must be documented. Qualified
persons (i.e. those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) shall, at a minimum, be
trained in and familiar with the following:
i.
ii.
The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of
electric equipment.
The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts,
and
iii.
The clearance distances specified in the approach distances table and the corresponding
voltages to which the qualified person will be exposed.
iv.
Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves either direct or indirect
contact shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal
protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools.
Note: The supervisor shall determine, through regular supervision and through inspections conducted
on at least an annual basis, that each employee is complying with the safety-related work
practices required by this manual. Employees must be retrained upon introduction of a new
procedure or new equipment on which the employee has not been trained.
b.
Employees who work in areas where they are not normally exposed to electrical hazards shall be
trained or made familiar with the requirements for unqualified workers to protect them around
electrical installations. For example, landscape personnel who maintain the grounds around an
10
electrical substation should be familiar with the safe approach distances for unqualified employees.
4.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
a.
Existing conditions related to the safety of the work to be performed shall be determined before
work on or near electric lines or equipment is started. Such conditions include, but are not limited to,
the nominal voltages of lines and equipment, the presence of hazardous induced voltages, the
presence and condition of protective grounds and equipment grounding conductors, the condition of
poles, environmental conditions relative to safety, and the locations of circuits and equipment,
including power and communication lines and fire protective signaling circuits. The employee in
charge shall conduct a job briefing with the employees involved in an electrical job before they start
each job. The briefing shall cover at least the following subjects: hazards associated with the job,
work procedures involved, special precautions, energy source controls, and personal protective
equipment requirements.
b.
When an unqualified person is working on the ground or above ground in the vicinity of overhead
lines, the person may not bring any conductive object closer to unguarded, energized overhead lines
than the distances given below. (An employee who is not trained to work near electrical circuits is
considered to be unqualified):
c.
d.
i.
For voltages to ground 50kV or below - 10 feet (305 cm);
ii.
For voltages to ground over 50kV - 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches (10 cm) for every 10kV
over 50kV.
Any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized
overhead lines shall be operated so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the voltage is
higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage.
However, under any of the following conditions, the clearance may be reduced:
i.
If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122
cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for
every 10 kV over that voltage.
ii.
If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the lines, and if the barriers are rated
for the voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the vehicle
or its raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the designed working
dimensions of the insulating barrier.
iii.
If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage involved, and if the work is
performed by a qualified (trained) person, the clearance (between the uninsulated portion of
the aerial lift and the power line) may be reduced to the distance given in the approach
distances table above.
Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or mechanical equipment or any of
its attachments, unless:
i.
The employee is using protective equipment rated for the voltage; or
ii.
The equipment is located so that no uninsulated part of its structure (that portion of the
structure that provides a conductive path to employees on the ground) can come closer to the
line than the clearance distances permitted above.
Note: If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near
energized overhead lines is intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground near
11
the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility
of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of barricades or insulation,
shall be taken to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth
resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward
from the grounding point.
e.
Work on electrical circuits and equipment should always be performed with the circuit or equipment
de-energized and locked/tagged out. Only in special circumstances where the power cannot be
reasonably turned off may work be performed on or near an exposed energized circuit. Safe
procedures for de-energizing circuits and equipment shall be determined before circuits or
equipment are de-energize using the following guidelines:
i.
The circuits and equipment to be worked on shall be disconnected from all electric energy
sources. Control circuit devices, such as push buttons, selector switches, and interlocks, may
not be used as the sole means for de-energizing circuits or equipment. Interlocks for electric
equipment may not be used as a substitute for lockout and tagging procedures.
ii.
Stored electric energy which might endanger personnel shall be released. Capacitors shall be
discharged and high capacitance elements shall be short-circuited and grounded, if the stored
electric energy might endanger personnel.
Note: If the capacitors or associated equipment are handled in meeting this requirement, they shall
be treated as energized.
iii.
Stored non-electrical energy in devices that could reenergize electric circuit parts shall be
blocked or relieved to the extent that the circuit parts could not be accidentally energized by
the device.
iv.
Each disconnecting means used to deenergize circuits and equipment on which work is to be
performed shall be locked/tagged. When a lock is used, it shall be attached so as to prevent
persons from operating the disconnecting means unless they resort to undue force or the use of
tools. If a lock cannot be applied, or if the employee believes that tagging procedures will
provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lock, a tag may be used
without a lock.
v.
Each tag shall contain a statement prohibiting unauthorized operation of the disconnecting
means and removal of the tag.
vi.
A tag used without a lock, shall be supplemented by at least one additional safety
measure,(such as the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch,
or opening of an extra disconnecting device) that provides a level of safety equivalent to that
obtained by use of a lock
vii.
A lock may be placed without a tag only where only one circuit or piece of equipment is deenergize, and the lockout period does not extend beyond the work shift.
viii. In order for equipment to be considered and worked as de-energize, a qualified person must
operate the equipment operating controls or otherwise verify that the equipment cannot be
restarted; and use test equipment to test the circuit elements and electrical parts of equipment
to which employees will be exposed and verify that the circuit elements and equipment parts
are de-energize. The test shall also determine if any energized condition exists as a result of
inadvertently induced voltage or unrelated voltage backfeed even though specific parts of the
circuit have been de-energize and presumed to be safe. If the circuit to be tested is over 600
volts, nominal, the test equipment shall be checked for proper operation immediately after this
12
test.
f.
ix.
To reenergize conductors or equipment, even momentarily, the qualified person shall conduct
tests and visual inspections, as necessary, to verify that all tools, electrical jumpers, shorts,
grounds, and other such devices have been removed, so that the circuits and equipment can be
safely energized.
x.
Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing the circuit or equipment shall
be warned to stay clear of circuits and equipment.
xi.
Each lock and tag shall be removed by the employee who applied it or under his or her direct
supervision, unless the employee is absent from the workplace, in which case the lock or tag
may be removed by a qualified person designated to perform this task after a visual
determination that all employees are clear of the circuits and equipment.
xii.
An employee whose lock or tag has been removed shall be informed before he or she resumes
work at the worksite.
A trained (qualified) employee may not approach or take a conductive object without an approved
insulating handle closer to energized electrical conductors than the distances in the chart below
unless they are protected from harm by one of the following means:
i.
They are insulated from the conductor by wearing properly rated insulating gloves, or
ii.
The energized part is insulated both from all other conductive objects at a different potential
and from the person, or
iii.
The person is insulated from all conductive objects at a potential different from that of the
energized part (live line work).
APPROACH DISTANCES FOR QUALIFIED
EMPLOYEES - ALTERNATING CURRENT
Voltage range (phase to phase)
300V and less
Minimum approach distance
Avoid Contact
Over 300V, not over 750V
1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm)
Over 750V, not over 2kV
1 ft. 6 in. (46 cm)
Over 2kV, not over 15kV
2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm)
Over 15kV, not over 37kV
3 ft. 0 in. (91 cm)
Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV
3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm)
Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV
4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm)
Over 121kV, not over 140kV
4 ft. 6 in. (137 cm)
g.
Employees may not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts, unless illumination is provided
that enables the employees to perform the work safely. Where lack of illumination or an obstruction
precludes observation of the work to be performed, employees shall not perform tasks near exposed
13
energized parts. Employees shall not reach blindly into areas which may contain energized parts.
The points of control shall be so located that persons are not likely to come in contact with any live
part or moving part of the equipment while turning on the lights.
h.
When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that contains
exposed energized the employee shall use protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating
materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the
like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into an employee and causing the employee to contact
exposed energized parts.
i.
Conductive materials and equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee's body shall be
handled in a manner that will prevent them from contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit
parts. If an employee must handle long dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in
areas with exposed live parts, work practices (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material
handling techniques) shall be used to minimize the hazard.
j.
Portable ladders shall have nonconductive siderails if they are used where the employee or the ladder
could contact exposed energized parts.
k.
Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such a watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains,
necklaces, metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal headgear) may not be worn if
they might contact exposed energized parts. However, such articles may be worn if they are rendered
nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means.
l.
Where live parts present an electrical contact hazard, employees may not perform housekeeping
duties at such close distances to the parts that there is a possibility of contact, unless adequate
safeguards (such as insulating equipment or barriers) are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning
materials (including conductive solids such as steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicon carbide, as
well as conductive liquid solutions) may not be used in proximity to energized parts unless
procedures are followed which will prevent electrical contact.
m.
Only a qualified (trained) person may defeat an electrical safety interlock, and then only temporarily
while he or she is working on the equipment. The interlock system shall be returned to its operable
condition when this work is completed.
n.
Portable electrical equipment, including power tools and extension cords, shall be handled in a
manner which will not cause damage. Flexible electric cords connected to equipment may not be
used for raising or lowering the equipment. Flexible cords may not be fastened with staples or
otherwise hung in such a fashion as could damage the outer jacket or insulation.
o.
Portable cord and plug connected equipment and extension cords shall be visually inspected before
use for external defects (such as loose parts, deformed and missing pins, or damage to outer jacket or
insulation) and for evidence of possible internal damage (such as pinched or crushed outer jacket).
Cord and plug connected equipment and extension cords which remain connected once they are put
in place and are not exposed to damage need not be visually inspected until they are relocated.
p.
If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or
damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests
necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.
q.
An extension cord used with grounding type equipment shall contain an equipment grounding
conductor. Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered in a manner which
would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor at the point where plugs are
attached to receptacles. Adapters which interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding
14
connection may not be used.
r.
Portable electric equipment and flexible cords used in highly conductive work locations (such a
those inundated with water or other conductive liquids), or in job locations where employees are
likely to contact water or conductive liquids, shall be approved for those locations.
s.
Employees' hands may not be wet when plugging and unplugging flexible cords and cord and plug
connected equipment, if energized equipment is involved. Plugs and receptacles shall be dry when
being handled without protective gloves.
t.
Locking type connectors shall be properly secured after connection.
u.
Load rated switches, circuit breakers, or other devices shall be used for the opening, reversing, or
closing of circuits under load conditions. Cable connectors not of the load break type, fuses, terminal
lugs, and cable splice connections may not be used for such purposes, except in an emergency.
v.
After a circuit is de-energize by a circuit protective device, the circuit may not be manually
reenergized until it has been determined that the equipment and circuit can be safely energized. The
repetitive manual reclosing of circuit breakers or reenergizing circuits through replaced fuses is
prohibited. When it can be determined that the automatic operation of a device was caused by an
overload rather than a fault condition, no examination of the circuit or connected equipment is
needed before the circuit is reenergized.
w.
Overcurrent protection of circuits and conductors may not be modified to increase the permissible
current above the rating of the conductors/equipment.
x.
Only qualified persons may perform testing work on electric circuits or equipment.
y.
Test instruments and equipment and all associated leads shall be properly rated and visually
inspected for external defects and damage before the equipment is used. If there is a defect or
evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be
removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to render the
equipment safe have been made.
z.
Where flammable materials are present only occasionally, electric equipment capable of igniting
them shall not be used, unless measures are taken to prevent hazardous conditions from developing.
Such materials include, but are not limited to: flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible dust;
and ignitable fibers or flyings.
Note: Electrical installation requirements for locations where flammable materials are present on a
regular basis are contained in NFPA 70.
aa.
Before employees work on power line voltage capacitors, the capacitors shall be disconnected from
energized sources and, after a wait of at least 5 minutes from the time of disconnection,
short-circuited.
ab.
Before the capacitor units are handled, each unit in series-parallel capacitor banks shall be
short-circuited between all terminals and the capacitor case or its rack. If the cases of capacitors are
on ungrounded substation racks, the racks shall be bonded to ground.
ac.
Any line to which capacitors are connected shall be short-circuited before it is considered deenergize.
ad.
The secondary of a current transformer may not be opened while the transformer is energized. If the
primary of the current transformer cannot be de-energize before work is performed on an instrument,
a relay, or other section of a current transformer secondary circuit, the circuit shall be bridged so that
15
the current transformer secondary will not be opened.
ae.
Before work is begun in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic that may endanger employees,
warning signs or flags and other traffic control devices shall be placed in conspicuous locations to
alert and channel approaching traffic. Where additional employee protection is necessary, barricades
shall be used.
af.
If there is a possibility of voltage backfeed from sources of cogeneration or from the secondary
system (for example, backfeed from more than one energized phase feeding a common load), deenergizing and grounding shall apply if the lines or equipment are to be worked as de-energize, and
the energized work procedures apply if the lines or equipment are to be worked as energized.
ag.
Hydraulic fluids used for the insulated sections of equipment shall provide insulation for the voltage
involved.
5.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
a.
Each disconnecting means for motors and appliances and each service, feeder, and branch circuit, at
its disconnecting means or overcurrent device, shall be durably and legibly marked to indicate its
purpose, unless located and arranged so the purpose is evident.
b.
Sufficient access and working space shall be provided and maintained about all electric equipment to
permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment. At least one entrance of
sufficient area shall be provided to give access to the working space about electric equipment.
c.
Working space around access to live parts operating at 600 volts or less and likely to require
operation, examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized may not be less than
indicated in the following table:
WORKING CLEARANCES AROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Nominal voltage to ground (volts)
Minimum clear distance for condition
0-150
3 ft.
151-600
3 ft. (exposed to contact one side only)
3.5 ft. (exposed to contact one side, grounded surface on other
side)
4 ft. (exposed to contact both sides)
600 - 2500
3 ft. (exposed to contact one side only)
4 ft. (exposed to contact one side, grounded surface other
side)
5 ft. (exposed to contact both sides)
NOTE: 1. Working space may not be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are
exposed for inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or general open space,
shall be suitably guarded. The minimum headroom of working spaces about service equipment,
switchboards, panel-boards, or motor control centers shall be 6 feet 3 inches for 600 volts or less, 6
feet 6 inches for over 600 volts.
16
NOTE: 2. Where energized parts are exposed, the minimum clear workspace may not be less than 3
feet wide (measured parallel to the equipment). Where rear access is required to work on deenergize parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum working space of 30 inches
horizontally shall be provided.
d.
A disconnecting means shall be located in sight from a motor controller location for equipment at
600 volts or less. If the motor controller is marked with a warning label giving the location and
identification of the disconnecting means which can be locked in the open position, the
disconnecting means does not have to be in sight on circuits over 600 volts.
i.
If a motor and the driven machinery are not in sight from the controller location, the
installation shall comply with one of the following conditions:
1) The controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position.
2) A manually operable switch that will disconnect the motor from its source of supply shall
be placed in sight from the motor location.
ii.
A disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on)
position, shall be accessible, and shall disconnect the motor and controller from all
ungrounded supply conductors.
iii.
An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each motor, but a single
disconnecting means may be used for a group of motors under any one of the following
conditions:
1) If a number of motors drive special parts of a single machine or piece of apparatus, such as
a metal or woodworking machine, crane, or hoist;
2) If a group of motors is under the protection of one set of branch-circuit protective devices;
or
3) If a group of motors is in a single room in sight from the location of the disconnecting
means.
e.
iv.
Motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit conductors shall be protected
against overheating due to motor overloads or failure to start, and against short-circuits or
ground faults. These provisions shall not require overload protection that will stop a motor
where a shutdown is likely to introduce additional or increased hazards, as in the case of fire
pumps, or where continued operation of a motor is necessary for a safe shutdown of
equipment or process and motor overload sensing devices are connected to a supervised
alarm.
v.
A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit for each motor-generator arc
welder, and for each AC transformer and DC rectifier arc welder which is not equipped with a
disconnect mounted as an integral part of the welder.
vi.
A switch or circuit breaker shall be provided by which each resistance welder and its control
equipment can be isolated from the supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting
means may not be less than the supply conductor ampacity.
Except as required or permitted elsewhere in this manual, live parts of electric equipment operating
at 50 to volts or more shall be guarded against accidental contact by approved cabinets or other
forms of approved enclosures, or by any of the following means:
i.
By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons.
17
ii.
By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens so arranged that only qualified persons
will have access to the space within reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or
screens shall be so sized and located that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact
with the live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them.
iii.
By location on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and arranged as to exclude
unqualified persons.
iv.
By elevation of 8 feet or more above the floor or other working surface for 600 volts or less.
f.
In locations where electric equipment would be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or guards
shall be so arranged and of such strength as to prevent such damage.
g.
Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts shall be marked with
conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter. In addition, the entrances to all
buildings, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at
over 600 volts, nominal, shall be kept locked or shall be under the observation of a qualified person
at all times. At voltages over 600 volts a wall, screen, or fence less than 8 feet in height is not
considered to prevent access unless it has other features that provide a degree of isolation equivalent
to an 8 foot fence. Ventilating or similar openings in metal-enclosed equipment shall be designed so
that foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from energized parts.
h.
Electrical installations that are open to unqualified persons shall be marked with appropriate caution
signs and be constructed as metal-enclosed equipment or enclosed in a vault or an area, access to
which is controlled by a lock. If equipment is exposed to physical damage from vehicular traffic,
suitable guards shall be provided to prevent such damage.
i.
Unguarded live parts above working space at voltages 600 volts through 6000 volts shall be
maintained at elevations not less than 8 feet 6 inches (8 feet if constructed before April 16, 1991).
j.
At least one entrance not less than 24 inches wide and 6 feet 6 inches high shall be provided to give
access to the working space about electric equipment. On switchboard and control panels exceeding
48 inches in width, there shall be one entrance at each end of such board where practicable. Where
bare energized parts at any voltage or insulated energized parts above 600 volts are located adjacent
to such entrance, they shall be suitably guarded.
k.
Permanent ladders or stairways shall be provided to give safe access to the working space around
electric equipment installed on platforms, balconies, mezzanine floors, or in attic or roof rooms or
spaces.
l.
Temporary electrical power and lighting wiring methods may be of a class less than would be
required for a permanent installation. Temporary electrical power and lighting installations 600
volts, nominal, or less may be used only:
i.
During and for remodeling, maintenance, repair, or demolition of buildings, structures, or
equipment, and similar activities;
ii.
For experimental or development work, and
iii.
For a period not to exceed 90 days for Christmas decorative lighting, carnivals, and similar
purposes.
m.
Temporary wiring over 600 volts, nominal, may be used only during periods of tests, experiments, or
emergencies.
n.
Temporary wiring feeders shall originate in an approved distribution center. The conductors shall be
18
run as multi conductor cord or cable assemblies, or, where not subject to physical damage, they may
be run as open conductors on insulators not more than 10 feet apart.
o.
Temporary branch circuits shall originate in an approved power outlet or panelboard. Conductors
shall be multi conductor cord or cable assemblies. Branch-circuit conductors used outdoors must be
protected against traffic damage and routed safely away from damage producing traffic or activities.
p.
Temporary wiring receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in a complete metallic
raceway, each branch circuit shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor and all
receptacles shall be electrically connected to the grounding conductor.
q.
No bare conductors nor earth returns may be used for the wiring of any temporary circuit.
r.
Suitable disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of
all ungrounded conductors of each temporary circuit.
s.
Temporary lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental contact or breakage.
Protection shall be provided by elevation of at least 7 feet from normal working surface or by a
suitable fixture or lampholder with a guard.
t.
Flexible cords and cables used in temporary wiring shall be protected from accidental damage. Sharp
corners and projections shall be avoided. Where passing through doorways or other pinch points,
flexible cords and cables shall be provided with protection to avoid damage.
6.
SPECIAL RULES FOR POWER DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS
LSU primarily utilizes an underground distribution system of 4,160 volts. Some overhead
circuits exist in surrounding areas and may operate at voltages greater than 4,160 volts. The rules
in this section pertain to work on the underground and overhead distribution circuits, including
the service wires and conductors from the transformers to the various buildings and facilities.
The rules are derived from OSHA standard 29CFR1910.269, Electrical Power Generation,
Transmission and Distribution.
a.
Insulating blankets, matting, covers, line hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber shall meet the
following ASTM Standards for Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 120-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating
Gloves.
ASTM D 178-88, Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting.
ASTM D 1048-88a, Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets.
ASTM D 1049-88, Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers.
ASTM D 1050-90, Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
ASTM D 1051-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
b.
Electrical protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition.
c.
Maximum use voltages shall conform to those listed in the table below:
RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS
Class of equipment
Maximum use voltage*
19
Retest voltage
Retest voltage
a - c Phase to phase volts
(a - c - rms)
(d - c - avg.)
0
1,000
5,000
20,000
1
7,500
10,000
40,000
2
17,000
20,000
50,000
3
26,500
30,000
60,000
4
36,000
40,000
70,000
NOTE: Maximum use voltage can be the phase to ground voltage in some circumstances.
Check with Occupational and Environmental Safety before using the phase to ground
voltage to rate gloves and other electrical equipment.
d.
Insulating equipment shall be inspected for holes, tears, punctures, cuts, ozone damage, embedded
objects, swelling, softening, hardening, stickiness, filthiness, and other damage before each day's
use and immediately following any incident that can reasonably be suspected of having caused
damage. Insulating gloves shall be given an air test, along with the inspection.
e.
Insulating equipment shall be stored in such a location and in such a manner as to protect it from
light, temperature extremes, excessive humidity, ozone, and other injurious substances and
conditions.
f.
Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves.
g.
Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to periodic electrical tests. Test voltages and the
maximum intervals between tests shall be in accordance with the table above on test voltages and the
table below on test intervals:
RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT TEST INTERVALS
Type of equipment
h.
When to test
Rubber insulating line hose
Upon indication that insulating value is suspect.
Rubber insulating covers
Upon indication that insulating value is suspect.
Rubber insulating blankets
Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter.
Rubber insulating gloves
Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter
Rubber insulating sleeves
Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter
Insulating equipment failing to pass inspections or electrical tests may not be used by employees,
except as follows:
i.
Rubber insulating line hose may be used in shorter lengths with the defective portion cut off.
ii.
Rubber insulating blankets may be repaired using a compatible patch that results in physical
and electrical properties equal to those of the blanket.
20
iii
Rubber insulating blankets may be salvaged by severing the defective area from the
undamaged portion of the blanket. The resulting undamaged area may not be smaller than 22
inches by 22 inches (560 mm by 560 mm) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blankets.
iv.
Rubber insulating gloves and sleeves with minor physical defects, such as small cuts, tears, or
punctures, may be repaired by the application of a compatible patch. Also, rubber insulating
gloves and sleeves with minor surface blemishes may be repaired with a compatible liquid
compound. The patched area shall have electrical and physical properties equal to those of the
surrounding material. Repairs to gloves are permitted only in the area between the wrist and
the reinforced edge of the opening.
Note: Repaired insulating equipment shall be retested before it may be used by employees.
i.
The department shall certify that equipment has been tested and shall identify the equipment that
passed the test and the date it was tested. Marking of equipment and entering the results of the tests
and the dates of testing onto logs are two acceptable means of meeting this requirement.
j.
Safe work practices for entry into and work in enclosed spaces (manholes and unvented vaults) and
for rescue of employees from such spaces shall be employed:
i.
Employees who enter enclosed spaces or who serve as attendants shall be trained in the
hazards of enclosed space entry, in enclosed space entry procedures, and in enclosed space
rescue procedures.
ii.
Equipment to ensure the prompt and safe rescue of employees from the enclosed space shall
be available.
iii.
Before any entrance cover to an enclosed space is removed, the employee in charge shall
determine whether it is safe to do so by checking for the presence of any atmospheric pressure
or temperature differences. He/she shall also evaluating whether there might be a hazardous
atmosphere in the space by having the space checked for oxygen deficiency, flammable gases,
and any toxic agent reasonable foreseen. Any conditions making it unsafe to remove the cover
or enter shall be eliminated before the cover is removed and entry is made.
iv.
“Hazardous atmosphere” means an atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of
death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from an
enclosed space), injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:
1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL);
2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL;
Note: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures
vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or less.
3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent;
4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure
limit published in OSHA’s OSHA’s Subpart G, Occupational Health and Environmental
Control, or in OSHA’s Subpart Z, Toxic and Hazardous Substances, of this Part and
which could result in employee exposure in excess of its dose or permissible exposure
limit;
Note: An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death,
incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its
health effects is not covered by this provision.
21
5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health.
Note: For air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a dose or permissible
exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Material Safety Data Sheets that
comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, 1910.1200, published information,
and internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric
conditions.
v.
When covers are removed from enclosed spaces, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a
railing, temporary cover, or other barrier intended to prevent an accidental fall through the
opening and to protect employees working in the space from objects entering the space.
e.
While work is being performed in the enclosed space, a person with first aid training shall be
immediately available outside the enclosed space to render emergency assistance.
f.
If open flames are used in enclosed spaces, a test for flammable gases and vapors shall be made
immediately before the open flame device is used and at least once per hour while the device is used
in the space. Testing shall be conducted more frequently if conditions present in the enclosed space
indicate that once per hour is insufficient to detect hazardous accumulations of flammable gases or
vapors.
g.
Live line tools, body belts, safety straps, lanyards, lifelines, and body harnesses shall be inspected
before use each day to determine that the equipment is in safe working condition. Defective
equipment may not be used. Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded. Fall arrest
equipment, work positioning equipment, or travel restricting equipment shall be used by employees
working at elevated locations more than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground on poles, towers, or similar
structures if other fall protection has not been provided. Qualified employees may climb or position
on overhead line/substation structures without use of fall protection.
h.
i.
i.
When stopping or arresting a fall, personal fall arrest systems shall limit the maximum
arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) if used with a body belt or 1800 pounds
(8 kN) if used with a body harness.
ii.
Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more
than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor contact any lower level.
iii.
If vertical lifelines or droplines are used, not more than one employee may be attached to any
one lifeline.
iv.
Snaphooks may not be connected to loops made in webbing-type lanyards, nor connected to
each other.
Cord-and plug-connected equipment supplied by a source other than premises wiring shall:
i.
Be equipped with a cord containing an equipment grounding conductor connected to the tool
frame and to a means for grounding the other end; or
ii.
Be of the double-insulated type; or
iii.
Be connected to the power supply through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded
secondary.
Portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to supply cord- and plug-connected equipment shall
only supply equipment located on the generator or the vehicle and cord- and plug-connected
equipment through receptacles mounted on the generator or the vehicle.
22
j.
The non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor
terminals of the receptacles shall be bonded to the generator frame; and, in the case of
vehicle-mounted generators, the frame of the generator shall be bonded to the vehicle frame. Any
neutral conductor shall be bonded to the generator frame.
k.
Safe operating pressures for hydraulic and pneumatic tools, hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and fittings
may not be exceeded, and these items must be free from defects to be used. Hoses may not be kinked
and pressure shall be released before connections are broken, unless quick acting, self-closing
connectors are used. Employees may not use any part of their bodies to locate or attempt to stop a
hydraulic leak.
l.
A hydraulic or pneumatic tool used where it may contact exposed live parts shall be designed and
maintained for such use.
Note: The hydraulic system supplying a hydraulic tool used more than 35 feet (10.7 m) above the
ground where it may contact exposed live parts shall provide protection against loss of insulating
value for the voltage involved due to the formation of a partial vacuum in the hydraulic line.
m.
A pneumatic tool used on energized electrical lines or equipment or used where it may contact
exposed live parts shall provide protection against the accumulation of moisture in the air supply.
n.
Live-line tools shall:
i.
be constructed using materials meeting ASTM F711-89, Standard Specification for
Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live-Line Tools.
ii.
be wiped clean and visually inspected for defects before use each day.
iii.
be removed from service and examined and tested if defects are found
iv.
be removed from service and inspected, waxed and cleaned every two years if it is used for
“primary” protection. After inspection, it shall be electrically tested if the tool:
1)
is made from hollow FRP
(fiberglass reinforced product) tube products or wood, or
2)
is found to have defects during
the inspection
v.
o.
The voltage applied during the tests shall be as follows:
1)
75,000 volts
per foot (2461 volts per centimeter) of length for 1 minute if the tool is made of
fiberglass, or
2)
50,000 volts
per foot (1640 volts per centimeter) of length for 1 minute if the tool is made of wood.
In areas not restricted to qualified persons only, materials or equipment may not be stored closer to
energized lines or exposed energized parts of equipment than the following distances plus an amount
providing for the maximum sag and side swing of all conductors and providing for the height and
movement of material handling equipment:
i.
For lines and equipment energized at 50 kV or less, the distance is 10 feet (305 cm).
ii.
For lines and equipment energized at more than 50 kV, the distance is 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4
inches (10 cm) for every 10 kV over 50 kV.
23
p.
In areas restricted to qualified employees, material may not be stored within the working space about
energized lines or equipment.
q.
Only qualified employees may work on or with exposed energized lines or parts of equipment. Only
qualified employees may work in areas containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of
equipment operating at 50 volts or more. Electric lines and equipment shall be considered and
treated as energized unless de-energize and locked or tagged out, and grounded where appropriate.
r.
At least two employees shall be present while the following types of work are being performed:
i.
Installation, removal, or repair of lines that are energized at more than 600 volts,
ii.
Installation, removal, or repair of de-energize lines and equipment, such as transformers,
capacitors, and regulators, if an employee is exposed to contact with other parts energized at
more than 600 volts,
iii.
Work involving the use of mechanical equipment, other than insulated aerial lifts, near parts
energized at more than 600 volts, and
Exceptions to two person rule:
i.
Routine switching of circuits, if the employer can demonstrate that conditions at the site allow
this work to be performed safely,
ii.
Work performed with live-line tools if the employee is positioned so that he or she is neither
within reach of nor otherwise exposed to contact with energized parts, and
iii.
Emergency repairs to the extent necessary to safeguard the general public.
s.
Each employee, to the extent that other safety-related conditions at the worksite permit, shall work in
a position from which a slip or shock will not bring the employee's body into contact with exposed,
uninsulated parts energized at a potential different from the employee.
t.
Connections shall generally be made so that minimum handling is performed on energized
conductors.
u.
Employees must removed or render nonconductive any exposed articles, such as key or watch
chains, rings, wristwatches, and necklaces.
v.
Electric arcs produce tremendous heat and results in serious injury in many cases. Injury can also be
the result of melting and burning clothing resulting from an arc. For this reason, employees who are
exposed to the hazards of flames or electric arcs shall not wear clothing that, when exposed to flames
or electric arcs, could increase the extent of injury that would be sustained by the employee. The
following fabrics, either alone or in blends are prohibited from being worn by such workers: acetate,
nylon, polyester, and rayon.
Exception: where the fabric has been treated to withstand the arc without melting, dripping or
burning or where the clothing is worn in such a manner as to eliminate the hazard.
w.
Fuse handling. When fuses must be installed or removed with one or both terminals energized at
more than 300 volts or with exposed parts energized at more than 50 volts, the employee shall use
tools or gloves rated for the voltage. When expulsion-type fuses are installed with one or both
terminals energized at more than 300 volts, the employee shall wear eye protection, use a tool rated
for the voltage, and stay clear of the exhaust path of the fuse barrel.
x.
Metal parts of equipment or devices, such as transformer cases and circuit breaker housings, shall be
treated as energized at the highest voltage to which they are exposed, unless the employee inspects
24
the installation and determines that these parts are grounded before work is performed.
y.
Devices used to open circuits under load conditions shall be designed to interrupt the current
involved.
z.
When de-energizing lines and equipment for work on power distribution lines and other power
equipment, the following practices must be used in addition to those provided elsewhere in this
manual:
i.
A qualified and authorized person shall be designated to issue the clearance to work on lines
or equipment
ii.
Protective grounds shall be installed except where greater hazards will be created in certain
underground installations.
iii.
If two or more independent crews will be working on the same lines or equipment, each crew
shall independently establish a clearance for their work.
iv.
To transfer the clearance, the employee in charge (or, if the employee in charge is forced to
leave the worksite due to illness or other emergency, the employee's supervisor) shall inform
the person who issued the clearance; employees in the crew shall be informed of the transfer;
and the new employee in charge shall be responsible for the clearance.
aa.
For employees to work lines or equipment as de-energize, the lines or equipment shall be deenergize using proper procedures grounded as specified below. However, if the supervisor can
demonstrate that installation of a ground is impracticable or that the conditions resulting from the
installation of a ground would present greater hazards than working without grounds, the lines and
equipment may be treated as de-energize provided the lines and equipment have been de-energize
using proper procedures, there is no possibility of contact with other energized sources, and the
hazard of induced voltage is not present. When work is performed on a cable at a location remote
from the cable terminal, the cable may not be grounded at the cable terminal if there is a possibility
of hazardous transfer of potential should a fault occur.
ab.
Temporary protective grounds shall be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner as to
prevent each employee from being exposed to hazardous differences in electrical potential:
i.
Grounding sets must meet ASTM F855-1990, Standard Specifications for Temporary
Grounding Systems to be Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment.
ii.
Protective grounds shall have an impedance low enough to cause immediate operation of
protective devices in case of accidental energizing of the lines or equipment
iii.
Before any ground is installed, lines and equipment shall be tested and found absent of
nominal voltage, unless a previously installed ground is present.
iv.
When a ground is to be attached to a line or to equipment, the ground-end connection shall be
attached first, and then the other end shall be attached by means of a live-line tool.
v.
When a ground is to be removed, the grounding device shall be removed from the line or
equipment using a live-line tool before the ground-end connection is removed.
vi.
Grounds may be removed temporarily during tests. During the test procedure, the employee
shall use insulating equipment and remain isolated from any hazards involved, and institute
any additional measures as may be necessary to protect each exposed employee in case the
previously grounded lines and equipment become energized.
25
7.
HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING
a.
Permanent test areas shall be guarded by walls, fences, or barriers designed to keep employees out of
the test areas.
b.
In field testing, or at a temporary test site where permanent fences and gates are not provided, one of
the following means shall be used to prevent unauthorized employees from entering: (The barriers
shall be removed when the protection they provide is no longer needed)
c.
8.
i.
The test area shall be guarded by the use of distinctively colored safety tape that is supported
approximately waist high and to which safety signs are attached, or
ii.
The test area shall be guarded by a barrier or barricade that limits access to the test area, or
iii.
The test area shall be guarded by one or more test observers stationed so that the entire area
can be monitored.
The test operator in charge shall conduct these routine safety checks before each series of tests and
shall verify at least the following conditions:
i.
That barriers and guards are in workable condition and are properly placed to isolate
hazardous areas;
ii.
That system test status signals, if used, are in operable condition;
iii.
That test power disconnects are clearly marked and readily available in an emergency;
iv.
That ground connections are clearly identifiable, and that all conductive parts accessible to the
test operator during the time the equipment is operating at high voltage will be maintained at
ground potential except for portions of the equipment that are isolated from the test operator
by guarding. (Visible grounds shall be applied before work is performed on the circuit or
item or apparatus under test)
v.
That personal protective equipment is provided and used as required by this manual; and
vi.
That signal, ground, and power cables are properly separated and that a separate isolated
ground-return path is provided for the current impressed during the test (unless the separate
path is impractical and the employee is protected from step and touch potentials).
vii.
That if a test trailer or vehicle is used, it is grounded.
OVERHEAD POWER LINE WORK
a.
Before elevated structures, such as poles or towers, are subjected to such stresses as climbing or the
installation or removal of equipment may impose, the employee shall ascertain that the structures are
capable of sustaining the additional or unbalanced stresses. If the pole or other structure cannot
withstand the loads which will be imposed, it shall be braced or otherwise supported so as to prevent
failure.
b.
When poles are set, moved, or removed near exposed energized overhead conductors, the pole may
not contact the conductors. Each employee shall wear electrical protective equipment or use
insulated devices when handling the pole and avoid contact the pole with uninsulated parts of his or
her body.
c.
To protect employees from falling into holes into which poles are to be placed, the holes shall be
attended by employees or physically guarded whenever anyone is working nearby.
26
d.
When installing conductors, employees shall minimize the possibility that conductors and cables
being installed or removed will contact energized power lines or equipment. Conductors, cables, and
pulling and tensioning equipment shall be grounded and/or barricaded during the work, and
reclosing relays on adjacent circuits will be disabled.
e.
Load ratings of stringing lines, pulling lines, conductor grips, load-bearing hardware and accessories,
rigging, and hoists may not be exceeded, and pulling lines and accessories shall be repaired or
replaced when defective. Employees will not stand directly under conductors or on the crossarm
while the conductors are being pulled in.
f.
Reliable communications, through two-way radios or other equivalent means, shall be maintained
between the reel tender and the pulling rig operator, and the pulling rig may only be operated when it
is safe to do so.
g.
Employees shall abide by rules in this manual for mechanical equipment while operating such
equipment near overhead lines.
h.
Employees shall not perform live line, barehand work.
i.
Tree trimming rules for work near overhead lines are shown elsewhere in this manual and shall be
followed by employees while performing tree trimming work.
9.
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORK
a.
A ladder or other climbing device shall be used to enter and exit a manhole or subsurface vault
exceeding 4 feet (122 cm) in depth. No employee may climb into or out of a manhole or vault by
stepping on cables or hangers.
b.
Equipment used to lower materials and tools into manholes or vaults shall be capable of supporting
the weight to be lowered and shall be checked for defects before use. Before tools or material are
lowered into the opening for a manhole or vault, each employee working in the manhole or vault
shall be clear of the area directly under the opening.
c.
While work is being performed in a manhole containing energized electric equipment, an employee
with first aid and CPR training meeting paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall be available on the
surface in the immediate vicinity to render emergency assistance. Occasionally, the employee on the
surface may briefly enter a manhole to provide assistance, other than emergency. For the purpose of
inspection, housekeeping, taking readings, or similar work, an employee working alone may enter,
for brief periods of time, a manhole where energized cables or equipment are in service, if the
employee is protected from all electrical hazards. Reliable communications, through two-way radios
or other equivalent means, shall be maintained among all employees involved in the job
d.
Only qualified (trained) employees may enter manholes containing unguarded, uninsulated
energized lines or parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more.
e.
If duct rods are used, they shall be installed in the direction presenting the least hazard to employees.
An employee shall be stationed at the far end of the duct line being rodded to ensure that the
required minimum approach distances are maintained.
f.
When multiple cables are present in a work area, the cable to be worked shall be identified by
electrical means, unless its identity is obvious by reason of distinctive appearance or location or by
other readily apparent means of identification. Cables other than the one being worked shall be
protected from damage.
g.
Energized cables that are to be moved shall be inspected for defects.
27
h.
Where a cable in a manhole has one or more abnormalities that could lead to or be an indication of
an impending fault, the defective cable shall be de-energize before any employee may work in the
manhole, except when service load conditions and a lack of feasible alternatives require that the
cable remain energized. In that case, employees may enter the manhole provided they are protected
from the possible effects of a failure by shields or other devices that are capable of containing the
adverse effects of a fault in the joint.
Note: Abnormalities such as oil or compound leaking from cable or joints, broken cable sheaths or
joint sleeves, hot localized surface temperatures of cables or joints, or joints that are swollen beyond
normal tolerance are presumed to lead to or be an indication of an impending fault.
i.
When work is performed on buried cable or on cable in manholes, metallic sheath continuity shall be
maintained or the cable sheath shall be treated as energized.
j.
Excavated areas shall be protected with barricades.
k.
At night, warning lights shall be prominently displayed.
10.
POWER SUBSTATION INSTALLATIONS AND WORKER RULES
a.
Access and working space in substations shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Safety
Code (ANSI C2-1987). This access and working space shall be adequate to permit ready and safe
operation and maintenance of such equipment, and to facilitate the minimum approach distances
required by these rules. Consideration shall be given to operation of switches with live line tools.
b.
Where installations were installed before 1987, the installation can remain in service if:
c.
i.
The installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect at the time the
installation was made,
ii.
The configuration of the installation enables employees to maintain the minimum approach
distances required by this manual while they are working on exposed, energized parts, and
iii.
The precautions taken when work is performed on the installation provide protection
equivalent to the protection that would be provided by access and working space meeting
ANSI C2-1987.
When draw-out-type circuit breakers are removed or inserted, the breaker shall be in the open
position. The control circuit shall also be rendered inoperative, if the design of the equipment
permits. Employees racking in or racking out draw-out-type circuit breakers shall:
i.
shall wear flame resistant outer garments and face protection at 480 volts
ii.
shall wear a flame resistant switching suit and face protection at 4160 volts or above
d.
Conductive fences around substations shall be grounded. When a substation fence is expanded or a
section is removed, fence grounding continuity shall be maintained, and bonding shall be used to
prevent electrical discontinuity.
e.
Rooms and spaces in which electric supply lines or equipment are installed shall meet the
requirements of paragraphs ci through cv below under the following conditions:
If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are located within 8 feet of the ground or
other working surface inside the room or space; or
If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts and located within 8 feet of the ground or other working
surface inside the room or space are guarded only by location or
28
If live parts operating at more than 600 volts are located within the room or space, unless the live
parts are enclosed within approved metal clad equipment or they are installed at a height above
ground and any other working surface that provides protection at the voltage to which they are
energized corresponding to the protection provided by an 8-foot height at 50 volts.
i.
The rooms and spaces shall be so enclosed within fences, screens, partitions, or walls as to
minimize the possibility that unqualified persons will enter.
ii.
Signs warning unqualified persons to keep out shall be displayed at entrances to the rooms
and spaces.
iii.
Entrances to rooms and spaces that are not under the observation of an attendant shall be kept
locked.
iv.
Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or spaces while the electric supply lines or
equipment are energized.
f.
Guards shall be provided around all live parts operating at more than 150 volts to ground without an
insulating covering, unless the location of the live parts gives sufficient horizontal or vertical or a
combination of these clearances to minimize the possibility of accidental employee contact. Except
for fuse replacement and other necessary access by qualified persons, the guarding of energized parts
within a compartment shall be maintained during operation and maintenance functions.
g.
When guards are removed from energized equipment, barriers shall be installed around the work
area to prevent employees who are not working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from
contacting the exposed live parts.
h.
The job briefing (prejob planning conference) required by this manual shall cover such additional
subjects as the location of energized equipment in or adjacent to the work area and the limits of any
de-energize work area.
11.
ADDITIONAL RULES FOR POWER HOUSE WORKERS
a.
A designated employee shall inspect conditions before work is permitted and after its completion.
Eye protection, or full face protection if necessary, shall be worn at all times when condenser, heater,
or boiler tubes are being cleaned.
b.
Where it is necessary for employees to work near tube ends during cleaning, shielding shall be
installed at the tube ends.
c.
Areas where chemical cleaning is in progress shall be cordoned off to restrict access during cleaning.
If flammable liquids, gases, or vapors or combustible materials will be used or might be produced
during the cleaning process, the area shall be posted with signs restricting entry and warning of the
hazards of fire and explosion, and smoking, welding, and other possible ignition sources shall be
prohibited in these restricted areas.
d.
Where a restricted area is established for chemical cleaning, the number of personnel in the restricted
area shall be limited to those necessary to accomplish the task safely.
e.
There shall be ready access to water or showers for emergency use when chemical cleaning is being
performed.
f.
Employees in restricted areas shall wear protective equipment meeting the requirements of OSHA’s
Subpart I of this Part and including, but not limited to, protective clothing, boots, goggles, and
gloves.
29
g.
Before internal furnace or ash hopper repair work is started, overhead areas shall be inspected for
possible falling objects. If the hazard of falling objects exists, overhead protection such as planking
or nets shall be provided.
h.
When opening an operating boiler door, employees shall stand clear of the opening of the door to
avoid the heat blast and gases which may escape from the boiler.
12.
WIRING IN WET LOCATIONS
The following rules apply to electric wiring for and equipment in or adjacent to all swimming,
wading, therapeutic, and decorative pools and fountains, whether permanently installed or
storable, and to metallic auxiliary equipment, such as pumps, filters, and similar equipment.
Therapeutic pools in health care facilities are exempt from these provisions.
a.
A single receptacle of the locking and grounding type that provides power for a permanently
installed swimming pool recirculating pump motor may be located not less than 5 feet from the
inside walls of a pool. All other receptacles on the property shall be located at least 10 feet from the
inside walls of a pool. Receptacles which are located within 15 feet of the inside walls of the pool
shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters.
Note: In determining these dimensions, the distance to be measured is the shortest path the supply
cord of an appliance connected to the receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, wall, or
ceiling of a building or other effective permanent barrier.
b.
Unless they are 12 feet above the maximum water level, lighting fixtures and lighting outlets may
not be installed over a pool or over the area extending 5 feet horizontally from the inside walls of a
pool. However, a lighting fixture or lighting outlet which has been installed before April 16, 1981,
may be located less than 5 feet measured horizontally from the inside walls of a pool if it is at least 5
feet above the surface of the maximum water level and shall be rigidly attached to the existing
structure. It shall also be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter installed in the branch circuit
supplying the fixture.
c.
Unless installed 5 feet above the maximum water level and rigidly attached to the structure adjacent
to or enclosing the pool, lighting fixtures and lighting outlets installed in the area extending between
5 feet and 10 feet horizontally from the inside walls of a pool shall be protected by a ground-fault
circuit interrupter.
d.
Flexible cords used with the following equipment may not exceed 3 feet in length and shall have a
copper equipment grounding conductor with a grounding-type attachment plug:
i)
Cord- and plug-connected lighting fixtures installed within 16 feet of the water surface of
permanently installed pools.
ii)
Other cord- and plug-connected, fixed or stationary equipment used with permanently
installed pools.
e.
A ground-fault circuit interrupter shall be installed in the branch circuit supplying underwater
fixtures operating at more than 15 volts. Equipment installed underwater shall be approved for the
purpose.
f.
No underwater lighting fixtures may be installed for operation at over 150 volts between conductors.
g.
All electric equipment operating at more than 15 volts, including power supply cords, used with
fountains shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters.
30
13. USE OF ELECTRICALLY POWERED EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
a.
All electrically powered equipment or hand tools, except double insulated hand tools, shall be
grounded.
b.
Portable hand tools and electrically powered equipment shall be used with a ground fault circuit
interrupter (GFCI) or an assured equipment grounding program (AEGP) (see "Ground Fault Circuit
Protection" this section) shall be in effect.
c.
Electrical equipment shall be disconnected or the current otherwise interrupted while it is being
adjusted or repaired.
d.
Permanent wiring shall be put in conduits.
e.
All breakers, motors, and appliance disconnects shall be labeled.
f.
Framing of electrical motors shall grounded.
g.
Outlets, switching, junction boxes, etc., shall be covered.
h.
Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment that may become energized under
abnormal conditions shall be grounded when in wet or damp locations; if electrical contact with
metal, if operated in excess of 150 volts to ground, or
in a hazardous location.
NOTE: Consider all exposed wires "hot" until verified otherwise.
14.
GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
a.
When using extension cords, portable electrically powered hand tools, appliances, or other
electrically powered equipment outdoors or in an area under construction, they shall be of the 3-wire
type (except double insulated tools) and shall be connected to a GFCI or an Assured Equipment
Grounding Program (AEGP) shall be in effect.
b.
The AEGP requires regular inspections of all tools, cords, and electric devices. Appropriate
documentation shall be maintained. Components of an AEGP are:
15.
i.
A written description of the program including specific procedures.
ii.
Qualified employees appointed to run the program. More than one person shall be appointed.
iii.
All equipment, cords, etc., to be used shall be inspected for external defects each day. All
defective equipment shall be tagged out until repairs are made. All defects, repairs,
inspections, etc., shall be documented.
EXTENSION CORDS
See the appendix for guidelines on extension cord use.
a.
Cords shall not be hung over nails, bolts, or sharp edges.
b.
Cords shall not be laid in aisles unless protected from damage; they shall be so placed so as to not
create a tripping hazard.
c.
Cords shall not be used as a substitute for fixed wiring.
d.
Cords shall not be run through holes in walls, ceiling, floors, doors, windows, or hung from light
fixtures or attached to building surfaces.
31
16.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
a.
Standard electrical apparatus cannot be used in locations where flammable gases, vapors, dusts, and
other easily ignitable materials are present.
b.
Before electrical equipment and its associated wiring is selected for a hazardous location, the exact
nature of the flammable materials present should be determined.
c.
The National Electric Code, NFPA-70, Articles 500-503, shall be consulted before any use or
installation of electrical equipment and associated wiring is selected.
C.
STAIRS & LADDERS
1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a.
A stairway or ladder must be provided at all worker points of access where there is a break in
elevation of 19 inches (48 cm) or more and no ramp, runway, embankment, or personnel hoist is
provided.
b.
When there is only one point of access between levels, it must be kept clear to permit free passage by
workers. If' free passage becomes restricted, a second point of access must be provided and used.
c.
Where there are more than two points of access between levels, at least one point of access must be
kept clear.
d.
All stairway and ladder fall protection systems required by these rules must be installed and all
duties required by the stairway and ladder rules must be performed before employees begin work
that requires them to use stairways or ladders and their respective fall protection systems.
2.
a.
STAIRWAYS
The following general requirements apply to all stairways used during the process of construction, as
indicated:
i.
Stairways that will not be a permanent part of the structure on which construction work is
performed must have landings at least 30 inches deep and 22 inches wide (76 x 56 cm) at
every 12 feet (3.7 m) or less of vertical rise.
ii.
Stairways must be installed at least 30 degrees--and no more than 50 degrees--from the
horizontal.
iii.
Variations in riser height or stair tread depth must not exceed 1/4 inch in any stairway system,
including any foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs.
iv.
Where doors or gates open directly onto a stairway, a platform must be provided that extends
at least 20 inches (51 cm) beyond the swing of the door.
v.
Metal pan landings and metal pan treads must be secured in place before filling.
vi.
All stairway parts must be free of dangerous projections such as protruding nails.
vii.
Slippery conditions on stairways must be corrected.
viii. Workers may not use spiral stairways that will not be a permanent part of the structure.
b.
The following requirements apply to stairs in temporary service during construction:
i.
Except during construction of the actual stairway, stairways with metal pan landings and
32
treads must not be used where the treads and/or landings have not been filled in with concrete
or other materials, unless the pans of the stairs and/or landings are temporarily filled in with
wood or other materials. All treads and landings must be replaced when worn below the top
edge of the pan.
3.
ii.
Except during construction of the actual stairway, skeleton metal frame structures and steps
must not be used (where treads and/or landings will be installed later) unless the stairs are
fitted with secured temporary treads and landings.
iii.
Temporary treads must be made of wood or other solid material and installed the full width
and depth of the stair.
STAIRRAILS AND HANDRAILS
The following general requirements apply to all stairrails and handrails:
a.
Stairways having four or more risers, or rising more than 30 inches (76 cm) in height--whichever is
less--must have at least one handrail. A stairrail also must be installed along each unprotected side or
edge. When the top edge of a stairrail system also serves as a handrail, the height of the top edge
must be no more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less than 36 inches (9 1.5 cm) from the upper surface of
the stairrail to the surface of the tread.
b.
Winding or spiral stairways must have a handrail to prevent using areas where the tread width is less
than 6 inches (15 cm).M
c.
Stairrails installed after Mach 15.1991, must be not less than 36 inches (91.5 cm) in height.
d.
Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent intermediate structural
members must be provided between the top rail and stairway steps to the stairrail system.
e.
Midrails, when used, must be located midway between the top of the stairrail system and the
stairway steps.
f.
Screens or mesh, when used, must extend from the top rail to the stairway step and along the
opening between top rail supports.
g.
Intermediate vertical members, such as balusters, when used, must not be more than 19 inches (48
cm) apart.
h.
Other intermediate structural members, when used, must be installed so that there are no openings of
more than 19 inches (48 cm) wide.
i.
Handrails and the top rails of the stairrail systems must be able to withstand, without failure, at least
200 pounds (890 n) of weight applied within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge in any downward or
outward direction, at any point along the top edge.
j.
The height of handrails must not be more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less than 30 inches (76 cm)
from the upper surface of the handrail to the surface of the tread.
k.
Stairrail systems and handrails must be surfaced to prevent injuries such as punctures or lacerations
and to keep clothing from snagging.
l.
Handrails must provide an adequate handhold for employees to grasp to prevent falls.
m.
The ends of stairrail systems and handrails must be built to prevent dangerous projections, such as
rails protruding beyond the end posts of the system.
33
n.
Temporary handrails must have a minimum clearance of 3 inches (8 cm) between the handrail and
walls, stairrail systems, and other objects.
o.
Unprotected sides and edges of stairway landings must be provided with standard 42-inch (1.1 m)
guardrail systems.
4.
LADDERS
The following general requirements apply to all ladders, including job-made ladders:
a.
A double-cleated ladder or two or more ladders must be provided when ladders are the only way to
enter or exit a work area having 25 or more employees, or when a ladder serves simultaneous twoway traffic.
b.
Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps must be parallel, level, and uniformly spaced when the ladder is in
position for use.
c.
Rungs, cleats, and steps of portable and fixed ladders (except as provided below) must not be spaced
less than 10 inches (25 cm) apart, nor more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, along the ladder's side
rails.
d.
Rungs, cleats, and steps of step stools must not be less than 8 inches (20 cm) apart, nor more than 12
inches (31 cm) apart, between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.
e.
Rungs, cleats, and steps at the base section of extension trestle ladders must not be less than 8 inches
(20 cm) nor more than 18 inches (46 cm) apart, between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.
The rung spacing on the extension section must not be less than 6 inches (15 cm) nor more than 12
inches (31 cm).
f.
Ladders must not be tied or fastened together to create longer sections unless they are specifically
designed for such use.
g.
A metal spreader or locking device must be provided on each stepladder to hold the front and back
sections in an open position when the ladder is being used.
h.
Two or more separate ladders used to reach an elevated work area must be offset with a platform or
landing between the ladders, except when portable ladders are used to gain access to fixed ladders.
i.
Ladder components must be surfaced to prevent injury from punctures or lacerations. and prevent
snagging of clothing.
j.
Wood ladders must not be coated with any opaque covering, except for identification or warning
labels which may be placed only on one face of a side rail.
5.
PORTABLE LADDERS
a.
Non-self-supporting and self-supporting portable ladders must support at least four times the
maximum intended load; extra heavy-duty type 1A metal or plastic ladders must sustain 3.3 times
the maximum intended load. The ability of a self-supporting ladder to sustain loads must be
determined by applying the load to the ladder in a downward vertical direction. The ability of a nonself-supporting ladder to sustain loads must be determined by applying the load in a downward
vertical direction when the ladder is placed at a horizontal angle of 75.5 degrees.
b.
The minimum clear distance between side rails for all portable ladders must be 11.5 inches (29 cm).
c.
The rungs and steps of portable metal ladders must be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with
34
skid-resistant material, or treated to minimize slipping.
6.
FIXED LADDERS
a.
A fixed ladder must be able to support at least two loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, concentrated
between any two consecutive attachments. Fixed ladders also must support added anticipated loads
caused by ice buildup, winds, rigging, and impact loads resulting from using ladder safety devices.
b.
Individual rung/step ladders must extend at least 42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level or landing
platform either by the continuation of the rung spacings as horizontal grab bars or by providing
vertical grab bars that must have the same lateral spacing as the vertical legs of the ladder rails.
c.
Each step or rung of a fixed ladder must be able to support a load of at least 250 pounds (114 kg)
applied in the middle of the step or rung.
d.
The minimum clear distance between the sides of individual rung/step ladders and between the side
rails of other fixed ladders must be 16 inches (41 cm).
e.
The rungs of individual rung/step ladders must be shaped to prevent slipping off the end of the
rungs.
f.
The rungs and steps of fixed metal ladders manufactured after March 15, 1991, must be corrugated,
knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or treated to minimize slipping.
g.
The minimum perpendicular clearance between fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps and any
obstruction behind the ladder must be 7 inches (18 cm), except that the clearance for an elevator pit
ladder must be 4.5 inches (11 cm).
h.
The minimum perpendicular clearance between the centerline of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and
steps, and any obstruction on the climbing side of the ladder must be 30 inches (76 cm). If
obstructions are unavoidable, clearance may be reduced to 24 inches (61 cm), provided a deflection
device is installed to guide workers around the obstruction.
i.
The step-across distance between the center of the steps or rungs of fixed ladders and the nearest
edge of a landing area must be no less than 7 inches (18 cm) and no more than 12 inches (30 cm). A
landing platform must be provided if the step-across distance exceeds 12 inches (30 cm).
j.
Fixed ladders without cages or wells must have at least a 15-inch (38 cm) clear width to the nearest
permanent object on each side of the centerline of the ladder.
k.
Fixed ladders must be provided with cages, wells, ladder safety devices, or self-retracting lifelines
where the length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3 m) but the top of the ladder is at a distance greater
than 24 feet (7.3 m) above lower levels.
l.
If the total length of the climb on a fixed ladder equals or exceeds 24 feet (7.3 m), the following
requirements must be met: fixed ladders must be equipped with either (a) ladder safety devices; (b)
self-retracting lifelines and rest platforms at intervals not to exceed 150 feet (45.7 m); or (c) a cage
or well, and multiple ladder sections, each ladder section not to exceed 50 feet (15.2 m) in length.
These ladder sections must be offset from adjacent sections, and landing platforms must be provided
at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15.2 m).
m.
The side rails of through or side-step fixed ladders must extend 42 inches (1.1 m) above the top level
or landing platform served by the ladder. Parapet ladders must have an access level at the roof if the
parapet is cut to permit passage through it; if the parapet is continuous, the access level is the top of
the parapet.
35
n.
Steps or rungs for through-fixed-ladder extensions must be omitted from the extension; and the
extension of side rails must be flared to provide between 24 inches (61 cm) and 30 inches (76 cm)
clearance between side rails.
o.
When safety devices are provided, the maximum clearance distance between side rail extensions
must not exceed 36 inches (91 cm).
7.
CAGES FOR FIXED LADDERS
a.
Horizontal bands must be fastened to the side rails of rail ladders or directly to the structure,
building, or equipment for individual-rung ladders.
b.
Vertical bars must be on the inside of the horizontal bands and must be fastened to them.
c.
Cages must not extend less than 27 inches (68 cm), or more than 30 inches (76 cm) from the
centerline of the step or rung, and must not be less than 27 inches (68 cm) wide.
d.
The inside of the cage must be clear of projections.
e.
Horizontal bands must be spaced at intervals not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart measured from
centerline to centerline.
f.
Vertical bars must be spaced at intervals not more than 9.5 inches (24 cm), measured centerline to
centerline.
g.
The bottom of the cage must be between 7 feet (2.1 m) and 8 feet (2.4 m) above the point of access
to the bottom of the ladder, The bottom of the cage must be flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm)
between the bottom horizontal band and the next higher band.
h.
The top of the cage must be a minimum of 42 inches (1.1 m) above the top of the platform or the
point of access at the top of the ladder. Provisions must be made for access to the platform or other
point of access.
8.
WELLS FOR FIXED LADDERS
a.
Wells must completely encircle the ladder.
b.
Wells must be free of projections.
c.
The inside face of the well on the climbing side of the ladder must extend between 27 inches (68
cm) and 30 inches (76 cm) from the centerline of the step or rung.
e.
The inside width of the well must be at least 30 inches (76 cm).
f.
The bottom of the well above the point of access to the bottom of the ladder must be between 7 feet
(2.1 m) and 8 feet (2.4 m).
9.
LADDER SAFETY DEVICES AND RELATED SUPPORT SYSTEMS FOR FIXED
LADDERS
a.
All safety devices must be able to withstand, without failure, a drop test consisting of a 500-pound
weight (226 kg) dropping 18 inches (41 cm).
b.
All safety devices must permit the worker to ascend or descend without continually having to hold,
push, or pull any part of the device, leaving both hands free for climbing.
c.
All safety devices must be activated within 2 feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs, and limit the descending
36
velocity of an employee to 7 feet/second (2.1 m/sec) or less.
d.
10.
The connection between the carrier or lifeline and the point of attachment to the body belt or harness
must not exceed 9 inches (23 cm) in length.
MOUNTING LADDER SAFETY DEVICES FOR FIXED LADDERS
a.
Mountings for rigid carriers must be attached at each end of the carrier, with intermediate
mountings, spaced along the entire length of the carrier, to provide the necessary strength to stop
workers' falls.
b.
Mountings for flexible carriers must be attached at each end of the carrier. Cable guides for flexible
carriers must be installed with a spacing between 25 feet (7.6 m) and 40 feet ( 12.2 m) along the
entire length of the carrier, to prevent wind damage to the system.
c.
The design and installation of mountings and cable guides must not reduce the strength of the ladder.
d.
Side rails and steps or rungs for side-step fixed ladders must be continuous in extension.
11.
USE OF ALL LADDERS
a.
When portable ladders are used for access to an upper landing surface, the side rails must extend at
least 3 feet (.9 m) above the upper landing surface. When such an extension is not possible, the
ladder must be secured, and a grasping device such as a grab rail must be provided to assist workers
in mounting and dismounting the ladder. A ladder extension must not deflect under a load that
would cause the ladder to slip off its supports.
b.
Ladders must be maintained free of oil, grease, and other slipping hazards.
c.
Ladders must not be loaded beyond the maximum intended load for which they were built nor
beyond their manufacturer's rated capacity.
d.
Ladders must be used only for the purpose for which they were designed.
e.
Non-self-supporting ladders must be used at an angle where the horizontal distance from the top
support to the foot of the ladder is approximately one-quarter of the working length of the ladder.
Wood job-made ladders with spliced side rails must be used at an angle where the horizontal
distance is one-eighth the working length of the ladder.
f.
Fixed ladders must be used at a pitch no greater than 90 degrees from the horizontal, measured from
the back side of the ladder.
g.
Ladders must be used only on stable and level surfaces unless secured to prevent accidental
movement.
h.
Ladders must not be used on slippery surfaces unless secured or provided with slip-resistant feet to
prevent accidental movement. Slip-resistant feet must not be used as a substitute for the care in
placing, lashing, or holding a ladder upon slippery surfaces.
i.
Ladders placed in areas such as passageways, doorways, or driveways, or where they can be
displaced by workplace activities or traffic must be secured to prevent accidental movement or a
barricade must be used to keep traffic or activities away from the ladder.
j.
The area around the top and bottom of the ladders must be kept clear.
k.
The top of a non-self-supporting ladder must be placed with two rails supported equally unless it is
equipped with a single support attachment.
37
l.
Ladders must not be moved, shifted, or extended while in use.
m.
Ladders must have nonconductive side rails if they are used where the worker or the ladder could
contact exposed energized electrical equipment.
o.
The top or top step of a stepladder must not be used as a step.
p.
Crossbracing on the rear section of stepladders must not be used for climbing unless the ladders are
designed and provided with steps for climbing on both front and rear sections.
q.
Ladders must be inspected by a competent person for visible defects on a periodic basis and after
any incident that could affect their safe use.
r.
Single-rail ladders must not be used.
s.
When ascending or descending a ladder, the worker must face the ladder.
t.
Each worker must use at least one hand to grasp the ladder when climbing.
u.
A worker on a ladder must not carry any object or load that could cause him/her to lose balance and
fall.
12.
STRUCTURAL DEFECTS
a.
Portable ladders with structural defects--such as broken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps, broken or
split rails, corroded components, or other faulty or defective components--must immediately be
marked defective, or tagged with "Do Not Use" or similar language and withdrawn from service
until repaired.
b.
Fixed ladders with structural defects--such as broken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps, broken or
split rails, or corroded components--must be withdrawn from service until repaired.
c.
Defective fixed ladders are considered withdrawn from use when they are (a) immediately tagged
with "Do Not Use" or similar language; (b) marked in a manner that identifies them as defective; or
(c) blocked-such as with a plywood attachment that spans several rungs.
d.
Ladder repairs must restore the ladder to a condition meeting its original design criteria before the
ladder is returned to use.
13.
GLOSSARY
Cleat - A ladder crosspiece of rectangular cross section placed on edge upon which a person may step
while ascending or descending a ladder.
Double-Cleat Ladder - A ladder with a center rail to allow simultaneous two-way traffic for employees
ascending or descending.
Failure - Load refusal, breakage, or separation of components.
Fixed Ladder - A ladder that cannot be readily moved or carried because it is an integral part of a building
or structure.
Handrail - A rail used to provide employees with a handhold for support.
Job-Made Ladder - A ladder that is fabricated by employees, typically at the construction site;
noncommercially manufactured.
Load Refusal - The point where the structural members lose their ability to carry the load.
Point of Access - All areas used by employees for work-related passage from one area or level to another.
38
Portable Ladder - A ladder that can be readily moved or carried.
Riser Height - The vertical distance from the top of a tread or platform/landing to the top of the next
higher tread or platform/landing.
Side-Step Fixed Ladder - A fixed ladder that requires a person to get off at the top to step to the side of
the ladder side rails to reach the landing.
Single-Cleat Ladder - A ladder consisting of a pair of side rails connected together by cleats, rungs, or
steps.
Stairrail System - A vertical barrier erected along the unprotected sides and edges of a stairway to prevent
employees from falling to lower levels.
Temporary Service Stairway - A stairway where permanent treads and/or landings are to be filled in at a
later date.
Through Fixed Ladder - A fixed ladder that requires a person getting off at the top to step between the
side rails of the ladder to reach the landing.
Tread Depth - The horizontal distance from front to back of a tread, excluding nosing, if any.
D.
SCAFFOLDS
1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL SCAFFOLDS
a.
Scaffolds shall be furnished and erected in accordance with this standard for persons engaged in work
that cannot be done safely from the ground or from solid construction, except that ladders used for
such work shall conform to 1910.25 and 1910.26.
b.
The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum
intended load without settling or displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose brick, or
concrete blocks shall not be used to support scaffolds or planks.
c.
Scaffolds and their components shall be capable of supporting without failure at least four times the
maximum intended load.
d.
Scaffolds and other devices mentioned or described in this section shall be maintained in safe
condition. Scaffolds shall not be altered or moved horizontally while they are in use or occupied.
e.
Any scaffold damaged or weakened from any cause shall be immediately repaired and shall not be
used until repairs have been completed.
f.
Scaffolds shall not be loaded in excess of the working load for which they are intended.
g.
All load-carrying timber members of scaffold framing shall be a minimum of 1,500 lbs.- f/in2. (Stress
Grade) construction grade lumber. All dimensions are nominal sizes as provided in the American
Lumber Standards, except that where rough sizes are noted, only rough and undressed lumber or the
size specified will satisfy minimum requirements.
h.
All planking shall be Scaffold Grade as recognized by grading rules for the species of wood used. The
maximum permissible spans for 2- X 9-inch or wider planks are shown in the following table:
39
Material
Full thickness undressed lumber
Nominal thickness
lumber
Working load (p.s.f) ................
25
50
75
25
50
Permissible span (ft.)
10
8
6
8
9
i.
The maximum permissible span for 1 1/4 x 9-inch or wider plank of full thickness is 4 feet with
medium loading of 50 p.s.f.
j.
Nails or bolts used in the construction of scaffolds shall be of adequate size and in sufficient numbers
at each connection to develop the designed strength of the scaffold. Nails shall not be subjected to a
straight pull and shall be driven full length.
k.
All planking or platforms shall be overlapped (minimum 12 inches) or secured from movement.
l.
An access ladder or equivalent safe access shall be provided.
m.
Scaffold planks shall extend over their end supports not less than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches.
n.
The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be plumb, and securely and rigidly braced to prevent
swaying and displacement.
o.
Materials being hoisted onto a scaffold shall have a tag line.
p.
Overhead protection shall be provided for men on a scaffold exposed to overhead hazards.
q.
Scaffolds shall be provided with a screen between the toeboard and the guardrail, extending along the
entire opening, consisting of No. 18 gauge U.S. Standard Wire one-half-inch mesh or the equivalent,
where persons are required to work or pass under the scaffolds.
r.
Employees shall not work on scaffolds during storms or high winds.
s.
Employees shall not work on scaffolds which are covered with ice or snow, unless all ice or snow is
removed and planking sanded to prevent slipping.
t.
Tools, materials, and debris shall not be allowed to accumulate in quantities to cause a hazard.
u.
Only treated or protected fiber rope shall be used for or near any work involving the use of corrosive
substances or chemicals.
v.
Wire or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension shall be capable of supporting at least six times the
intended load.
w.
When acid solutions are used for cleaning buildings over 50 feet in height, wire rope supported
scaffolds shall be used.
x.
The use of shore scaffolds or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
y.
Lumber sizes, when used in this section, refer to nominal sizes except where otherwise stated.
z.
Scaffolds shall be secured to permanent structures, through use of anchor bolts, reveal bolts, or other
equivalent means. Window cleaners' anchor bolts shall not be used.
aa.
Special precautions shall be taken to protect scaffold members, including any wire or fiber ropes,
when using a heat-producing process.
40
2.
TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS
a.
A light-duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts, bearers, runners, and bracing of nominal
2-inch O.D. steel tubing. The posts shall be spaced no more than 6 feet apart by 10 feet along the
length of the scaffold. Other structural metals when used must be designed to carry an equivalent
load.
b.
A medium-duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts, runners, and bracing of nominal
2-inch O.D. steel tubing. Posts spaced not more than 6 feet apart by 8 feet along the length of the
scaffold shall have bearers of nominal 2 ½-inch O.D. steel tubing. Posts spaced not more than 5 feet
apart by 8 feet along the length of the scaffold shall have bearers of nominal 2-inch O.D. steel
tubing. Other structural metals when used must be designed to carry an equivalent load.
c.
A heavy-duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts, runners, and bracing of nominal 2-inch
O.D steel tubing, with the posts spaced not more than 6 feet apart by 6 feet 6 inches along the length
of the scaffold. Other structural metals when used must be designed to carry an equivalent load.
d.
Tube and coupler scaffolds shall be limited in heights and working levels to those permitted by the
manufacturer or a registered professional engineer. Drawings and specification of all tube and
coupler scaffolds designed by a registered professional engineer must make copies available to the
employer and for inspection purposes.
e.
All tube and coupler scaffolds shall be constructed and erected to support four times the maximum
intended loads by 29 CFR 1910.25 and .26, or as set forth in the specifications by a registered
professional engineer, copies which shall be made available to the employer and for inspection
purposes.
f.
All tube and coupler scaffolds shall be erected by competent and experienced personnel.
g.
Posts shall be accurately spaced, erected on suitable bases, and maintained plumb.
h.
Runners shall be erected along the length of the scaffold located on both the inside and the outside
posts at even height. Runners shall be interlocked to form continuous lengths and coupled to each
post. The bottom runners shall be located as close to the base as possible. Runners shall be placed
not more than 6 feet 6 inches on centers.
i.
Bearers shall be installed transversely between posts and shall be securely coupled to the posts
bearing on the runner coupler. When coupled directly to the runners, the coupler must be kept as
close to the posts as possible.
j.
Bearers shall be at least 4 inches but not more than 12 inches longer than the post spacing or runner
spacing. Bearers may be cantilevered for use as brackets to carry not more than two planks.
k.
Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of the scaffold at least every third set of posts
horizontally and every fourth runner vertically. Such bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner
and outer runners upward to the next outer and inner runners.
l.
Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at approximately a 45-degree angle from near the
base of the first outer post upward to the extreme top of the scaffold. Where the longitudinal length
of the scaffold permits, such bracing shall be duplicated beginning at every fifth post. In a similar
manner longitudinal diagonal bracing shall also be installed from the last post extending back and
upward toward the first post. Where conditions preclude the attachment of this bracing to the posts,
it may be attached to the runners.
m.
The entire scaffold shall be tied to and securely braced against the building at intervals not to exceed
41
30 feet horizontally and 26 feet vertically.
n.
Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42
inches high, with a mid-rail, when required, of 1 x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall
be installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height. Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph
(a)(17) of this section.
3.
TUBULAR WELDED FRAME SCAFFOLDS
a.
Metal tubular frame scaffolds, including accessories such as braces, brackets, trusses, screw legs,
ladders, etc., shall be designed and proved to safely support four times the maximum intended load.
b.
Spacing of panels or frames shall be consistent with the loads imposed.
c.
Scaffolds shall be properly braced by cross bracing or diagonal braces, or both, for securing vertical
members together laterally, and the cross braces shall be of such length as will automatically square
and aline vertical members so that the erected scaffold is always plumb, square, and rigid. All brace
connections shall be made secure.
d.
Scaffold legs shall be set on adjustable bases or plain bases placed on mud sills or other foundations
adequate to support the maximum intended load.
e.
The frames shall be placed one on top of the other with coupling or stacking pins to provide proper
vertical alinement of the legs.
f.
There uplift may occur, panels shall be locked together vertically by pins or other equivalent suitable
means.
g.
Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42
inches high, with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall
be installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height. Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph
(a)(17) of this section.
h.
All tubular metal scaffolds shall be constructed and erected to support four times the maximum
intended loads.
i.
To prevent movement, the scaffold shall be secured to the building or structure at intervals not to
exceed 30 feet horizontally and 26 feet vertically.
j.
Maximum permissible spans of planking shall be in conformity with paragraph (a)(9) of this section.
k.
Drawings and specifications for all frame scaffolds over 125 feet in height above the base plates
shall be designed by a registered professional engineer and copies made available to the employer
and for inspection purposes.
l.
All tubular welded frame scaffolds shall be erected by competent and experienced personnel.
m.
Frames and accessories for scaffolds shall be maintained in good repair and every defect, unsafe
condition, or noncompliance with this section shall be immediately corrected before further use of
the scaffold. Any broken, bent, excessively rusted, altered, or otherwise structurally damaged frames
or accessories shall not be used.
n.
Periodic inspections shall be made of all welded frames and accessories, and any maintenance,
including painting, or minor corrections authorized by the manufacturer, shall be made before
further use.
42
E.
MATERIAL HANDLING
The following are general safety rules and requirements regarding material handling and material
handling equipment regularly used on campus.
1.
LIFTING BY HAND
Lifting and carrying can be done without injury by using the following criteria:
a.
Personal Protection
NOTE: Minor office material lifting is exempt from Personal Protection section of "Lifting By
Hand."
i.
Hand protection shall be used when lifting; however, gloves or loose clothing shall not be
worn around rotating and reciprocating equipment.
1)
2)
b.
Leather gloves and aprons shall be worn when handling rough or sharp objects.
Chemical gloves, splash suits, and eye protection shall be worn when handling
chemicals of any nature (corrosives, flammables, etc.).
ii.
Eye protection are recommended to be worn at all times.
iii.
Steel-toed shoes and/or shin guards are recommended to be worn at all times.
Body Condition
How much should you lift? Lifting capacity depends on body condition; that is, flexibility and
strength, and physical make-up. To help your condition, build up your strength by a regular exercise
program and stretch your body before doing any lifting.
c.
Sizing Up The Load
Questions to ask:
d.
i.
Is it too big for you to handle?
ii.
What about the shape? Is it irregular, square, rectangular, etc.?
iii.
Can you get a firm, comfortable grip?
iv.
How many loads are there and where are they going?
Lifting It Right
i.
There are six steps to proper lifting:
1)
Keep feet parted--one alongside the object and one behind the
object. Comfortably spread feet give greater stability; the rear foot is in position for the
upward thrust of the lift.
2)
Keep back straight, nearly vertical. Use the sit-down position to
do so, but remember that
"straight" does not mean absolutely "vertical". A straight
back keeps the spine, back muscles, and organs of the body in correct alignment. It
minimizes the compression of the guts that can cause hernia.
3)
Tuck in chin so the neck and head continue the straight back line
and keep spine straight and firm.
43
e.
f.
4)
Grasp the object with the whole hand. The palm grip is one of the
most important elements of correct lifting. The fingers and hand are extended around
the object to be lifted. Use the full palm; fingers alone have very little power. Wearing
gloves is recommended.
5)
Tuck elbows and arms in and hold load close to body. When the
arms are held away from the body, they lose much of their strength and power. Keeping
the arms tucked in also helps keep body weight centered. See attached diagrams.
6)
Keep body weight directly over feet. This provides a more
powerful line of thrust and ensures better balance. Start the lift with a thrust of the rear
foot.
ii.
When setting the load down, the same six proper lifting steps shall be used in reverse.
iii.
To change direction, the worker shall lift the object to the carrying position and turn the entire
body including the feet. He/she shall avoid twisting the body. In repetitive work, the person
and the material both shall be positioned to prevent twisting of the body when moving the
material.
Team Lifting
i.
When two or more people carry one object, they shall adjust the load so that it rides level.
ii.
When long sections of material (pipe, lumber) are carried, the load shall be carried on the
same shoulder and both persons shall walk in step.
iii.
When team lifting, one person shall be designated to give the signal when to lift.
Handling of Specific Shapes
i.
Barrels and drums
1) It is recommended that a hand truck or other type of material handling equipment be used
for lifting and transporting barrels and/or drums.
2) If it is necessary to roll a barrel or drum, the worker shall push against the sides with both
hands. To change directions, the drum or barrel shall be stopped, the direction changed
by grabbing the upper and lower rim seams, and movement started.
3) When uprighting a full drum, the six steps to safe lifting shall be adhered to.
ii.
Long Objects (Pipe, Lumber, Barsteel, etc.)
There are two schools of thought on this. The method chosen shall be determined by the
obstructions to be encountered.
1) The item shall be carried on the shoulders with the front end held as high as possible to
avoid striking other employees--especially when going around corners.
2) The item shall be carried on the shoulders with the front end low so it does not catch
overhead objects.
iii.
Compressed gas cylinders
1) Compressed gas cylinders may be rolled on the bottom edge for short distances. They
shall never be dragged.
2) Because of their shape, smooth surface, and weight, cylinders are difficult to carry by
44
hand. Cylinders weighing more than 40 pounds total should be transported on a hand or
motorized truck, suitably secured to keep them from falling.
g.
Items to remember when lifting by hand:
i.
Avoid twisting while turning with a load.
ii.
Watch for narrow places when moving materials.
iii.
Avoid high reaching and lifting. A suitable ladder or platform shall be used to get up to
load.
iv.
Do not jump with a load.
v.
Do not catch or throw loads.
vi.
Check the materials to be lifted for nails, splinters, rough strapping, or other things that
might injure hands.
vii.
Ascertain good visibility--especially on stairs.
2.
a.
b.
HANDTRUCKS
General
i.
Keep truck under control at all times.
ii.
Trucks shall be stored in designated areas--not in aisles.
iii.
Housekeeping--all aisles and loading areas shall be kept clear.
iv.
Always move the truck at a safe speed. Do not run.
v.
Loads shall be packed securely; avoid overhanging.
vi.
No riders or horseplay.
vii.
Hands shall be kept inside to protect them in narrow areas if the truck does not have knuckle
guards or handles.
One Axle Handtrucks
i.
Keep the center of gravity of the load as low as possible. Place heavy objects below higher
objects.
ii.
Place the load so it is carried by the axle, not the handles.
iii.
Load only to a height that will allow a clear view ahead.
iv.
When lifting from a horizontal position, have a straight back and lift with the legs. The load
shall be put down the same way.
v.
Let the truck carry the load. The operator shall balance and push only.
vi.
Never walk backwards with a handtruck.
vii.
For extremely bulky or pressurized items, such as gas cylinders, strap or chain the item to the
truck. Valve caps shall be on valves.
viii. Always move the truck at a safe speed. Do not run.
c.
Two Axle Trucks
45
NOTE: Many one axle handtruck rules apply here also.
i.
Load evenly to prevent tipping.
ii.
Push. Do not pull.
iii.
The truck shall not be loaded so high that the operator cannot see where in the direction of
travel. If the load is high, two persons are needed; one to push and one to guide.
iv.
Truck contents shall be arranged so they will not fall if accidently bumped.
v.
When entering elevators or tight areas, enter with the load forward. Make sure load is bound
to truck.
3.
REQUIREMENTS FOR HEAVY CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
(Rollers, Compactors, Front-end Loaders, Bulldozers, Trucks, etc.)
a.
All vehicles of these types shall have a suitable horn available which is tested before the vehicle is
used.
b.
Operators shall wear seat belts at all times when machinery is in operation.
c.
All controls (brakes, steering, etc.) shall be tested each shift before the vehicle is used.
d.
No riders shall be allowed on machines unless the machine is designed to carry riders.
e.
Blades, buckets, and shovels on earth-moving machines shall be lowered to the ground when the
equipment is parked or unattended.
f.
All earth-moving equipment shall have a roll-over protection structure (ROPS) and seat belts.
g.
Trucks that are loaded by a crane, power shovel, loader, or similar equipment shall have a cab shield
and/or canopy strong enough to protect the operator from shifting or falling materials. Operators
shall be out of the vehicles while they are being loaded. Brakes shall be set.
h.
All trucks, excluding pickup trucks and earth-moving equipment, shall have an audible warning
device that sounds automatically when they are backing up. The sound shall be able to be heard at
least 200' away.
i.
Smoking during vehicle refueling is prohibited.
j.
All vehicles shall be operated in a safe manner. Earth-moving equipment shall not exceed 15 mph.
k.
All vehicles shall be inspected before each use and thoroughly on a regular basis.
4.
FORK TRUCKS
Fork trucks are used to carry, push, pull, lift, stack, and tier materials.
a.
b.
Only trained and authorized operators shall be permitted to operate a powered industrial
truck. Training shall include:
i.
Lecture
ii.
Instructor led demonstration field activities
iii.
Workplace evaluation
Guarding
46
c.
i.
Hazardous moving parts such as chain and sprocket drives and exposed gears shall be guarded
to protect the operator in his normal operating position.
ii.
All fork trucks shall have an overhead guard in accordance with ANSI B 56.1.
iii.
Exposed tires shall have guards that will stop particles from being thrown at the operator.
iv.
Hydraulically-driven lifting systems shall have a relief valve installed and suitable stops shall
be provided to prevent travel over of the carriage.
v.
A load backrest extension shall always be used when the type of load presents a hazard to the
operator. The top of a load shall not exceed the height of the backrest.
Loading
i.
If the material being handled is obstructing the view, the operator is required to travel
backwards. The operator shall face the direction of travel at all times.
ii.
Only loads within the rated capacity of the truck shall be handled. No counter weights shall
be allowed. A nameplate showing the weight of the truck and its rated capacity shall be
located in plain view on the truck.
iii.
Backwards tilt shall be used to stabilize the load.
iv.
Loads shall be checked for overloading and for loose material before making the lift.
v.
Extreme care shall be taken when handling long items, i.e., bar stock and lumber.
vi.
The load shall never be driven in an upward position, nor raised or lowered while moving.
vii.
Forks shall be locked to the carriage, and the fork extension designed so as to prevent
unintentional lifting of the toe or displacement of the fork extension.
viii. Bridge plates and dock boards shall be strong enough to support the intended load. They shall
also have side boards, anti-slip surfaces, and be secured to the dock.
ix.
d.
Chocks shall be used on truck wheels when unloading. See attached diagram.
Inspections
All fork trucks should be inspected before each use and formally on an annual basis.
e.
f.
Miscellaneous
i.
Powered industrial trucks shall be equipped with horns.
ii.
Steering wheel knobs are prohibited.
iii.
All trucks shall be equipped with an ABC fire extinguisher.
iv.
Fork trucks shall not be used on upper level floors unless the floors are designed for that load
capacity.
v.
Diesel or gasoline fork trucks shall be used in adequately vented areas only.
vi.
Never give rides on a fork truck unless the truck is designed for it.
General Operating Requirements
i.
No excessive speed or reckless driving.
ii.
When the operator will be farther than 25' from the truck, the forks shall be down, motor cut
off, and emergency brake applied.
47
iii.
No one shall be allowed to pass under the elevated portion of any truck--loaded or empty.
iv.
The operator shall come to a stop at blind corners and before passing through doorways.
v.
Extreme caution shall be taken when operating on turns, ramps, grades, or inclines.
vi.
Reverse control shall never be used for braking.
vii.
Always drive with the load pointing upgrade unless a bulky load permits poor visibility.
viii. Trucks shall not be used for any purpose other than the one for which they never designed,
i.e., bumping skids, pushing piles of material out of the way, using forks as a hoist, etc.
ix.
Trucks shall ascend or descend grades slowly. When ascending or descending grades in
excess of 10%, loaded trucks should be driven with the load upgrade. Unloaded trucks
should be operated on all grades with the load-engaging means downgrade.
x.
When standard forks are used to pick up round objects such as rolls or drums, care shall be
taken to see that the tips do not damage the load or push it against workers.
xi.
Operators of lift trucks shall not move improperly loaded skids or pallets, broken pallets, or
loads too heavy for the truck.
NOTE: Using a lift truck as an elevator for employees shall only be done if the work platform is
securely seated on the forks, fastened to the vertical face, and provided with handrails and
toeboards. The truck shall also have an overhead guard for the operator's protection. The
operator shall not leave the controls while the truck is being used as a man lift.
5.
a.
HOISTS
Hoists are used to raise, lower, and transport heavy loads for limited distances.
i.
Hoists shall not be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people unless designed for that
purpose.
ii.
The load capacity of each hoist shall be shown in conspicuous figures on the hoist body. Lifts
shall not be made beyond the rated capacity of the hoist, slings, chains, ropes, straps, etc.
iii.
All hoists shall have safe operating procedures affixed to them.
iv.
Hoists operating on rails, tracks, or trolleys shall have positive stops or limiting devices on the
equipment, rails, tracks, or trolleys to prevent overrunning of safe limits.
v.
Pick up loads only when they are directly under the hoist.
vi.
Unless they are grounded, rope-operated electric hoists shall have non-conducting control
cords.
vii.
Control cords shall be clearly marked "hoist" or "lower" or a similar combination.
viii. The block shall not be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain
on the hoisting drum.
b.
ix.
When lifting and moving material, the area should be clear. No one shall be allowed to walk
under the load.
x.
No load shall be left suspended without an operator at the controls.
xi.
When not in use, the hoist shall be lifted in the upward position.
Hoists shall be inspected before each use. Regularly scheduled detailed inspections shall pay special
48
attention to load hooks, ropes, brakes, limit switches, wear damage, and railstops. During inspection
and/or repair, the power shall be disconnected and potential energy sources depleted. A warning
sign stating such shall be posted. See Lock out / Tag out Program.
6.
INSULATED AERIAL BASKETS
See Electrical Safety for additional guidance.
a.
Aerial baskets shall be of the proper design and construction for the intended work.
b.
The design limits of the equipment must be thoroughly understood and the baskets operated within
the limits of their capabilities.
c.
Daily inspections shall be performed by the operator to uncover defects before they become serious
in nature. Annual comprehensive inspection and dielectric testing shall be performed on an annual
basis.
d.
All maintenance, both preventive and corrective, shall be performed by qualified personnel.
e.
Operation of aerial baskets shall be trained on and familiar with the specific type of aerial basket
being operated.
f.
Adequate clearances shall be observed. The ability to judge distances is essential.
g.
Sufficient rubber protective equipment is as necessary in working from aerial baskets as in working
from a pole.
h.
Pre-job briefing (tail board conference) shall be conducted before jobs involving aerial baskets.
7.
HAND SIGNALS
Basic hand signals should be used by all operators and riggers of cranes, hoists, boom trucks,
aerial baskets, etc., shall use.
NOTE: See Appendix for hand signals.
8.
a.
SLINGS
Materials Used
i.
The type of sling to be used is determined by the load to be lifted.
ii.
Fiber rope is particularly suitable for the handling of loads that may be damaged by contact with
metal slings. Fiber rope is generally made from manila, sisal, benequen, nylon (2.5 x breaking
strength & 4 x elasticity of manila), polyester, and polypropylene (special applications). Manila
and nylon ropes give the best uniform strength and service.
iii.
Wire rope is used widely instead of fiber rope because:
1) It has a greater strength and durability under severe working conditions.
2) Its physical characteristics do not change when used in varying environments.
3) It has controlled and predictable stretch characteristics.
4) Where mechanical type loop endings are employed or where swayed or pressed on
terminations are used.
49
iv.
Chain slings are used when a high resistance to abrasion and corrosive substances is needed.
Chain slings are generally made from alloy steels such as stainless steel, monel metal, bronze, etc.
v.
Web slings are used when lifting loads in need of surface protection; used on tubular, nonferrous,
ceramic, painted, polished, highly machined, and other products with a fine or delicate surface.
vi.
Two types of web slings:
1) synthetic web--nylon or polyester
2) metal mesh web--alloy steel = sharp edges, concrete, high temperature
b.
Rated Capacity
i.
As the sling is used, factors such as abrasion, nicking, distortion, corrosion, and other factors
affect the load rating.
ii.
Slings can be used at various angles, but stress increases rapidly with the angle of lift. All slings
shall be ordered with this in mind.
NOTE: Most slings have catalogs and rating tables for load rating worked out--consult them.
c.
iii.
Each sling shall bear a tag indicating its rated load capacity. Rated capacity is based on newly
manufactured slings.
iv.
Allowances shall be made when hitches are used.
v.
If loads having sharp edges or corners are to be lifted, pads or saddles shall be used to protect the
ropes and chains.
Inspection
i.
Slings shall be checked daily by trained employees.
ii.
Any damaged or suspected damaged slings shall be removed immediately from service and made
unusable.
iii.
Fiber ropes shall be inspected every 30 days and more often if used in critical applications. Rope
shall be examined over the length of the rope for wear, abrasions, powdered fibers between
strands, variations in size or roundness of strands, dis-location, and rotting.
iv.
Wire rope shall be inspected when installed, weekly during use, and regularly by a trained
inspector. Wear of crown wires, broken wires, kinking, high strands, corrosion, loose wires,
nicking, and lubrication shall be checked. Experience and judgement of all factors, combined
with the length of time in service and the tonnage hoisted by the rope, determines when it should
be discarded.
v.
Chain slings shall be inspected daily by personnel using the chain and semi-annually or more
often by persons qualified by experience or training. A link-by-link inspection link inspection
shall be made to detect bent links, cracks in welded areas, transverse nicks and gouges, corrosion
pits and elongation (stretching by overloading).
vi.
Web slings shall be inspected by the user it each time they is used. Also, periodic inspections
shall be made by a person experienced in the inspection of web slings. Web slings shall be
checked for abrasive wear, cuts, tears, snags, punctures, etc.
50
F.
CONFINED SPACES
1.
CONFINED SPACE is intended to mean a relatively small or restricted space such as a
tank, boiler, manhole, or any place where entry or exit is limited or ventilation is poor. A
confined space is normally not intended for human occupancy or entry when the
process/equipment is in operation. An “enclosed space” is a confined area that is suitable
for human entry during operation, such as a manhole.
2.
A PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE is one where there is an atmosphere, or the
threat of an atmosphere, that is dangerous to life, or in which a hazard exists that may
impede escape of an individual if a accident occurs. Exposed electrical hazards in a
confined space will cause the space to become a permit required confined space. Fall
hazards in the space can cause the space to be declared a permit required confined space.
LSU has identified several permit required confined space located on campus. Work in these
areas requires that the procedures listed below are followed by all personnel. Permit required
confined spaces are located in the following areas:
- LSU Power House (6 Boilers)
- Highland Road Utilities(3 Boilers)
- Sewer Lift Stations(3 on campus)
3.
TRAINING
All employees who enter confined spaces must be properly trained.
4.
HAZARDS OF CONFINED SPACES
a.
Lack of oxygen can cause a worker to collapse almost instantly.
b.
Toxic gases or vapors can poison or suffocate workers.
c.
Combustion, a buildup of flammable/combustible gases or vapors, can burn or explode.
d.
Heat can cause heat exhaustion, cramps, etc.
e.
Noise intensifies in small spaces and can cause hearing loss, as well as interfere with
communication.
f.
Mechanical equipment can cause sparks to ignite flammable or combustible gases, or cause physical
injury.
g.
Falls can cause injury-falls from one level to another or by slips and trips.
5.
a.
PROCEDURES
Review Guidelines
i.
Determine potential hazards.
ii.
Determine the classification, permit required or not.
iii.
Review safety equipment required.
iv.
Review emergency measures.
51
b.
Get Proper Approval
i.
Obtain an entry permit from your supervisor.
ii.
Post it at worksite, if required.
c.
Lockout/Tagout Sources of Danger (See "Lockout/Tagout")
d.
Test for Potential Hazards
e.
i.
All confined spaces shall be tested for possible oxygen deficiency and flammable/combustible
gas/vapor content by a qualified person.
ii.
If hazardous gases/vapors are detected, ventilate and clean the space, then test again.
Ventilate
If inadequate ventilation is suspected, a blower shall be made available to assure sufficient air
supply.
f.
g.
h.
Assemble Proper Equipment and Post Observers
i.
Required respirators, lifelines, tools, etc., shall be gathered before entering.
ii.
An observer shall be posted near the entrance in case an emergency rescue is needed.
iii.
In a permit required space, rescue equipment must be at the worksite, and a life line must be
used. Also, a log of entries must be kept, and unauthorized people must be prohibited from
entering.
Miscellaneous
i.
Before welding, burning, cutting, or brazing work starts, a hot work permit shall be obtained.
ii.
If asbestos pipe insulation is to be removed in a confined space, it shall be done by employees
trained in asbestos removal techniques using proper personal protective equipment.
Never
i.
Enter a confined space unless authorized.
ii.
Enter a confined space unless an observer is posted near the entrance.
iii.
Smoke in a confined space.
NOTE: SEE APPENDIX FOR CONFINED SPACE ENTRY CHECKLIST
G.
HANDLING, USING, AND STORING OF COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS
1.
HANDLING CYLINDERS
a.
Only cylinders approved for use in interstate commerce for transportation of compressed gases
shall be accepted.
b.
Numbers or marks stamped on cylinders shall not be removed or changed.
c.
Because of their shape, smooth surface, and weight, cylinders are difficult to carry by hand.
Cylinders may be rolled on their bottom edge but never dragged. Cylinders weighing more than 40
pounds (18.2 kg total) shall be transported on a hand motorized truck and suitably secured to keep
them from falling.
52
d.
Cylinders shall be protected from cuts or scratches.
e.
Compressed gas cylinders shall not be lifted with an electro- magnet. Where cylinders must be
handled by a crane or derrick as on construction jobs, they shall be carried in a cradle or suitable
platform and extreme care shall be taken to see that they are not dropped or bumped. Slings shall
not be used.
f.
Cylinders shall not be dropped or be allowed to strike each other violently.
g.
Cylinders shall not be used for rollers, supports, or any purpose other than to contain gas.
h.
Safety devices in valves or on cylinders shall not be tampered with.
i.
When in doubt about the proper handling of a compressed gas cylinder or its contents, the supplier
of the gas shall be consulted.
j.
When empty cylinders are to be returned to vendor, they shall be marked EMPTY or MT with chalk.
Close the valves and replace the valve protection caps if the cylinders are designed to accept caps.
k.
Cylinders to be transported shall be loaded to allow as little movement as possible. Secure them to
prevent violent contact or upsetting.
l.
Cylinders shall always be considered full and shall be handled carefully. Accidents have resulted
when containers under partial pressure were thought to be empty.
m.
The fusible safety plugs on acetylene cylinders melt at about the boiling point of water. If an outlet
becomes frozen or clogged with ice, it shall be thawed with warm (not boiling) water applied to the
valve only. A flame shall never be used.
2.
USING CYLINDERS
a.
Cylinders, particularly those containing liquified gases and acetylene, shall be used in a secured
upright position to prevent them from being accidentally knocked over.
b.
Unless the cylinder valve is protected by a recess in the head, the metal cap shall be kept in place to
protect the valve when the cylinder is not connected for use. A blow on an unprotected valve might
cause high pressure gas to escape.
c.
The threads on a regulator or union shall correspond to those on the cylinder valve outlet.
Connections that do not fit shall not be forced.
d.
Cylinder valves shall be opened slowly. Cylinders without handwheel valves shall be opened with a
spindle key, special wrench, or other tool provided or approved by the gas supplier.
e.
Cylinders of compressed gas shall not be used without a pressure-reducing regulator attached to the
cylinder valve except where cylinders are attached to a manifold--in which case the regulator shall be
attached to the manifold header.
f.
Before making connection to a cylinder valve outlet, the valve shall be "cracked" for an instant to
clear the opening of particles of dust or dirt. The valve and opening shall always be pointed away
from the body and not toward anyone else. Fuel gas cylinder valves shall not be cracked near other
welding work, sparks, open flames, or other possible sources of ignition.
g.
Regulators and pressure gauges shall be used only with gases for which they are designed and
intended. Make no attempt to repair or alter cylinders, valves, or attachments. This shall be done by
the manufacturer.
h.
Unless the cylinder valve has first been closed tightly, no attempt shall be made to stop a leak
53
between the cylinder and the regulator by tightening the union nut.
i.
Fuel gas cylinders in which leaks occur shall be taken out of use immediately and handled as
follows:
i.
The valve shall be closed and the cylinder taken outdoors well away from any ignition source.
The cylinder shall be properly tagged and the supplier notified. A regulator attached to the
valve may be used temporarily to stop a leak through the valve seat.
ii.
If the leak occurs at a fuse plug or other safety device, the cylinder shall be taken outdoors
well away from any ignition source, the cylinder valve opened slightly, and permit the fuel gas
permitted to escape slowly. The cylinder shall be plainly tagged. NO SMOKING or
IGNITION SOURCE signs shall be POSTED. A responsible person shall stay in the area
until the cylinder is depressurized to make sure that no fire occurs. The supplier shall be
promptly notified and follow his instructions for returning the cylinder.
j.
Sparks, molten metal, electric currents, excessive heat, or flames shall not be permitted to come in
contact with the cylinder or attachments.
k.
Oil or grease shall never be used as a lubricant on valves or attachments of oxygen cylinders.
Oxygen cylinders and fittings shall be kept away from oil and grease such cylinders or apparatus
shall not be handled with oily hands, gloves, or clothing.
l.
Never use oxygen as a substitute for compressed air in pneumatic tools, in oil pre-heating burners, to
start internal combustion engines, or to dust clothing. It shall be used only for the purpose for which
it is intended.
m.
Cylinders shall never be brought into tanks or unventilated rooms or other closed quarters.
n.
Cylinders shall not be filled except with the consent of the owner and then only in accordance with
DOT (or other applicable regulations. No attempt to mix gases in a compressed gas cylinder or to
use it for purposes other than those intended by the supplier shall be made.
o.
Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the cylinder valve shall be closed and the gas
released from the regulator.
3.
STOR
ING CYLINDERS
a.
Cylinders shall be stored in a safe, dry, well-ventilated place prepared and reserved for the purpose.
b.
Cylinders shall not be stored near elevators, gangways, stairwells, or other places where they can be
knocked down or damaged.
c.
Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored within 20' (6m) of gas cylinders or highly combustible
materials. If closer, cylinders shall be separated by a fire-resistive partition at least 5' (1.6 m) having
a fire resistive rating of at least ½ hour.
d.
Acetylene and liquified fuel gas cylinders shall be stored with the valve end up. If storage areas are
within 100' (30.5 m) distance of each other and not protected by automatic sprinklers, the total
capacity of acetylene cylinders stored and used inside the building shall be limited to 2000 ft3 (57
m3) of gas, exclusive of cylinders in use or connected for use. Quantities exceeding this total shall be
stored in a special room built in accordance with the specifications of NFPA 51, "Oxygen-Fuel Gas
Systems for Welding and Cutting," either in a separate building or outdoors.
54
e.
Acetylene storage rooms and buildings shall be well ventilated. Open flames shall be prohibited.
Storage rooms shall have no other occupancy.
f.
Cylinders shall be stored on a level, fire resistive floor.
g.
To prevent rusting, cylinders stored in the open shall be protected from contact with the ground and
against weather extremes such as ice and snow accumulations in winter and continuous direct rays of
the sun in the summer.
h.
Cylinders are not designed for temperatures in excess of 130F (54C). Accordingly, they shall not
be stored near sources of heat such as radiators or furnaces, or near highly flammable substances like
gasoline, oil or volatile liquids.
i.
Cylinder storage shall be planned so that cylinders will be used in the order in which they are
received from the supplier.
j.
Empty and full cylinders shall be stored separately with empty cylinders plainly identified as such so
as to avoid confusion. Cylinders having held the same contents shall be grouped together.
k.
A flame or electric arc shall never be permitted to contact any part of a compressed gas cylinder.
l.
Storage rooms for cylinders containing flammable gases shall be well ventilated to prevent the
accumulation of explosive concentrations of gas; no source of ignition shall be permitted; smoking
shall be prohibited; wiring shall be in conduit; electric lights shall be in fixed position, enclosed in
glass or other transparent material to prevent gas from contacting lighted sockets or lamps, and they
shall be equipped with guards to prevent breakage; electric switches shall be located outside the
room.
H.
CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY: LOCKOUT/TAG OUT
1.
PURPOSE
Control of Hazardous energy is the purpose of the Lockout- Tagout Program. This program
establishes the requirements for isolation of both kinetic and potential electrical, chemical,
thermal, hydraulic and pneumatic and gravitational energy prior to equipment repair, adjustment
or removal. Reference: OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910. 147, the control of hazardous energy.
2.
DEFINITIONS
Authorized (Qualified) Employees are the only ones certified to lock and tagout equipment or machinery.
Whether an employee is considered to be qualified will depend upon various circumstances in the
workplace. It is likely for an individual to be considered "qualified" with regard to certain equipment in
the workplace, but "unqualified" as to other equipment. An employee who is undergoing on-the-job
training and who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at
his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person, is considered
to be "qualified" for the performance of those duties.
Affected Employees are those employees who operate machinery or equipment upon which lockout or
tagging out is required under this program. Training of these individuals will be less stringent in that it
will include the purpose and use of the lockout procedures.
Other Employees are identified as those that do not fall into the authorized, affected or qualified employee
category. Essentially, it will include all other employees. These employees will be provided instruction
in what the program is and not to touch any machine or equipment when they see that it has been
55
locked or tagged out.
3.
a.
TRAINING
Authorized Employees Training.
All Maintenance Employees, Department Supervisors and Janitorial employees will be trained to use
the Lock and Tag Out Procedures. The training will be conducted by the Maintenance Supervisor or
Safety Coordinator. Retraining shall be held at least annually.
b.
c.
4.
Affected Employee Training
i.
Only trained and authorized Employees will repair, replace or adjust machinery, equipment
or processes.
ii.
Affected Employees may not remove Locks, locking devices or tags from machinery,
equipment or circuits.
Other Employee Training
i.
Only trained and authorized Employees will repair, replace or adjust machinery or
Equipment.
ii.
Other Employees may not remove Locks, locking devices or tags from machinery,
equipment or circuits
PREPARATION FOR LOCK AND TAG OUT PROCEDURES
a.
A Lockout - Tagout survey has been conducted to locate and identify all energy sources to verify
which switches or valves supply energy to machinery and equipment. Dual or redundant controls
have been identified.
b.
A Tagout Schedule has been developed for each major piece of equipment and machinery. This
schedule describes the energy sources, location of disconnects, type of disconnect, special hazards
and special safety procedures. The schedule will be reviewed each time to ensure employees
properly lock and tag out equipment and machinery. If a Tagout Schedule does not exist for a
particular piece of equipment, machinery and process, one must be developed prior to conducting a
Lockout - Tagout. As repairs and/or renovations of existing electrical systems are made,
standardized controls will be used.
5.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE & MACHINE ADJUSTMENTS
Lock and Tag Out procedures are not required if equipment must be operating for proper
adjustment. This rare exception may be used only by trained and authorized Employees when
specific procedures have been developed to safely avoid hazards with proper training. All
consideration shall be made to prevent the need for an employee to break the plane of a normally
guarded area of the equipment by use of tools and other devices.
6.
LOCKS, HASPS, AND TAGS
All Qualified Maintenance Personnel will be assigned a lock with one key, hasp, and tag. All
locks will be keyed differently, except when a specific individual is issues a series of locks for
complex lockout-tagout tasks. In some cases, more than one lock, hasp and tag are needed to
completely de-energize equipment and machinery. Additional locks may be checked out from the
Department or Maintenance Supervisor on a shift-by-shift basis. All locks and hasps shall be
56
uniquely identifiable to a specific employee.
7.
SOP: GENERAL LOCK AND TAG OUT PROCEDURES - SHUTDOWNS
a.
Before working on, repairing, adjusting or replacing machinery and equipment, the following
procedures will be utilized to place the machinery and equipment in a neutral or zero mechanical
state.
b.
Before authorized or affected employees turn off a machine or piece of equipment, the authorized
employee will have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to
be controlled, and the means to control the energy.
c.
Notify all affected Employees that the machinery, equipment or process will be out of service
d.
The machine or equipment will be turned or shut down using the specific procedures for that
specific machine. An orderly shutdown will be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazards
to employees as a result of equipment de-energization.
e.
If the machinery, equipment or process is in operation, follow normal stopping procedures (depress
stop button, open toggle switch, etc.).
8.
MACHINE OR EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
a.
All energy control devices that are needed to control the energy to the machine or
equipment will be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the
machine or equipment from the energy source.
b.
Move switch or panel arms to "Off" or "Open" positions and close all valves or other energy
isolating devices so that the energy source(s) is disconnected or isolated from the machinery or
equipment.
9.
LOCKOUT OR TAGOUT DEVICE APPLICATION
a.
Lockout or tagout devices will be affixed to energy isolating devices by authorized employees.
b.
Lockout devices will be affixed in a manner that will hold the energy isolating devices from the
"safe" or "off" position.
c.
Where tagout devices are used they will be affixed in such a manner that will clearly state that the
operation or the movement of energy isolating devices from the "safe" or "off" positions is
prohibited.
d.
The tagout devices will be attached to the same point a lock would be attached. If the tag cannot be
affixed at that point, the tag will be located as close as possible to the device in a position that will
be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device.
e.
Lock and tag out all energy devices by use of hasps, chains and valve covers with assigned
individual locks.
10.
STORED ENERGY
a.
Following the application of the lockout or tagout devices to the energy isolating devices, all
potential or residual energy will be relieved, disconnected, restrained, and otherwise rendered safe.
b.
Where the re-accumulation of stored energy to a hazardous energy level is possible, verification of
isolation will be continued until the maintenance or servicing is complete.
57
c.
11.
Release stored energy (capacitors, springs, elevated members, rotating fly wheels, and
hydraulic/air/gas/steam systems) must be relieved or restrained by grounding, repositioning,
blocking and/or bleeding the system.
VERIFICATION OF ISOLATION
a.
Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked or tagged out, the authorized
employees will verify that isolation or de-energization of the machine or equipment have been
accomplished.
b.
After assuring that no Employee will be placed in danger, test all lock and tag outs by following the
normal start up procedures (depress start button, etc.).
c.
Caution: After Test, place controls in neutral position.
d.
Special Electrical Note: Check Voltage as part of testing procedures.
12.
EXTENDED LOCKOUT - TAGOUT
Should the shift change before the machinery or equipment can be restored to service, the lock
and tag out must remain. If the task is reassigned to the next shift, those Employees must lock
and tag out before the previous shift may remove their lock and tag.
13.
RELEASE FROM LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
Before lockout or tagout devices are removed and the energy restored to the machine or
equipment, the following actions will be taken:
a.
The work area will be thoroughly inspected to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and
that machine or equipment components are operational.
b.
The work are will be checked to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed.
Before the lockout or tagout devices are removed, the affected employees will be notified that the
lockout or tagout devices are being removed.
c.
Each lockout or tagout device will be removed from each energy isolating device by the employee
who applied the device.
14.
LOTO PROCEDURE FOR ELECTRICAL PLUG-TYPE EQUIPMENT
This procedure covers all Electrical Plug-Type Equipment such as Battery Chargers, some
Product Pumps, Office Equipment, Powered Hand Tools, Powered Bench Tools, Lathes, Fans,
etc. When working on, repairing, or adjusting the above equipment, the following procedures
must be utilized to prevent accidental or sudden startup:
a.
Unplug Electrical Equipment from wall socket or in-line socket.
b.
Attach "Do Not Operate" Tag on Plug Box & Lock on end of power cord. An exception is granted
to not lock & tag the plug is the cord & plug remain in the exclusive control of the Employee
working on, adjusting or inspecting the equipment.
c.
Test Equipment to assure power source has been removed by depressing the "Start" or On" Switch.
d.
Perform required operations.
e.
Replace all guards removed.
f.
Remove Lock & Plug Box and Tag.
58
g.
15.
Inspect power cord and socket before plugging equipment into power source. Any defects must be
repaired before placing the equipment back in service.
LOTO PROCEDURES INVOLVING MORE THAN ONE EMPLOYEE
In the preceding SOPs, if more than one Employee is assigned to a task requiring a lock and tag
out, each must also place his or her own lock and tag on the energy isolating device(s) unless
crew/craft LOTO procedures are used.
16.
MANAGEMENT'S REMOVAL OF LOCK AND TAG OUT
Only the employee that locks and tags out machinery, equipment or processes may remove
his/her lock and tag. However, should the employee leave the facility before removing his/her
lock and tag, the maintenance manager/supervisor may remove the lock and tag. The
maintenance manager/supervisor must be assured that all tools have been removed, all guards
have been replaced and all employees are free from any hazard before the lock and tag are
removed and the machinery, equipment or process are returned to service. Notification of the
employee who placed the lock is required prior to lock removal.
17.
CONTRACTORS
Contractors, working on University property and equipment must use a Lockout - Tagout
procedure while servicing or maintaining equipment, machinery, or processes. Office of
Occupational and Environmental Safety and Facility Services shall be notified of the details of
the contractors program.
I.
EXCAVATIONS, TRENCHING, AND SHORING
1.
All surface encumbrances that are located so as to create a hazard to employees shall be
removed or supported, as necessary, to safeguard employees.
2.
The estimated location of utility installations, such as sewer, telephone, fuel, electric,
water lines, or any other underground installations that reasonably may be expected to be
encountered during excavation work, shall be determined before opening an excavation by
contacting local utility companies and Facility Services, to establish the location of the
utility underground installations.
3.
An excavation permit shall be obtained from Facility Services prior to beginning the
excavation on campus.
4.
When excavation operations approach the estimated location of underground
installations, the exact location of the installations shall be determined by safe and
acceptable means, such as probing and hand digging.
5.
While the excavation is open, underground installations shall be protected, supported or
removed as necessary to safeguard employees.
6.
Structural ramps that are used solely by employees as a means of access or egress from
excavations shall be designed by a competent person. Structural ramps used for equipment
shall be designed by a competent person qualified in structural design, and shall be
constructed in accordance with the design.
59
7.
Structural ramps used in lieu of steps shall be provided with cleats or other surface
treatments on the top surface to prevent slipping.
8.
A stairway, ladder, ramp or other safe means of egress shall be located in trench
excavations that are 4 feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to require no more than 25 feet
of lateral travel for employees.
9.
Employees exposed to public vehicular traffic shall be provided with, and shall wear,
warning vests or other suitable garments marked with or made of reflectorized or
high-visibility material.
10.
When mobile equipment is operated adjacent to an excavation, or when such equipment
is required to approach the edge of an excavation, and the operator does not have a clear
and direct view of the edge of the excavation, a warning system shall be utilized such as
barricades, hand or mechanical signals, or stop logs. If possible, the grade should be away
from the excavation.
11.
Where employees enter excavations greater than 4 feet in depth , and where oxygen
deficiency (atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen) or a hazardous
atmosphere exists or could reasonably be expected to exist, the atmospheres in the
excavation shall be tested before entry. A hazardous atmosphere is one with greater than
20% LEL or airborne exposure above OSHA PELs
12.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent employee exposure to atmospheres
containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen and other hazardous atmospheres, such as a
concentration of a flammable gas in excess of 20 percent of the lower flammable limit of
the gas.
13.
When controls are used that are intended to reduce the level of atmospheric contaminants
to acceptable levels, testing shall be conducted as often as necessary to ensure that the
atmosphere remains safe.
14.
Emergency rescue equipment, such as breathing apparatus, a safety harness and line, or a
basket stretcher, shall be readily available where hazardous atmospheric conditions exist or
may reasonably be expected to develop during work in an excavation. Such equipment shall
be attended while the work is in progress.
15.
Employees entering bell-bottom pier holes, or other similar deep and confined footing
excavations, shall wear a harness with a lifeline securely attached to it. The lifeline shall be
separate from any line used to handle materials, and shall be individually attended at all
times while the employee wearing the lifeline is in the excavation.
16.
Employees shall not work in excavations in which there is accumulated water, or in
excavations in which water is accumulating, unless adequate precautions have been taken
to protect employees against the hazards posed by water accumulation. The precautions
necessary to protect employees adequately vary with each situation, but could include
special support or shield systems to protect from cave-ins, water removal to control the
level of accumulating water, or use of a safety harness and lifeline. If water is controlled or
prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal equipment, the water removal
60
equipment and operations shall be monitored by a competent person to ensure proper
operation.
17.
If excavation work interrupts the natural drainage of surface water (such as streams),
diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means shall be used to prevent surface water from
entering the excavation and to provide adequate drainage of the area adjacent to the
excavation. Excavations subject to runoff from heavy rains will require an inspection by a
competent person.
18.
Where the stability of adjoining sidewalks, poles, buildings, walls, footings or other
structures is endangered by excavation operations, support systems such as shoring,
bracing, or underpinning shall be provided to ensure the stability of such structures for the
protection of employees. An engineer shall determine if the condition is safe where
building footings or foundations are concerned.
19.
Adequate protection shall be provided to protect employees from loose soil that could
pose a hazard by falling or rolling from an excavation face or from the surface above. Such
protection shall consist of scaling to remove loose material; installation of protective
barricades at intervals as necessary on the face to stop and contain falling material, and by
placing and keeping such materials or equipment at least 2 feet from the edge of
excavations and / or by the use of retaining devices that are sufficient to prevent materials
or equipment from falling or rolling into excavations.
20.
Daily inspections of excavations, the adjacent areas, and protective systems shall be made
by a competent person for evidence of a situation that could result in possible cave-ins,
indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous
conditions. An inspection shall be conducted by the competent person prior to the start of
work and as needed throughout the shift. Inspections shall also be made after every
rainstorm or other hazard increasing occurrence. These inspections are only required when
employee exposure can be reasonably anticipated.
21.
Where the competent person finds evidence of a situation that could result in a possible
cave-in, indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other
hazardous conditions, exposed employees shall be immediately removed from the
hazardous area until the necessary precautions have been taken to ensure their safety.
22.
Walkways shall be provided where employees or equipment are required or permitted to
cross over excavations. Guardrails shall be provided where walkways are 6 feet or more
above lower levels.
23.
Adequate barrier physical protection shall be provided at all remotely located
excavations. All wells, pits, shafts, etc., shall be barricaded or covered.
24.
Where excavations are less than 5 feet (1.52 m) in depth and examination of the ground
by a competent person provides no indication of a potential cave-in, there are no additional
steps necessary to prevent cave-ins.
25.
Excavations shall be sloped at an angle not steeper than one and one-half horizontal to
one vertical (34 degrees measured from the horizontal), unless one of the other options
61
provided for in the OSHA standard is used under the direction of the competent person or
registered professional engineer, as applicable.
26.
Support systems shall be installed and removed in a manner that protects employees from
cave-ins, structural collapses, or from being struck by members of the support system.
Removal shall begin at, and progress from, the bottom of the excavation. Members shall be
released slowly so as to note any indication of possible failure of the remaining members of
the structure or possible cave-in of the sides of the excavation. Backfilling shall progress
together with the removal of support systems from excavations.
27.
No more than two feet may be excavated below the bottom of the support system, and
this may occur only when the competent person/engineer has evaluated the conditions and
given approval.
28.
If design of the excavation is performed by a professional engineer, at least one copy of
the design shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction of the protective system.
J.
SAFETY IN WELDING AND CUTTING OPERATIONS
1.
GENERAL
Before starting welding operations outside shop areas, use Hot Work Cutting/Welding Permit in
the Appendix.
2.
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
a.
Protective clothing and equipment shall be suitable for the type of work to be performed, kept in
good repair, and kept free of oil and grease.
b.
Sleeves shall be kept buttoned at the wrist.
c.
Collars shall be kept buttoned.
d.
Fire resistant gauntlet gloves, aprons of leather or asbestos, and leggings shall be used as protection
against radiated heat or sparks.
e.
Front pockets on overalls and aprons, and cuffs on pants shall be eliminated.
f.
Capes or shoulder covers made of leather or other flame and heat-resistant material shall be worn
during overhead welding or cutting operations. Leather skull caps worn under helmet provide
protection against head burns. When working in a confined space or an overhead location, ear plugs
shall be worn or the ears covered with wire screen protectors.
g.
Hard hats or other types of head protectors shall be used where there is exposure to falling objects.
h.
Low cut shoes shall not be worn unless the ankles are covered with protective leggings.
i.
Employees required to wear respirators shall keep them clean and sterilized. When not in use, such
equipment shall be stored in closed containers.
j.
The air line to supplied-air respirators shall be provided with a filter which will remove pipe scale,
water, oil, mist, and noxious vapors. It shall also be equipped with a pressure reducing valve to
prevent the supplied-air pressure from exceeding 25Psi.
k.
Insulating mats of sufficient size shall be used when sitting on the same metal which is being
62
welded. Rubber gloves shall be worn under welding gloves when welding in wet or damp locations.
l.
3.
After a welding job is completed, the material shall be chalk marked "HOT," or a warning sign shall
be posted to caution other employees.
EYE PROTECTION
a.
Goggles, helmets, hand shields, or other suitable eye protection having the proper lens shade for the
work being done shall be worn during all welding or cutting operations. (See attached tables.)
b.
Goggles, helmets, and hand shields shall be checked frequently. Equipment with light leaks shall not
be worn, as radiation burns will result. Cracked, broken, or loose filter plates must be replaced
immediately.
c.
Protective colored flash goggles with side shields shall be worn under a hood for protection against
harmful rays, flying chips, and sparks when an arc is struck prematurely before the helmet is
lowered. The lenses shall be No. 1 or No. 3 shade. Inert gas metal-arc welding by nearby welders
requires goggles under the helmet with lens shade as per table.
NOTE: Momentary observation of an arc without protective lenses can cause a retinal burn, which,
in turn, may result in a permanent dark area in the field of vision.
d.
When arc welding operations are performed in an area that is not enclosed or isolated, workers or
other persons near the welding area (generally within 75' of the arc) shall wear appropriate goggles.
e.
Flash shields shall be carried on portable welding carts as standard equipment and shall be used
when necessary.
4.
WORK IN CONFINED SPACES
a.
All confined spaces such as tanks, boilers, and compartments shall be ventilated when welding
operations are being performed within. When impracticable to provide such ventilation, supplied-air
respirators shall be used.
b.
When welding, cutting, or burning is performed in confined spaces, the cylinders shall be left
outside. When welding operations are interrupted for coffee breaks, lunch, or at the end of the day,
the cylinder valves shall be closed to prevent gas leaks into the confined space as this may cause
oxygen depletion or an explosion hazard. Before re-entry, the tank atmosphere shall be checked for
signs that oxygen depletion, flammable gases, or toxic vapors are not present.
c.
In confined spaces where the means of exit is a manhole or other small opening, a means for quickly
removing workers in an emergency should be provided, such as a life belt and life line. An
attendant shall be stationed outside the exit at all times while work is in progress. See Item, "Work In
Confined Spaces".
5.
VENTILATION
a.
Mechanical ventilation shall be used as a precaution against breathing welding fumes and dust.
When this is not provided, approved respiratory protection is required.
b.
When welding on brass, bronze, galvanized iron, or cadmium plated metals, adequate ventilation
shall be provided to carry off welding fumes. Metals containing or coated with lead, cadmium, zinc,
mercury, beryllium, and similar materials produce toxic fumes when welded or cut.
c.
For local exhaust suction devices to be effective, the exhaust hood entrance shall be within 9" of the
weld or cut.
63
6.
FIRE PREVENTION
a.
When practicable, the object to be welded shall be moved to a safe location designated for welding.
If the object to be welded cannot be moved to a safe location, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity
shall be taken to a safe place.
b.
Welding and cutting operations shall not be done in rooms, compartments, or confined places
containing flammable vapors or dusts, nor on containers that have held flammable liquids or gases
until all fire and explosion hazards have been eliminated. This is in accordance with
recommendations of the American Welding Society, "Standard A6.0--Welding and Cutting
Containers Which Have Held Combustibles." For petroleum storage tanks, the recommendations of
the American Petroleum Institute contained in their Manual No. RP2015, "Cleaning Petroleum
Storage Tanks," shall be followed. Also see Section, "Recycling of Used Steel Drums and
Containers."
c.
Welding and cutting operations shall be performed only in areas that are free of fire hazards.
d.
Welding shall not be performed on the outside or inside of tanks that contain flammable liquids until
all explosion or fire hazards have been removed.
e.
Before starting welding or cutting operations on tanks or similar surfaces, an inspection shall be
made to see that no combustible material is present on either side of the surface.
f.
Approved fire extinguishing equipment in good operating condition shall be kept close to all
welding or cutting operations.
g.
Sheet metal guards or other similar protection shall be used to prevent sparks (which can travel up to
35') from falling on wooden floors, partitions, or on flammable materials that cannot be moved. A
fire watcher with fire extinguishing equipment shall be in attendance where combustible materials
may be ignited by welding sparks. After the job is done careful inspection of these areas shall be
made to ascertain that no sparks are left in flammable materials. The watcher shall be assigned to
inspect the area for at least a half hour after work has been completed.
h.
To prevent explosions, welding or other burning torches shall not be taken into confined spaces until
pressures have been regulated and unless they are to be used immediately. Remove torches as soon
as the work is finished.
i.
When required, welding permits shall be made available for review by interested parties.
7.
GAS WELDING AND CUTTING
a.
Storage, Handling, and Use of Cylinders:
i.
Special care shall be used in the identification and selection of cylinders to insure that the
proper type of gas is used. Identification shall be made from the cylinder tag instead of
depending on the cylinder color code.
ii.
Cylinders shall be handled carefully. They shall not be dropped or jarred.
iii.
The loading and storage platform shall be used for outdoor storage of cylinders so that they
can be transferred between delivery trucks and the platform without being dropped or jarred.
Full and empty cylinders of each type of gas shall be stored separately.
iv.
Cylinders shall be stored so that they will not be knocked over or damaged by falling objects,
passing vehicles, or persons.
64
v.
Cylinders shall not be stored near radiators, stoves, or any other sources of heat.
vi.
O2 cylinders in shall be stored 20' away from fuel gas cylinders and combustible materials, or
if closer, separated by a non-combustible barrier (at least 5' high) with a fire resistance rating
of one-half hour.
vii.
All cylinder storage rooms shall be well ventilated.
viii. Unless other suitable provisions have been made to prevent cylinders from upsetting during
use, they shall be securely tied to a substantial stationary object.
ix.
Cylinder valves shall be closed and valve protection caps replaced before cylinders are moved
or placed into storage.
x.
Special cylinder carts shall be used for moving cylinders.
xi.
All cylinders shall be placed in an upright position whether in use or in storage. This prevents
fuel gas liquids in LP-Gas or MAPP Gas (Methylacetylene-Propadiene) cylinders or acetone
liquid in acetylene cylinders from being discharged through the regulator.
xii.
Cylinders shall be used in the order they are received from the supplier. When empty, their
valves shall be closed, caps replaced, and the cylinders marked "MT Storage" to indicate that
they are empty. Also see Section, "Handling, Using, and Storage of Compressed Gas
Cylinders."
xiii. Cylinders shall not be permitted to come in contact with electrical wires.
xiv. Cylinders shall be placed in locations where they will not come in contact with sparks or
flames from welding or cutting work.
xv.
When cylinders are to be hoisted or lowered by derrick, they shall be securely placed on a
suitably designed carrier or platform and attached to the derrick hook by means of a choker
sling. Cylinders shall not be lifted by their value or caps. Electric magnets shall never be
used.
xvi. Oxygen or acetylene cylinders shall be used only when equipped with proper regulators or
reducing valves.
xvii. Regulators or automatic reducing valves shall be used only with the gas for which they are
intended and at pressures for which they are intended.
xviii. While acetylene cylinders are in use, the valve key wrench shall be kept in place. It shall be
removed after closing the valve.
xix. The fusible safety plug on acetylene cylinders shall not be tampered with.
xx.
Warm water, never a flame or boiling water, shall be used to remove ice from around the
outlet valve of an acetylene cylinder.
xxi. Leaking acetylene cylinders shall not be placed in service. When uncontrollable leaks are
present, the cylinder shall be moved to a well ventilated open area, and the valve shall be
opened slightly to permit the acetylene to escape slowly. Warning signs shall be displayed to
keep persons with cigarettes or other sources of ignition at a safe distance.
xxii. The tops of acetylene cylinders shall be kept free of tools or other objects.
xxiii. Fuel gas and acetylene cylinders shall be stored and used valve end up.
xxiv. Fuel gas cylinders shall not be used as a substitute for compressed air, as a source of pressure,
65
nor used for ventilation or dusting operations.
xxv. Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored near highly combustible material, especially oil and
grease, or near reserve stocks of carbide and acetylene or other fuel-gas cylinders, or near any
other substance likely to cause or accelerate fire, or in an acetylene generator compartment.
xxvi. Acetylene shall not be used at a pressure >15psi.
b.
Hose Lines and Connections
i.
Only hose in good condition shall be used. At regular intervals, examine pressurized hose
while it is immersed in water to detect leaks.
ii.
Only hose designated to be used with a specific gas shall be used. In general, hoses can be
identified by their color: red=fuel gas, green=oxygen, and black=inert gas.
iii.
Hose shall be protected from damage by trucks, falling objects, sharp edges, sparks, slag, and
open flame.
iv.
Hose shall be placed so that it will not create a tripping hazard. Excess hose shall be coiled to
prevent kinks and tangles.
v.
Standard oxygen hose or regulator outlet connections have right-hand threads; fuel gas
connections have left-hand threads with a grooved hex on the nut or shank. Connections shall
never be forced.
vi.
Oil or grease shall not be used in making up connections.
vii.
Tape shall not be used to repair hose. Hose may be spliced using standard brass fittings (not
copper tubing) and ferrules or hose clamps designed for this purpose.
viii. Welders shall not stand in front of the gauges on the regulator when opening the discharge
valve of the tank. Sudden pressure may destroy the gauge, blowing out the glass and parts.
c.
Torches
i.
Torches shall not be lighted by cigarette lighters, pilot lights, or matches. Torches shall not be
relighted from hot work, especially when operating in a small confined space--if gases do not
light instantly, ignition could be violent.
ii.
Purge oxygen and fuel gas lines individually to remove air and other contaminants before
using each day. Do not purge in a confined space.
iii.
When torches are changed or welding is discontinued for longer than five minutes, all
cylinder valves shall be closed.
iv.
A clear, unobstructed space shall be maintained between the work and the cylinders so that
pressure reducing regulators can be reached quickly in an emergency.
v.
If a flashback occurs because of combustible gas mixtures burning inside the tip, torch or
hose, faulty equipment or misuse is generally the cause. In an oxy-fuel torch, when hissing or
squealing is heard, flame has passed the mixer and the torch and cylinder valves shall be shut
off and the area vacated for about five minutes. If the torch, regulator, and cylinder are cool,
inspect the torch and regulator for inner damage. Discard the hose unless it will pass a
pressure test--the greater of either 300psi or twice the operating pressure.
8.
a.
ELECTRIC ARC WELDING
Equipment and Cables:
66
i.
Before starting operations, all electrical connections shall be checked to determine that they
are securely made and firmly attached to the work.
ii.
Work leads shall be kept as short as possible.
iii.
Equipment shall be examined frequently to determine that all electrical connections and
insulations on holders and cables are in good condition. Loose cable connections may
overheat or arc and cause a fire.
iv.
Safety devices such as circuit breakers and interlocks shall not be shunted our or
disconnected. Power sources or line fuses shall be locked out or removed when equipment is
being installed, inspected, or serviced.
v.
Report any missing enclosures or defects in the motor or generator to your supervisor.
vi.
Terminals of the welding generator shall not contact the frame of the welder. This produces an
electrical ground.
vii.
Only electrode holders designed to safely handle the maximum rated current required shall be
used.
viii. Electrode holders that are not fully insulated shall be replaced. Holders with protruding
screws shall not be used.
ix.
Electrodes shall be removed from the holder when not in use.
x.
An arc shall not be struck on a gas cylinder or any pressure vessel as it may seriously weaken
the vessel.
xi.
Only welding cables that are completely insulated, flexible, and of proper size for the
maximum current requirements of the work shall be used. Cables shall be regularly inspected
for cracks, wear, or damage and repair or replace if necessary.
xii.
Lengths of cable shall be connected by fully insulated lock-type connectors having a capacity
equal to that of the cable.
xiii. Cable lugs shall be soldered to the cable and shall be securely fastened to give full electrical
contact.
xiv. The exposed metal parts of lugs shall be completely covered with rubber tape and protected
with friction tape. Exposed parts of electrical units shall have insulating covers in place
before the power is turned on.
xv.
Proper electrical contact shall exist at all joints when a building structure or pipeline is used
temporarily as a ground-return circuit.
xvi. When a structure or pipe is continuously used as a ground for the machine, all joints shall be
electrically bonded to establish a good ground.
xvii. Pipe containing gases, flammable liquids, or conduits carrying electrical conductors shall not
be used as a ground-return circuit.
xviii. Welders shall make every effort to keep welding cables dry, grease and oil-free, and protected
from sparks or hot metal.
xix. Cables shall be supported from overhead when practical.
xx.
Cables laid on the floor or ground shall be protected so they will not be damaged or cause a
tripping hazard.
67
xxi. Welding cables shall not be located close to other power supply cables or other high-tension
leads.
xxii. When discontinuing work, the power supply switch in the equipment shall be opened and the
unit disconnected from the source of power.
xxiii. Welding rods shall be stored in the container on the welding machine; not thrown on floors or
staging.
xxiv. Welding shall never take place in damp areas without insulation to protect workers against
electrical shock. Dry duckboard or a mat shall be used if necessary.
xxv. Gas or diesel electric generators shall have the exhaust gases vented to the outside to avoid the
toxic effects of carbon monoxide and other gaseous byproducts.
NOTE: The hazards connected with atomic hydrogen and heli-arc welding are essentially the same
as described herein for arc welding.
b.
Spot Welding
The use of this type of welding presents certain hazards inherent to the nature of spot welding equipment.
i.
Prior to spot welding, the material is usually cleaned in a caustic or slightly acid bath.
Employees performing these wash operations shall be protected from splashing liquid.
ii.
Under no circumstances shall the operator of a spot welding machine adjust the contactors.
This shall be done by a trained electrician.
iii.
In hand spot welding installations, eye protection shall be required to protect the operator
from the spattering metal.
iv.
Operators shall exercise extreme care when cleaning the tips of the contactors to prevent
having their fingers crushed between tips.
v.
Welding of materials such as stainless and high carbon steels causes excessive spattering of
metal. Operators shall be cautioned to protect against the possible penetration of the metal
into the tips of the fingers.
FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR PROTECTION
AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY
Gas Welding Operation
Shade Number
Soldering
2
Torch brazing
3 or 4
Light cutting, up to 1"
3 or 4
Medium cutting, 1" to 6"
4 or 5
Heavy cutting, over 6"
5 or 6
Gas welding (light), up to 1/8"
4 or 5
Gas welding (medium), 1/8" to ½"
5 or 6
Gas welding (heavy), over ½"
6 or 8
68
Electric Arc Welding Operation
Shade Number
Shielded metal-arc welding 1/16, 3/32,
1/8, 5/32 inch diameter electrodes
10
Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous)
1/16, 3/32, 1/8, 5/32 inch diameter electrodes 11
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1/16,
3/32, 1/8, 5/32 inch diameter electrodes
12
Shielded metal-arc welding 3/16, 7/32,
1/4 inch diameter electrodes
12
5/16, 3/8 inch diameter electrodes
14
Atomic hydrogen welding
10 - 14
Carbon-arc welding
14
K.
SAFE USE OF HAND TOOLS AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS
1.
SCREWDRIVERS
a.
A screwdriver is the most commonly used and abused tool. The practice of using screwdrivers as
punches, wedges, pinch bars, or pry pars shall be discouraged as this practice dulls blades and
causes employee injury.
b.
Screwdriver tips shall be selected to fit the screw. Sharp- edged bits will not slip as easily as ones
that are dull. Redress tips to original shape and keep them clean.
c.
Always hold work in a vise or lay it on a flat surface to lessen the chance of injury if the screwdriver
should slip.
d.
When working near electrical equipment, screwdrivers shall be equipped with insulated handles
(some also come with insulated blades).
2.
HAMMERS
Wooden handles shall be straight grained and free of slivers or splinters. Once split, handles shall be
replaced. Make sure handles are tightly wedged.
a.
Never strike a hammer with another hammer.
b.
Discard any hammer that shows chips, dents, etc. Redressing is not recommended.
c.
Safety glasses shall be worn while using a hammer or any other striking tool.
d.
Never use a common nail hammer to strike other metal objects such as cold chisels.
3.
PUNCHES
Never use a punch with a mushroomed struck face or with a dull, chipped, or deformed point.
Punches that are bent, cracked, or chipped shall be discarded. Safety glasses shall be worn while
using a punch.
4.
CHISELS
69
Choose a chisel only large enough for the job so the blade is used, rather than only the point or
corner. Never use chisels with dull blades--the sharper the tool, the better the performance. Chisels
that are bent, cracked, or chipped shall be discarded. Re-dress cutting edge or struck end to original
contour as needed. When chipping or shearing with a cold chisel, the tool shall be held at an angle
that permits one level of the cutting edge to be flat against the shearing plane.
5.
HACKSAWS
a.
Hacksaws shall be adjusted and tightened in the frame to prevent buckling and breaking, but shall
not be tight enough to break off the pins that support the blade. Install blade with teeth pointing
forward.
b.
Pressure shall be applied on the forward stroke only. Lift the saw slightly, pulling back lightly in the
cut to protect the teeth. Do not bend and twist the blade. Never continue an old cut with a new
blade.
6.
FILES
a.
Select the right file for the job, making sure that it has a secure handle.
b.
Files shall be cleaned only with file-cleaning cards; never by striking. Never use a file as a pry or
hammer, as chipping and breaking could result in user injury.
c.
Grasp the file firmly in one hand and use the thumb and forefinger of the other to guide the point.
7.
AXES AND HATCHETS
a.
The cutting edges are designed for cutting wood and equally soft metal. Never strike against metal,
stone, or concrete.
b.
Never use an axe or hatchet as a wedge or maul, never strike with the sides, and never use them with
loose or damaged handles.
c.
Proper axe grip for a right-handed person is to have the left hand about 3" from the end of the handle
and the right hand about ¾ of the way up. Reverse hands if left handed.
d.
Sharp, well-honed axes and hatchets are much safer to use because "glancing" is minimized.
e.
Safety glasses and safety shoes shall be worn and clear swinging checked before using axes and
hatchets. Axes and hatchets shall be carried with the covers on.
8. KNIVES
a.
Knives cause more disabling injuries than any other hand tool. The hazards are that the hands may
slip from the handle onto the blade or that the knife may strike the body or the free hand. Use knives
with handle guards if possible. Knives shall be kept sharp and in their holders, cabinets, or sheaths
when not in use; the cutting stroke shall be away from the body.
b.
Do not wipe dirty or oily knives on clothing. To clean, the blade shall be wiped with a towel or
cloth with the sharp edge turned away from the wiping hand. Horseplay of any kind (throwing,
"fencing," etc.) shall be prohibited.
9.
CROWBARS
Use the proper kind and size for the job. Never use makeshifts such as pieces of pipe, as they may
slip and cause injury. Crowbars shall have a point or toe of such shape that it will grip the object to
70
be moved and a heel to act as a pivot or fulcrum. A block of wood under the heel may prevent
slippage and help reduce injuries.
10.
SHOVELS
a.
Shovel edges shall be kept trimmed and handles checked for splinters and cracks. Workers shall
wear safety shoes with sturdy soles. They shall have feet well separated to get good balance and
spring in the knees. The leg muscle will take much of the load. To reduce the chance of injury, the
ball of the foot (not the arch) shall be used to press the shovel into the ground or other material.
b.
Dipping the shovel in water or greasing or waxing the shovel will prevent some materials from
sticking.
c.
Gloves shall be worn while using shovels.
d.
When not in use, hang up shovels, stand them against the wall, or keep them in racks or boxes.
11.
BOX AND SOCKET WRENCHES
a.
The use of box and socket wrenches is indicated where a heavy pull is necessary and safety is a
consideration. Box and socket wrenches completely encircle the nut, bolt or fitting and grip it at all
corners as opposed to two corners gripped by an open end wrench. They will not slip off laterally,
and they eliminate the dangers of sprung jaws.
b.
Avoid overloading the capacity of a wrench by using a pipe extension on the handle or strike the
handle of a wrench with a hammer. Hammer abuse weakens the metal of a wrench and causes the
tool to break. Special heavy duty wrenches are available with handles as long as 3'. Where possible,
special penetrating oil shall be used to first loosen tight nuts.
12.
ELECTRIC SAWS
Electric saws shall be equipped with guards above and below the face plate. The lower guard shall
be checked frequently to be sure it operates freely and encloses the teeth completely when not
cutting. Circular saws shall not be crowded into the work. The motor shall be started and stopped
outside the work. At the beginning and end of the stroke or when the teeth are exposed, the operator
shall use extra care to keep the body out of the line-of-cut. Saws shall be equipped with "dead man"
controls or a trigger switch that shuts off the power when pressure is released.
13.
PORTABLE GRINDER
a.
Grinding wheels shall be guarded as completely as possible. They shall never be used at greater than
their rated speed. To do so may result in the wheel breaking apart due to excessive centrifugal force.
Guards shall be adjustable so the operator will be inclined to make the adjustments rather than
remove the guard. However, the guard shall be easily removable to facilitate replacement of the
wheel. In addition to mechanical guarding, the operator shall wear safety glasses at all times.
b.
Care shall be exercised to protect the grinder from damage.
c.
Since part of the wheel is exposed, it is important the employee hold the wheel so it does not touch
his clothes or body.
14.
a.
AIR HOSES
Workers shall be warned against disconnecting the air hose from the tool and using it to clean
machines or remove dust from clothing. Air used for cleaning shall not exceed 30 psi and workers
71
shall wear safety glasses at all times when using air hoses. Brushing or vacuuming equipment is
recommended for removing dust from clothing.
b.
Air shall be shut off before attempting to disconnect the air hose from the air line. Any air pressure
inside the line shall be released before disconnecting.
L. SAFETY RULES FOR WOODWORKING MACHINES
1.
GENERAL
a.
All machines shall be constructed and maintained so that they are free of excessive noise and
harmful vibration.
b.
All machines, except portable or mobile ones, shall be level and shall be securely fastened to the
floor or other suitable foundation.
c.
Small units shall be secured to benches or stands of adequate strength and design.
d.
Tools shall be used only on machines for which they were designed.
e.
All safety devices shall be regularly checked for proper adjustment.
f.
Machines shall be securely locked and tagged out before cleaning.
g.
Loose clothing, long hair, jewelry, and gloves shall not be worn around rotating parts of machinery.
h.
Adjustments shall not be made while machines are running.
i.
All metal framework on electrically driven machines shall be grounded and shall comply with the
National Electrical Code (NFPA-70) and applicable local codes.
j.
All machines shall have a cutoff device within reach of the normal operating position.
k.
Power controls and operating controls shall be located within easy reach and away from a hazardous
area. They shall be positioned so the operator can remain at the regular work location.
l.
Each operating control shall be protected against unexpected or accidental activation.
m.
There shall be ample marked work space around each machine.
2. HOUSEKEEPING
a.
Good housekeeping shall be maintained to prevent buildup of dust, chips, sawdust, and scraps.
b.
The working surface of machines shall be kept clear of scrap and waste materials.
3.
GUARDS
All belts, shafts, gears, and other moving parts shall be fully enclosed or be grounded in accordance
with American National Standard B15.1, "Safety Standards for Mechanical Power Transmission
Apparatus".
NOTE: See MACHINE SAFEGUARDING REQUIREMENTS for more information.
4.
ILLUMINATION
The machines and the adjacent stock areas shall be adequately illuminated.
General work areas - 50 foot-candles;
Fine work - 100 or more foot-candles.
72
There should be no shadows or reflected glare.
NOTE: See ILLUMINATION FOR OCCUPATIONAL TASKS for more information.
5.
INSPECTION
a.
Machines shall be inspected before each use. Areas of inspection include operating controls, safety
control, power drives and sharpness of cutting edges, and other parts to be used.
b.
Cutting edges and tools shall be kept sharp at all times. They shall also be properly adjusted and
secured.
c.
All shops and machines shall be inspected on a regular basis. See INSPECTION SCHEDULES
AND REPORTS for information on frequencies and inspection forms to use.
6.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
a.
Individuals in the work area shall wear eye protection at all times.
b.
All workers shall wear close-fitting apparel and avoid loose clothing, neck ties, gloves, and jewelry.
c.
Hair nets or caps shall be worn over long hair to keep it away from moving parts. Beards shall be
kept trimmed close to the face.
d.
Safety shoes shall be worn when handling heavy material or when there is potential for foot injury.
NOTE: See PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT for more information.
7.
CODE REFERENCES FOR WOODWORKING MACHINES
a.
OSHA 1910.213.
b.
American National Standard 01.1 and 0.1.a, "Safety Requirements for Woodworking Machinery".
M. GUIDE TO WOODWORKING
1.
TABLE SAW
a.
Feed with body to side of stock.
b.
Adjust blade to appropriate height.
c.
Use guard with splitter and anti-kickback fingers.
d.
Keep stock firm against fence.
e.
When crosscutting, remove ripfence.
f.
Make sure blade is guarded by approved guard.
2.
RADIAL ARM SAW
a.
Rip saw against the direction of the blade and use anti-kick fingers.
b.
Use blade guards.
c.
Make sure end plates are tight on track-arm.
d.
Make sure all clamps are tight.
e.
Make sure material is tight to fence.
f.
Return cutter to rear of track.
73
3.
BAND SAW
a.
Feed with body to side of stock.
b.
Guard height shall allow ½" clearance of material.
c.
A band saw should have a tension control device to indicate proper blade tension.
d.
Back off of blade and release cuts before long curves.
e.
Stop machine to remove scrap or pull out incomplete cut.
4.
JOINTER/PLANER
a.
Make sure knife projection which extend beyond this body of the head is not more than 1/3".
b.
Use long length stock.
c.
Use sharp cutters.
d.
Do not pass hands over cutters.
e.
Use push stick for small stock.
f.
Guard should adjust itself to the moving stock (swinging guard).
6.
WOOD SHAPER
a.
The stock should be clamped securely in place.
b.
Use correct guard.
c.
Feed into knives--do not back off.
d.
No feeding between fence and cutter.
e.
Collar and starting pin work for irregular work--stock of sufficient weight.
f.
Make sure fence opening is only enough to clear cutters.
g.
Use stock as guard by shaping the underside of stock.
h.
Make sure spindle nut is tight.
i.
Shape only pieces 10" or longer.
7. SANDER
a.
Keep hand from abrasive surface.
b.
Adequate exhaust system available.
c.
Belt or disk in good condition.
d.
Sand on downward side of disk.
8.
LATHE
a.
Stock without defects; glued joints dry. (When using V-Belt, power should be off when changing
speeds.)
b.
Make sure tool rest is close to stock.
c.
Hold tools firmly in both hands.
74
d.
Remove tool rest when sanding or polishing.
9.
CIRCULAR SAW BLADES FOR CUTTING WOOD
HOLLOW GROUND PLANER BLADES are for precision cross cutting, mitering, and rip-ping on all
woods, plywood, and laminates where the smoothest of cuts are desired.
MASTER COMBINATION BLADES are used for use on all woods, plywood, and wood base materials,
such as fiberboard and chip-board. This type blade is better for cross cut and mitering than for ripping
in solid woods. The teeth are set, and deep gullets are provided for cool and free sawing.
RIP BLADES are primarily intended for rip cuts in solid woods. The teeth are set and deep gullets are
provided for cool and free cutting.
PLYWOOD BLADES are fine tooth cross cut type blades intended for cross cutting of all woods,
plywood, veneers, and chip-board. It is especially recommended for cutting plywood where minimum
of splintering is desired. The teeth are set and sharpened to give a smooth but free-cutting blade.
CHISEL TOOTH COMBINATION BLADES are all-purpose blades for fast cutting of all wood where
the best of finish is not required. Ideal for use in cutting of heavy rough timbers, in framing of
buildings, etc. It cross cuts, rips, and miters equally well.
CABINET COMBINATION BLADES are for general cabinet and trim work in solid wood. It will cross
cut, rip, and miter hard and soft wood to give good accurate cuts for moldings, trim, cabinet work.
STANDARD COMBINATION BLADES are used for all hard and soft wood for cross cut, rip, or miter
cut. It is especially recommended for use on power miter boxes and for accurate molding and framing
work.
METAL-CUTTING BLADES
NONFERROUS METAL CUTTING BLADES are for cutting brass, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead,
bronze, etc. Blades are taper-ground and need no set. Use wax or lubricant on the blades for best
results.
STEEL SLICER BLADES are for cutting thin steel and sheet iron up to 3/32-inch (2.4 mm) thickness.
Not for use on nonferrous metals, wood, or plastic. This blade will give off sparks when cutting steel
because it cuts by friction. Always keep sawdust chips free of machine to prevent fires.
FLOORING BLADES are tungsten carbide-tipped blades especially designed for rough cutting where
occasional nails, metal lathe, etc. will be cut. It is especially recommended for the professional
carpenter or installer of air conditioning or heating ducts where it is necessary to cut through old walls
and floors. Always wear safety goggles when cutting metal.
N.
MACHINE SAFEGUARDING REQUIREMENTS
1.
FLYWHEELS
a.
All parts of flywheels which are 7' or less above the floor or working platform shall be guarded.
b.
Screens shall be placed in front of all flywheel spokes to protect against accidental contact by pipe,
bars, rods, and similar materials.
c.
Flywheel pits shall be surrounded with a standard railing and a toeboard not less than 6" high with
standard railing, toe-board, and spoke guard showing.
2.
MACHINE GUARDS
75
a.
Where guard or enclosure is within 2" of moving parts, openings through the guard shall not be
>3/8".
b.
If guards are >4" and less than <15" from moving parts, then the largest opening shall not be >2".
Where slatted guards are used, the opening shall not be >1".
c.
Inclined belt guards shall be installed so that the vertical clearance between the lower run of the belt
and the floor shall not be <7' at any point outside of the guard.
d.
Any panel in a guard exceeding 6 ft² or 42" in either dimension shall be supported by an additional
frame member.
e.
A standard railing placed not <15" nor >20" from a flywheel, is acceptable; but a railing shall not be
used where other types of guards are specifically required such as guards for gears, sprockets, and Vbelts.
f.
When frequent oiling must be done inside the guard, openings with hinged or sliding self-closing
covers shall be provided. All points not readily accessible shall have oil fed tubes or grease gun
connections outside the guard if lubricant is to be added while machinery is in motion.
g.
Self-lubricating bearings are recommended.
3.
DRIVES
GEARS, SPROCKETS, FRICTION
a.
All gears or sprockets shall be completely enclosed or shall be guarded with side flanges extending
inward beyond the roots of the teeth.
b.
All spokes on open web gears, sprockets, or friction drives shall be guarded to prevent accidental
contact.
c.
The contact points of all friction drives must be enclosed.
4.
DRIVES
BELT, CHAIN OR ROPE
a.
Single or multiple V-belts, located 7' or less from the floor or working platform shall be completely
enclosed.
b.
Belt, chain, or rope drives 7' or less above the floor or platform shall be guarded. The guard shall
extend to at least 15" above the belt or to a height of 7'; however, where both runs of a horizontal
belt are 42" or less from the floor, the belt shall be fully enclosed.
c.
Overhead horizontal drives with a lower run of 7' or less from the floor or platform shall be guarded
on the bottom and sides to a height of not <7', or 15" above the lower run.
d.
Horizontal flat belts and chain or rope drives, regardless of height above the floor or platform, shall
be guarded for the entire length if located over passageways or workplaces. The guards shall follow
the line of the pulley to the ceiling or to the nearest wall, thus enclosing the belt effectively. Where
this is impractical, the guard shall enclose the top and bottom runs of the belt and the faces of the
pulleys. The guards shall be of sufficient strength to restrain broken belts or drives.
5.
SHAFTING
a.
All horizontal shafting 7' or less from the floor, working platforms, or runways shall be guarded.
b.
All vertical or inclined shafting 7' or less from the floor, working platforms, or runways shall be
76
guarded.
c.
Shafting under benches or tables shall (1) be completely enclosed, or (2) be guarded by a trough
which shall extend at least 2" above or below the shafting; open space is not to exceed 6" below the
table or above the floor, or (3) be protected with a rigid guard from the underside of the bench to 2"
below the bottom line of shafting.
d.
Projecting shaft ends lower than 7' from the ceiling or story base shall either be cut off smooth
within one-half the diameter of the shaft or shall be guarded by a non-rotating guard.
e.
Unused keyways shall be filled, covered, or guarded.
6.
CONVEYORS
BELT
a.
Means for stopping the motor or engine shall be provided at the operator's station and also at the
motor or engine.
b.
Conveyor systems shall be equipped with an audible warning system to be sounded immediately
before starting up the conveyor.
c.
Emergency stop switches shall be arranged so that the conveyor cannot be started again until the
actuating loop switch has been reset to running or "ON" position.
d.
All conveyors passing over occupied locations shall be guarded so as to prevent material from
falling.
e.
All belt conveyor head, tail, tension, and dip take-up pulleys shall be guarded to cover the entire
sides of the pulleys and along the run of the belt a sufficient distance so that a person cannot reach
behind the guard and become caught in the nip point between the belt and pulley.
O.
GROUNDS MAINTENANCE
Prevention of accidents and injuries from tools and machines used in grounds maintenance
requires that equipment be chosen for a specific purpose and that it be used and maintained
properly. Fuel and chemicals shall be stored and used properly. Workers shall be thoroughly
trained and shall wear proper clothing and use protective equipment as required. (See "Personal
Protective Equipment".)
It is important that maintenance workers be able to recognize poisonous vines, shrubs, fruits, and
insects. (See "Poison Ivy and Oak".) They shall avoid contact with poison oak and ivy and
permanently destroy all poisonous growths. They shall guard against insects and infections, and
scrub hands thoroughly after working outdoors. All cuts and scratches received outdoors shall be
treated with proper antiseptic covering. All foreign matter such as glass, metal, and wire shall be
removed from the grounds to be maintained. Gloves, sturdy shoes, and appropriate garments for
protection shall be worn at all times.
1.
H
AND TOOLS
See "Safe Use of Hand and Portable Power Tools."
2.
77
G
ASOLINE POWERED EQUIPMENT
The following points shall be followed when handling gasoline:
a.
Gasoline shall never be used for cleaning floors, tools, clothes, or hands. Gasoline is to be used in
engines as a source of fuel only.
b.
Gasoline shall only be stored in approved closed containers. Never use an open container, glass, or
other breakable container.
c.
Pouring gasoline from one container to another may generate a charge of static electricity. A
metal-to- metal contact shall be maintained.
d.
Gasoline spills shall be cleaned up immediately to prevent accumulation of vapors. Do not allow
electrical switches to be turned on until the gasoline vapors have dispersed. Electrical devices that
start automatically such as cold water fountains may have to be shut off at the main switch if the
main switch can be pulled safely.
e.
If gasoline is spilled on a person, the saturated clothing shall be removed immediately and the person
kept away from sources of ignition. The affected area of the skin shall be washed with soap and
water to avoid a skin rash or irritation. If the eyes are involved, they shall be flushed with water
and get the person to a doctor.
f.
Gasoline tanks or equipment parts that are likely to contain gasoline shall be drained or dismantled
only out-of- doors or in a well-ventilated area free from sources of ignition.
g.
Smoking shall be allowed in approved areas only. Smoking shall not be allowed in fueling areas,
fuel system servicing areas, maintenance areas, bulk fuel delivery areas, etc.
h.
Gasoline shall not be dispensed into a fuel tank while the engine is running or the motor is hot.
i.
Equipment with fuel in the tank shall not be stored inside a building where vapors could reach an
open flame or spark. Allow the engine to cool before storing in any enclosure.
j.
Never run an engine indoors.
3.
LAWN TRIMMERS
a.
Edgers and trimmers shall be treated with the same caution as mowers because they, too, have a
heavy metal cutting blade that can throw debris or cut a finger.
b.
Guards shall be kept in place and in working order. Keep the blades sharp. Do not put hands near
the working area unless the machine is turned off and unplugged.
c.
Nylon-cord weed trimmers cannot hurt as seriously as metal- blade trimmers-edgers, but getting hit
by the line can sting. The operator shall disconnect the power cord when adjusting the cutter cord
length or changing the reel, applying the same precautions as with any electrical appliance. Care
shall be taken in wet areas and the cord checked periodically for cracks or breaks in the insulation.
d.
Gasoline-powered mowers and tractors shall meet the American National Standard B71.1, "Safety
Specifications for Power Lawn Mowers, Lawn and Garden Tractors, and Lawn Tractors". Snow
throwers shall meet ANSI B71.3, "Safety Specifications for Snow Throwers".
4.
a.
POWER LAWN MOWERS
Before starting, supervisors shall make sure the operator is well trained in using the mower. If it is
the first time the mower will be used that season, the operator shall review the instruction manual.
78
Before starting to mow, the operator shall pick up rocks, glass, tree branches and twigs, and any
other objects that could become lethal missiles if thrown out by the mower blade and observe the
location of fixed objects such as pipes, lawn sprinkler heads, and curbs that could damage the mower
or break off and become missiles. Any wheel height adjustment shall be made prior to starting the
mower; disconnect the spark plug wire when cleaning, repairing, or inspecting the mower.
Unauthorized persons shall not be allowed to be in the mowing area. The operator shall make a
quick inspection for loose nuts and bolts, check the engine oil level (if the mower has a separate oil
reservoir), and fill the fuel tank before starting. Using a vented can with a flex spout. The operator
shall wear work shoes and safety glasses. A brimmed hat, long pants and a long-sleeved shirt will
protect against sunburn.
b.
The operator shall be instructed to mow in daylight or good artificial light and to push the mower
forward as much as possible because feet can be injured when pulling a mower backward. When
mowing on a slope or terrace, a series of horizontal passes along the incline shall be used. If the
operator pushes up the incline, he/she runs the risk of having the mower drift back onto his/her foot.
If he pushes down, he/she could lose his footing and fall into the mower.
c.
The mower shall not be used when the grass is wet and slippery. If the grass is damp or high, cut at
a slower speed, if possible, and set the cutting height higher than for dry grass; otherwise, the
discharge chute may clog up.
d.
Rotary blades can also pick up stones, pieces of wire, nails, or other objects hiding in the grass, and
throw them out of the discharge chute at high speeds. Guards shall be in place every time the catcher
is not used.
e.
The operator shall shut off the engine and make certain that the blade has stopped completely before
taking off the grass catcher to empty it, attempting to free obstructions from the discharge chute,
adjusting the cutting height or performing any operation requiring him/her to put his/her hands or
feet near the blade.
5.
RIDING MOWERS
Suggested safe practices for riding mowers include the following:
a.
The operator shall be fully instructed in handling riding mowers. He/she shall know the controls,
know how to stop the machine quickly, and shall read the owner's manual--especially at the
beginning of each mowing season.
b.
The work area shall be cleared of objects that might be picked up and thrown. Fixed objects that
might damage the mower shall be identified. All areas cannot be reached by a riding mower; some
corners or sharp slopes will have to be mowed by a power mower. When planning landscaping,
leave enough space around new plantings for easy mower access and allow for future growth.
c.
Disengage all attachment clutches and shift into neutral before attempting to start the engine (motor).
Disengage power to attachments and stop the engine before making any repairs or adjustments.
Disengage the power to attachments when transporting them or when they are not in use. All
possible precautions shall be taken when leaving the vehicle unattended such as disengaging the
power takeoff, lowering the attachments, shifting into neutral, setting the parking brake, stopping the
engine, and removing the ignition key.
d.
When mowing, the operator shall stay alert for holes in the terrain and for other hidden hazards. Do
not start or stop suddenly when going uphill or downhill. Mow up and down the face of steep
slopes; never mow across as the wheelbase is longer than the thread so the unit is more stable that
79
way.
e.
Reduce speed on slopes and on sharp turns to prevent tipping or loss of control. Extreme caution
shall be used when changing direction, especially on slopes. Do not back up without looking to
make certain it is safe to do so. Watch for traffic when crossing or near roadways. When using
attachments, direct discharge of materials away from anything that could be hurt or damaged by it.
f.
Maintain vehicle and attachments in good operating condition and keep safety devices in place.
Keep all nuts, bolts, and screws tight, and make sure the equipment is in safe working condition;
check especially blade mounting bolts. If the vehicle or its attachments strike a solid object, stop and
inspect for damage; the damage shall be repaired before restarting and operating the equipment. The
engine governor settings shall not be changes; the engine shall not be over speeded; discharge guards
shall always be in the down position.
6.
GARDEN TRACTORS:
a.
Garden tractors shall have safeguards for all moving parts to reduce the hazard of contacting belts,
chains, pulleys, and gears.
b.
Garden tractors shall have a throttle, gears, and brakes that are accessible and can be operated
smoothly with minimum effort.
c.
Safety instructions shall be provided with the garden tractor. There shall be warning labels on the
machine itself.
d.
The operator shall read the owner's manual and shall reread its recommendations before each use of
the garden tractor.
e.
Never allow children or unauthorized persons to operate the tractor and keep them away from these
areas during operation.
f.
The operator shall wear sturdy, rough-soled work shoes, and close-fitting slacks and shirts to avoid
entanglement in the moving parts. He/she shall never operate a garden tractor in bare feet, sandals,
or sneakers.
g.
The machine shall be turned off and the spark plug wire disconnected when the machine is to be
adjusted.
h.
The operator shall always drive up and down the slopes--rather than across when using a garden
tractor on a hill for greater stability. (This instruction is different than that for power lawn-mowers.)
i.
Garden tractors shall be started outdoors, not in a garage where carbon monoxide gas can collect.
j.
No smoking shall be allowed near the garden tractor or gasoline storage can.
k.
Unauthorized persons shall be kept away from the machines and the fuel.
l.
All loose or broken parts, especially blades shall be tightened or replaced.
m.
Get expert servicing regularly; it may prevent serious injuries.
n.
Bypass starting of tractors shall not be allowed. (See Section, "Bypass Starting of Tractors.")
7.
PESTICIDES
Insecticides, herbicides, fungicides, disinfectants, rodenticides, and animal repellents are all
pesticides. The safe use of pesticides is everyone's responsibility. The user, however, has the
major responsibility which begins the day a pesticide is selected and purchased and continues
80
until the empty container has been disposed of properly.
All labels shall include a list of what the product will control, directions on how to apply the
pesticide, a warning of potential hazards, and safety measures to follow.
Before using any pesticide poison, read the label carefully. The label states the hazards involved,
antidotes, and first aid instructions. Those poisons that have DANGER-POISON on the label are
highly toxic. If inhaled, eaten, or allowed to frequently remain on skin, they could kill. Poisons
that have WARNING on the label are moderately toxic and can be quite hazardous. Poisons that
have CAUTION on the label have low toxicity, but could cause harm if the poison is eaten or
grossly misused. Label instructions for mixing, handling, and applying shall be followed. BE
SURE--DO NOT GUESS.
a.
Application: Any restricted-use pesticide used around a plant shall be applied by a certified handler
according to law (Public Law 92.516).
b.
The least toxic pesticide shall be used for the job in order to reduce hazards.
c.
Only enough pesticide to last one season shall be purchased. This cuts down on storage and
disposal problems. The following precautions shall be observed:
i.
Use pesticide poisons only for the purposes stated on the label.
ii.
Keep pesticide poisons in the original labeled container. Check for leaks or container
damage.
iii.
Mix pesticide poisons carefully (outdoors if possible), keep off skin, and avoid breathing dust
or vapors. Use protective clothing and equipment including respirators for toxic chemicals.
See "Personal Protective Equipment."
iv.
Set aside a special set of mixing tools (measuring spoons and a graduated measuring cup) for
use with sprays and dusts only. Keep them with the chemicals.
v.
Avoid spilling. Set aside a level shelf or bench in a well-ventilated area, preferably outside,
for mixing chemicals. A level, uncluttered surface helps avoid spills. If chemicals do spill,
wash hands at once with soap and water. Then hose down the mixing area and contact the
Office of Campus Safety.
vi.
Never smoke or eat while spraying or dusting.
vii. Someone shall always be "in attendance" when pesticides are being used.
viii. During application, stay out of the spray drift. Avoid outside application on a windy day.
d.
ix.
If pesticide poison gets on skin or clothing, immediately remove clothing and take an all-over
bath or shower; be sure to shampoo and use plenty of soap and water. Wash clothing before
reuse and contact Campus Safety.
x.
When finished, wash immediately with soap and water. Do not smoke, eat, or drink without
washing first.
xi.
Never allow unauthorized personnel around treated areas or pesticide poison mixing, storage,
and disposal area.
Safe Storage:
i.
Pesticide poisons shall be stored in a well ventilated, locked area or building. Packages that
81
are likely to be damaged by dampness shall be kept off the floor.
ii.
Poisons shall be kept in tightly closed, original containers. The label gives information
needed in case of accidents. Do not store pesticides in other containers.
iii.
Do not store clothing, respirators, lunches, cigarettes, or drinks with pesticide poisons. They
may pick up poisonous vapors or dusts or soak up spilled poisons.
iv.
Keep soap and plenty of water handy. Seconds count when washing poisons from the skin.
e.
Disposal: Dispose of pesticides through the LSU Hazardous Waste Program only. See "Hazardous
Waste Program."
f.
Emergency Information:
If an emergency occurs, additional advice and information on antidotes for specific pesticides may
be obtained from the Student Health Center or a local hospital. Telephone numbers shall be
conspicuously posted.
8.
POISON IVY AND POISON OAK
All maintenance workers shall be trained to recognize poison ivy and poison oak.
a.
Poison Ivy grows as a vine up to 50' long or as a small plant. The leaves of this plant always grow
in groups of three. The leaves of poison ivy are green in late spring and summer; reddish in the
early spring, late summer, and fall.
b.
Poison Oak is most commonly a bush, although it sometimes grows as a vine up to 30' long. The
leaves always grow in groups of three and are green in late spring and summer; reddish in early
spring, late summer, and fall.
c.
Exposure to poison ivy or oak can be acute (short-term) or chronic (long-term). Acute exposure is
received by touching the plant, swallowing parts of the plant, or inhaling smoke of the burning plant.
Local signs and symptoms begin 12 hours to 7 days after exposure. Chronic exposure (repeated
exposure) increases the severity of the symptoms which could lead to severe poisoning.
d.
Symptoms include itching, swelling, blister formation, oozing, and crusting. Generalized signs and
symptoms include fluid accumulation, weakness, malaise, and fever.
e.
Prevention:
i.
Employees shall be able to recognize these poisonous plants and know how to avoid them.
ii.
If exposure is possible, heavy clothes and leather gloves shall be used.
iii.
Upon exposure, the employee shall wash thoroughly with soap and water, and remove all
contaminated clothing for washing.
NOTE:
f.
Ingesting of poisonous plants does not help achieve immunity.
Treatment:
Upon exposure, the employee shall wash thoroughly with soap and water and be brought to the
Student Health Center for evaluation.
82
P.
WATER VESSEL OPERATION
1.
INSPECTION
a.
Operators shall be responsible for visually checking the water vessel for safety prior to placing it in
motion. Each vessel’s safety features should be checked before use each day, using the checklist
provided by the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
b.
Department supervisors shall be responsible for assuring that fluid levels and safety equipment are
checked at least weekly for vessels used on a routine basis. Other vehicles should be checked before
each use.
2.
TRAINING
Employees and others authorized to operate water vessels on state business shall be trained in the
water vessel safety course, and have their Louisiana Department of Wildlife & Fisheries’ vessel
operation records checked in accordance with the LSU Water Vessel Safety Program.
3.
ACCIDENTS
Accidents in state vessels and in personal vessels being used for state purposes shall be reported as
soon as possible to the appropriate supervisor.
4.
GENERAL
a.
A float plan shall be developed and shared/discussed with the supervisor and other agencies as
appropriate for the trip.
b.
Speed limits and wake production considerations shall be observed by operators at all times.
c.
Water vessels shall not be operated in excess of load and passenger ratings.
d.
State and federal laws and regulations shall be followed at all times during operation of water
vessels.
e.
Personal flotation devices shall be worn by operator and passengers while the water vessel is in
transit and during activities where the potential for drowning exists due to unintentional entry into
the water.
f.
Operators and passengers shall be cognizant at all times of the potential for fires and explosions
aboard the water vessel. Activities which involve ignition sources and flammable materials shall be
conducted in a safe manner.
g.
Operation in threatening and dangerous weather shall be performed only as necessary and only with
the express permission of the supervisor or in emergency situations.
5.
WATER VESSEL SAFETY PROGRAM
The L.S.U. Safe Vessel Operation Program shall be followed by all employees and can be found in
the appendix.
83
Q.
VEHICLE OPERATION
1.
INSPECTION
a.
Operators shall be responsible for visually checking the vehicle for safety prior to placing it in
motion. Each vehicle’s safety features should be checked before use each day, using the appropriate
checklist for each department.
b.
Department supervisors shall be responsible for assuring that fluid levels are checked at least weekly
for vehicles used on a routine basis. Other vehicles should be checked before each use.
3.
TRAINING
a.
Operators of vehicles must be properly licenced for the vehicle being driven. For example, drivers
of vans and buses which carry 16 or more passengers must have a commercial drivers license with
passenger endorsement.
b.
All vehicle operator shall be trained and have motor vehicle records checked in accordance with the
Safe Driver Program located in the appendix.
4.
ACCIDENTS
Accidents in state vehicles and in personal vehicles being used for state purposes shall be reported as
soon as possible to the appropriate supervisor.
5.
GENERAL
a.
Vehicle operators shall know and observe all traffic laws.
b.
At least a 2 second following distance will be kept at all times. Following distances will be
increased in adverse conditions to at least 3 seconds.
6.
SAFE DRIVERS PROGRAM
The L.S.U. Safe Driver Program shall be followed by all employees and can be found the appendix.
84
V.
INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE
A.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
1.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION
Development, Preparedness, and Response Rules
(Act 435 of the 1985 Louisiana Legislative Regular Session)
The purpose of the Act is to insure that the hazards of all chemicals produced, imported, consumed,
applied, transported, stored, or emitted in Louisiana are communicated to appropriate emergency
response organizations, local information repositories, and to the general public upon request.
OES’s role in responding to the requirements of this Act is covered in Section VII of the manual.
2.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
a.
General Program Information
The purpose of this program is to make employees aware of the hazards of chemicals and provide
them information on how to protect themselves. The LSU written Hazard Communication Plan can
be found in the Appendix. This plan has been developed based on the OSHA Hazard
Communication Standard and addresses hazardous material identification, use of material safety data
sheets, employee training, and labeling.
b.
Responsibilities
i.
Deans, Directors, Department Chairs, Principal Investigators, Managers and Supervisors
shall:
1)
2)
ii.
Comply with the specific requirements of the program.
Maintain a current list of chemicals in the work place. Update the list on an ongoing
basis via the Internet.
3)
Ensure that minimum amounts of chemicals are maintained in the workplace.
4)
Ensure that MSDSs are readily available to employees.
5)
Ensure that necessary physical or toxic warning signs are posted in those areas where
special notices are required.
6)
Ensure that each work area requiring specific personal protective equipment is posted
with appropriate warning signs. Department Heads/Supervisors shall make appropriate
personal protective equipment available as needed.
7)
Inform any contractor working in their area of chemicals to which their employees are
exposed. Contractors must reciprocate on chemicals used in their work. MSDS
information shall be exchanged.
8)
Train their employees regarding the chemicals in the workplace, the location and
operation of controls, procedures used to protect themselves and other workers,
emergency plans and location of MSDS or information related to chemicals in the
workplace. (Note: Much of the above can be handled in safety meetings.)
The Occupational and Environmental Safety Office is responsible for:
1
iii.
iv.
1)
Establishment of an MSDS library/access system via the Internet.
2)
Assisting departments in determining proper use, storage and labeling of chemicals.
3)
Assisting departments with employee training. This shall be coordinated through the
Safety and Environmental Training Officer.
4)
Assessing chemical inventories provided by LSU departments and ensure that
MSDSs are available via the Internet.
University Stores shall:
1)
Ensure that each container of a chemical received is properly labeled.
2)
Ensure that each container of a chemical shipped to departments is properly labeled.
3)
Ensure employees are properly trained in handling chemicals and in spill response.
Employees shall:
1) Learn about the chemical and physical hazards of chemicals in their workplace and how to
protect themselves.
2) Comply with the chemical safety requirements of LSU’s hazard communication program
and the MSDS sheets for a particular chemical.
3) Immediately report spills or suspected spills of chemicals.
4) Report any problems with storage or use of chemicals.
5) Use only those chemicals for which they have received training.
6) Use chemicals only for the tasks designated and covered in standard operating procedures,
and protect other employees from these hazards.
7) Inform their supervisors of changes in operations that could affect the safety and health of
the job site or work area.
8) Use personal protective equipment as specified by the MSDS.
v.
c.
Contractors’ responsibilities:
1)
Comply with all aspects of LSU’s Hazard Communication Program and OSHA’s Hazard
Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200.
2)
Ensure Contractor employees are properly trained.
3)
Monitor and ensure proper storage and use of chemicals by Contractor employees.
4)
Properly dispose of chemicals and hazardous waste.
Training Program
Department Heads/Supervisors shall provide training to affected employees annually, or when
changes in operations warrant. Occupational and Environmental Safety can assist in this effort. The
training shall include the following points:
i.
Physical and health hazards of the chemicals or materials in the workplace and all information
on the MSDS that may affect employees.
ii.
Methods that may be used to detect the presence of a chemical or material by visual
appearance, odor, irritation (skin, headaches, coughing).
2
iii.
Measures used to protect the employee (engineering design, barriers, ventilation, operating
procedures, special training, etc.).
iv.
Measures employees can take to protect themselves from exposure (work practices,
respiratory equipment, eye protection, other personal protective equipment, special training,
etc.).
v.
Details of the Hazard Communication Program.
An outline of a hazard communication training program is contained in the appendix.
3.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DEFINITIONS
a.
CHEMICAL
"Chemical" means any element, chemical compound or mixture of elements and/or compounds.
b.
COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID
"Combustible liquid" means any liquid having a flashpoint at or above 100 deg. F (37.8 deg. C), but
below 200 deg. F (93.3 deg. C), except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 deg.
F (93.3 deg. C), or higher, the total volume of which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume
of the mixture.
c.
d.
COMPRESSED GASES
i.
A gas or mixture of gases having, in a container, an absolute pressure exceeding 40 psi at 70
deg. F (21.1 deg. C); or
ii.
A gas or mixture of gases having, in a container, an absolute pressure exceeding 104 psi at
130 deg. F (54.4 deg. C) regardless of the pressure at 70 deg. F (21.1 deg. C); or
iii.
A liquid having a vapor pressure exceeding 40 psi at 100 deg. F (37.8 deg. C) as determined
by ASTM D-323-72.
CONTAINER
"Container" means any bag, barrel, bottle, box, can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel, storage tank, or
the like that contains a hazardous chemical. For purposes of this section, pipes or piping systems,
and engines, fuel tanks, or other operating systems in a vehicle, are not considered to be containers.
e.
EXPLOSIVE
"Explosive" means a chemical that causes a sudden, almost instantaneous release of pressure, gas,
and heat when subjected to sudden shock, pressure, or high temperature.
f.
EXPOSURE OR EXPOSED
"Exposure or exposed" means that an employee is subjected in the course of employment to a
chemical that is a physical or health hazard, and includes potential (e.g. accidental or possible)
exposure. "Subjected" in terms of health hazards includes any route of entry (e.g. inhalation,
ingestion, skin contact or absorption.)
g.
FLAMMABLE
"Flammable" means a chemical that falls into one of the following categories:
i.
"Aerosol, flammable" means an aerosol that, when tested by the an approved method
described yields a flame projection exceeding 18 inches at full valve opening, or a flashback
(a flame extending back to the valve) at any degree of valve opening;
3
ii.
h.
"Gas, flammable" means:
1)
A gas that, at ambient
temperature and pressure, forms a flammable mixture with air at a concentration of
thirteen (13) percent by volume or less; or
2)
A gas that, at ambient
temperature and pressure, forms a range of flammable mixtures with air wider than
twelve (12) percent by volume, regardless of the lower limit;
iii.
"Liquid, flammable" means any liquid having a flashpoint below 100 deg. F (37.8 deg. C),
except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 100 deg. F (37.8 deg. C) or higher,
the total of which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture.
iv.
"Solid, flammable" means a solid, other than a blasting agent or explosive, that is liable to
cause fire through friction, absorption of moisture, spontaneous chemical change, or retained
heat from manufacturing or processing, or which can be ignited readily and when ignited
burns so vigorously and persistently as to create a serious hazard. A chemical shall be
considered to be a flammable solid if, when tested by an approved method, it ignites and
burns with a self-sustained flame at a rate greater than one-tenth of an inch per second along
its major axis.
FLASHPOINT
"Flashpoint" means the minimum temperature at which a liquid gives off a vapor in sufficient
concentration to ignite when tested as follows:
i.
Tagliabue Closed Tester (See American National Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by
Tag Closed Tester, Z11.24-1979 (ASTM D 56-79)) for liquids with a viscosity of less than 45
Saybolt Universal Seconds (SUS) at 100 deg. F (37.8 deg. C), that do not contain suspended
solids and do not have a tendency to form a surface film under test; or
ii.
Pensky-Martens Closed Tester (see American National Standard Method of Test for Flash
Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Tester, Z11.7-1979 (ASTM D 93-79)) for liquids with a
viscosity equal to or greater than 45 SUS at 100 deg. F (37.8 deg. C), or that contain
suspended solids, or that have a tendency to form a surface film under test; or
iii.
Setaflash Closed Tester (see American National Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by
Setaflash Closed Tester (ASTM D 3278-78)).
Organic peroxides, which undergo autoaccelerating thermal decomposition, are excluded
from any of the flashpoint determination methods specified above.
i.
HAZARD WARNING
"Hazard warning" means any words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof appearing on a label
or other appropriate form of warning which convey the specific physical and health hazard(s),
including target organ effects, of the chemical(s) in the container(s). (See the definitions for
"physical hazard" and "health hazard" to determine the hazards which must be covered.)
j.
HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL
"Hazardous chemical" means any chemical which is a physical hazard or a health hazard.
k.
HEALTH HAZARD
"Health hazard" means a chemical for which there is statistically significant evidence based on at
4
least one study conducted in accordance with established scientific principles that acute or chronic
health effects may occur in exposed employees. The term "health hazard" includes chemicals which
are carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, corrosives, sensitizers,
hepatotoxins, nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents which act on the hematopoietic system, and agents
which damage the lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous membranes. Appendix A provides further definitions
and explanations of the scope of health hazards covered by this section, and Appendix B describes
the criteria to be used to determine whether or not a chemical is to be considered hazardous for
purposes of this standard.
l.
THE NFPA HAZARD IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (DIAMOND)
RED
FIRE
BLUE
YELLOW
HEALTH
REACTIVITY
WHITE
COLORLESS
Numerical rating from 0-4 with the hazards becoming more extreme as they are upscaled.
HEALTH--BLUE
4 A few whiffs of the gas or vapor could cause death; liquid penetration could be fatal.
3 Material is extremely dangerous, but area may be entered if fully protected.
2 Material hazardous to health, but area may be entered freely if SCBA is used.
1 Material is only slightly hazardous to health.
0 Material offers no health hazard.
FIRE--RED
4 Flash point below 73 deg F.
3 Flash point below 100 deg F.
2 Flash point between 100 and 200 deg F.
1 Flash point above 200 deg F.
0 Materials that will not burn.
REACTIVITY--YELLOW
4 May detonate
3 Shock and heat may detonate
2 Violent chemical change
1 Unstable if heated
0 Stable.
COLORLESS
Special reactive materials such as:
Oxidizers: OX
Corrosive: CORR
Radiation:
Water Reactive: -W-
5
m.
ORGANIC PEROXIDE
"Organic peroxide" means an organic compound that contains the bivalent -O-O-structure and which
may be considered to be a structural derivative of hydrogen peroxide where one or both of the
hydrogen atoms has been replaced by an organic radical.
n.
OXIDIZER
"Oxidizer" means a chemical other than a blasting agent or explosive as defined in 1910.109(a), that
initiates or promotes combustion in other materials, thereby causing fire either of itself or through
the release of oxygen or other gases.
o.
PHYSICAL HAZARD
"Physical hazard" means a chemical for which there is scientifically valid evidence that it is a
combustible liquid, a compressed gas, explosive, flammable, an organic peroxide, an oxidizer,
pyrophoric, unstable (reactive) or water-reactive.
p.
PYROPHORIC
"Pyrophoric" means a chemical that will ignite spontaneously in air at a temperature of 130 deg. F
(54.4 deg. C) or below.
q.
REACTIVE CHEMICALS
"Unstable (reactive)" means a chemical which in the pure state, or as produced or transported, will
vigorously polymerize, decompose, condense, or will become self-reactive under conditions of
shocks, pressure or temperature. "Water-reactive" means a chemical that reacts with water to release
a gas that is either flammable or presents a health hazard.
4.
CHEMICAL HANDLING AND STORAGE
a.
General Considerations
i.
Avoid storing equipment and material on top of cabinets.
ii.
Do not store materials on top of high cabinets where they will be difficult to reach.
iii.
Keep exits, passageways, areas under tables or benches, and emergency equipment areas free
of stored equipment and materials.
iv.
Label all chemical containers appropriately.
v.
Place the users name and the date received on all purchased materials in order to facilitate
inventory control of the materials.
vi.
Provide a definite storage place for each chemical and return the chemical to that location
after each use.
vii.
Avoid storing chemicals on bench tops, except of those chemicals being used currently.
viii. Avoid storing chemicals in laboratory hoods, except for those being used currently.
ix.
Store volatile toxins and odoriferous chemicals in a ventilated cabinet. Check with the
institution’s environmental health and safety officer.
x.
Provide ventilated storage near laboratory hoods.
xi.
If a chemical does not require a ventilated cabinet, store it inside a closable cabinet or on a
shelf that has a lip to prevent containers from sliding off in the event of a fire, serious
6
accident, or earthquake.
xii.
Do not expose stored chemicals to heat or direct sunlight.
xiii. Observe all precautions regarding the storage of incompatible chemicals.
xiv. Separate chemicals into compatible groups and store alphabetically within compatible groups.
See below for one suggested method for arranging chemicals in this way.
Related and Compatible Storage Groups
Inorganic Family
Nitric acid, other inorganic acids
Metals, hydrides
Sulfur, phosphorus, arsenic, phosphorus
pentoxide
Halides, sulfates, sulfites, thiosulfates,
phosphates, halogens
Organic Family
Amides, nitrates (except ammonium
nitrate), nitrites, azides
Acids, anhydrides, peracids
Alcohols, glycols, amines, amides,
imines, imides
Hydroxides, oxides, silicates,
carbonates, carbon
Hydrocarbons, esters, aldehydes
Sulfides, selenides, phosphides,
carbides, nitrides
Ethers, ketones, ketenes, halogenated
hydrocarbons, ethylene oxide
Chlorates, perchlorates, perchloric
acid, chlorites, hypochlorites,
peroxides, hydrogen peroxide
Epoxy compounds, isocyanates
Peroxides, hydroperoxides, azides
Sulfides, polysulfides, sulfoxides,
nitrites
Arsenates, cyanides, cyanates
Borates, chromates, manganates,
permanganates,
Phenols, cresols
xv.
b.
Store flammable liquids in approved flammable liquid storage cabinets.
Containers and Equipment
i.
Use corrosion-resistant storage trays or secondary containers to retain materials if the primary
container breaks or leaks.
ii.
Provide vented cabinets beneath laboratory hoods for storing hazardous materials. (This
encourages the use of the hoods for transferring such materials.)
iii.
Use chemical storage refrigerators only for storing chemicals.
iv.
Label these refrigerators with the following signage: NO FOOD-CHEMICAL STORAGE
v.
Seal containers to minimize escape of corrosive, flammable, or toxic vapors.
vi.
Label all materials in the refrigerator with contents, owner, date of acquisition or preparation,
and nature of any potential hazard.
vii.
Do not store flammable liquids in a refrigerator unless if is approved of such storage. Such
refrigerators are designed not to spark inside the refrigerator. If refrigerated storage is needed
7
inside a flammable-storage room, it is advisable to choose an explosion-proof refrigerator.
c.
Storing Highly Reactive Substances
i.
Consider the storage requirements of each highly reactive chemical prior to bringing it into the
laboratory.
ii.
Consult the MSDSs or other literature in making decisions about storage of highly reactive
chemicals.
iii.
Bring into the laboratory only the quantities of material you will need for your immediate
purposes (less than 3- to 6-month supply, the length depending on the nature and sensitivity of
the materials).
iv.
Label, date, and inventory all highly reactive materials as soon as received. Make sure the
label states, DANGER! HIGHLY REACTIVE MATERIAL!
v.
Do not open a container of highly reactive material that is past its expiration date. Call your
institution’s hazardous waste coordinator for special institution’s hazardous waste coordinator
for special instructions.
vi.
Do not open a liquid organic peroxide or peroxide former if crystals or a precipitate are
present. Call your institution’s hazardous waste coordinator for special instructions.
vii.
Dispose of (or recycle) highly reactive material prior to expiration date.
viii. Segregate the following materials:
1)
oxidizing agents from reducing agents and combustibles
2)
powerful reducing agents from readily reducible substrates
3)
pyrophoric compounds from flammables, and
4)
perchloric acid from reducing agents.
ix.
Store highly reactive liquids in trays large enough to hold the contents of the bottles.
x.
Store percholric acid bottles in glass or ceramic trays.
xii.
Store peroxidizable materials away from heat and light.
xiii. Store materials that react vigorously with water away from possible contact with water.
xiv. Store thermally unstable materials in a refrigerator. Use a refrigerator with these safety
features:
xv.
1)
all spark-producing controls on the outside,
2)
a magnetic locked door, and
3)
an alarm to warn when the temperature is too high.
Store liquid organic peroxides at the lowest possible temperature consistent with the solubility
or freezing point. Liquid peroxides are particularly sensitive during phase changes.
xvi. Inspect and test-peroxide-forming chemicals periodically (these should be labeled with an
acquisition or expiration date) and discard containers that have exceeded their safe storage
lifetime.
xvii. Store particularly sensitive materials or larger amounts of explosive materials in explosive
relief boxes.
8
xviii. Restrict access to the storage facility.
xix. Assign responsibility for the storage facility to one primary person and a backup person.
Review this responsibility at least yearly.
d.
Storing Toxic Substances
i.
Store chemicals known to be highly toxic (including carcinogens) in ventilated storage in
unbreakable, chemically resistant secondary containers.
ii.
Keep quantities at a minimum working level.
iii.
Label storage areas with appropriate warning signs, such as:
CAUTION! REPRODUCTIVE TOXIN STORAGE or
CAUTION! CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT STORAGE
5.
BIOHAZARD CONTROL
This section presents certain safety requirements for handling specific hazardous microorganisms. These
requirements are based on present knowledge and shall change as research continues and new standards
are developed. All activities within labs where biohazards exist must operate under the CDC/NIH
guidelines for biosafety. These guidelines are on the OES web page. The operational requirements serve,
in part, to indicate what facilities and resources should be made available to minimize hazards in work
with specific microorganisms.
a.
General Guidelines.
i.
Authorized Personnel
Only authorized employees, students, and visitors shall be allowed to enter infectious disease
laboratories or utility rooms.
ii.
Autoclaving
1) All infectious or toxic materials, equipment, or apparatus shall be autoclaved or otherwise
disinfected before being washed or disposed of. Each individual working with infectious
material shall be responsible for its disinfection before disposal.
2) Infectious or toxic materials shall not be placed in autoclaves overnight in anticipation of
autoclaving the next day.
3) Autoclaves shall be checked for operating efficiency if spore formers are used.
iii.
Building Vacuum Line
When the building vacuum line is used, suitable traps or filters shall be interposed to insure
that pathogens do not enter the fixed system.
iv.
Centrifuging, Sonication, Separation--Aerosol Precautions
1) Before centrifuging, inspect tubes for cracks; inspect the inside of the trunnion cup for
rough walls caused by erosion of adhering matter; and carefully remove bits of glass
from the rubber cushion. A germicidal solution added between the tube and trunnion
cup not only disinfects the outer surface of both of these but also provides an excellent
cushion against shocks that might otherwise break the tube.
9
2) Avoid decanting centrifuge tubes. If you must do so, wipe off the outer rim with a
disinfectant afterwards; otherwise, the infectious fluid will spin off as an aerosol. Avoid
filling the tube to the point that the rim becomes wet with culture.
3) A ventilated and filtered safety centrifuge cabinet is recommended to house and safeguard
all centrifuging of infectious substances. Use a safety centrifuge cup. Centrifuging shall
always be done in closed containers and, whenever possible, in closed centrifuge heads.
When centrifuging is done in a ventilated glove box, the glove panel shall be in place
with the glove ports covered. A centrifuge in operation creates reverse air currents that
may cause escape of agent from an open cabinet.
4) An aerosol containment hood or enclosure shall be provided for sonicators, cream
separators, and similar aerosol producing apparatus.
v.
Containers--Protective
1) Insure that all virulent fluid cultures or viable powdered infectious materials in glass
vessels are transported, incubated, and stored in easily-handled, non-breakable,
leak-proof containers that are large enough to contain all fluid or powder in case of
leakage or breakage of the glass vessel.
2) All inoculated Petri plates or other inoculated solid media shall be transported and
incubated in leak-proof pans or other leak-proof containers.
vi.
Emergencies
1) No person shall work alone on an extremely hazardous operation. Use the "buddy
system."
2) Prepared solutions of suitable disinfectants, along with instructions for use, should be
maintained in each laboratory in a conspicuous location. The location should be labeled
"Disinfectants for Emergency Use."
3) An Emergency Notification Sign, available from the Office of Occupational and
Environmental Safety, shall be posted by the responsible researcher on the exterior door
of each lab giving instructions to follow in the event of an emergency such as a fire or
spill. Instructions shall emphasize precautionary measures. Biohazard signs must be
posted on lab doors.
vii.
Floors and Other Surfaces
1) Floors, laboratory benches, and other surfaces in the buildings in which infectious
substances are handled shall be disinfected with a suitable germicide as often as deemed
necessary by the supervisors or as directed by CDC/NIH guidelines. After completion
of operations involving planting, pipetting, centrifuging, lyophilizing, and similar
procedures with infectious agents, the surroundings shall be disinfected.
2) Floor drains throughout the building shall be flooded with water, glycol, or a safe
disinfectant at least once a week in order to fill traps and prevent backflow of sewer
gases.
3) Elimination of sweeping through use of vacuum cleaners utilizing absolute filters or
through wet mopping only is recommended. If floors are swept, use push brooms only.
The use of a floor sweeping compound is recommended because of its effectiveness in
lowering the number of airborne organisms. Water used to mop floors shall contain
10
suitable disinfectants. Custodial services in Biosafety Level 3 or 4 labs shall be
performed by laboratory personnel only--not by Facility Services or University
contractors.
viii. Hygiene
1) Develop the habit of keeping your hands away from your mouth, nose, eyes, and face.
This may prevent self-inoculation.
2) Deepfreeze and dry ice chests and refrigerators shall be checked and cleaned out
periodically to remove broken ampules, tubes, etc., containing infectious material. A
tray can be used to line the bottom of the refrigerator or freezer to catch and retain
broken containers.
3) Library books and journals shall not be taken into rooms where work with infectious
agents is in progress.
4) An effort shall be made to keep all other surplus materials and equipment out of these
rooms.
5) According to the level of risk, the wearing of laboratory or protective clothing may be
required for persons entering infectious disease laboratories. Likewise, showers with a
germicidal soap may be required before exit.
6) Contaminated laboratory clothing shall not be worn in clean areas or outside the building.
ix.
Labeling
All laboratory rooms containing infectious sub-stances shall designate separate areas or
shelters labeled: "INFECTIOUS--TO BE AUTOCLAVED," or "NOT INFECTIOUS--TO
BE CLEANED." All infectious disease work areas including cabinetry shall be prominently
marked with the Biohazard Warning Control symbol. Cultures shall be labeled with the
name of the agent, researchers' names, and date.
x.
Membrane Filters
Care shall be exercised in the use of membrane filters to obtain sterile filtrates of infectious
materials. Because of the fragility of the membrane and other factors, such filtrates cannot be
handled as noninfectious until culture or other tests have proven their sterility.
xi.
Personal Protective Equipment
1) A respirator or gas mask shall be worn when changing a glove or gloves attached to a
safety cabinet if an infectious aerosol may possibly be present in the cabinet. See
"Personal Protective Equipment."
2) Diagnostic serum specimens carrying a risk of serum hepatitis shall be handled with
rubber gloves.
xii.
Pest Control
Pest and rodent control must be maintained. (See CDC/NIH Guidelines)All laboratories shall
be sprayed with insecticides as often as necessary to control flies and other insects. Consult
Physical Plant pesticide control personnel for spraying. Advise them of hazards in the
laboratory before work begins and exercise adequate control of entry and activity as permitted
under the lab classification.
xiii. Pipettes
11
1)
No infectious materials shall be pipetted by mouth or blown out of a pipette. Do
not use a pipette for mixing or for bubbling air through an infectious mixture. Hand
pipetting devices shall be used to pipette all microorganisms, tissue, cell cultures,
caustic or corrosive chemicals, poisons, organic solvents, radioactive materials,
mutagens, carcinogens, or teratogens.
2) Contaminated pipettes shall be placed horizontally in a pan containing enough suitable
disinfectant to allow complete immersion. They shall not be placed vertically in a
cylinder. The pan and pipette shall be autoclaved as a unit and replaced by a clean pan
with fresh disinfectant.
xiv. Syringes
1) Only syringes of the Luer-Lok type shall be used with infectious materials.
2) Use an alcohol-soaked pledget around the stopper and needle when removing a syringe
and needle from a rubber-stoppered vaccine bottle.
3) Expel excess fluid and bubbles from a syringe vertically into a cotton pledget soaked with
disinfectant or into a small bottle or cotton.
4) Syringes and needles shall be autoclaved and destroyed before disposal into special waste
containers (not into the "trash"). Blunt needles (cannulas) shall be used wherever sharp
needles are not required.
xv.
Shakers
1) A safety box or safety shaker tray shall be used to house or safeguard all containers of
infectious substances on shaking machines.
2) Broth cultures shall be taken in a manner that avoids wetting the plug or cap.
xvi. Smoking, Eating, and Drinking
1) Food, candy, gum, or beverages for human consumption shall not be taken into infectious
disease or recombinant DNA research laboratories. Smoking shall not be permitted in
any area in which work with infectious or toxic substances is performed. Employees
who have been working with infectious materials shall wash and disinfect their hands
thoroughly before smoking, eating, or drinking. See "Consumption of Food and
Beverages."
2) Industrial water from lab sinks shall not be used for human consumption.
xvii. Storage
At the close of each workday, to minimize hazard to fireman, maintenance personnel, or
emergency crews, all infectious or toxic material shall be:
1) placed in the refrigerator,
2) placed in the incubator, or
3) autoclaved or otherwise disinfected before the building is closed.
xviii. Wastes
1) No infectious substances shall be allowed to enter a building drainage or refuse disposal
system without proper sterilization.
12
2) Mechanical garbage disposal units shall not be installed for use in disposing of
contaminated wastes. The units release considerable amounts of aerosol.
xix. Water Baths and Warburg Baths
Water baths and warburg baths used to inactivate, incubate, or test infectious substances
shall contain a suitable disinfectant. For cold water baths, 70% propylene glycol is
recommended.
b.
Sterilization and Disinfection Methods
General criteria for sterilization of typical materials are presented below. Supervisors are
encouraged to review the type of materials being handled and to establish standard conditions for
sterilization. Treatment conditions to achieve sterility will vary in relation to the volume of material
treated, its contamination level, the moisture content, and other factors.
i.
Steam Autoclave
1) Laundry--250F (121C) for 30 minutes with 15 minutes pre-vacuum of 27" Hg.
2) Trash--250F (121C) for 1 hour with 15 minutes pre- vacuum of 27" Hg.
3) Glassware--250F (121C) for 1 hour with 15 minutes pre-vacuum of 27" Hg for filled
NTH Glassware can.
4) Liquids--250F (121C) for 1 hour for each gallon.
5) Animals--250F (121C) for 8 hours with 15 minutes pre-vacuum of 27" Hg.
6) Bedding--250F (121C) for 8 hours with 15 minutes pre-vacuum of 27" Hg.
ii.
Gas Sterilants
1) Ethylene Oxide Gas--Sixteen hours exposure to a concentration of 750 mg/liter
(approximately 5%) at 30 to 60% relative humidity and at ambient temperatures (>
70F).
2) Paraformaldehyde--16 hours exposure to a concentration of 1.0 mg/liter at 40 to 60%
relative humidity at ambient temperatures (> 70F).
iii.
Disinfectants
1) Mercurials are not recommended for general use because they have poor activity against
vegetative bacteria and are useless as sporicides. Although the mercurials exhibit good
activity against viruses (1:500 to 1:1000 concentration), they are toxic and not
recommended.
2) Quaternary Ammonium Compounds are acceptable as general-use disinfectants to control
vegetative bacteria and non-lipid-containing viruses. However, they are not active
against bacterial spores at the usual-use concentrations (1.750).
3) Phenolic Compounds are recommended for killing vegetative bacteria, including
Mycobacterium tuberculosis, fungi, and lipid-containing viruses.
4) Chlorine Compounds are recommended for certain disinfecting procedures, provided the
available chlorine needed is considered. Low concentrations of available chlorine (50 to
500 ppm) are active against vegetative bacteria and most viruses. For bacterial spores,
concentrations of approximately 2500 ppm are needed. The corrosive nature of these
13
compounds, their decay rates, and lack of residuals are such that they are recommended
only in special situations.
5) Iodophors show poor activity against bacterial spores, but they are recommended for
general use (75 to 150 ppm). They are effective against vegetative bacteria and viruses.
Their advantages are:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Iodophors possess a wide spectrum of antimicrobial and antiviral activity.
Iodophors have a built-in indicator. If the solution is brown or yellow, it is still
active.
Iodophors are relatively harmless to man.
Iodophors can be readily inactivated and iodophor stains can be readily removed
with solutions of Na2S2O3 (Sodium Thiosulfate).
6) Alcohols, in concentrations of 70 to 95 percent, are good general-use disinfectants, but
they exhibit no activity against bacterial spores.
7) Formaldehyde Solutions, in concentrations of 8 percent, exhibit good activity against
vegetative bacteria, spores, and viruses.
8) Activated Glutaraldehyde, in two percent solutions, exhibit good activity against
vegetative bacteria, spores, and viruses. Its use, however, shall be limited and controlled
because of its toxic properties and the damage to the eyes.
9) Formaldehyde-Alcohol, in solutions of 8 percent in 70 percent alcohol are considered
very good for disinfection purposes because of their effectiveness against vegetative
bacteria, spores, and viruses. For many applications, this the disinfectant of choice.
c.
Factors Influencing Biological Safety Equipment Selection
i.
Proposed Activity. Procedures which may cause aerosols to be of particular concern.
ii.
Risk of the Infective Agent. All known characteristics of the agent shall be evaluated, i.e.,
potential for infection, history of known laboratory-acquired human infections, concentration
of the viable agent to be used, classification of the etiologic agent on the basis of hazard, etc.
iii.
Control Objectives. The control protection desired shall be determined from the proposed
activity and the specific agent.
1) Product protection only
2) Personnel protection only
3) Personnel and product protection
d.
Biosafety Ventilation Equipment
See appendix.
e.
Animals
Plans for a biohazard program involving animals shall be submitted to the appropriate department
head and reviewed and approved as necessary by the Animal Committee. All animals, equipment,
and the animal room itself shall be treated as contaminated. Each animal shall be identified to
indicate inoculation with infectious substances.
i.
Animal Cages
14
Cages used for infected animals shall be cared for in the following manner:
1) Careful handling procedures shall be employed to minimize the dissemination of dust
from cage refuse and animals.
2) Cages shall be sterilized by autoclaving. Refuse bowls and watering devices shall remain
in the cage during sterilization.
3) All watering devices shall be of a non-drip type.
4) Each cage shall be examined each morning and at each feeding time so that dead animals
can be removed.
5) Animals in cages with shavings shall be transferred to clean cages as often as necessary.
If cages have false screen platforms, the catch pan shall be replaced before it becomes
full.
6) The names of the investigators, a description of infectious agent, the date and method of
administration, and an emergency telephone number shall be placed on each cage.
7) If properly maintained, ultraviolet lamps and reflectors can prevent the airborne spread of
infections between cages. Depending upon the location of the ultraviolet lamps, it may
be necessary to shield the lamp to protect animals and personnel from eye damage.
Protective goggles may be necessary. High efficiency spun-glass filter materials used on
the sides or top of a small animal cage will also prevent cross-infection. Consult the
Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
8) Several types of ventilated cages are available and useful where airborne organisms are
under investigation. Ventilated lids can be made to fit ordinary animal cages by use of
air-tight gaskets around the rim of the lid, which are connected to a central exhaust
system through an absolute filter. Horsefall type cubicles of flexible film isolators may
also be used.
ii.
Animal Rooms
1)
2)
Doors to animal rooms shall be kept closed at all times except for necessary entrance
and exit. The doors shall be marked by a conspicuous sign, HAZARDOUS
BIOLOGICAL MATERIALS. The conventional biohazard symbol shall be used.
Unauthorized persons shall not be permitted entry to animal rooms.
3)
A container of suitable disinfectant shall be kept in each animal room for disinfecting
gloves and boots and for general decontamination. Floors, walls, and cage racks shall be
mop-washed with a suitable disinfectant frequently.
4)
Floor drains in animal rooms shall be flooded with water, glycol, or a suitable
disinfectant periodically to prevent backing up of sewer gases.
5)
Shavings or other refuse on floors shall not be washed down the floor drains.
6)
Animal rooms shall have a licensed pest control service.
7)
Special care shall be taken to prevent live animals, especially mice, from finding their
way in disposable trash.
8)
Animal rooms in infectious disease units shall be ventilated under negative pressure
with respect to corridors or adjoining non-infectious areas. Ten to fifteen changes of air
per hour generally are sufficient, depending upon the species of animal. There shall be
15
no recirculating of room air in infectious areas.
9)
iii.
Handling Infected Animals
1)
iv.
v.
Use disinfectant vaporizers to decontaminate an animal room after experiments. No
personnel or animals shall be in the room during this process.
Special attention shall be given to the humane treatment of all laboratory animals in
accordance with the Principles of Laboratory Animal Care as promulgated by the
National Society for Medical Research and the National Institute of Health.
2)
Monkeys shall be tuberculin-tested and examined for herpes lesions.
3)
Suitable masks and eye protection shall be worn when primates are being handled.
4)
Persons regularly handling monkeys shall receive periodic chest X-ray examinations
and other appropriate tuberculosis detection procedures.
5)
Heavy gloves shall be worn when feeding, watering, or removing infected animals.
Under no circum-stances shall the bare hands be placed in the cage to move any object.
6)
When animals are to be injected with pathogenic material, the animal caretaker shall
wear protective gloves and the laboratory workers should wear surgeon's gloves. Every
effort shall be made to restrain the animal to avoid accidents that may result in
disseminating infectious materials. Before and after injection of an animal, swab the site
of the injection with a disinfectant.
7)
Ventilated biological safety cabinets or laminar flow biological hoods are
recommended for the inoculation of animals with infectious organisms and for necropsy
of infected animals. They shall be equipped, as applicable, with viewing windows,
glove ports, lights, ultraviolet lamps, an air exhaust absolute filter, and outlets for gas,
air, water, and vacuum.
8)
Infected animals to be transferred via public corridors shall be placed in aerosol-proof
containers.
Animal Bites
1)
If the handler receives a bite or scratch, the wound (even a superficial one) shall be
scrubbed for three minutes with soap and water followed by a thorough rinsing with
warm water, drying with an absorbent cotton, and swabbing with 1% solution of
Zephiran Chloride. The injured person shall seek medical attention promptly. If a fever
develops, the handler shall report for medical attention promptly. If a fever develops, the
handler shall report for medical aid and inform the doctor that he works with animals.
2)
Report any bite wounds to employees on an Employers Report of Occupational
Injury or Disease Report. Students shall report bite wounds to their instructors and to
the Student Health Center. Appropriate medical care shall be sought immediately.
Necropsy of Infected Animals
1) Necropsy of infected animals shall be carried out in ventilated biological safety cabinets
equipped with absolute exhaust filtration or special rooms with such ventilation control.
The inside of the ventilated cabinet and other potentially contaminated surfaces shall be
disinfected with a suitable germicide before and after the necropsy.
2) Rubber gloves shall be worn when performing necropsies. Respiratory protection shall be
16
used to prevent the inhalation of infectious agents.
3) Surgeon's gowns shall be worn over laboratory clothing during necropsies.
4) Fur of the animal shall be wet with a suitable disinfectant.
5) Small animals shall be restrained and placed within a metal tray. Large animals shall be
processed in an appropriate room designated for the purpose of necropsy.
6) Upon completion of necropsy, all potentially contaminated material shall be placed in
suitable disinfectant or left in the necropsy tray. The entire tray shall be autoclaved at
the conclusion of the operation.
7) Grossly contaminated rubber gloves shall be cleaned in disinfectant before removal from
hands, preparatory to sterilization.
8) Dead laboratory animals shall be placed in proper leak-proof containers and thoroughly
autoclaved before removal and incineration if zoonotic potential is present.
vi.
Recommended Biosafety Levels for Infectious and Infected Animals
The selection of an appropriate biosafety level for work with a particular agent or animal
study is dependent upon a number of factors. The most important of these include: the
virulence, pathogenicity, biological stability, communicability of the agent, the nature of
function of the laboratory or function, the quantity and concentration of the agent, the
endemicity of the agent, and the availability of effective vaccines or therapeutic measures.
The laboratory supervisor and/or principal investigator shall seek approval of the Department
Head and the Institutional Biological and Recombinant DNA Safety Committee as well as
other necessary administrative directors prior to initiation of experiments dealing with
bio-hazard materials. The principal criteria to be satisfied is the safety of University
personnel and students. It is also necessary to comply with CDC/NIH guidelines.
If a combination of increasingly stringent primary and secondary containment procedures and
facilities is used, laboratory studies and manipulations can be safely conducted on agents that
are correspondingly more hazardous.
In general, the biosafety level used for activities using infectious agents or infected animals
shall be commensurate with that required for the agent of highest virulence known or likely
to be encountered in the course of contemplated work. For example: all diagnostic sera of
human origin shall be considered potentially infectious for hepatitis and handled under
conditions which reasonably preclude cutaneous, oral, and parenteral exposure to personnel.
Sputa shall be considered as potentially infectious for tuberculosis and should be handled
under conditions which reasonably preclude the generation of aerosols, or which contain any
aerosols generated. If, in the course of diagnostic or other laboratory examinations, there is
evidence that the materials being studied contain only an agent of higher or lower risk than
expected, the biosafety level shall be raised or lowered accordingly.
f.
Inspection of Bioscience Laboratories
i.
Responsibilities.
1)
The assignment of inspection personnel depends upon the type of inspection and area
to be covered. Safety of assigned areas is inherently the responsibility of the supervisor.
To detect unsafe conditions, he/she may assign inspection duties to subordinates or use
available staff inspection groups. In any event, the responsibility rests with the
17
supervisor.
2)
ii.
iii.
g.
Inspections of Biosafety Level 3 Recombinant DNA research labs must be performed
by the Biosafety Officer. Such inspections are recommended for labs performing work
with infectious agents.
Procedures.
1)
To help with the inspection process, an inspection report form has been developed
that includes items construed to be important by the National Institute of Health,
American Chemical Society, and the National Safety Council regarding safety in the
bio-science laboratory. (See Appendix.)
2)
Once finalized, the report shall be turned over to the department head/chairperson
and a copy sent to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
3)
The department head/chairperson shall review the report and respond by taking
measures necessary to comply with recommendations.
4)
It is important that the inspected area be identified by building name, department
(botany, zoology, physiology, etc.), floor on which it is located, and room number.
Furthermore, the area shall be identified as used for teaching, research, both, or neither
as would be the case in chemical storage and/or hazardous waste holding areas.
Inspection Form.
1)
Biological Safety: include such items as training, authorization, written
emergency procedures, infectious agents, recombinant DNA procedures, accident
investigations, NIH/CDC guidelines, and laboratory ventilation.
2)
Fire and Explosion Safety: are items related compliance the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) guidelines, including storage and handling of flammable
chemicals, sprinkler systems, means of egress, and compressed gas cylinders..
3)
General Safety Considerations: included are questions regarding the
administration of the laboratory safety program, hazard communication, personal
protective equipment, and electrical safety.
Shipping Requirements and Limitations for Infectious Substances and Diagnostic Specimens
The World Health Organization document, “Guidelines for the Safe Transport of Infectious
Substances and Diagnostic Specimens” is available at the OES web site. These guidelines are
applicable to the transport of infectious substances and diagnostic specimens both nationally and
internationally. They provide information for identifying and classifying the material to be
transported and for its safe packaging and transport. The guidelines stress the importance of
developing a working relationship between the groups involved – the sender, the carrier and the
receiver – in order to provide for the safe and expeditious transport of this material.
i.
Definitions
For the purpose of describing transport safety measures the terms “infectious substances” and
“infectious materials” are considered synonymous. The term “infectious substances” will be
used in this document.
1)
Infectious substances - An infectious substance is defined as a substance
containing a viable microorganism, such as a bacterium, virus, rickettsia, parasite or
18
fungus, that is known or reasonably believed to cause disease in humans or animals*.
With respect to packaging and transport situations, infectious substances include:
a)
all cultures containing or suspected of containing an agent which may
cause infection;
b)
human or animal samples that contain such an agent in quantities
sufficient to cause infection, should an exposure to them occur due to a transport
mishap;
c)
d)
ii.
sample(s) from a patient with a serious disease of unknown cause;
other specimens not included above and designated as infectious by a
qualified person, e.g. a physician, scientist, nurse, etc.
*
This definition is taken from the current UN Recommendations on the
Transport of Dangerous Goods. Prions are not included in this definition although they
are considered to be infectious agents.
2)
Diagnostic specimens - A diagnostic specimen is defined as any human or
animal material including, but not limited to, excreta, blood and its components, tissue
and tissue fluids collected for the purposes of diagnosis, but excluding live infected
animals. Diagnostic specimens resulting from medical practice and research are
considered a negligible threat to the public health. Diagnostic specimens obtained from
patients with suspected infectious diseases may contain limited quantities of an
infectious agent. There are very few agents which may be the source of an infection as a
result of a transport mishap. If exposure to the specimen due to transport mishap could
result in an infection, the diagnostic specimen must be packaged, labeled and transported
as an infectious substance. Diagnostic specimens collected during an investigation of an
outbreak of a serious disease of unknown cause must be handled as infectious
substances.
Packaging, Labeling and Documentation for Transport
Because of the distinction of risks between infectious substances and diagnostic specimens,
there are variations to the packaging, labeling and documentation requirements. The
packaging requirements are determined by the UN and are contained in ICAO and IATA
regulations in the form of Packaging Instructions (PI) 602 and 650. The requirements are
subject to change and upgrade by these organizations. The current packaging requirements are
described in the WHO document. UN-approved packaging systems are available
commercially.
h.
Radiation
Radiation problems shall be referred to the Campus Radiation Safety Officer. If an emergency
exists or is thought to exist, see "Radiation Safety."
B.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY AND SANITATION
1.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY RULES
Staff, faculty and students can assist in controlling indoor air quality by following the guideline below:
a.
Cap chemical containers when not in use.
b.
Clean up spills of chemical or waste products immediately.
19
c.
Report need for repairs to facilities and equipment which introduce mold/mildew into the building,
such as a leaking roofs, pipes, drains, etc.
d.
Conduct experiments which pollute the indoor air either inside hoods, or outside the building.
e.
Prevent outdoor air contamination from entering buildings. (Example: during roofing operations,
close vents and windows.)
f.
Maintain rooms, especially carpets and floors, in clean, sanitary condition at all times.
g.
Assure trash is collected and emptied frequently.
h.
Report problems with air quality to supervisor/OES.
vii.
Warn occupants and work out necessary arrangement to prevent exposure
before painting, treating, or demolition which may affect indoor air quality.
2.
HOUSEKEEPING
Inadequate housekeeping can cause indoor air quality problems -- buildings should be kept clean.
Also, cleaning materials themselves may be pollutant sources that produce odors and emit a
variety of chemicals. Select cleaning methods that are effective for the given need. Read product
labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on all cleaning products used in buildings. The
housekeeping staff will be the most highly exposed to the chemicals in cleaning products. Buy
products with the least adverse impact on human health.
a.
b.
Housekeeping Specific Steps
i.
Prepare and follow written housekeeping procedures that detail the proper use, storage and
purchase of cleaning materials.
ii.
Be aware of the housekeeping products and equipment used in buildings, particularly those
that are potential irritants or have other IAQ impacts.
iii.
Purchase the safest available housekeeping products that meet cleaning needs.
iv.
Educate housekeeping staff or contractors about proper use of cleaning materials, cleaning
schedules, purchasing, materials storage and trash disposal.
Training
It is important that the housekeeping staff, whether they are in-house staff or contractors, be trained
on how your housekeeping procedures and products may affect IAQ. In fact, OSHA’s Hazard
Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) requires employers to explain the labels and MSDSs
of all hazardous chemicals used, even infrequently, by an employee, and to train those employees in
how to protect themselves from emergencies.
3.
MAINTENANCE
HVAC PREVENTIVE
A written preventive maintenance program is an effective tool for improving IAQ. The plan
should include monitoring, inspecting and cleaning HVAC components such as outside air
intakes, outside air dampers, air filters, drain pans, heating and cooling coils, the interior of air
handling units, fan motors and belts, air humidification, controls and cooling towers.
a.
Preventive Maintenance Specific Steps
20
i.
Develop and follow a preventive maintenance plan that includes maintenance schedules.
Activities in the plan should include:
1)
Inspect
outside air dampers for nearby sources of contamination,
2)
Ensure
that air dampers are clear of obstruction and operating properly,
3)
Regularly
replace or clean air filters,
4)
Clean
and inspect drain pans,
5)
Inspect
and clean heating and cooling coils,
6)
Inspect
and clean as warranted interior of air handling units,
7)
Inspect
fan motors and belts,
8)
Regularly
inspect and clean air humidification equipment and controls,
9)
Inspect,
clean and treat cooling towers, and
10)
ii.
b.
Inspect
and clean as needed air distribution pathways and variable air volume (VAV) boxes.
Update your maintenance plan when equipment is added, removed or replaced.
The frequency of maintenance activities may vary from building to building. It is important to
develop a maintenance schedule based on the needs of the equipment and building. However, the
schedule should ensure that all equipment is in good, sanitary condition and is operating as close to
design set points as possible.
4.
BASICS FOR HANDLING FOOD SAFELY
Safe steps in food handling, cooking, and storage are essential to avoiding foodborne illness. You
can't see, smell, or taste bacteria which may be on any food. Follow these food safety guidelines
to keep pathogens away.
a.
Safe Shopping
i.
Buy cold food last; get it home fast.
ii.
Never choose packages which are torn or leaking.
iii.
Don't buy foods past "sell-by" or expiration dates.
iv.
Put raw meat and poultry into a plastic bag so meat juices won't cross- contaminate cooked
foods or those eaten raw, such as vegetables or fruit.
v.
Place refrigerated or frozen items in the shopping cart last, right before heading for the
21
checkout counter.
b.
c.
d.
e.
vi.
When loading the car, keep perishable items inside the air- conditioned car -- not in the trunk.
vii.
Drive immediately home from the grocery. If you live farther away than 30 minutes, bring a
cooler with ice from home; place perishables in it.
Safe Storage of Foods
i.
Keep it safe; refrigerate.
ii.
Unload perishable foods from the car first and immediately refrigerate them. Place securely
wrapped packages of raw meat, poultry, or fish in the meat drawer or coldest section of your
refrigerator.
iii.
Check the temperature of your unit with an appliance thermometer. To slow bacterial growth,
the refrigerator should be at 40 F; the freezer, 0 F.
iv.
Cook or freeze fresh poultry, fish, ground meats, and variety meats within 2 days; other beef,
veal, lamb, or pork, within 3 to 5 days.
Safe Food Preparation
i.
Keep everything clean!
ii.
Wash hands before and after handling raw meat and poultry.
iii.
Sanitize cutting boards often in a solution of 1 teaspoon chlorine bleach in 1 quart of water.
Wash kitchen towels and cloths often in hot water in washing machine.
iv.
Don't cross-contaminate. Keep raw meat, poultry, fish, and their juices away from other food.
After cutting raw meats, wash hands, cutting board, knife, and counter tops with hot, soapy
water.
v.
Marinate meat and poultry in a covered dish in the refrigerator.
Thaw Food Safely
i.
Refrigerator: Allows slow, safe thawing. Make sure thawing juices do not drip on other foods.
ii.
Cold Water: For faster thawing, place food in a leak-proof plastic bag and submerge in cold
tap water.
iii.
Microwave: Cook meat and poultry immediately after microwave thawing.
Safe Cooking
Cook ground meats to 160 F; ground poultry to 165 F. Beef, veal and lamb steaks, roasts, and
chops may be cooked to 145 F; all cuts of fresh pork, 160 F. Whole poultry should reach 180 F in
the thigh; breasts, 170 F.
f.
Serving Food Safely
i.
Never leave it out over 2 hours. (1 hour in temperatures above 90 F)
ii.
Bacteria that cause foodborne illness grow rapidly at room temperature.
iii.
Keep hot food hot! Cold food cold!
iv.
When serving food at a buffet, keep hot food over a heat source and keep cold food on ice.
Keep platters of food refrigerated until time to serve or heat them.
22
v.
g.
h.
Carry perishable picnic food in a cooler with a cold pack or ice. Set the cooler in the shade
and open the lid as little as possible.
Handling Leftovers Safely
i.
Divide foods into shallow containers for rapid cooling. Put food directly in the refrigerator or
freezer.
ii.
Cut turkey off the bone and refrigerate. Slice breast meat; legs and wings may be left whole.
iii.
Use cooked leftovers within 4 days.
Refreezing Food
Meat and poultry defrosted in the refrigerator may be refrozen before OR after cooking. If thawed by
other methods, cook before refreezing.
C.
SAFETY RULES FOR THE LABORATORY
1.
CHEMICAL HYGIENE PLAN
See appendix.
2.
LABORATORY VENTILATION
Toxic, pathogenic, radioactive, or unknown properties shall be controlled so that
workers/students in the laboratory do not absorb, ingest, or inhale the contaminants. They shall
be contained within, captured by hoods or enclosures, or dispersed through spot ventilation.
a.
Laboratory Hoods
A laboratory fume hood is a ventilated enclosed work space consisting of side, back, and top
enclosure panels, a work surface or deck, a work opening called the face, and an exhaust plenum
equipped with horizontal adjustable slots for the regulation of air flow distribution.
b.
Hood Face Velocity
i.
The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), “Industrial
Ventilation,” and the National Research Council, “Prudent Practices in the Laboratory,”
recommend a face velocity of between 80 and 100 fpm.
ii.
The following table was taken from the ACGIH “Industrial Ventilation...Manual”:
Condition
cfm/ft2
Open Hood
Face
1
2
Ceiling panels properly located with average panel face velocity
<40 fpm. Horizontal sliding sash hoods. No equipment in hood
closer than 12 inches to face of hood. Hoods located away from
doors and traffic ways.*
60
Same as above; some traffic past hoods. No equipment in hoods
closer than 6 inches to face of hood. Hoods located away from
80
23
doors and traffic ways.*
3
4
5
c.
Ceiling panels properly located with average panel face velocity
<60 fpm. No equipment in hood closer than 6 inches to face of
hood. Hoods located away from doors or traffic ways.*
80
Same as 3 above; some traffic past hood. No equipment in hood
closer than 6 inches to face of hood.
100
Wall grilles are possible but not recommended for advance
planning of new facilities.
* Hoods near doors are acceptable if 1) there is a second safe egress from the
room;
2) traffic past the hood is low; and 3) door is normally closed.
Work Practices for Laboratory Hoods (from ACGIH “Industrial Ventilation...”)
No large, open-face hood with a low face velocity can provide complete safety for a worker standing
at the face against all events that may occur in the hood. The hood may not adequately protect the
worker from volatile or otherwise airborne contaminants with a TLV in the low part-per-billion
range. For more ordinary exposures, a properly designed hood in a properly ventilated room can
provide adequate protection. However, certain work practices are necessary for the hood to perform
capably. The following work practices are generally required; more stringent practices may be
necessary in some circumstances.
i.
Conduct all operations that may generate air contaminants at or above the appropriate
Threshold Limit Value (TLV) inside a hood.
ii.
Keep all apparatus at least 6 inches back from the face of the hood. A stripe on the bench
surface is a good reminder.
iii.
Do not put your head in the hood when contaminants are being generated.
iv.
Do not use the hood as a waste disposal mechanism except for very small quantities of volatile
materials.
v.
Do not store chemicals or apparatus in the hood. However, if hoods are used to store
chemicals, they are to be labeled “for storage only.” Store hazardous chemicals in an approved
safety cabinet.
vi.
Keep the hood sash closed as much as possible.
vii.
Keep the slots in the hood baffle free of obstruction by apparatus or containers.
viii. Minimize foot traffic past the face of the hood.
ix.
Keep laboratory doors closed (exception: some laboratory designs require lab doors to be
open).
x.
Do not remove hood sash or panels except when necessary for apparatus set-up; replace sash
or panels before operating.
xi.
Do not place electrical receptacles or other spark sources inside the hood when flammable
liquids or gases are present. No permanent electrical receptacles are permitted in the hood.
xii.
Use an appropriate barricade if there is a chance of explosion or eruption.
24
xiii. Provide adequate maintenance for the hood exhaust system and the building supply system.
Use static pressure gauges on the hood throat, across any filters in the exhaust system, or other
appropriate indicators to ensure that exhaust flow is appropriate.
xiv. If hood sash is supposed to be partially closed for the operation, the hood should be so labeled
and the appropriate closure point clearly indicated.
d.
e.
Sash Operation
i.
Except when adjustments to the apparatus are being made, the hood should be kept closed,
with vertical sashes down and horizontal sashes closed, to help prevent the spread of a fire,
spill, or other hazard into the laboratory. Sliding sashes should not be removed from
horizontal sliding sash hoods. The face opening of the hood should be kept small to improve
the overall performance of the hood. If the face velocity becomes excessive, the facility
engineers should make adjustments or corrections.
ii.
For hoods without face velocity controls, the sash should be positioned to produce the
recommended face velocity, which often occurs only over a limited range of sash positions.
This range should be determined and marked during fume hood testing. For hoods with face
velocity controls, it is imperative to keep the sash closed when the hood is not in use.
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic inspections and air velocity checks of hoods are necessary if effective control is to be
maintained. The Office of Campus Safety inspects fume hoods once a year. In addition, an in house
inspection program shall developed. This inspection program shall include:
3.
i.
Face velocity checks--if possible. The ACGIH recommends, “Use static pressure gauges on
the hood throat, across any filters in the exhaust system, or other appropriate indicators to
ensure that exhaust flow is appropriate.”
ii.
Housekeeping--accumulation of chemicals and/or equipment in hood. Such materials restrict
air flow.
iii.
Sashes--adequate number of sashes, condition, ease of movement, and cleanliness.
iv.
Motor/Belt Inspection--belts and motors shall be checked on a regular basis. Physical Plant
shall be contacted for this service.
REFRIGERATORS
a.
Use of domestic refrigerators in a laboratory setting constitutes a unique hazard in that explosions
may occur when they are used for storage of volatile or unstable chemicals. Domestic (household)
refrigerators shall not be used for chemical storage unless they have been modified in accordance
with National Electric Code, Article 501.
b.
Chemicals stored in refrigerators shall be sealed and labeled with the name of the material, the date it
was placed in the refrigerator, and the name and phone number of the person who stored the
material.
c.
In accordance with Labeling of Refrigerators Located in the Laboratories, refrigerators in which any
toxic materials are stored shall bear a label located on the outside of the refrigerator door stating "No
Food or Drink To Be Stored in This Refrigerator." As indicated, no food or beverages of any kind
shall be stored in the same refrigerator as chemicals.
25
4.
FOOD AND BEVERAGE CONSUMPTION
No employee, student, visitor, etc., shall knowingly consume any food or beverage that has been
stored in a chemical storage refrigerator (and labeled as such), nor shall food or beverages be
stored or consumed in any area containing toxic materials.
D.
ASBESTOS
1.
GENERAL
Asbestos is a mineral rock mined from the earth in much the same ways as other minerals such as
iron, lead, and copper. However, instead of crushing up into dust particles, asbestos divides into
millions of fibers. These fibers come in three common varieties: chrysotile, amosite, and
crocidolite. All three varieties exhibit substantial resistance to heat and chemicals and thus have
been used for many commercial and industrial purposes. In fact, asbestos has been used in more
than 3,000 products. It has been apparent for some time that asbestos fibers can cause lung
disease. Accordingly, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and subsequently the Louisiana Department of
Environmental Quality (DEQ) have developed strict regulations regarding the use, removal, and
disposal of asbestos and asbestos containing material.
Removal and disposal of asbestos and/or asbestos containing material is a very exacting process
and must be done only by individuals who have been specially trained and certified to perform
such tasks. Anticipated work that might involve asbestos or asbestos containing material shall be
coordinated through Facility Services and the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
The above is true if it is only suspected that asbestos could be involved. Removal of materials
such as floor tiles, acoustical ceiling tiles, ceiling and wall plaster, insulated pipes, or removal of
insulation from pipes or any sprayed or trowled on material within a building is not acceptable
unless done by Facility Services's trained and certified workers.
If a building occupant suspects asbestos problems, i.e. dust or fallen material on floors, exposed
pipe insulation, etc., he or she shall report it to Facility Services or Office of Occupational and
Environmental Safety. The presence of asbestos containing materials does not mean the health
of building occupants is endangered. If asbestos containing materials remain in good condition
and are unlikely to be disturbed, exposure will be negligible. However, when fibers are released,
they can create a potential hazard for building occupants.
2.
RESPONSIBILITIES
a.
Occupational and Environmental Safety
b.
i.
Oversight of occupational and environmental rules and procedures relating to asbestos.
ii.
Point of contact to ensure compliance with OSHA and La. DEQ regulations.
iii.
Provide asbestos awareness training to LSU departments upon request.
Facility Services
i.
Maintain the University Asbestos Operation and Maintenance Plan, including periodic
surveillance.
26
c.
ii.
Provide asbestos crew to conduct small scale removal as needed.
iii.
Ensure that asbestos workers, inspectors, and planners are trained and certified.
Building Coordinators
Ensure that potential asbestos problems are reported to OES in a timely fashion.
d.
Building Occupants and Employees, Staff, and Faculty
i.
Foster an awareness of potential asbestos hazards and report potential problems to supervisor,
building coordinators, or OES.
ii.
Do not undertake job or activity which may involve asbestos materials without checking with
OES.
27
E.
ILLUMINATION FOR OCCUPATIONAL TASKS
1.
BACKGRO
UND
Glare, diffusion, direction, uniformity, brightness, color, and brightness ratios affect visibility and the
ability to see easily, accurately, and quickly. Poor lighting is uncomfortable and possibly hazardous. The
desirable quantity of light for any particular installation depends primarily upon the work that is being
done. As the illumination of the task is increased, the ease, speed, and accuracy of accomplishing it are
also increased. Following are two tables of levels of illumination for industrial areas as recommended by
the American National Standard A11.1 "Practice for Industrial Lighting." The Office of Occupational and
Environmental Safety will perform lighting measurements upon request.
2.
DEFINITIO
NS
Footcandle - A unit of illuminance on a surface that is everywhere 1 foot from a point source of light of
one candle and equal to one lumen per square foot.
Illumination Level - The quantity or amount of light falling on a surface usually expressed in foot candles.
Intensity (Luminous Intensity) - The quantity of light a source gives off in a given direction expressed in
candela (formerly “candle”).
Lamp - any man-made light source.
Lumen - The flux falling on a surface of one square foot in area, every part of which is one foot from a
point source having a luminous intensity of one candela (candlepower) in all directions.
Luminaire - A complete lighting device consisting of lamps and parts to distribute the light.
Luminance (Photometric Brightness) - The amount of light emitted and reflected from an area of a surface
measured in footlamberts. A surface emitting one lumen per square foot has a luminance of one
footlambert.
Reflectance - A measure of how much light is reflected from a surface. It is the ratio of luminance to
illumination.
28
RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM LUMINANCE RATIOS
Environmental Classification
1
Between task and adjacent darker surroundings
A
3 to 1
B
3 to 1
C
5 to 1
2
Between tasks and adjacent lighter surroundings
1 to 3
1 to 3
1 to 5
3
Between tasks and more remote darker surfaces
10 to 1
20 to 1
*
4
Between tasks and more remote lighter surfaces
1 to 10
1 to 20
*
5
Between luminaires (or windows, skylights, etc.) and
surfaces adjacent to them
20 to 1
*
*
6
Anywhere within normal field of view
40 to 1
*
*
*
Brightness Ratio control not practical.
A -- Interior Areas where reflectances of entire space can be controlled in line with
recommendations for optimum seeing conditions.
B -- Areas where reflectances of immediate work area can be controlled, but control of remote
surroundings is limited.
C -- Areas (indoor and outdoor) where it is completely impractical to control reflectances and
difficult to alter environmental conditions.
NOTE: From the normal view point, brightness ratios of areas of appreciable size in industrial areas
shall not exceed those in the above table.
Recommended Reflectance Values Applying to Environmental Classifications A and B
Reflectance (%)**
Ceiling
80 to 90
Walls
40 to 60
Desk and bench tops, machines and equipment
25 to 50
Floors
not less than 20
** Reflectance should be maintained as near as practical to recommended values.
29
LEVELS OF ILLUMINATION RECOMMENDED FOR SAMPLE OCCUPATIONAL TASKS
Area
Foot-Candles
Assembly-rough, easy seeing
30
Assembly-medium
100
Building construction-general
10
Corridors
20
Drafting Rooms-detailed
200
Electrical equipment, testing
100
Elevators
20
Garages-repair areas
100
Garages-traffic areas
20
Inspection, ordinary
50
Inspection, highly difficult
200
Loading platforms
20
Machine shops-medium work
100
Materials-loading, trucking
20
Offices-general areas
100
Paint dipping, spraying
50
Service spaces-wash rooms, etc.
30
Sheet metal-presses, shears
50
Storage rooms-inactive
5
Storage rooms-active, medium
20
Welding-general
50
Woodworking-rough sawing
30
1 foot-candle=10.76 lux.
From: A132.1-1973, Office Lighting.
30
F.
HOT ENVIRONMENTS
When the rate of heat transfer from the body by convection, radiation, and sweat evaporation is
not adequate, then warming of the body occurs. Excessive warming of the body can lead to heat
stroke which can be fatal unless treated promptly and properly. Other consequences of heat
stress include heat exhaustion, heat cramps, and heat rashes. All employees who work in hot
environments shall be trained in the recognition of heat stress warning signs and the appropriate
emergency treatments should symptoms occur.
1.
HEAT CRAMPS
Heat cramps are the least severe of the three heat-related illnesses. They are often the first signal that
the body is having trouble with the heat. Heat cramps are painful muscle spasms that usually occur
in the legs and abdomen. If a person has heat cramps, take them to a cool place, loosen clothing, and
give cool water or a commercial sports drink. Allow the person to drink about one glass of liquid
every 15 minutes. With rest and fluids, the person should recover quickly and be able to resume
activity. Keep the person drinking fluids and watch for any further signs of heat-related illness.
2.
HEAT EXHAUSTION
Heat exhaustion is more serious than heat cramps. Symptoms include cool, moist, pale or flushed
skin, headache, nausea, dizziness, weakness and exhaustion. As with heat cramps, get the person to a
cool place and loosen the victim's clothing. Give plenty of fluids to a heat exhaustion victim. Apply
cool, wet compresses to cool the person.
3.
HEAT STROKE
Heat stroke is the most severe heat condition. It develops when the body systems become
overwhelmed by heat and begin to stop functioning. Heat stroke is a serious medical emergency. The
signals include red, hot, dry skin; changes in consciousness; rapid, weak pulse; and rapid, shallow
breathing. Work to cool the person, as in the other two heat-related illness, but also call for medical
help. Refusing water, vomiting and changes in consciousness indicate the person's condition is
worsening. Get medical attention immediately. If the person vomits, do not give any more fluids and
put him on his side. This prevents the possibility of the person choking on his vomit. Watch for
breathing problems and keep the victim lying down. Cool the body as much as possible. Place cool,
wet cloths or ice packs on the victim's wrists, ankles, on the groin area, armpits and neck to cool the
large blood vessels. Do not apply rubbing alcohol.
4.
HEAT RASHES
Heat rashes are the most common problem in hot work environments. Prickly heat is manifested as
red papules and usually appears in areas where the clothing is restrictive. As sweating increases,
these papules give rise to a prickling sensation. Prickly heat occurs in skin that is persistently wetted
by sweat, and heat rash papules may become infected if they are not treated. In most cases, heat
rashes will disappear when the affected individual returns to a cool environment.
5.
TRAINING
See appendix
31
G.
ERGONOMICS
Preventing Work-Related Musculoskeletal Disorders (WMSDs)
1.
WHY ARE WMSDS A PROBLEM?
Work-related musculoskeletal disorders occur when there is a mismatch between the physical requirements
of the job and the physical capacity of the human body. More than 100 different injuries can result from
repetitive motions that produce wear and tear on the body. Back pain, wrist tendinitis and carpal tunnel
syndrome may all stem from work-related overuse. Specific risk factors associated with WMSDs include
repetitive motion, heavy lifting, forceful exertion, contact stress, vibration, awkward posture and rapid
hand and wrist movement.
2.
RULES TO PREVENT WMSDS
a.
Look at injury and illness records to find jobs where problems have occurred.
b.
Talk with workers to identify specific tasks that contribute to pain and lost workdays.
c.
Ask workers what changes they think will make a difference.
d.
Encourage workers to report WMSD symptoms and establish a medical management system to
detect problems early.
e.
Find ways to reduce repeated motions, forceful hand exertions, prolonged bending or working above
shoulder height.
f.
Reduce or eliminate vibration and sharp edges or handles that dig into the skin.
g.
Rely on equipment-not backs-for heavy or repetitive lifting.
h.
Keep physically fit, maintain good muscle tone. Exercise at desk or work station.
3.
SIMPLE SOLUTIONS OFTEN WORK BEST
Workplace changes to reduce pain and cut the risk of disability need not cost a fortune. For
example:
a.
Change the height or orientation of the product, such as using knives with curved handles to prevent
bending wrists unnaturally for a particular task.
b.
Provide lifting equipment to prevent back strain when working alone.
c.
Offer workers involved in intensive keyboarding more frequent short breaks to rest muscles.
d.
Vary tasks to avoid repeated stress for the same muscles.
4.
CONTACT OES FOR ASSISTANCE
OES can review a particular task or operation that may be troublesome upon request.
32
I.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM
1.
GENERAL
Where engineering controls are not feasible in completely controlling exposure to dusts, mists, or
chemical agents, Louisiana State University encourages the use of respirators for protection from
inhalation of these products. In some instances OSHA regulations may require the use of a
respirator due to potential overexposure to a particular agent. In most instances, however, the
use may be recommended to provide comfort or added protection to the individual. This added
protection is the choice of the individual and constitutes “voluntary” protection.
2.
GENERAL PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - RESPONSIBILITIES
The respiratory protection program is provided in the appendix. In general, OES provided
technical support, departmental managers and directors are responsible for implementation of the
program, and employees are responsible for following the requirements of the program.
3.
VOLUNTARY USE
Voluntary respirator use applies if the employees are not exposed to hazardous agents above the
permissible exposure limits, or they are not emergency responders. Voluntary use of respirators is
encouraged by Louisiana State University to prevent inhalation of small amounts of potentially
harmful agents that are not considered to be at hazardous levels as defined by OSHA. If the
responsible person decides that respirator use is permitted, that person must ensure that the
voluntary user is given the information in Appendix D of this program (“Information for
Employees Using Respirators When Not Required Under the Standard”). OES also recommends
that a medical evaluation is accomplished, and that the respirator is cleaned, stored, and
maintained so that its use does not present a health hazard to the employee. If employees use
filtering facepiece respirators (dust masks), a medical evaluation is not required.
4.
RESPIRATOR SELECTION
Respirator use is work place specific. Respirators shall be assigned to individuals based upon the
following their job requirements and the hazards to which the individual is exposed. Contact
OES for assistance in respirator selection. More details of respirator selection requirements are
contained in the appendix.
5.
MEDICAL EVALUATION
A medical evaluation is required of those individuals required to wear a respirator, and
recommended for those individuals using a respirator on a voluntary basis. Those wearing a
filtering facepiece respirator (dust mask) do not need an evaluation. The evaluation consists
primarily of filling out a questionnaire for review by a medical practitioner. Details are in the
appendix.
33
J.
NOISE
1.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
a.
OSHA permits noise exposures up 90 decibels, averaged over an 8-hour period. Noise levels are
measured on the A scale of a standard sound level meter and are expressed as dBA.
b.
Paragraph 1910.95(c) of the 1983 Hearing Conservation Amendment to the Occupational Noise
Exposure Standard requires employers to administer a continuing, effective hearing conservation
program for all employees whose noise exposures equal or exceed an 8-hour TWA (time-weighted
average) of 85 dBA or, equivalently, a noise dose that is equal to 50 percent of the PEL. The
standard requires that all continuous, intermittent, and impulsive sound levels from 80 dB to 130 dB
be included in the measurement of dose. In other words, the threshold level for noise measurement
purposes is 80 dB.
c.
Dosimeters can be used to calculate both the continuous equivalent A-weighted sound level (LA) and
the 8-hour TWA for the time period sampled.
2.
a.
EFFECTS
Auditory Effects
i.
Chronic noise-induced hearing loss is a permanent sensorineural condition that cannot be
treated medically. It is initially characterized by a declining sensitivity to high-frequency
sounds, usually at frequencies above 2,000 Hz.
ii.
Exposure of a person with normal hearing to workplace noise at levels equal to or exceeding
the PEL may cause a shift in the worker's hearing threshold. Such a shift is called a standard
(or significant) threshold shift and is defined as a change in hearing thresholds of an average
10 dB or more at 2,000, 3,000, and 4,000 Hz in either ear. Workers experiencing significant
threshold shifts are required by 29 CFR 1910.95(g)(8) to be fitted with hearing protectors and
to be trained in their use.
b.
Extra-auditory Effects. In addition to effects on hearing, noise:
Interferes with speech;
Causes a stress reaction;
Interferes with sleep;
Lowers morale;
Reduces efficiency;
Causes annoyance;
Interferes with concentration; and
Causes fatigue.
c.
Noise/Hearing Loss
Noise-induced loss of hearing is an irreversible, sensorineural condition that progresses with
exposure. Although hearing ability declines with age (presbycusis) in all populations, exposure to
noise produces hearing loss greater than that resulting from the natural aging process. This noise
induced loss is caused by damage to nerve cells of the inner ear (cochlea) and, unlike some
conductive hearing disorders, cannot be treated medically.
34
3.
a.
STANDARDS
Time-weighted average (TWA) noise limits as a function of exposure duration are shown as follows:
Sound Level - dB(A)
Duration of
Exposure (hrs/day)
ACGIH
NIOSH
OSHA
16
82
82
85
8
85
85
90
4
88
88
95
2
91
91
100
1
94
94
105
1/2
97
97
110
1/4
100
100
115*
1/8
103
103
---
* No exposure to continuous or intermittent noise in excess of 115 dB(A).
** Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 dB peak sound pressure level.
*** No exposure to continuous, intermittent, or impact noise in excess of a peak C-weighted level of
140 dB.
b.
The OSHA regulation has an additional action level of 85 dB(A) which stipulates that an employer
shall administer a continuing, effective hearing conservation program when the TWA value exceeds
the action level. The program must include monitoring, employee notification, observation, an
audiometric testing program, hearing protectors, training programs, and recordkeeping requirements.
c.
The OSHA noise standard also states that when workers are exposed to noise levels in excess of the
OSHA PEL of 90 dB(A), feasible engineering or administrative controls shall be implemented to
reduce the workers' exposure levels. Also, a continuing, effective hearing conservation program shall
be implemented.
4.
a.
PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPATIONAL NOISE EXPOSURE
Monitoring
The hearing conservation program requires employers to monitor noise exposure levels in a manner
that will accurately identify employees who are exposed to noise at or above 85 decibels (dB)
averaged over 8 working hours, or an 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA.) Under this program,
employees are entitled to observe monitoring procedures and they must be notified of the results of
exposure monitoring. Instruments used for monitoring employee exposures must be carefully
checked or calibrated to ensure that the measurements are accurate.
c.
Noise - Training Information
Supervisors and exposed workers must become aware of and understand about the adverse effects of
noise and how to prevent noise-induced hearing loss. People exposed to hazardous noise must take
35
positive action, if progressive permanent hearing loss is to be prevented. Each exposed worker and
supervisor should know the following.
d.
i.
Noise exposure may result in permanent damage to the auditory system and there is no
medical or surgical treatment for this type of hearing loss.
ii.
Each person should know how to recognize hazardous noise even if a noise survey has not
been conducted an/or warning signs posted.
iii.
Preventing noise-induced hearing loss is accomplished by reducing both the time and intensity
of exposure. Reducing exposure time is accomplished by avoiding any unnecessary exposure
to loud sound. Reducing intensity is usually accomplished by wearing personal hearing
protection. Each person must be able to properly wear and care for the particular type of
hearing protection selected.
iv.
Each person must know how to tell if they have been overexposed to loud sound.
Overexposure may occur even while wearing hearing protection. Earplugs and/or earmuffs
alone may not be enough protection. Each time a temporary threshold shift (TSS) occurs, a
certain degree of permanent loss results. The recognizable symptoms of overexposure are
described as "dullness in hearing or ringing in the ears."
General Program Management
i.
Deans, Directors, Department Chairs, Principal Investigators, Managers and Supervisors are
responsible for ensuring that noise hazards which may contribute to occupational hearing loss
in there areas are evaluated.
ii.
Occupational & Environmental Safety is responsible for:
1) Monitoring and evaluating noise sources upon request.
2) Providing training for potentially noise exposed individuals upon request.
iii.
Workers responsibilities include the following:
1) Learn about the potential hazards of noise exposure and follow the rules when around or
operating noisy equipment.
2)
3)
4)
Wear or use prescribed protective equipment.
Refrain from operating equipment without proper training or equipment that has
safety defects.
Attended training sessions for hazardous noise exposures.
5) Be aware of the noise producing capabilities of equipment they are around or use.
36
VI. PERSONAL PROTECTION PROGRAM
This section applies to employees and students on campus construed to be in need of personal
protective equipment by virtue of their exposure to hazards in the working, teaching, or research
environment. Protective equipment shall be used and maintained in sanitary and reliable
condition. Under no circumstances shall a person knowingly be subjected to a hazardous
condition without appropriate personal protective equipment. Persons who are exposed to
hazards requiring personal protective equipment shall be properly instructed in the use of such
equipment by the individual in charge of the activity or his/her designee. It is the responsibility of
the individual in charge of the activity to assure that safety practices are adhered to. If those
individuals required to wear personal protective equipment fail to do so, they will be subject to
disciplinary action.
A.
EYE PROTECTION
1.
GENERAL
a.
Persons working in or studying occupations such as painting, carpentry, construction, labor,
landscape, general maintenance, metal trades, chemistry, other sciences and engineering, or any
work/study activity which involves hazards such as flying objects, dust and/or vapors, hot metals,
chemicals, or light radiation shall wear approved safety eyewear/goggles at all times while exposed.
b.
Custodial workers shall wear approved safety eyewear/goggles when cleaning bathroom appliances
or mopping floors with caustic or abrasive cleaners.
c.
Management level employees, students, or visitors who make occasional visits to machine, welding,
and carpentry shops, boiler rooms, equipment rooms, power houses, construction areas, chemistry
labs, or other areas in which eye injury is a possibility shall wear approved eyewear.
2.
PRESCRIPTION LENS WEARERS
If required to wear eye protection, such persons shall wear an approved face shield, goggles that fit over
glasses, prescription glasses with protective optical lenses fitted with side shields, or goggles that
incorporate prescription lenses.
3.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS
Contact lenses shall never be considered as a substitute for eye protection; eye protection shall be worn
over them.
4.
APPROVAL AND SELECTION:
a.
Eye protection shall meet the ANSI Z87.1-1989 standard and the eyewear shall indicate such on the
lens or the frame.
b.
Visitors to hazardous areas shall be provided protective eyewear meeting ANSI Z87.1 protection
factors for visitor's eyewear.
c.
Selection chart for eye and face protectors:
This selection chart offers general recommendations only. Final selection of eye and face protective
devices is the responsibility of management and safety specialists. (For laser protection, refer to
1
American National Standard for Safe Use of Lasers, ANSI Z136.1-1976.)
SELECTION CHART FOR EYE AND FACE PROTECTORS FOR USE IN
INDUSTRY, SCHOOLS, AND COLLEGES
1. GOGGLES--Flexible fitting, regular ventilation.
2. GOGGLES--Flexible fitting, hooded ventilation.
3. GOGGLES--Cushioned fitting, rigid body.
4. SPECTACLES*--Without side shields.
5. SPECTACLES--Eyecup type side shields.
6. SPECTACLES--Semi-/Flat-fold side shields.
7. WELDING GOGGLES--Eyecup type, tinted lenses (illustrated).
7A. CHIPPING GOGGLES--Eyecup type, clear safety lenses (not illustrated).
8. WELDING GOGGLES--Cover spec type, tinted lenses (illustrated).
8A. CHIPPING GOGGLES--Cover spec type, clear safety lenses (not illustrated).
9. WELDING GOGGLES--Cover spec type, tinted plate lens.
10. FACE SHIELD--Plastic or mesh window (see caution note).
11. WELDING HELMET*
*Non-side shield spectacles are available for limited hazard use requiring only frontal
protection.
Operation
Acetylene-Burning
Hazards
Sparks, harmful rays, molten
metal,
flying particles
Protection
7,8,9
Chemical Handling
Splash, acid burns, fumes
2 (for severe exposure,
add 10)
Chipping
Flying particles
1,3,4,5,6,7A,8A
Electric (Arc) - Welding
Sparks, intense rays, molten
metal
11 (in combination with
4,5,6 in tinted lenses,
advisable)
Furnace Operations
Glare, heat, molten metal
7,8,9 (for severe
exposure, add 10)
Grinding-Light
Flying particles
1,3,5,6 (for severe
exposure, add 10)
Grinding-Heavy
Flying particles
1,3,7A,8A (for severe
exposure, add 10)
Laboratory
Chemical splash, glass breakage
2 (10 when in
combination with 5,6)
Machining
Flying particles
1,3,5,6 (for severe
exposure, add 10)
Molten Metals
Heat, glare, sparks,
7,8 (10 in combination
with 5,6, in tinted
lenses)
Spot Welding
Flying particles
1,3,4,5,6 (tinted sparks
Acetylene-Cutting
Acetylene-Welding
2
lenses advisable; for
severe exposure add 10)
CAUTION:
* Face shields alone do not provide adequate protection.
* Plastic lenses are advised for protection against molten metal splash.
* Contact lenses, of themselves, do not provide eye protection in the industrial sense and shall not be
worn in a hazardous environment without appropriate covering safety eyewear.
5.
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
All eye and face protection shall be kept clean and inspected daily before each use. Badly scratched or
damaged items are to be replaced immediately.
6.
OTHER
It is recommended that all employees required to wear eye and face protection shall have their own and be
required to inspect and maintain them in accordance with this section.
B.
HEARING PROTECTION
1.
EMPLOYEES/STUDENTS COVERED
Hearing protection shall be worn by employees/students when noise exposure is above that of the 90dB
when measured on the A-scale of the standard sound level meter at slow response. An employees/students
may also be required to wear hearing protection if hearing loss is demonstrated during audiometric testing.
Audiometric testing is required at 85dBA of noise exposure and the employees/students is placed in the
hearing conservation program.
2.
APPROVAL AND SELECTION
a.
Personal hearing protection devices shall meet ANSI 53.19.
b.
Selection of hearing protection shall take into consideration durability, ease of fit, noise calculations
in area, and length of time to be worn.
c.
There are many types of disposable and permanent hearing protection. Listed below are three:
i.
Earmuffs: fluid or foam-filled cushions connected by a plastic or metal band that fits over the
head. They reduce noise levels by 35-40dB depending on type and fit. In order for them to
be effective, a perfect seal must be formed. Glasses, long side burns, and facial movements
can reduce protection.
ii.
Ear Plugs: the most commonly used ear protection device. They come in many different
shapes, sizes, and materials. Ear plugs can be purchased as disposables, preformed, or
molded (professionally fitted). They reduce noise levels by 25-30dB depending on type and
fit. Cotton is ineffective as ear plugs.
iii.
Ear Caps: a cross between ear muffs and ear plugs--ear plugs connected to a plastic (usually)
band which can be worn under the chin, over the top of the head, or behind the neck. They
reduce noise levels by 25-35dB depending on type and fit.
NOTE: Combinations or ear plugs and ear muffs can reduce noise level be an additional 3-5dB
depending on type and fit.
3.
FITTING
3
Preformed ear plugs have to be professionally fitted. All others are fitted according to need in accordance
with LSU's hearing conservation and evaluation program.
4.
MAINTENANCE
INSPECTION AND
All ear protection, if not disposable, shall be inspected and cleaned before each use. All damaged ear
protection shall be discarded and replaced. No unauthorized modifications shall be allowed.
5.
OTHER
Noise measurements shall be performed by the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety
personnel. Noise studies shall be authorized by the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
C.
HAND PROTECTION
1.
COVERED
EMPLOYEES/STUDENTS
Hand protection shall be worn by employees when handling hot work, chemicals, electrical, material
handling of rough and/or sharp items, doing landscaping work, welding, and "wherever it is necessary by
reason of hazards of processes of environmental, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical
irritants encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or impairment." (OSHA 1910 Standards)
Hand protection shall not be worn while working on moving machinery such as drill saws, grinders, or
other rotating and moving equipment that might catch the hand protection and pull the worker's hand into a
hazardous area.
2.
SELECTION
APPROVAL AND
Hand protection used will meet the criteria for its particular use. Consult with OES for assistance in
selection as required. The OES web site contains chemical resistance charts for glove selection. Other
factors such as durability, dexterity, and frequency and ease of donning and removing gloves are also
important factors in glove selection.
3.
FITTING
Gloves shall be selected to fit comfortably and snugly.
4.
INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE
All hand protection shall be kept clean and inspected daily before each use. Badly worn or damaged items
are to be replaced.
5..
GLOVE MATERIALS
NOTE:
For Glove selection, consult the Occupational and Environmental Safety Web Page or contact
OES.
To assure resistance to a particular chemical, the user should rely upon chemical permeation and resistance
data conducted by the manufacturer. Manufacturers may show different data for the same glove material.
a.
Liquid Proof Styles
4
a.
i.
Butyl (cement*) Highest resistance to permeation by most gases and water vapor.
ii.
Viton (cement*) Exceptional performance when subjected to chlorinated and aromatic
solvents, coupled with excellent resistance to permeation by many vapors.
iii.
Nitrile (latex*) Superior puncture and abrasion resistance. Recommended as a general duty
glove. Excellent resistance to the degrading effects of fats, petroleum products, and a wide
array of chemicals.
iv.
Natural Rubber Excellent resistance to the degrading (cement*) effects of alcohols and
caustics. Ideal for use in sand blasting.
v.
PVC Coated Excellent abrasion resistance in a liquid-proof glove. Also provides cushioning.
*
Cement and Latex refer to two basic manufacturing processes of unsupported liquid proof
gloves. As a general rule, cement dip gloves exhibit greater resistance to liquid and vapor
permeation than do Latex dipped gloves. Therefore, where a permeation barrier is required, a
cement dip glove shall be selected.
General Purpose: Fabrics And Coatings
i.
Worknit® Combines the toughness of a nitrile coating with the softness and stretchy comfort
of jersey.
ii.
Worknit HD Developed and designed to replace leather and/or heavy cotton gloves, the
HD fabric has a heavier cotton liner than the regular Worknit. This glove is best used where
a tough job requires a product which provides protection, excellent wear, comfort, and value.
iii.
Coated Machine Knits
Unique, economical answer to the general purpose glove. Offers comfort and long wear.
Four wearing surfaces instead of two. Superior grip and abrasion resistance.
1) Grip-N®, Grip-N® Hot Mill, Double Grip-N® (1.)Reversibility (2.)N-tread PVC
coating.
2) Clean Grip (1.)Reversible (2.)Large. Soft PVC Dots
iv.
Impregnated Wovens and Jerseys
1)
2)
Newtex Woven cloth for strength. Coating for abrasion resistance.
PVC Dotted Canton and Jersey. The original coated glove. Cool, comfortable
cotton, permanently "dotted" for longer wear and better grip.
v.
Uncoated Knit Fabrics Machine Knit (string glove). 100% cotton. They are cool,
comfortable,
and the lowest-priced glove on the market.
vi.
General Purpose: Leather
1) Side Split Leather Superior combination of strength, thickness and suppleness in split
cowhide leather. A minimum of flaws, scars, and weaknesses, provides longer wear and
comfort.
2) Shoulder Split Leather Provides cushioning and abrasion resistance in a more economical
grade of leather.
3) Grain Leather Better flexibility, finger dexterity and fit than split leather. Generally
more comfortable, but less durable than split leather.
5
D.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM
1.
GENERAL PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
See Industrial Hygiene Section and appendix for details of the program.
2.
RULES FOR RESPIRATOR PROGRAM
a.
If a respirator is required by an OSHA standard or due to overexposure to a contaminant in the
workplace, all of the requirements of the respirator program must be met, including medical
evaluation, fit testing, maintenance, and program management.
b.
If a respirator is required by the organization (i.e., director, manager, supervisor, principle
investigator), all of the requirements of the respirator program must be met, including medical
evaluation, fit testing, maintenance, and program management.
c.
If respirator use is voluntary, OES recommends having a medical evaluation, fit testing, and
maintenance. Dust masks do not require a medical evaluation or fit testing.
Note: Voluntary respirator use applies if the employees are not exposed to hazardous agents above
the permissible exposure limits, they are not emergency responders, or they are not required by the
organization. Voluntary use of respirators is encouraged by Louisiana State University to prevent
inhalation of small amounts of potentially harmful agents that are not considered to be at hazardous
levels as defined by OSHA.
d.
3.
If a respirator is required use as a member of an emergency team, all of the requirements of the
respirator program must be met, including medical evaluation, fit testing, maintenance, and program
management.
FIT TESTING
a.
Before using a respirator an employee must be fit tested with the same make, model, style, and size
of respirator that they will be wearing.
b.
A qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quantitative fit test (QNFT) according to Appendix A of the
attachment must be used.
c.
Air supplied or powered air purifying (PAPR) respirators must also use the fit test techniques of
Appendix A of the attachment by adapting the facepieces to negative air respirators or using an
identical negative air respirator as a surrogate.
4.
RULES FOR MAINTENANCE, CARE AND USE OF RESPIRATORS
(Does not apply to dust masks)
a.
Change filter cartridges or dispose of respirator in accordance with breakthrough times
recommended by the manufacturer.
b.
Clean facepieces periodically to maintain hygienic conditions using the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning product (or isopropyl alcohol, or suitable disinfectant). Emergency use
respirators, respirators used by more than one person, and fit test respirators are to be cleaned after
each use.
c.
Perform field fit check before each use (see appendix for procedure).
d.
Facial hair and glasses shall not interfere with respirator fit.
e.
Inspect respirators before each use and replace if defective.
6
f.
Store respirators to prevent contamination, moisture, or damage.
5.
a.
b.
BREATHING AIR QUALITY AND USE.
Compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for respiration shall comply
with the following specifications:
i.
Compressed and liquid oxygen shall meet the United States Pharmacopoeia requirements for
medical or breathing oxygen; and
ii.
Compressed breathing air shall meet at least the requirements for Type 1-Grade D breathing
air described in ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G–
7.1–1989, to include:
1)
Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5– 23.5%;
2)
Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air or less;
3)
Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less;
4)
Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less; and
5)
Lack of noticeable odor.
Cylinders used to supply breathing air to respirators shall meet the following requirements:
i.
Cylinders are tested and maintained as prescribed in the Shipping Container Specification
Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR part 173 and part 178);
ii.
Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of analysis from the supplier that the
breathing air meets the requirements for Type 1—Grade D breathing air; and
iii.
The moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of ´50 F (´45.6 C) at 1
atmosphere pressure.
c.
Do not use oil-lubricated compressors.
d.
Breathing gas containers marked in accordance with the NIOSH respirator certification standard, 42
CFR part 84, shall be used.
6.
IDENTIFICATION OF FILTERS, CARTRIDGES, AND CANISTERS.
All filters, cartridges and canisters used in the workplace shall be labeled and color coded with the NIOSH
approval label and that the label is not removed and remains legible.
7.
TRAINING AND INFORMATION
Effective training must be provided to employees who are required to use respirators. The training must be
comprehensive, understandable, and recur annually, and more often if necessary. Employees who wear
respirators when not required by this section or by the employer to do so must be provided the basic
information on respirators in Appendix D of the attachment. Consult the appendix for training procedures.
7
E.
FALL PROTECTION
1.
EMPLOYEES/STUDENTS COVERED
Fall protection shall be utilized by those employees/students for the specific purpose of securing, suspending, or retrieving the employee/student in or from a hazardous work area, and/or when work exposes them
to the risk of falling more than 6' whether outdoors or inside buildings.
2.
APPROVAL AND SELECTION
Fall protection and devices and equipment shall meet ANSI A 10.14.
Selection of fall protection shall be based on the attached, "Classification of Safety Belts, Harnesses, and
Lanyards."
3.
FITTING
The appropriate safety belt shall be chosen for the hazard. It shall be securely buckled and worn tightly
enough to prevent any possibility of the wearer slipping out.
4.
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Safety belts and associated equipment shall be inspected before each use. Every one to three months they
shall be inspected by a trained inspector. Cut, worn, or damaged belts, lifelines, lanyards, etc., shall be
discarded and replaced. Safety belts in service shall not be tested for maximum impact loading.
NOTE: After an accidental freefall, the safety belt and lanyard shall be discarded.
5.
CLASSIFICATION OF SAFETY BELTS AND HARNESSES
Class I: Body belt (work belts), used to restrain a person in a hazardous work position and to reduce the
probability of falls and to avert falls from bucket trucks.
Class II: Chest harness, used where there are only limited fall hazards (no vertical free-fall hazard) and for
retrieval purposes, such as removal of a person from a tank, bin, or other enclosed place.
Class III: Body harness, used to arrest the most severe free-falls. This harness is ideal for workers on
elevated sites. During a fall, it distributes the fall impact over the body.
Class IV: Suspension belts, independent work supports used to suspend or support the worker.
Lifeline: A horizontal line between two fixed anchorages.
Support capacity: 5400 lbs.
Line diameter: ½ inch.
Personal Lifeline: This system is usually a rope system that provides flexibility for worker freedom of
movement, yet will arrest a fall and help absorb the shock. These systems always have some type of
belt or harness that is worn around the waist to which a lanyard or rope-grabbing device is attached.
Lanyard: A short piece of flexible line used to secure wearer of safety belt to a lifeline or dropline, or fixed
anchorage, such as on the boom of a bucket truck.
Support capacity: 5400 lbs.
F.
FOOT PROTECTION
1.
EMPLOYEES/STUDENTS COVERED
For all non-office personnel, "Footwear such as sandals, open-toed shoes, platforms, high heels,
8
cloth-bodied tennis shoes, or sneakers is not considered safe and is prohibited for use as a good work shoe.
Well-built safety shoes, leather-bodied shoes, or boots in good condition with low heels and hard soles are
to be used." (Physical Plant Operations Manual)
2.
APPROVAL AND SELECTION
Foot protection used shall meet ANSI Z41.1 "Men's Safety-Toe Footwear."
FOOT PROTECTION CLASSIFICATION AND PROTECTION FACTORS
Classification of Safety Shoes
a.
Safety-toe Shoes: Steel toes and metal reinforced sole.
Usage: Areas where heavy, protruding on falling objects presents a threat.
b.
Conductive Shoes: Reduces the possibility of generating a spark.
Usage: Areas where fire and explosive hazards exist.
c.
Foundry Shoes: Contains no fasteners and is easily removed.
Usage: Areas where exposure to splashes of molten metal is likely.
d.
Explosive Operation Shoes: A shoe with non-conductive and grounding properties.
Usage: Areas where explosive compounds are present when cleaning tanks with volatile
hydrocarbons.
e.
Electrical Hazard Shoes: A shoe which minimizes the hazard of conducting electricity (no metal in
shoes).
Usage: Areas where electrical hazards exist.
3.
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
All foot protection shall be kept reasonably clean and in good repair. Shoes shall be repaired or
replaced periodically.
G.
HEAD PROTECTION
1.
EMPLOYEES/STUDENTS COVERED
Employees/students in areas such as visiting construction sites, tree trimmers, and any work
where a potential for head hazard may exist.
2.
APPROVAL AND SELECTION
Head protection used shall bear the ANSI Z89.1 or Z89.2 approval, manufacturer's name, and
ANSI class designation (A, B, C, or D). Employees shall only be allowed to purchase or receive
them through an authorized department representative to insure compliance. Refer to the
attached "Selection Chart for Head Protection for University Employees" to determine
appropriate head protection.
3.
FITTING
Each employee shall be individually fitted. The hard hat shall fit firmly but comfortably on the
employee's head.
9
4.
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
a.
Painting: If the hard hat is to be painted, the manufacturer shall be contacted to see if the paint will
affect the properties of the hat.
b.
Cleaning: Hard hats shall be washed every thirty days. If worn by more than one employee, it shall
be washed daily.
c.
Inspection: Before each wearing of the hard hat, it shall be checked for wear and damages,
especially the suspension system.
d.
Other: Hard hats shall not be stored or carried on the rear window shelf of a vehicle. Sunlight and
extreme heat can affect the degree of protection offered. Also, the hard hat can become a projectile
in an accident.
5.
SELECTION CHART FOR HEAD PROTECTION FOR UNIVERSITY EMPLOYEES
a.
Hard Hat: A rigid head gear of varying materials used to protect the worker's head from impact,
penetration, electrical shock, or a combination of these.
b.
Composition: Special plastics, fiberglass and plastics combination, cloth and resin, and aluminum
alloy.
c.
Types:
d.
i.
Type 1: Helmet (hard hat), full brim. Allows for complete protection of head, face, and back
of neck.
ii.
Type 2: Helmet (hard hat), brimless with beak. This type is most commonly used and can
accommodate various types of face shields and ear protection.
Classes: There are four different voltage classes of head protection. University personnel covered
under this section shall only be allowed to wear class A and B.
i.
Class A: Limited voltage protection. Used by employees or students in general service
(non-electrical) occupations. i.e., construction, landscape, etc.
ii.
Class B: High voltage protection. Used by employees in electrical occupations, i.e.,
electricians.
iii.
Class C: Metal helmets. Under no circumstances shall metal helmets be used by University
employees or students.
iv.
Class D: Firefighters' helmet.
e.
H.
Other Forms of Protective Head Gear:
i.
Bump Hats: Shall not be used unless approved by the Office of Occupational and
Environmental Safety.
ii.
Hair Protection: All employees/students with long hair or beards who work around chains,
belts, or other machines with moving parts shall be required to wear protective hair coverings.
Hair nets, bandannas, and turbans shall not be considered satisfactory. Contact local vendors
for information on the type of protective hair coverings available. Those who work around
sparks, hot metals, flames, etc., shall use flame-resistant protective hair coverings.
PROTECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE CLOTHING
10
1.
EMPLOYEE/STUDENTS COVERED
Protective clothing shall be worn by employees/students when the potential of an
employee/student being exposed or coming in contact with harmful substance is evident. i.e.,
chemicals, high heat (radiant), dust, open flame, etc.
2.
APPROVAL AND SELECTION
There are many different standards for approval of protective clothing (ANSI, ASTM, etc.).
Protective clothing shall be selected for specified hazard, degree of protection, comfort, and ease
of use.
Once the specific or multi-hazards have been identified, contact a reputable vendor or
Occupational and Environmental Safety personnel for recommendation of proper protective
clothing and/or equipment needed.
3.
FITTING
Protective clothing shall fit the wearer comfortably and shall not be too loose or baggy.
4.
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Protective clothing shall be routinely cleaned unless disposable. Disposable clothing shall be
disposed of after use. Damaged, torn, ripped, etc., clothing shall be replaced before use.
5.
PREVENTIVE CLOTHING
Employees in occupations which expose them to arcs, flames, and explosions shall wear clothes
which will not melt, drip, or burn in the presence of one of these hazards. Heavy cotton of flame
resistant fabrics shall be worn.
I.
EMERGENCY SHOWERS AND EYE WASH STATIONS
Since it has been conclusively proven that immediate washing of the skin and eye with a
generous amount of water is the most effective first aid treatment for chemical burns, all
chemistry laboratories and areas where faculty, staff, students, or visitors are exposed to harmful
chemicals shall be provided with safety showers and eyewash fountains. These facilities shall be
conveniently located and tested frequently, readily available, operable, and known to persons
concerned.
The valve handle of safety showers and eyewash fountains shall be rigidly fixed and plainly
labeled. The valve shall open readily in either direction and remain open until intentionally
closed. Water flow pressure shall be sufficient to drench the subject rapidly or gently flow in the
case of eyewash fountains. The shower and eyewash fountain area shall be kept clear of
obstructions. Water of drinking purity only shall be used in safety showers and eyewash
fountains. The showers and eyewash stations shall be in the immediate vicinity. Eyewash
stations should be located close to the safety shower so that the eyes can be washed while the
body is showered if necessary.
Emergency eyewash fountains shall deliver a gentle flow of clean, aerated water. A hand-held
eyewash spray with a five foot hose is more adaptable to unusual situations including head and
11
body splashes, but shall not be located where it can be contaminated by waste materials. It shall
be understood by all that eye protection is infinitely more important than eye washes. For
chemical splashes, very complete irrigation is indicated. (A 15 minute flush is recommended.)
Immediately flush the eye with copious amount of water under gentle pressure, checking for and
removing contact lenses at once. An eyewash fountain shall be used if available. Forcibly hold
the eye open to wash thoroughly behind the eyelids. In the absence of an eyewash fountain, the
injured shall be placed on his back and water gently poured into the eye. The injured eye shall be
held open. The injured shall be given prompt medical attention, regardless of the severity of the
injury. Keep the eye immobilized with clean, wet, cold pads while transporting the injured to
medical attention.
Neutralizing agents shall not be used for chemical burns to the eye. Experiments have indicated
that this type of treatment is likely to increase the eye damage.
The emergency shower and eyewash fountains shall be tested on a regular basis and a record kept
of such tests. The tests shall concern the operation of the unit to determine sufficient water flow
and valve operation. The physical condition of the unit shall be noted and whether the unit is
kept clear of obstructions.
Portable Eye Wash Stations
Periodically inspect each station to make sure it is properly filled and ready to use. Check to see
if the unit is full. Change the water once a month with water of drinking purity. Test the unit's
operation monthly.
Also, be sure the unit is always clearly visible and there are no obstructions to interfere with its
use.
12
VII. ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAMS
The Environmental Section of OES encompasses many duties and several specific programs
which manage the environmental impact of University activities. Strictly regulated by the
Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (LADEQ) and closely scrutinized by local
inspectors, the campus community, and the general public; the Environmental Section must
maintain compliance with local, state, and federal laws concerning environmental protection.
Established programs that help maintain compliance are the Hazardous Waste Program, the
Management of Asbestos Containing Material, Emergency Response and Water Quality. These
programs manage hazardous activities and situations to minimize the impact on campus life.
A.
HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES
The University is required to manage hazardous wastes in a safe and environmentally sound
manner by federal, state, and local regulations. A generator of hazardous waste is responsible for
following University guidelines concerning management and disposal of hazardous waste within a
laboratory, shop or service area.
Title 33, Part V of the Louisiana Administrative Code is the state response to the federal
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) which governs how hazardous waste will be
handled and disposed of by generators. Under this code the Baton Rouge Campus is classified as
a “large quantity generator” of hazardous waste. As a large quantity generator, LSU must
strictly comply with the following requirements. All employees who generate hazardous waste in
the course of their duties must:
ii
DETERMINE IF THE MATERIAL IS A “HAZARDOUS WASTE”
A waste or unwanted chemical must be managed as a hazardous waste if it exhibits hazardous
characteristics or is specifically listed in federal or state regulations.
a.
Characteristics of Hazardous Waste
On the basis of criteria set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the Louisiana
Department of Environmental Quality (LADEQ), chemical waste is considered hazardous if it
exhibits any of the following characteristics:
i.
Ignitability(D001)
1) Liquids, other than aqueous solutions containing less than 24% alcohol by volume, that
have a flash point below 60 C (140 F).
 Non-liquids that are capable of causing fire by friction, absorption of moisture, or
spontaneous chemical changes and, when ignited, burn vigorously and persistently to
create a hazard.
 Flammable compressed gases.
 Oxidizers such as chlorates, permanganates, inorganic peroxides, or nitrates that yield
oxygen readily to stimulate the combustion of organic matter.
ii.
Corrosivity(D002)
1
1)
Aqueous solutions that have a pH equal to or less than 2 or equal to or greater
than 12.5. However, wastes with pH ranges 2-6 and 11-12.5 are also managed as
hazardous waste because of sewer discharge regulations and SARA Title III requirements.
2)
Liquids capable of corroding SAE 1020 steel at a rate greater than 6.35 mm/year
at 55 C.
iii.
1)
Substances that react with water violently or produce toxic gases or explosive
mixtures.
2)
Substances that are unstable.
3)
Explosives.
4)
iv.
Reactivity(D003)
Substances that contain cyanide or sulfide that generate toxic gases when exposed
to a pH in the range between 2 and 12.5.
Toxicity
1)
A solid waste containing the contaminants listed in the
following table at or above the maximum concentration listed when tested by TCLP.
EPA Waste
Number
Max
Concentration
Contaminant
(mg/l)
D004
5.0
Arsenic
D005
100.0
Barium
D006
1.0
Cadmium
D007
5.0
Chromium
D008
5.0
Lead
D009
0.2
Mercury
D010
1.0
Selenium
D011
5.0
Silver
D012
0.02
Endrin
D013
0.4
Lindane
D014
10.0
Methoxychlor
D015
0.5
Toxaphene
D016
10.0
2,4 - D
D017
1.0
Silvex
2
b.
Listed Hazardous Waste
EPA and LADEQ regulations also list approximately 450 commercial or off-specification chemicals,
waste streams, or their spill residues which must be handled as hazardous wastes due to their acute or
chronic toxicity.
For a list of these chemicals see Appendix
c.
Other Criteria
OES has chosen to manage as hazardous waste certain chemicals which may not technically be
considered hazardous waste under the hazardous waste regulations. Such chemicals have sufficient
mutagenic, teratogenic, carcinogenic, or reproductive hazards that they warrant such special handling
(e.g., ethidium bromide). In general, waste streams containing greater than 1 ppm of these wastes
should be sent through the Hazardous Waste Program.
2.
PROPERLY LABEL WASTE CONTAINERS
a.
Label each bottle with the words "Hazardous Waste," and the exact contents of the bottle (include
percentages and water content). Labels are available from OES and can be found on our web site.
b.
Indicate the accumulation start date.
c.
Include your name, department, phone number, room(lab), and building.
3.
AND CLOSED AT ALL TIMES
KEEP WASTE IN COMPATIBLE CONTAINERS
a.
Containers and lids must be compatible with the waste chemicals stored in them.
b.
Keep waste containers closed at all times except when adding or removing waste.
4.
STORE AND CONTAINERIZE
INCOMPATIBLE WASTE SEPARATELY
A compatibility chart is located in the appendix.
5.
USE POLLUTION PREVENTION
TECHNIQUES TO REDUCE THE AMOUNT OF HAZARDOUS WASTE
GENERATED
a.
Use microscale techniques, nonhazardous chemical substitutes, or process modification to reduce the
amount of waste generated.
b.
Contact your peers, professional organizations, or vendors to learn about the latest pollution
prevention techniques.
c.
Share unused chemicals within your department. Do not dispose of hazardous waste by evaporation,
sewer or trash
d.
Train your employees and students in pollution prevention techniques.
e.
Use the Chemical Redistribution Program to recycle or reuse unused chemicals.
6.
PROCEDURES
WASTE COLLECTION
The following procedure shall be followed in order for your waste to be collected by OES in a
3
prompt, effective and safe manner.
a.
Waste must be labeled and containerized properly.
b.
Fill out a “Request for Collection Form” (These forms are available from our office or you may
download the form from our web site.) The form can be mailed to 126 Public Safety Building or
faxed to 8-3577. The Hazardous Waste Coordinator will schedule a pick up time with the generator.
c.
A Hazardous Material Manifest form will be completed upon pick up and the generate is required to
sign the form and keep a copy for his/her records.
Request for Collection Form &
Manifest see appendix
B.
HAZARDOUS WASTE
MANAGEMENT FACILITIES
& PROGRAMS
1.
MATERIAL CONTROL CENTER (HMCC)
THE HAZARDOUS
The Hazardous Materials Control Center is located at 2719 Gourrier Avenue, southeast of the
Baton Rouge Campus. The building is set on ~2 acres of bordered by Gourrier Avenue on the
south, pasture land on the west, the Civil Engineering Pilot Scale Kiln & Petroleum Engineering
Well Facility on the north, and a small bayou on the east. This site is also ~500 yards from the
Mississippi River.
The building contains an office/laboratory and individual storage areas that total ~3750 square
feet. The building was designed to eliminate the possibility of waste being released from the
building in the event of a fire or spill.
The HMCC operates under a 90 days short term storage permit issued by the LADEQ and the
USEPA. This means that waste must be moved from the facility every 90 days. Waste is collected
from the LSU personnel by OES for ultimate disposal. A Hazardous Waste Coordinator uses a
vehicle designed to carry hazardous materials to collect waste from campus departments or
buildings and stores the material until a waste disposal contractor is hired to remove the waste from
the campus. The Hazardous Waste Coordinator is trained under the OSHA HAZWOPER
regulations and holds a Commercial Drivers License (CDL) for transporting hazardous materials.
Waste collected by OES is commingled into larger drums or shelved with other compatible
materials based on the on information provided by the generator. (Label)
The facility is regulated by the LADEQ and the EPA as a Treatment, Storage, Disposal
Facility(TSDF) and has completed numerous inspections by LADEQ,
2.
MANAGEMENT
BIOMEDICAL WASTE
Biomedical Waste materials are generated throughout the campus in various departments.
Three(3) department have a shared responsibility for disposal of the waste.
The Student Health Center collects, stores, and disposes of medical waste generated at its facility as
well as other departments.
4
The School of Veterinary Medicine collects, stores, and disposes of waste generated in teaching
labs and research ongoing at its facility.
OES collects ,stores, and disposes of biomedical waste generated in research labs not associated by
the SVM or the SHC.
All biomedical waste shall be properly containerized, labeled, and then notify one of the facilities
listed above for pick up or drop off.
3.
a.
RECYCLING PROGRAM
The Chemical Redistribution Program
This program is coordinated by OES and its purpose is to encourage university personnel to recycle
old and unused chemicals. When OES picks up materials that are not “waste” but unwanted; the
materials are placed into the redistribution program. The materials are then stored in a separate area
at the HMCC and an inventory is published on a regular basis. University personnel must simply call
and request the material and it will be delivered to them. OES does not redistribute opened
containers of chemicals or extremely hazardous materials. This program saves the university in
disposal costs and chemical purchase costs.
b.
Used Oil Recycling
OES collects and stores used oil and other petroleum production for recycling. A local recycler
converts the used oil into a useful product for sale.
c.
Lead Waste Recycling
Lead contacting waste can be recycled at a local smelting facility. Used lead acid batteries and lead
waste from other campus operations are shipped to this facility.
d.
Silver Waste Recycling
Waste from photography and x-ray processing contains high quantities of silver. This waste is
considered hazardous but it also has value and can be recycled. The silver is recovered from the waste
and resold. Silver recovery units can be installed to automatically remove the silver from the waste
processing fluids as they are flushed from the system.
e.
PCB Ballast
Flourescent light ballast are routinely changed out on campus. Some of the older ballast contain PCBs
and are considered hazardous. These ballast can be recycled by removing the hazardous component
(PCBs) and then reusing the other metal components.
C.
MAN
AGEMENT OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
The management of asbestos containing materials (ACM) located in campus buildings is
regulated by the state Department of Environmental Quality. Specifically, Chapter 27 of the Air
Quality Regulations covers all activities in schools and state owned buildings regarding asbestos
containing materials. Additional information on asbestos may be found in section V of this
manual. The following guidelines must be followed when handling ACM..
1.
RULE
5
S FOR THE PROPER HANDLING OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL(ACM)
a.
Only authorized persons can handle asbestos containing material. State regulations mandated that
employees must be training and accredited to perform asbestos work.
b.
Suspect material that may contain asbestos, should not be touched. Contact OES or Facility Services
and a training and accredited inspector will assess the situation for potential hazzards.
c.
Prior to renovation or demolition activities OES shall be consulted to determine if asbestos materials
are present.
d.
OES has oversight of occupational and environmental exposure to asbestos. As such OES is the
point of contact (liaison) with the LADEQ to ensure compliance with OSHA and DEQ regulations.
e.
Facility Services maintains the University Asbestos Operation and Maintenance Plan, including
periodic surveillance. Periodic surveillance (PS) must be completed every six(6) months for all areas
of the campus. PS consists of a visual inspection of all asbestos containing materials to note any
change in condition of the material.
f.
Building Coordinators ensure that potential asbestos problems are reported to OES and Facility
Services in a timely fashion.
2.
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT REVIEW AND CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION
a.
When contractors perform work on campus they may come into contact with asbestos containing
materials. It is the University’s responsibility to properly communicate the potential risk to the
contractors prior to the start of work. The University must inform the contractor about the location
of all asbestos in the work area. This information is communicated with the following forms.
Construction Document Review Forms and Contractor Notification Form see appendix
3.
a.
4.
MANAGEMENT PLANS
Inspections have been performed in all University buildings identifying ACM. This information is
contained in Management Plan Documents. These documents are housed in the OES office and at
Facility Services. The Management Plans are updated after every asbestos activity. All employees
have a right to view the information for their work area.
EMPLOYEE TRAINING
a.
OES also provides 2 hour Asbestos Awareness Training for all employees as directed by state and
federal regulations. Asbestos Awareness Training covers information about asbestos and its origins,
health effect of exposure, proper identification techniques, University policy and O & M Plans, and
emergency response. This ensures that all employees can protect themselves from unnecessary
exposure to asbestos environments. This level of training does not permit an employee to handle
ACM in any circumstance. Working with asbestos require advanced training as described below.
b.
Employees who work with asbestos on a routine basis require additional training. The training may
be for 8 to 40 hours depending on the level of exposure and type of activities involved in the task the
employee is required to perform.
D.
WATER QUALITY
Water Quality is strictly regulated by the LADEQ. Any discharge into a body of water or the
sanitary sewer may result in damage to the ecosystem and enforcement actions by the state. Some
discharges are allowed ,but only when properly approved by the state through the permit process.
6
LSU is permitted to discharge sewer waste to the city parish sewer system. LSU is also permitted
to discharge wash water into a local bayou by the LADEQ.
1.
a.
PERMIT MANAGEMENT
City Sewer Discharge Permit Management
LSU is the largest user of water and the largest discharger of waste in the parish. Sanitary sewer
waste is discharged off campus into city parish sewage treatment facilities. The waste sent off
campus is routinely monitored by LSU and City Parish employees to insure that only normal sewage
is being discharged. Waste must fall within a set criteria when it reaches the treatment plant. Waste
falling outside the established limits will be surcharged; or in other words, the University will be
fined.
b.
State Discharge Permit - Landscape Services
LSU is permitted to discharge wash water from landscaping operations into a local bayou by the
LADEQ. LSU applied for and was granted a Louisiana Water Discharge Permit (LWDP) for
landscape services. This permit only allows discharge which meets a strict criteria. The discharge
must be sampled and tested quarterly by LSU to insure that the discharge falls within the regulatory
requirements.
E.
RADIATION
Radiation Protection in University Facilities is managed by the Office of Radiation Safety. ORS
is located in the Nuclear Science Building as part of the Department of Nuclear Science.
Radiation Protection is also regulated by the LADEQ. All users of radioactive materials must be
registered with ORS and follow University guidelines.
7
VIII. APPENDIX
A.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
1.
RESPONSIBILITIES
a.
Deans, Directors, Department Chairs, Principal Investigators, Managers and Supervisors shall:
i.
Comply with the specific requirements of the program.
ii.
Maintain a current list chemicals in the work place. Provide a list of chemicals to OES.
Update the list on an ongoing basis via the Internet.
iii.
Ensure that minimum amounts of chemicals are maintained in the workplace.
iv.
Ensure that MSDSs are readily available to employees.
v.
Ensure that necessary physical or toxic warning signs are posted in those areas where special
notices are required.
vi.
Ensure that each work area requiring specific personal protective equipment is posted with
appropriate warning signs. Department Heads/Supervisors shall make appropriate personal
protective equipment available as needed.
vii.
Inform any contractor working on campus in writing of chemicals used in their work areas,
and contractors must notify campus personnel of chemicals used in their work. MSDS
information shall be exchanged.
viii. Train their employees regarding the chemicals in the workplace, the location and operation of
controls, procedures used to protect themselves and other workers, emergency plans and
location of MSDS or information related to chemicals in the workplace. (Note: Much of the
above can be handled in safety meetings.)
b.
c.
d.
The Occupational and Environmental Safety Office is responsible for:
i.
Assisting with periodic audits of the program.
ii.
Establishment of an MSDS library/access system via the Internet.
iii.
Assisting with employee training through the Safety and Environmental Training Officer.
iv.
Reviewing chemical inventories provided by LSU departments and assisting with MSDS
access via the Internet. The Safety and Health Officer will coordinate this activity.
University Stores shall:
i.
Ensure employees are properly trained in spill response.
ii.
Ensure received MSDSs are properly distributed.
Employees shall:
i.
Learn about the chemical and physical hazards of chemicals in their workplace and how to
protect themselves.
ii.
Comply with the chemical safety requirements of LSU’s hazard communication program and
the MSDS sheet for specific substances.
iii.
Immediately report spills or suspected spills of chemicals.
1
iv.
Report any problems with storage or use of chemicals.
v.
Use only those chemicals for which they have received training.
vi.
Use chemicals only for the tasks designated and covered in and other employees from these
hazards.
vii.
Inform their supervisors of changes in operations that could affect the safety and health of the
job site or work area.
viii. Use personal protective equipment as specified by MSDS.
e.
Contractors shall:
i.
Comply with all aspects of LSU’s Hazard Communication Program and the applicable OSHA
standard (29CFR1910.1200 or 29CFR1926.59).
ii.
Ensure Contractor employees are properly trained.
iii.
Monitor and ensure proper storage and use of chemicals by Contractor employees.
iv.
Arrange for proper disposal of Chemicals following project completion (chemicals shall not
be left on campus).
Note: See Appendix for contractor notification form.
2.
GENERAL PROGRAM INFORMATION
This written Hazard Communication Plan (HAZCOM) has been developed based on OSHA Hazard
Communication Standard and consists of the following elements:
a.
Identification of Hazardous Materials
b.
Product Warning Labels
c.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
d.
Written Hazard Communication Program
e.
Effective Employee Training
3.
a.
HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL INVENTORY
Overview
The hazard communication standard requires manufacturers of chemicals to identify all of the
hazards associated withe the use of their chemical products. Those employers using manufacturer’s
products must compile a list of chemicals known to be present in the workplace.
b.
Inventory Basics
The first objective in the development of a chemical inventory is the completion of a list that
includes every hazardous chemical in the workplace. The person in charge of the operation/task
must determine in the case of each hazardous substance whether, under any circumstances, an
employee might be exposed. Any hazardous chemical that an employee works with on a regular
basis, or may be potentially exposed to in the case of an emergency, must be inventoried. OES may
be contacted to assist with this process.
c.
What's on the inventory list?
There are many substances common to any workplace that you may not think of as "hazardous
2
materials." For example: heating and cooling fluids, cleansers, soaps, paints, varnishes, lacquers,
thinners, copying fluid, gasoline, antifreeze, or brake and hydraulic fluid could all be considered
hazardous under the right conditions. A general rule of thumb to follow is if the manufacturer has
determined that it is hazardous, or it is a pure (single, non-compounded) hazardous chemical, or if
the material could burn, explode, corrode, or otherwise injure an employee under reasonable,
foreseeable circumstances, it should be listed.
d.
What to exclude
Some products found at the University that the OSHA hazard communication standard would not
require to be on a chemical inventory list:
i.
Any hazardous waste as defined in the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA),
ii.
Tobacco or tobacco products,
iii.
Wood or wood products,
iv.
manufactured items (articles) - see below, or
v.
food, drugs or cosmetics intended for personal consumption by employees at the workplace.
vi.
Ionizing and non-ionizing radiation hazards
vii.
Biological hazards
Note: The term "article" as used in the fourth exception raises an interesting point. Under the
standard, "article" is defined as a manufactured item: a) Which is formed to a specific shape of
design during manufacture. b) Which has an end use that is contingent upon its shape or form
as manufactured. c) Which does not release or in any way expose, an employee to a hazardous
chemical during normal use. This is very important considering the importance that the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration seems to place on the definition. For example,
when wood burns it produces smoke which is potentially hazardous. Therefore, wood in a
particular workplace could only be exempted if burning was not a part of its "normal" work
application. Another factor to consider is the notion of chemical containment. Just because a
substance cannot be contained, doesn't mean that it shouldn't be included on your hazardous
chemical list. For example, consider welding fumes. Welding fumes are produced under
normal working conditions and are considered a hazardous substance that qualifies for
admission to your inventory list and MSDS file.
e.
Inventory Procedure
OES is in the process of obtaining an inventory management system for material safety data sheets
and chemicals. Until the system is in place, The person in charge of the operation/task should use
their judgement for appropriate inventory methods. Computer management is recommended.
4.
a.
LABELING
General requirements
OSHA requires that containers housing hazardous substances be labeled. The intent of the law is to
ensure that employees are fully informed as to the identities of the materials they are exposed to and
any inherent danger that handling said substances implies. Labels provide employees with an
immediate source of information and should not under any circumstances be removed or defaced. It
is the manufacturer's responsibility to label all hazardous chemicals shipped out of the company's
facility. However, if a hazardous chemical is transferred from a large container to a smaller
3
container, or a label falls off, you may find it necessary to produce or update a label. Louisiana State
University, under the Federal Communication Standard's definition of "employer," is required to
provide its employees with relevant information about the hazardous chemicals to which they are
exposed. Words such as "danger," "caution," or "harmful if inhaled or ingested," usually do not
fulfill the hazard warning criteria prescribed by the federal standard. According to the standard's
definition of hazard warning, the label must specifically convey the hazard of the chemical. If the
inhalation of a given substance causes lung damage, then that is what the label should read, not
"harmful if inhaled." Your label should list the constituents of the product and the hazard(s) of the
substance. It is not necessary to list every hazard of the chemical when you create a label; however,
acute, chronic and/or well-substantiated hazards should be listed. For example, if you are
transferring acid from one container to another, you need only list the name, hazardous properties
and a brief warning. If an employee is unfamiliar with the acid, he/she should have enough data from
the new label to reference the MSDS (which your unit should have on file) and find out any
additional information.
b.
In-house labeling exceptions
There are three exceptions to the labeling requirements:
c.
i.
consumer products - Cans of spray paint, toilet bowl cleaner, turpentine; in short, anything
available over the counter to the general public is exempt from labeling requirements,
provided that the item has appropriate consumer warnings on the factory label.
ii.
stationary process containers - Such as tanks. The standard states that an employer may use
signs, placards, process sheets, batch tickets or other such written materials instead of actually
affixing labels to process containers. If your unit is working with some sort of chemical
process, for example electro-plating, it may not be practical to permanently label your
stationary containers. In this case, a warning sign could be generated and stood or hung
proximate to the work area. The sign or placard must convey the same information that a label
would and be visible to employees in the area throughout the work shift.
iii.
portable containers -The Hazard Communication Standard states, "the employer is not
required to label portable containers into which hazardous chemicals are transferred from
labeled containers, and which are intended only for the immediate use by the employee who
performs the transfer." "Immediate use" in this case means "that the hazardous chemical will
be under the control of and used only by the person who transfers it from a labeled container
and only within the work shift in which it is transferred." If hazardous material is going to be
in the container after the employee who filled it leaves work, or if another employee is going
to use the material, it must be labeled. All this aside, It would be in everyone's best interest if
all containers, even portable ones, were labeled. When an employee fills a portable container,
a simple piece of masking tape with the name of the material and its primary hazard will
suffice as a temporary label.
Incoming container inspection
Containers of hazardous chemicals coming into the workplace must be inspected to ensure that
proper labeling procedures have been observed by the manufacturer. If an improperly labeled
container arrives, it must be re-labeled.
5.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS
a.
What Are They?
4
A Material Safety Data Sheet is a written information sheet about a specific hazardous chemical.
Since Louisiana State University is not a manufacturer of chemicals, we are not generally required to
create original MSDSs. We are, however, required to secure, maintain and update MSDSs for all
hazardous chemicals used at LSU. Whenever your department receives a hazardous material that you
do not have a current MSDS for, check the hazardous chemical inventory and see if it has been
included. Failing this, the department may contact the manufacturer to request one or contact OES to
see if one is available.
The Federal Hazard Communication Standard (FHCS) called for all chemical manufacturers to
create new Material Safety Data Sheets by November 25, 1985. All MSDSs, as a result of the FHCS,
now must have a date, must list medical conditions that could arise or become aggravated by
exposure to the chemical, must state whether the chemical is a carcinogen or contains any
carcinogens and, must state the primary routes of entry into the body (for a detailed description of
what information is required on an MSDS, continue reading; for a summary, see Section 4, Quick
Reference Questions and Answers, about MSDSs in the appendices). If you receive a chemical with
an MSDS that does not have the required information, then it is your responsibility to obtain an
accurate copy. One indication that an MSDS might be obsolete is its date. If the data sheet is dated
more than three years ago, then chances are there is a more current version. In the case of an
outdated MSDS, every attempt should be made to secure the most recent copy.
b.
Employee Access To MSDSs
Employees have the right to obtain copies of any MSDS(s) and/or list(s) of hazardous chemicals
used in their workplace. There are three ways to obtain a Material Safety Data Sheet:
1) Contact your supervisor or safety representative,
2) Access the MSDS databases on the Internet at the OES web site
3) contact the OES. If several MSDS's are required, please submit the request to the OES in writing
and include the name of the product, the manufacturer's name and address.
e.
Understanding The MSDS
Note: Since the definitions were published using the original OSHA format, the Chemical
Manufacturer’s Association has developed a new format which is accepted as the ANSI standard.
See the teaching outline for more details. OES recommends using MSDSs with the ANSI format
where possible.
Section 1 Identity - Self explanatory
Section 2 Hazardous Ingredients - Here the chemical and common names of all constituents should
be listed. If the product's hazard determination was made as a mixture or compound then the
common name of the product or chemical name of the compound will suffice.
Section 3 Physical/Chemical Characteristics - This section will tell you what to expect from the
chemical. This is particularly important to guarantee proper handling, fire and spill address
procedures.
BOILING POINT - The temperature at which the material boils. If the material is a mixture, a
range might be given.
VAPOR PRESSURE - Tells how much vapor the material may produce. A high vapor
pressure indicates that the material will readily evaporate.
VAPOR DENSITY - Tells how heavy a vapor is relative to an equal amount of air. A high
5
vapor density means that the vapor will tend to accumulate at the bottom of tanks.
SOLUBILITY IN WATER - Indicates the solubility of the substance in water. Solubility is
generally indicated numerically in weight percent. Solubility might also be expressed as
follows:
Water Solubility Table
Negligible......................less than 0.1 percent solubility
Slight..............................0.1 to1 percent solubility
Moderate......................1 to 10 percent solubility
Appreciable....................more than 10 percent solubility
Complete.......................soluble in all proportions
SPECIFIC GRAVITY - Indicates how heavy the material is relative to water.
Specific Gravity Table
1.0.................................same as water
above 1.0....................heavier than water
below 1.0.....................lighter than water
EVAPORATION RATE - You must exercise caution when interpreting evaporation rate
data. There are two commonly used bases from which to derive a figure. Ethyl ether is
used as the basis for determining evaporation rates of highly volatile solvents. In this
case, values higher than 1 indicate less rapid evaporation than ether. Butyl acetate is the
standard used for less volatile solvents and values greater than 1 indicate evaporation
rates greater than butyl acetate.
MELTING POINT - Temperature at which a solid material melts.
APPEARANCE AND COLOR - Self explanatory.
Section 4 Fire and Explosion Hazard Data - This information is intended to help you in case of an
emergency. Special attention should be taken to understand how to interpret the data in this
section quickly and correctly.
FLASH POINT - This figure indicates the temperature at which a material will ignite. There
are two general methods used to determine flash point (closed cup and open cup), so the
method used in the determination should be specified.
FLAMMABLE LIMITS - This gives the range of concentrations of a gas or vapor (percent by
volume of air) which will burn or explode if exposed to an ignition source. Upper
explosive limit (UEL) and lower explosive limits (LEL) are given.
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA - Cites the appropriate fire extinguishing media for the material.
SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES - A list of special provisions including personal
protective equipment and procedures.
UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS - Lists any peculiarities the material may
demonstrate during fire fighting procedures. For example, this section could contain the
following: "extremely flammable, water reactive, vapors heavier than air and could flow
along floor to alternate ignition sources."
6
Section 5 Reactivity Data -This information helps the user determine safe storage procedures. This
section should provide information on material stability and reactivity and should state what
other chemicals or substances to avoid when handling the material.
STABILITY - Tells how easily a material becomes self-reactive and under what conditions it
is most likely to do so.
INCOMPATABILITY - Tells what chemicals that the material might come in contact with
that should be avoided.
HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION OR BYPRODUCTS - Lists hazardous chemicals that
are produced if the material is burned, oxidized or heated.
HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION - Usually a yes or no response indicative of whether or
not hazardous polymerization is likely to occur. If "yes" then conditions by which the
reaction could take place should be listed.
Section 6 Health Hazard Data - This section gives pertinent health data and effects of exposure.
ROUTES OF ENTRY - This information tells you how the chemical is most likely to enter
the body. Also indicated should be any potential routes of entry in a foreseeable
emergency situation. A foreseeable emergency is one that might be expected as a
consequence of something going wrong during the normal course of an employee's job,
e.g. a tank explosion, burst pipe, accidental inhalation, ingestion, etc.
HEALTH HAZARDS - Indicates what the potential health effects of exposure to the material
are and whether the effects are acute or chronic. Acute effects are those that occur from a
concentrated dose of the material over a relatively short period of time. Chronic
conditions are usually associated with continuous, low-level exposures, and do not
appear for days, months, or even years after the initial exposure.
CARCINOGENICITY - Tells if the material is carcinogenic or not. A material is considered
carcinogenic if it is specified as such by the National Toxicology Program's, Annual
Report on Carcinogens, the International Agency for Research on Cancer, or OSHA.
SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF EXPOSURE - The most common symptoms of exposure are
described in this section. Specific allergic reactions are rarely listed so there may be
other danger signs not mentioned by the MSDS.
MEDICAL CONDITIONS GENERALLY AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE - Those
medical conditions generally recognized as aggravated or complicated by exposure to the
material.
EMERGENCY FIRST AID PROCEDURES - Self explanatory for the most part. It should be
noted that these are first aid procedures only and a qualified medical person should be
contacted and apprized of the situation as soon as possible.
Section 7 Control Measures - This section lists protective equipment to be used, types of ventilation
and general precautions to consider.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION - Type of respirator to use.
VENTILATION - Type of ventilation suggested for work with the material.
PROTECTIVE GLOVES - Gives construction (type of material) of the glove recommended
for work with the substance.
7
EYE PROTECTION - Indicates type of eye protection.
OTHER PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND/OR EQUIPMENT - Tells when special suits or
protective equipment of any kind should be used.
WORK / HYGIENIC / MAINTENANCE PRACTICES - Indicates personal hygienic
practices for working with the material, like washing hands, etc.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED ON AN MSDS
Acute - Short term period of action. Readily apparent.
Asphyxiant - A gas or vapor that can cause injury by reducing the amount of oxygen available
for breathing.
Carcinogen - A substance which has been identified as causing cancer in humans.
Chronic - A long time period of action.
Combustible Liquid - A liquid having a flash point at or above 1000F but below 2000F. This
definition does not include mixtures containing one or more constituents with flash
points outside the parameters indicated.
Compressed Gas - Means 1) a gas or mixture of gases having in a container an absolute
pressure exceeding 40 pounds per square inch at 700F, or 2) a gas or mixture of gases
having in a container an absolute pressure exceeding 104 pounds per square inch at
1300F, regardless of the pressure at 700F,or 3) a flammable liquid having a vapor
pressure exceeding 40 pounds per square inch absolute pressure at 1000F, as determined
by the American National Standard Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum
Products.
Corrosive Material - A chemical capable of causing visible and irreversible damage to human
skin tissue at the site of contact.
Explosive - A chemical that produces a sudden release of pressure, gas and/or heat when
subjected to sudden shock, pressure or high temperature.
Exposure - Contact of an individual with a hazardous material during the course of
employment through any route of entry.
Flammable Material - A substance that meets any of the following specifications: A
flammable aerosol is a chemical substance or mixture, dispensed from a container as a
mist, spray or foam by a propellant under pressure, which yields a flame of at least 18
inches at full valve opening, or a flashback (flame extending back through the valve) at
any opening. A flammable gas is a gas which, at normal atmospheric pressure and
temperature and at a concentration of 13 percent or less, forms a flammable mixture, or
that forms a range of flammable mixtures with air greater than 12 percent regardless of
the lower limit. A flammable liquid for our purposes, is defined as having a flash point
below 1000F except that this does not include any mixture where any one constituent
has a flash point at or above 1000F and makes up 99 percent or more of the total volume
of the mixture. A flammable solid is a material (other than an explosive) that causes fire
through friction, absorption of moisture, spontaneous chemical change, retained heat
from manufacturing or processing, or that can be readily ignited and can remain so even
after the ignition source is removed.
Flash Point - The minimum temperature at which a substance produces enough vapor to be
8
ignited.
Foreseeable Emergency - Any potential occurrence that could result in the uncontrolled
release of a hazardous material into the workplace.
Hazardous Chemical Substance or Mixture - Is a substance considered as one or more of the
following : a toxic material, a carcinogen, a corrosive material, an irritant, a strong
sensitizer, a dangerously reactive material, a flammable material, a combustible liquid, a
pyrophoric material, a strong oxidizer, an explosive material, or a compressed gas.
Health Hazard - A relative term generally referring to any substance that has been shown by
at least one established scientific study to produce acute or chronic detrimental health
effects to exposed personnel.
Irritant - A chemical substance or mixture, other than a corrosive, that when contacted with
the skin produces an inflammatory reaction to the affected area and/or surrounding areas.
Median Lethal Concentration LC50 - The concentration in air of gas, vapor, mist, fume or
dust for a given period of time that will kill 50 percent of the test animals using a
specified test procedure. Inhalation is the primary route of entry.
Median Lethal Dose LD50 - The dosage of a substance that will kill 50 percent of the test
animals to which the substance is administered using a specified test procedure. Various
routes of entry can be used for testing purposes.
LEL (Lower Exposure Limit) - The lowest concentration of a gas or vapor in air that will
ignite or explode if an ignition source is provided.
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) - An information document that contains relevant
information about a specific chemical or mixture. Also lists the hazards of the chemical,
appropriate emergency response procedures, protective equipment that should be worn,
etc..
Mutagen - A material that affects organisms at the genetic level and whose effects may be
seen in subsequent generations.
Oxidizer - A chemical that promotes combustion in other materials. The definition does not
include explosives.
Physical Hazard - A chemical that is either a combustible liquid, a compressed gas, an
explosive, is flammable, an organic peroxide, an oxidizer, is pyrophoric, is reactive or
water-reactive.
Pyrophoric Material - A chemical substance or mixture that will ignite spontaneously in dry
or moist air at below 1300F.
Reactive Material - A chemical substance or mixture that may vigorously polymerize,
decompose, condense, or become self-reactive under conditions of shock, pressure or
temperature. Includes chemical substances that can be classified as explosive, an organic
peroxide, a pressure generating material or a water reactive material.
Sensitizer - A chemical substance or mixture known to cause some form of hyper-sensitive
reaction to normal tissue when said tissue is exposed to it.
Teratogen - A chemical that causes physical defects in a developing embryo.
Threshold Limit Values (TLV) - These are the upper exposure limits of airborne
9
concentrations of chemicals that are accepted as safe for employees to be exposed to on a
day-in, day-out basis. There are three types of threshold limit values. The Time
Weighted Average (TWA) is the maximum concentration that employees working eight
hours per day, 40 hours per week can be exposed to with no adverse physical effects.
The Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL) is the maximum concentration to which
workers can be exposed for a period of up to 15 minutes with no detrimental effects.
Finally, the Ceiling (C) is the concentration that should never be exceeded, not even
instantaneously.
Toxic - Refers to any chemical or substance that falls into any of the following categories:
1) A chemical that has a median lethal dose of more than 50 milligrams per kilogram but
not more than 1000 milligrams per kilogram of body weight when administered orally to
albino rats weighing between 200 and 300 grams each;
2) a chemical that has a median lethal dose of more than 200 milligrams per kilogram but
not more than 1000 milligrams per kilogram of body weight when administered by
continuous contact for 24 hours or less with the bare skin of albino rabbits weighing
between 2 and 3 kilograms each; or,
3) a chemical that has a median lethal concentration in air of more than 200 ppm but not
more than 2000 ppm by volume of gas vapor, or more than two milligrams per liter but
not more than 20 milligrams per liter of mist, fume or dust, when administered by
continuous inhalation for one hour or less to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300
grams each.
Unstable - A chemical or substance in a pure state (nothing added) that will readily
polymerize, decompose, condense, or become self-reactive under conditions of shock,
pressure or temperature.
Abbreviations commonly found on an MSDS
AQTX...................Aquatic Toxicity
atm......................Atmosphere
RDS..................Primary irritation dose
IRR....................Irritant effects (systemic)
bp.........................Boiling point
kg......................Kilogram
ca.........................(circa) about
l..........................Liter
CAR.....................Carcinogenic effects
LEL....................Lower explosive limit
cc.........................Cubic centimeter
LFM...................Linear feet per minute
CC.......................Closed Cup
LC50...................Median lethal concentration
CFR....................Code of Federal Regulations LD50...................Median lethal dose
CNS....................Central Nervous System
m3......................Cubic meter
COC..................Cleveland Open Cup mp........................Melting point
conc...................concentration
MESA........Mining Enforcement and Safety Admin.
decomp..............decompose
mg.......................Milligram
G.I. or GI............Gastrointestinal
ml...............Milliliter
g or gms............Grams
m Hg...........Milliliters of Mercury
10
HW.....................Hazardous waste
I...........................Intermittent
MLD................Mild irritation effects
MSDS........Material Safety Data Sheets
inhl.....................Inhalation
MW.................Molecular weight
insol....................Insoluble
NEO..............Neoplastic effects
NOx..............Oxides of Nitrogen
PMCC............Pensky-Martens Closed Cup
Ox................Oxides of Phosphorous
ppb..............Parts per billion
TLV...................Threshold limit value UEL...................Upper exposure limit
6.
TRAINING
Refer to teaching outline in Appendix.
B.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION--TEACHING OUTLINE
1.
OBJECTIVES:
a.
To assure that the employee is made aware of the danger of hazardous materials/chemicals in the
workplace.
b.
To assure that the employee is made aware of how such materials/chemicals affect his/her body.
c.
To assure that the employee learns how to recognize through labeling the hazard categories of
materials/chemicals.
d.
To assure that the employee learns to interpret the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
e.
To assure that the employee learns how to protect himself/herself from hazardous
materials/chemicals.
2.
MODES OF ENTRY INTO THE BODY:
a.
Inhalation--Breathing
b.
Ingestion--Entering through the mouth
c.
Absorption--Contact with exposed body areas
d.
Contact--As above (Corrosives)
3.
i.
Once in the body, many materials/chemicals attack vital organs
ii.
Attack can be long or short term, but the results can be the same
EFFECTS:
a.
Carcinogenic--Cancer
b.
Toxic--Poison the organs
c.
Flammable--Burns
d.
Reactive--Explosion, burns, or toxic fumes leading to
e.
Cryogenic--Freezing or frostbite of body parts
f.
Corrosive--Destruction of human tissue
11
injury or death
g.
Mutagenic--Damage to reproductive processes and fetus
4.
a.
b.
5.
RECOGNIZING THE HAZARD:
The NFPA Hazard Identification System
i.
Health--Blue
ii.
Flammability--Red
iii.
Reactivity--Yellow
iv.
Others--Colorless
v.
The numerical rating system
Product labeling by manufacturer
i.
Display of labels
ii.
Display of signs
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS:
(ANSI standard format)
a.
Section 1:
Chemical product and company identification
b.
Section 2:
Composition and/or information on hazardous ingredients
c.
Section 3:
Hazards identification, including emergency overview
d.
Section 4:
First aid measures
e.
Section 5:
Fire-fighting measures
f.
Section 6:
Accidental release measures
g.
Section 7:
Handling and storage
h.
Section 8:
Exposure controls and personal protection
i.
Section 9:
Physical and chemical properties
j.
Section 10:
Stability and reactivity
k.
Optional information: Section 11: Toxicological information; Section 12: Ecological information;
Section 13: Disposal considerations; Section 14: Transport information; Section 15: Regulatory
information; Section 16: Other information
6.
REVIEW
12
C.
INCOMPATIBLE CHEMICALS PARTIAL LISTING
Chemical
Incompatible Chemicals
Acetic acid
Chromic acid, nitric acid, permanganates, and peroxides
Acetic anhydride
Hydroxyl containing compounds such as ethylene glycol,
perchloric acid
Acetone
Concentrated nitric acid and sulfuric acid mixtures, hydrogen
peroxide
Acetylene
Bromine, chlorine, copper, fluorine, mercury, and silver
Alkaline and alkaline earth metals such
as powdered calcium, cesium, lithium,
magnesium, potassium, sodium,
aluminum, etc.
Carbon dioxide, chlorinated hydrocarbons, water, and the
halogens (dry sand should be used to extinguish fires)
Aluminum and its alloys (particularly
powders)
Acid or alkaline solutions, ammonium persulfate, water,
chlorates, chlorinated compounds, nitrates, and organic
compounds in nitrate/nitrite salt baths
Ammonia (anhydrous)
Bromine, calcium hypochlorite, chlorine, hydrofluoric acid,
iodine, mercury, and silver
Ammonium nitrate
Acids, chlorates, chlorides, lead, metallic nitrates, metal
powders, finely divided organics or combustibles, sulfur, and
zinc
Ammonium perchlorate, permanganate,
or persulfate
Combustible materials, oxidizing materials such as acids,
chlorates, and nitrates
Aniline
Hydrogen peroxide or nitric acid
Barium peroxide
Combustible organics, oxidizing materials, water, and
reducing agents
Bismuth and its alloys
Perchloric acid
Bromine
Acetone, acetylene, ammonia, benzene, butadiene, butane
and other petroleum gases, hydrogen, finely divided metals,
sodium carbide, and turpentine
Calcium or sodium carbide
Moisture in air or water
13
Calcium hypochlorite
(Activated) ammonia or carbon containing materials
Carbon, activated
Calcium hypochlorite and all oxidizing agents
Chlorates or perchlorates
Acids, aluminum, ammonium salts, cyanides, phosphorous,
metal powders, finely divided organics or other combustibles,
sugar, sulfides, and sulfur
Chlorine
Same as bromine
Chlorine dioxide
Ammonia, hydrogen, sulfide, methane, phosphine, and
organic materials
Chemicals
Incompatible Chemicals
Chromic acid
Acetic acid (glacial), acetic anhydride, alcohols, combustible
materials, flammable liquids, glycerine, naphthalene, nitric
acid, sulfur, turpentine, reducing agents, and oxidizing
materials
Copper
Acetylene, hydrogen peroxide, sodium azide
Cumene hydroperoxide
Acids (mineral or organic)
Cyanides
Acids or alkalies
Flammable liquids
Ammonium nitrate, chromic acid, hydrogen peroxide, nitric
acid, sodium peroxide, and the halogens
Fluorine
Most materials (isolate from everything)
Hydrocarbons such as benzene, butane,
gasoline, propane, turpentine, etc.
Bromine, chlorine, chromic acid, fluorine, hydrogen
peroxide, and sodium peroxide
Hydrofluoric acid or anhydrous
hydrogen fluoride
Ammonia (anhydrous or aqueous)
Hydrocyanic acid or hydrogen cyanide
Alkalies, nitric acid, oxidizers
Hydrogen peroxide 3%
Chromium, copper, iron, most metals or their salts
Hydrogen peroxide 30% to 90%
Same as 3% hydrogen peroxide plus aniline, any flammable
liquids, combustible materials, nitromethane, and all other
organic matter including alcohols
Hydrogen sulfide
Fuming nitric acid or oxidizing gases
14
Iodine
Acetylene, ammonia (anhydrous or aqueous), and hydrogenreducing materials
Lithium
Acids, moisture in air, water, oxidizers
Lithium aluminum hydride
Acids, chlorinated hydro-carbons, carbon dioxide, ethyl
acetate, and water-powered limestone as extinguishing agent
Magnesium (particularly powder)
Carbonates, chlorates, heavy metal oxalates or oxides,
nitrates, perchlorates, peroxides, phosphates, and sulfates
Mercuric oxide
Sulfur, reducing agents
Mercury
Acetylene, alkali metals, ammonia, nitric acid with ethanol,
oxalic acid, azides
Nitrates
Combustible and flammable materials,
esters, phosphorous, sodium acetate,
stannous
chloride, water, and zinc
powderNitric acid (concentrate)
Acetic acid, aniline, chromic acid, flammable gases and
liquids, hydrocyanic acid, and hydrogen sulfide
Chemicals
Incompatible Chemicals
Nitric acid
Alcohols and other oxidizable organic material, hydriodic
acid (hydrogen iodide), magnesium or other metals,
phosphorous, and thiophene
Nitrites
Potassium or sodium cyanide, reducing agents
Oxalic acid
Mercury or silver
Oxygen (liquid or enriched air)
Flammable gases, liquids, or solids such as acetone,
acetylene, grease, hydrogen, oils, and phosphorous
Perchloric acid
Acetic anhydrides, alcohols, bismuth and its alloys, grease,
oils or any organic materials, reducing agents, paper, wood
Peroxides (organic)
Acids (mineral or organic), reducing agents
Phosphorous
Chlorates and perchlorates, nitrates and nitric acid, organic
materials, reducing agents, white phosphorous, air or oxygen
in addition to others
15
Phosphorous pentoxide
Organic compounds, water, reducing agents
Picric acid
Ammonia heated with oxides or salts or heavy metals
(particularly copper, lead, zinc) and friction with oxidizing
agents and reducing agents
Potassium
Air (moisture and/or oxygen), water, carbon dioxide,
carbontetrachloride
Potassium chlorate or perchlorate
Acids or their vapors, combustible materials, especially
organic solvents, phosphorous, and sulfur
Potassium permanganate
Benzaldehyde, ethylene glycol, glycerine, and sulfuric acid
Silver
Acetylene, ammonium compounds, nitric acid with ethanol,
oxalic acid, tartaric acid, fulminic acid, azides
Sodium
Carbon tetrachloride, carbon dioxide, and water
Sodium amide
Air (moisture and oxygen), water, oxidizers
Sodium chlorate
Acids, ammonium salts, oxidizable materials, and sulphur
Sodium hydrosulfite
Air (moisture) or combustible materials
Sodium nitrite
Ammonia compounds, ammonium nitrate or other
ammonium salts, organic materials, friction
Sodium peroxide
Acetic acid (glacial), acetic anhydride, alcohols,
benzaldehyde, carbon disulfide, ethyl acetate, ethylene
glycol, furfural, glycerine, methyl acetate, and other
oxidizable substances, powdered metals, water, acids, organic
materials
Chemicals
Incompatible Chemicals
Sulfur
Any oxidizing materials
Sulfuric acid
Chlorates, perchlorates, permanganates, combustibles
Water
Acetyl chloride, carbides, chromic acid, phosphorous
oxychloride, phosphorous pentechloride, sulfuric acid, and
16
sulfur trioxide
Zinc chlorate
Acids or organic materials
Zinc (particularly powder)
Acids or water
Zirconium (particularly in powder form)
Carbon tetrachloride and other halogenated hydrocarbons,
peroxides, sodium bicarbonate, water, and air
**From Safety Engineering Standards, Industrial Indemnity Company and Prudent Practices in the
Laboratory
17
D.
1.
STORAGE OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS CLASSES IA, IB, IC
PURPOSE
This Louisiana State University Operational Safety Standard establishes consistent safety practices
within the Louisiana State University and Agricultural an Mechanical College for the Storage of
Flammable Liquids--Classes IA, IB, and IC.
2.
SCOPE
This Safety Standard shall apply to all users of Class IA, IB, and IC Flammable Liquids in the
performance of any task on University property or under the auspices of the University.
3.
DEFINITIONS
a.
Flammable Liquid--shall mean a liquid having a flash point below 100F (37.8C), having a vapor
pressure not exceeding 40 pounds per square inch (absolute) at 100F (37.8C), and shall be known
as a Class I liquid.
For the purpose of this standard, Class I liquids shall be subdivided as follows:
CLASS IA--shall include all liquids having flash points below 73F (22.8C) and having a
boiling point below 100F (37.8C).
CLASS IB--shall include all liquids having flash points below 73F (22.8C) and having a
boiling point at or above 100F (37.8C).
CLASS IC--shall include all liquids having flash points at or above 73F (22.8C) and below
100F (37.8C).
b.
Combustible Liquid--shall mean a liquid having a flash point at or above 100F (37.8C).
For the purpose of this standard, Combustible Liquids shall be subdivided as follows:
CLASS II--shall include liquids having flash points at or above 100F (37.8C) and below
140F (60C).
CLASS IIIA--shall include those liquids having flash points at or above 140F (60C) and
below 200F (93.4C).
CLASS IIIB--shall include those liquids having flash points at or above 200F (93.4C).
c.
Safety Can--shall mean an approved container of not more than five gallon capacity having a
spring-closing lid and spout cover and so designed that it will safety relieve internal pressure.
4.
STANDARDS
a.
Storage shall be limited to that required for operation of office equipment, maintenance,
demonstration, treatment, and laboratory work. All liquids in laboratories and other points of use
shall meet the following storage requirements:
i.
No container for Class I or II liquids shall exceed one gallon, except safety cans, which may
be of two gallon capacity.
ii.
No more than 10 gallons of Class I and II liquids combined shall be stored outside of a storage
cabinet or storage room, except in Safety Cans.
iii.
No more than 25 gallons of Class I and II liquids combined shall be stored in Safety Cans
18
outside of a storage room or storage cabinet.
iv.
No more than 60 gallons of Class IIIA liquids shall be stored outside of a storage room or
storage cabinet.
v.
Quantities of liquids in excess of those set forth in this Safety Standard shall be stored in an
approved inside or outside storage room.
Maximum allowable size of container:
Flammable Liquids
Class IA
Container
Glass
Metal or approved plastic
Safety cans
Combustible Liquids
Class IB
Class IC
Class II
Class IIIA
Liter Gallon Liter Gallon Liter Gallon Liter Gallon Liter Gallon
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
0.5
0.12
1
0.25
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
20
5
20
5
20
5
20
5
7.5
2
20
5
20
5
20
5
20
5
NOTE: Class IA and Class IB liquids may be stored in glass containers of not more than 1-gallon
capacity if the required liquid purity (such as ACS Analytical Reagent grade or higher) would be
affected by storage in metal containers or if liquid would cause excessive corrosion of the metal
container only upon written approval of the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
b.
Flame Proof Storage Cabinets shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) 30, Chapter 4.
Quantity and classification of liquids which can be stored:
i.
Not more than 120 gallon of Class I, Class II, or Class IIIA liquids.
ii.
Of the above total, not more than 60 gallons may be of Class I and Class II liquids.
iii.
No more than three cabinets can be located in a single room unless every group of three is
separated by 100' or more.
c.
Tank Storage--of flammable or combustible liquids, above or below ground and in any quantity,
shall meet NFPA 30, Chapter 2 through Chapter 9 and all codes set forth by the local authority
having jurisdiction.
d.
The Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety shall be contacted when any storage tank is
being considered for campus use.
E.
BIOSAFETY VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
Biological safety cabinets are the principal equipment used to provide physical containment.
They are used as primary barriers to prevent the escape of aerosols into the laboratory
environment. This is an important function because most laboratory techniques are known to
produce inadvertent aerosols that can be readily inhaled by the laboratory worker. Certain
cabinets can also protect the experiment from airborne contamination. The selection of a
19
Biological Safety Cabinet is based on the potential of the laboratory technique to produce
aerosols and the need to protect the experiment from airborne contamination.
Three types of Biological Safety Cabinets are used in the microbiological laboratory: the Class
I, the Class II, and the Class III cabinets. They are as follows:
1.
THE CLASS I BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINET
a.
The Class I cabinet is a ventilated cabinet that may be used in three operational modes: (1) with a
full-width open front, (2) with an installed front closure panel without gloves, and (3) with an
installed front closure panel equipped with arm-length rubber gloves. Materials may be introduced
and removed through the panel opening and, if provided, through the hinged front view panel or a
side UV air look. Lights, vacuum, gas (do not provide if cabinet is to be operated, sealed, and
with gloves installed), water, and drain can be provided. The materials of construction shall be
selected to withstand wear, corrosive action of gases and liquids, and decontaminants. Room air
flowing into the cabinet prevents the escape of airborne contaminants from the cabinet work area.
It flows across the work space, over and under a back wall baffle, out through a HEPA filter and
blower in an overhead duct to the building air exhaust system or outdoors. When operated with a
full-width open front, a minimum inward face velocity normal to the work opening of at least 75
fpm is required.
b.
Protection is provided to the user and the environment, but not to the product (experiment). A wide
range of activities is accommodated using equipment as varied as pipetting aids, burettes, pH
meters, sonicators, shielded centrifuges, blenders, and lyopilizers. Chemical carcinogens and low
levels of radioactive materials and volatile solvents can be used in Class I cabinets with minimum
face velocities of 100 fpm. When these materials are used in the Class I cabinet, a careful
evaluation shall be made to determine that concentrations do not reach dangerous levels or cause
problems of decontamination of the cabinet.
c.
The cabinet is a partial containment unit. Its primary barrier-function can be compromised by the
pumping action of sudden withdrawal of the hands, the opening and closing of the room door, or
rapid movements past the front of the cabinet. Aerosols created in large quantities may overcome
even higher face velocities. Also, the cabinet does not protect the experimenter's hands and arms
from contact with hazardous materials. Such protection is dependent on technique and the use of
gloves and other protective clothing.
2.
a.
THE CLASS II BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINET
The Class II cabinet is commonly known as a laminar airflow Biological Safety Cabinet. Class II
cabinets have a front opening for access to the work space and for introduction and removal of
materials. Airborne contaminants in the cabinet are prevented from escaping across this opening
by a curtain of air formed by (1) unfiltered air flowing from the room into the cabinet and (2) HEPA
filtered air supplied from an overhead grille in the cabinet. This curtain of air also prevents
airborne contaminants in the room from entering the work space of the cabinet across the front
opening. The curtain of air is drawn through a grille at the forward edge of the work surface into a
plenum below. Air from this plenum is HEPA filtered and recirculated through the overhead grille
down into the cabinet. A portion of this filtered air is used to maintain the air curtain and the
remainder passes down onto the work surface and is drawn out through grilles at the back edge of
the work surface. The HEPA filtered air from the overhead grille flows in a uniform downward
movement to minimize air turbulence. It is this air that provides and maintains a clean-air work
environment. A percentage of air drawn through the front and back grilles of the work surface,
20
which is equal to the flow of room air into the cabinet, is also filtered by HEPA filters and
exhausted from the cabinet.
b.
The selection of utility services and materials of construction are similar to those for Class I
cabinets.
c.
There are two types of Class II cabinets, A and B. These differ principally as to:
i.
Vertical dimension of the front opening
ii.
Proportion of air recirculated
iii.
Velocity of airflow to work surface
iv.
Manner of discharge of exhaust air
v.
Whether contaminated air plenums are under positive pressure
d.
The Type A cabinet has a fixed front access opening. The inward face velocity through the front
opening is at least 75 fpm. Contaminated air plenum are normally operated at positive pressure.
The cabinet operates with a high percentage (approximately 70%) of recirculated air. The Type A
cabinets can be operated with recirculation of the filtered exhaust air to the room in which they are
located. This minimizes extra demand on supply and exhaust air systems unless the buildup of heat
and odor from the recirculated exhaust air requires otherwise.
e.
Type B cabinets do not recirculate their exhaust air to the room. They have a vertical sliding sash
rather than the fixed opening of the type A. Inward air velocity of 100 fpm is attained at an 8"
sash opening. The cabinet operates with a low percentage (approximately 30%) of recirculated air.
f.
Type A and B cabinets are partial containment units with the same limitations as Class I cabinets.
These cabinets provide protection to the user, environment, and product (experiment). Activities
are accommodated that use pipetting aids, burettes, pH meters, sonicators, blenders, lyophilizers,
and shielded centrifuges. The Type B cabinets can be used with dilute preparations of chemical
carcinogens, of low-level radioactive materials, and of volatile solvents when the face velocity of
100 fpm is maintained. When these materials are used, however, a careful evaluation shall be made
to determine that concentrations do not reach dangerous levels or cause problems of
decontamination of the cabinets. The Type A cabinets cannot be used with toxic, explosive,
flammable, or radioactive substances because of the high percentage of recirculated air.
3.
THE CLASS III BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINET
a.
The Class III cabinet is a totally enclosed ventilated cabinet of gas-tight construction. Operations
within the Class III cabinet are conducted through attached rubber gloves. When in use, the Class
III cabinet is maintained under negative air pressure of at least 0.5" water gauge. Supply air is
drawn into the cabinet through HEPA filters. The cabinet exhaust air is filtered by two HEPA
filters installed in series or one HEPA filter and an incinerator. The exhaust fan for the Class III
cabinet is generally separate from the exhaust fans of the facility ventilation system.
b.
Materials are introduced and removed through attached double-door sterilizers and dunk baths with
liquid disinfect- ants. The usual utility services can be provided, but not gas. Liquid wastes go to a
holding tank for appropriate decontamination before release into "common" sewage lines. Stainless
steel is the usual construction material. Modular designs provide for inclusion of refrigerator,
incubator, deep freeze, centrifuge, animal holding, and other special cabinet units.
c.
The Class III cabinet provides the highest level of personnel and environmental protection.
Protection is also provided to the product (experiment). Most laboratory activities can be
21
accommodated: the usual cultivation of microorganisms, fertile eggs, tissue cells; microscopy;
serology; animal dissections and injections; experimental aerosol exposures; various physical
measurements; and many others on a small-to-large scale. Selected gaseous atmospheres can be
maintained at desired humidity and temperature conditions.
d.
The Class III cabinet protection can be compromised by puncture of the gloves or accidents creating
positive pressure in the cabinet. Flammable solvents shall not be used in the cabinets unless a
careful evaluation has been made to deter- mine that concentrations do not reach dangerous levels.
When required and determined safe, these materials shall only be introduced into the system in
closed, non-breakable containers. These materials shall not be stored in the cabinet. Electric heaters
are preferred over portable, canned-gas heaters. Flammable gas shall not be piped to the units.
4.
LAMINAR FLOW CLEAN AIR CABINET
This cabinet is not suitable for work with biohazards. Personnel are exposed to contaminated air
because the cabinet's positive pressure allows air to flow out of the cabinet. Such units are suitable
only for use with known "clean" materials where product protection is the only objective.
5.
CERTIFICATION OF BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS
The capability of biological safety cabinets to protect personnel and the environment from
exposures to potentially hazardous aerosols is dependent on both the ability of the laboratory
worker to use the cabinet properly and the adequate functioning of the cabinet itself. A biological
safety cabinet shall never be used to contain hazardous materials unless it has been demonstrated to
meet certain minimum safety specifications.
Certification of the cabinets for minimum safety specifications is required whenever (1) a new
cabinet has been purchased and installed, but before it is used, (2) after it has been moved or
relocated, and (3) at least annually. This service is provided by outside companies. Please consult
Occupational and Environmental Safety for names of companies.
F.
TRAINING - HEAT-RELATED DISORDERS
It is important for the employer to provide training in the symptoms and effects of heat stress and
heat stroke. It is also important to stress the importance of drinking fluids and maintaining
proper electrolyte levels.
1.
HEAT EXHAUSTION
a.
Symptoms: Fatigue; weakness; profuse sweating; normal temperature; pale clammy skin; headache;
cramps; vomiting; fainting.
b.
Treatment:
i.
Medical Alert
ii.
Remove worker from hot area
iii.
Have worker lie down and raise feet
iv.
Apply cool, wet cloths
v.
Loosen or remove clothing
vi.
Allow small sips of water or electrolyte beverage if victim is not vomiting, then encourage
victim to drink as much as possible
22
vii.
c.
d.
Instruct victim to stay out of heat for the remainder of the day
Prevention:
i.
Take frequent breaks
ii.
Increase fluid intake
iii.
Allow workers to become acclimatized to heat
Causes:
i.
High air temperature
ii.
High humidity
iii.
Low air movement
iv.
Hard work
v.
Not enough breaks
vi.
Insufficient fluid intake
vii.
Full body clothing
viii. Workers not acclimated to heat
2.
HEAT STROKE
a.
Symptoms:
Dizziness; nausea; severe headache; hot and dry skin; confusion; collapse; delirium; coma; death.
b.
Treatment:
i.
Medical emergency alert--life-threatening situation
ii.
Remove worker from hot area
iii.
Remove clothing
iv.
Have victim lay down
v.
Cool body by any means available--cold water, chemical cooling ice packs, ice rubbed
vigorously over body
vi.
Do not give stimulants
vii.
Give cold drinks if patient can cooperate
viii. Transport victim immediately to nearest medical facility
c.
Causes:
i.
High air temperature
ii.
High humidity
iii.
Low air movement
iv.
Hard work
v.
Not enough breaks
vi.
Insufficient fluid intake
23
vii.
Full body clothing
viii. Not acclimatized
G.
CHEMICAL HYGIENE PLAN
1.
PURPOSE
The LSU University Occupational and Environmental Safety Policy requires that University activities be
conducted in accordance with OSHA standards. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) promulgated a final rule entitled Occupational Exposures to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories
(commonly known as “The Laboratory Standard”). The purpose of the standard is to minimize the
exposure of laboratory personnel to chemicals in the laboratory, avoid underestimation of risk, and provide
adequate ventilation.
2.
SCOPE
The laboratory safety requirements applies to all faculty, staff, and students engaged in the laboratory use
of hazardous chemicals. Laboratory use of hazardous chemicals is defined as the use or handling of
chemicals in which all of the following conditions are met:
a.
Chemical manipulations are carried out on a “laboratory scale.” Laboratory scale is defined as work
with substances in which the containers used for reactions, transfer, and other handling of substances
are designed to be easily and safely manipulated by one person.
b.
Multiple chemical procedure or chemicals are used.
c.
The procedures involved are not part of a production process.
3.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
The Chemical Hygiene Plan is the written program that contains policies and procedures for the safe use of
hazardous chemicals. Major objectives of the plan as described in “Prudent Practices in the Laboratory”
are to:
a.
Minimize all chemical exposure - Because few laboratory chemicals are without hazards, general
precautions for handling all laboratory chemicals should be adopted, rather than specific guidelines
for particular chemicals. Skin contact with chemicals should be avoided as a cardinal rule.
b.
Avoid underestimation of risk - Even for substances of no known significant hazard, exposure
should be minimized; for work with substances which present special hazards, special precautions
should be taken. One should assume that any mixture will be more toxic than its most toxic
component and that all substances of unknown toxicity are toxic.
c.
Provide adequate ventilation - The best way to prevent exposure to airborne substances is to prevent
their escape into the working atmosphere by use of hoods and other ventilation devices.
d.
Institute a chemical hygiene program - A mandatory chemical hygiene program designed to
minimize exposures is needed; it should be a regular, continuing effort, not merely a standby or short
term activity. Its recommendations should be followed in academic teaching laboratories as well as
by full-time laboratory workers.
e.
Observe the PELs, TLVs - The Permissible Exposure Limits of OSHA and the Threshold Limit
Values of the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists should not be exceeded.
4.
GENERAL
24
PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
a.
b.
Deans, Directors, Department Chairs, Principal Investigators, Managers and Supervisors are
responsible for maintaining safe operations in their labs on a daily basis. Specific responsibilities
included:
i.
Ensure that the requirements of the Chemical Hygiene Plan are followed in their areas.
ii.
Attend a laboratory safety meeting in their responsible area at least once each year.
iii.
Assure that adequate safety resources are available to laboratory personnel.
Occupational & Environmental Safety is responsible for providing overall coordination for the
Chemical Hygiene Plan (CHP). Specific responsibilities of OES include:
i.
Provide initial training for managers, supervisors, and safety coordinators concerning
requirements of the program and their responsibilities.
ii.
Provide guidance for the preparation of procedures, chemical inventories, and training
programs required by the CHP.
iii.
Chemical Hygiene Officer
The Chemical Hygiene Officer (CHO) is an employee who is qualified by training or
experience, to provide technical guidance for the continuing implementation of the CHP. The
Chemical Hygiene Officer for LSU is Fred McGuigan, Safety & Health Officer. Specific
responsibilities of the CHO include:
1) Work with administrators and other employees to develop and implement appropriate
chemical hygiene policies and practices.
2) Monitor procurement, use, and disposal of chemicals used in the lab.
3) Maintain current knowledge concerning the legal requirements of regulated substances in
the laboratory.
4) Seek ways to improve the CHP.
5) Help project directors develop precautions and adequate facilities.
c.
Faculty and Principle Investigators are responsible for maintaining safe operations in their labs on a
daily basis. Specific responsibilities included:
i.
Attend initial training provided by OES concerning the requirements of this program and their
responsibilities, or send their representative who shall be the safety coordinator (SC) for the
work area.
ii.
Provide written standard operating procedures for specific laboratory procedures.
iii.
Ensure employee training at the time of initial assignment to the area, whenever a new hazard
is introduced to the area or when the employee is reassigned to an area using new or different
materials and/or processes.
iv.
Provide appropriate personal protective equipment and require its proper use and
maintenance.
v.
Ensure an inventory is completed for all chemicals used in their work areas.
vi.
Review and understand MSDSs on materials used by employees under their direct supervision
and inform employees as new MSDSs become available.
25
vii.
Ensure MSDS files are available in the work area and are readily accessible to employees.
viii. Ensure that employees requests for MSDSs and other materials are promptly handled,
requesting any necessary information or help from OES.
ix.
d.
e.
A Laboratory Safety Coordinator (LSC) will be designated for each school, department, or other
subdivision by the dean, chairman, or director ro serve as liaison to OES and the CHO.
Responsibilities of the LSC include:
i.
Ensure that training is documented using the an attendance record. Send a copy of the record
to OES.
ii.
Provide information about chemical hazards to contract employees or LSU maintenance
employees working in the areas.
iii.
Serve as a conduit for information between laboratories in their area and OES and the CHO.
iv.
Assist the CHO in inspections and other duties as available and as assigned.
Laboratory Workers responsibilities include the following:
i.
Follow LSU’s chemical hygiene procedures and all safety and health standards and rules.
ii.
Develop good personal hygiene habits.
iii.
Report all hazardous conditions to the supervisor.
iv.
Wear or use prescribed protective equipment.
v.
Refrain from operating equipment without proper training or equipment that has safety
defects.
vi.
Attended training sessions on the Chemical Hygiene Program.
vii.
Keep informed about chemicals used in the lab.
5.
a.
Ensure that all containers of hazardous materials are labeled with chemical name or trade
name.
BASIC RULES AND PROCEDURES FOR WORKING WITH CHEMICALS
General Rules are fundamental safety precautions which should be familiar to all lab users. These
practice should be followed at all times.
i.
Accidents and spills.
1) All personnel should know the emergency procedures, “Response to Chemical Spills and
Accidents,” from the “Emergency Procedures” section on the OES web page.
2) Eye contact: promptly flush eyes with water for a prolonged period (15 minutes) and seek
medical attention.
3) Ingestion: Consult MSDS.
4) Skin contact: Consult MSDS.
5) Clean-up: Promptly clean up spills using appropriate protective apparel and equipment
and proper disposal. See LSU Safety Manual section on spills and cleanup for guidance
and requirements on notifying OES.
6) All significant accidents should be carefully analyzed with the assistance of OES and the
26
results distributed to those who might benefit.
ii.
Avoidance of routine exposure. Each laboratory employee with the training, education and
resources provided by supervision, shall develop and implement work habits consistent with
this CHP to minimize personal and co-worker exposure to the chemicals in the laboratory.
Based on the realization that all chemicals inherently present hazards in certain conditions,
exposure to all chemicals shall be minimized. General precautions which shall be followed
for the handling and use of all chemicals include:
1) Skin contact with all chemicals shall be avoided.
2) All employees shall wash all areas of exposed skin prior to leaving the laboratory.
3) Mouth suction for pipetting or starting a siphon is prohibited.
4) Eating, drinking, smoking, gum chewing, or application of cosmetics in areas where
laboratory chemicals are present shall be prohibited.
5) Storage, handling and consumption of food or beverages shall not occur in chemical
storage areas or refrigerators. Glassware and utensils used for laboratory operations shall
not be used for food or drink consumption or preparation.
iii.
Laboratory Equipment and Glassware. Each employee shall keep the work area clean and
uncluttered. At the completion of each work day or operation, the work area shall be
thoroughly cleaned and all equipment properly cleaned and stored. In addition, the following
procedures shall apply to the use of laboratory equipment:
1) All laboratory equipment shall be used only for its intended purpose.
2) All glassware will be handled and stored will be handled and stored with care to minimize
breakage; all broken glassware will be immediately disposed of in an appropriately
labeled broken glass container constructed with corrugated cardboard or other punctureresistant material.
3) All evacuated glass apparatus shall be shielded to contain chemicals and glass fragment
4) All laboratory equipment shall be inspected by the user on a periodic basis for safety
defects, and replaced or repaired as necessary.
iv.
Personal Protection - Apparel
1) Safety glasses meeting ANSI Z87.1 are required for employees and visitors in laboratories
so designated, and will be worn at all time when in the laboratory. Glasses do not
provide protection from chemical splashes.
2) Chemical goggles and a full face shield (if necessary) shall be worn during chemical
transfer and handling operations as procedures dictate.
3) Sandals, open toed shoes, and bare feet should be prohibited.
4) Lab coats provide adequate body protection for most operations in the laboratory.
Laboratory coats will be laundered on a periodic basis (at least monthly). Laboratory
coats shall be removed immediately upon discovery of significant contamination.
5) Appropriate chemical-resistant gloves shall be worn at all times when there may be skin
contact with chemicals. The degradation and permeation characteristics of the glove
material selected must be appropriate for protection from the hazardous chemical being
handled. Glove selection information is available from the OES web site. Gloves shall
27
be inspected and washed prior to reuse. Damaged or deteriorated gloves will be
immediately replaced. If a chemical permeates the glove, it shall be immediately
replaced, as prolonged contact with the hand may cause more serious damage than in the
absence of a proper glove. Gloves shall be washed prior to removal from the hands.
6) Thermal-resistant gloves shall be worn for operations involving the handling of heated
materials and cryogenic fluids. Thermal-resistant gloves shall be non-asbestos and shall
be replaced when damaged or deteriorated.
7) Respirator usage shall comply with LSU’s Respiratory Protection Program. If the faculty
or principle investigator feels that respirators are needed, the Chemical Hygiene Officer
should be contacted for an exposure assessment. Voluntary use of respirators is
encouraged where relief from nuisance odors or dust is desirable. A copy of OSHA’s
statement, “Information for Employees Using Respirators When Not Required Under the
Standard,” must be given to those individuals using respirators voluntarily. This
statement is an attachment to LSU’s program and may be found on OES’s web site.
v.
Personal Protection - Equipment.
1) Spill control kits should be on hand to clean up small spills. See section on “Spills and
Accidents” for further guidance.
2) Safety shields should be used where applicable for protection against explosion and splash
hazards. Line of sight protection is desirable.
3) Fire extinguishers must be available in all laboratories and all personnel shall be trained in
their use annually.
4) Safety showers are to be available in all laboratories where chemicals are handled. Every
laboratory worker should know where the showers are and be trained in its use.
5) Eyewash fountains must be available in the laboratories to provide a continuous soft
stream of water for 15 minutes. The fountains should be located close to the safety
showers so that the eyes can be washed while the body is showered if necessary.
vi.
Personal Work Practices
1) All employees shall be alert for unsafe practice and conditions in the laboratory and shall
immediately report such practices and/or conditions to the laboratory supervisor. The
supervisor must correct unsafe practices and/or conditions promptly.
2) Long hair and loose-fitting clothing shall be confined close to the body to avoid being
caught in moving machine/equipment parts.
3) Use only those chemicals appropriate for the ventilation system.
4) Avoid unnecessary exposure to all chemicals by any route.
5) Do not smell or taste any chemicals
6) Avoid working alone in the laboratory. When working alone in the laboratory arrange for
periodic checks by personnel in adjacent laboratories.
7) Avoid practical jokes or other behavior which might confuse, startle or distract another
worker.
8) Wash areas of exposed skin well before leaving the laboratory.
28
9) Keep work area clean and uncluttered, with chemicals and equipment being properly
stored. Clean up the work area on completion of an operation or at the end of each day.
b.
c.
10)
Planning: Seek information and advice about hazards, plan appropriate protective
procedures, and plan positioning of equipment before beginning any new operation.
11)
Use of hood: Use the hood for operations which might result in the release of
toxic chemical vapors or dust. See section on engineering controls.
Working with Allergens and Embryotoxins.
i.
Wear suitable gloves to prevent hand contact with allergens or substances of unknown
allergenic activity. Latex gloves are to be avoided due to allergenic properties and are
generally not recommended for any chemical exposure unless manufacturer’s data is available
to show that their product is protective for a particular chemical.
ii.
If you are a woman of childbearing age, be particularly cautious when handling substances
known to be embryotoxins (examples: organomercurials, lead compounds, formamide).
Contact the research supervisor or OES to verify adequacy of controls.
Special Procedures for Highly Hazardous Substances. Special precautions shall be taken when
performing laboratory work with any of the following chemical categories: carcinogens, reproductive
toxins, substances that have a high degree of acute toxicity, or chemicals who toxic properties are
unknown.
i.
Chemical Categories
Carcinogens - Both known and suspect cancer - causing chemicals reported in the latest
edition of the National Toxicology Program’s “Carcinogens Summary”.
Reproductive Toxins - Chemicals including mutagens and teratogens identified as such by the
MSDS.
Acute Toxicity Chemicals - Any substance for which the LSD50 data described in the
applicable MSDS (or other literature source) cause the substance to be classified as a
level 3 or 4 health hazard according to the HMIS system.
Chemicals Whose Toxic Properties are Unknown - Chemicals for which there is no known
statistically significant study conducted in accordance with established scientific
principles that establishes its toxicity.
ii.
Precautions for Use
1) Allow only those persons specifically trained to work with highly hazardous chemicals to
work with those chemicals.
2) Designated Area - A hood, glove box, portion of a laboratory, or an entire laboratory
must be designated for high hazard use.
3) Designated areas shall be posted and their boundaries clearly marked. Posting shall
include the identification of the highly hazardous chemicals used in the area.
4) Access to the laboratory should be restricted during high hazard chemical use by the
laboratory supervisor.
5) Suitable gloves and long sleeves shall be worn during use of high hazardous chemicals.
6) Use the smallest amount of chemical that is consistent with the requirements of the work
29
to be done.
7) Use high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters or high-efficiency scrubber systems to
protect vacuum lines and pumps.
8) Decontaminate a designated area when work is completed.
d.
e.
Animal Work with Chemicals of High Chronic Toxicity
i.
Access: For large scale studies, special facilities with restricted access are preferable.
ii.
Administration of the toxic substance: When possible, administer the substance by injection
or gavage instead of in the diet. If administration is in the diet, use a caging system under
negative pressure or under laminar air flow directed toward HEPA filters.
iii.
Aerosol suppression: Devise procedures which minimize formation and dispersal of
contaminated aerosols, including those from food, urine, and feces (e.g. use HEPA filtered
vacuum equipment for cleaning, moisten contaminated bedding before removal from the cage,
mix diets in closed containers in a hood).
iv.
Personal protection: when working in the animal room, wear plastic or rubber gloves, fully
buttoned laboratory coat or jumpsuit and, if needed because of incomplete suppression of
aerosols, other apparel and equipment (shoe and head coverings, respirator).
v.
Waste disposal: Dispose of contaminated animal tissues and excreta by incineration if the
available incinerator can convert the contaminant to non-toxic products; otherwise, package
the waste appropriately for burial in an EPA-approved site.
Prior Approval For Laboratory Activities. Certain activities that present specific, foreseeable hazards
for laboratories and their users may require prior approval from their department and/or the CHO.
These activities include work with recombinant DNA and infectious agents, sole occupancy of
building, hazardous operations, use of new procedures or chemicals, and unattended operations.
i.
Sole Occupancy of Building. Under normal circumstances, work should not be done in the
laboratory when the only person in the building is the laboratory person performing the work.
If this is necessary, periodic checks on that person should be made by personnel in adjacent
buildings.
ii.
Hazardous Operations. All hazardous operations are to be performed during a time when at
least two people are present a the laboratory. At no time shall a laboratory person, while
working alone in the laboratory, perform work which is considered hazardous. The
determination of hazardous operations shall be made by the laboratory supervisor and/or
CHO.
iii.
New Procedures or Chemicals. Prior to the use of new procedures or chemicals, a review of
potential hazards created must be undertaken within the department. The review should also
be completed when there is a substantial change in the amount of chemicals used or a change
in the equipment used in the procedure.
iv.
Unattended Operations. When laboratory operations are performed which will be unattended
by laboratory personnel (continuous operations, overnight reactions, etc.), the following
procedures will be employed:
1)
2)
The laboratory supervisor will review work procedures to ensure the safe completion of
the operation.
An appropriate sign will be posted at all entrances to the laboratory.
30
3)
4)
5)
6)
6.
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
The overhead lights in the laboratory will be left on.
Precautions shall be made for the interruption of utility services during the unattended
operation (loss of water pressure, electricity, etc.).
Containment will be provided in the event of unexpected hazardous material releases.
Tubing for running water must be in good condition and secured at connections by
clamps or wire.
CHEMICAL PROCUREMENT, DISTRIBUTION, AND STORAGE
Procurement.
i.
Before a substance is received, information on proper handling, storage, and disposal should
be known to those who will be involved.
ii.
No container should be accepted without an adequate identifying label.
iii.
All substances should be received in a central location.
iv.
OES will be developing a closed system of purchasing and distribution using a computerized
and automated system, such as ChemMIST. This will enable OES to provide support to the
organization and emergency workers in the event of an emergency. The system will also
promote waste reduction by identifying excess chemicals for other departments prior to
purchase.
Stockrooms/storerooms.
i.
Toxic substances should be segregated in a well-defined area with local exhaust ventilation.
ii.
Chemicals which are highly toxic or other chemicals whose containers have been opened
should be in unbreakable secondary containers.
iii.
Stored chemicals should be examined periodically (at least annually) for replacement,
deterioration, and container integrity.
iv.
Stockrooms/storerooms should not be used as preparation or repackaging areas, should be
open during normal working hours, and should be controlled by one person.
Distribution.
i.
When chemicals are hand carried, the container should be placed in an outside container or
bucket.
ii.
Freight-only elevators should be used if possible.
Laboratory storage.
i.
Amounts permitted should be as small as practical.
ii.
Storage on bench tops and hoods is inadvisable. If hoods are used for storage, they must be
labeled as such and not used for experiments.
iii.
Exposure to heat or direct sunlight should be avoided.
iv.
Periodic inventories should be conducted, with the items being discarded or returned to the
storeroom/stockroom.
v.
All labels shall face front.
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING.
31
In the event of concern about the performance of a hood, when a new hood is put into service, or
there is reason to suspect exposure to laboratory personnel, contact OES to arrange for
monitoring and sampling. This may be desirable when highly toxic or very volatile toxic
chemicals are used or stored regularly.
8.
HOUSEKEEPING, MAINTENANCE, AND INSPECTIONS.
Each laboratory worker is directly responsible for the cleanliness of his or her work space, and
jointly responsible for common areas of the laboratory. Laboratory management shall insist on
the maintenance of housekeeping standards. The following procedures apply to housekeeping
standards of the laboratory:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
Cleaning.
i.
Floors should be cleaned regularly.
ii.
The work area shall be cleaned at the end of each operation or each day.
iii.
All apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned and returned to storage upon completion of usage.
iv.
Chemical containers shall be clean, properly labeled and returned to storage upon completion
of usage.
v.
All chemical waste will be disposed of promptly as described in the LSU Hazardous Waste
Program.
Inspections.
i.
Formal housekeeping and chemical hygiene inspections should be made by department
Laboratory Safety Coordinator (LSC) at least quarterly.
ii.
Faculty and principle investigators should informally conduct housekeeping and chemical
hygiene inspections continually.
Maintenance.
i.
Eye washes shall be inspected and flushed for 5 minutes weekly by laboratory employees.
ii.
Showers shall be inspected by OES at least annually.
iii.
Records shall be maintained for eye wash and shower inspections.
Passageways.
i.
The lab benches shall be kept clear of equipment and chemicals except those necessary for the
work currently being performed.
ii.
All floors, aisles, exits, fire extinguishing equipment, eye washes, electrical disconnects and
other emergency equipment shall remain unobstructed.
RECORDS
Accident reports for any safety related incident are to be submitted to Risk Management and
Occupational and Environmental Safety.
10.
SIGNS AND LABELS
Prominent signs and labels of the following types should be posted:
32
a.
Emergency telephone numbers of emergency personnel/facilities, supervisors, and laboratory
workers.
b.
Identity labels showing the contents of containers (including waste receptacles) and associated
hazards.
c.
Locations signs for safety showers, eyewash stations, other safety and first aid equipment, exits and
areas where food and beverage consumption and storage are permitted.
d.
Warning at areas or equipment where special or unusual hazards exist.
11.
INFORMATION AND TRAINING PROGRAM
a.
Training Organization. In order to provide specific and effective information to all laboratory users
in a timely manner, training for the CHP will employ the “train the trainer” system. OES will
provide information and training for managers, supervisors, and safety coordinators for each area.
The safety coordinator and lab supervisor of each area will then be responsible for implementing and
customizing training for their laboratory users.
b.
Training Timing and Frequency. Information and training shall be provided to laboratory employees
on the following basis:
c.
i.
Initially, all laboratory employees shall complete a training program.
ii.
Individuals who are assigned to use new hazardous chemicals and/or new laboratory work
procedures must have their training upgraded.
iii.
New employees shall complete a training program.
iv.
All employees shall be provided with updated information on an annual basis.
Training Components. This training shall include methods of detecting the presence of hazardous
chemicals, physical and health hazards of chemicals in the lab, and measure employees can take to
protect themselves from these hazards. The training shall present the details of the Chemical
Hygiene Plan and shall include:
i.
The contents of the Chemical Hygiene Plan.
ii.
The location and availability of the Chemical Hygiene Plan.
iii.
The permissible exposure limits for OSHA regulated substances or recommended exposure
values for other hazardous chemicals not regulated by OSHA which are present in the
laboratory.
iv.
The physical and health hazards of chemicals in the work area.
v.
Signs and symptoms associated with exposure to the chemicals present in the laboratory.
vi.
Location, availability, and how to use reference material on chemical hygiene including
Material Safety Data Sheets.
vii.
The criteria for selection and use of personal protective equipment and the limits of its
protection.
viii. Emergency procedures and the location of emergency equipment
d.
Training Documentation. The supervisor is responsible for documenting employee training. The
original record shall be maintained by the safety coordinator or department and a copy forwarded to
the Chemical Hygiene Officer.
33
12.
WASTE DISPOSAL PROGRAM
All chemicals shall be disposed of in accordance with the LSU Hazardous Waste Disposal
Program, the details of which can be found on the OES web site.
13.
ENGINEERING CONTROLS
a.
Intent. The engineering controls installed in the laboratory are intended to minimize employee
exposure to chemical and physical hazards in the workplace. These controls must be maintained in
proper working order for this goal to be realized.
b.
Modification. No modification of engineering controls will occur unless testing indicates that
worker protection will continue to be adequate.
c.
Improper Function. Improper function of engineering controls must be reported to Facility Services
or OES immediately. The system shall be taken out of service until proper repairs have been
executed.
d.
Usage
i.
Laboratory Fume Hoods. The laboratory hoods shall be utilized for all chemical procedures
which might result in release of hazardous chemical vapors or dust. As a general rule, the
hood shall be used for all chemical procedures involving substances which are appreciably
volatile and have a permissible exposure limit (PEL) less than 100ppm or are flammable
materials. The following work practices shall apply to the use of hoods:
1) Confirm adequate hood ventilation performance prior to opening chemical containers
inside the hood. An inward flow of air can be confirmed by holding a thin strip of tissue
at the face of the hood and observing the movement of the paper.
2) Keep the sash of the hood at or below the indicated maximum operating height except
when adjustments within the hood are being made. At these time, maintain the sash
height as low as possible.
3) Storage of chemicals and equipment inside the hood shall be kept to a minimum.
4) Minimize interference with the inward flow of air into the hood.
5) Locate apparatus toward the rear of the hood to prevent vapors from escaping.
6) Leave the hood operating when it is not in active use if hazardous chemicals are contained
inside the hood or if it is uncertain whether adequate general laboratory ventilation will
be maintained when the hood is non-operational.
7) The hood shall not be used as a means of disposal for volatile chemicals.
8) The ventilation system shall be inspected annually by OES. The hood face velocity shall
be at least 80-85 feet per minute. A record of each inspection shall be maintained by the
Chemical Hygiene Officer.
ii.
Gloves Boxes and Isolation Rooms. The exhaust air from a glove box or isolation room will
pass through scrubbers or other treatment before release into the regular exhaust system.
iii.
Flammable Storage Cabinets. Cabinets designed for the safe storage of flammable chemicals
can only do so if used and maintained properly. Cabinets are generally made of doublewalled construction and are made of 18 gage steel. The doors are two inches above the base
of the cabinet is liquid proof to that point. Two vents are provided on opposite side of the
cabinet and are equipped with flame-arrester screens. Always read the manufacturer’s
information and follow prudent safety practices such as:
1) Store only compatible materials inside the cabinet.
34
2) Store chemicals of similar vapor density together when using mechanical ventilation (e.g.,
heavier than air vapors are vented through the bottom vent and lighter than air vapors
through the top vent).
3) Do not store paper or cardboard inside cabinets with the chemicals.
4) Do not overload the cabinet.
H.
1.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM
PURPOSE
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) published a Final Rule on respiratory
protection (29 CFR 1910.134) on January 8, 1998. This Respiratory Protection Program has been
written to comply with the OSHA regulation. Use of respirators may be mandated by OSHA
regulations when employees are exposed to hazardous agents above the permissible exposure limit
(PEL). This program outlines responsibilities and procedures to ensure safe and effective use of
respiratory protection.
2.
SCOPE
The Respiratory Protection Program is for all employees and students of Louisiana State University
who use respirators in performance of their duties.
3.
DEFINITIONS
Air-purifying respirator means a respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister that removes
specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element.
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means a respirator that supplies the respirator user with breathing air
from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere, and includes supplied-air respirators (SARs) and
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) units.
Canister or cartridge means a container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items,
which removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container.
Demand respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the facepiece
only when a negative pressure is created inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Emergency situation means any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of
containers, or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled significant release
of an airborne contaminant.
Employee exposure means exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would occur if the
employee were not using respiratory protection.
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) means a system that warns the respirator user of the approach of the
end of adequate respiratory protection, for example, that the sorbent is approaching saturation or is no
longer effective.
Escape-only respirator means a respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit.
Filter or air purifying element means a component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols
from the inspired air.
Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means a negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter as an integral
part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium.
Fit factor means a quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific individual, and
35
typically estimates the ratio of the concentration of a substance in ambient air to its concentration inside
the respirator when worn.
Fit test means the use of a protocol to qualitatively or quantitatively evaluate the fit of a respirator on an
individual. (See also Qualitative fit test QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
Helmet means a rigid respiratory inlet covering that also provides head protection against impact and
penetration.
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter means a filter that is at least 99.97% efficient in removing
monodisperse particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter. The equivalent NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate
filters are the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
Hood means a respiratory inlet covering that completely covers the head and neck and may also cover
portions of the shoulders and torso.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means an atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to
life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an individual’s ability to escape
from a dangerous atmosphere.
Loose-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that is designed to form a partial seal with the
face.
Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) means a respirator in which the air pressure inside the facepiece
is negative during inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an atmosphere with an oxygen content below 19.5% by volume.
Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) means an individual whose legally permitted
scope of practice (i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her to independently provide,
or be delegated the responsibility to provide, some or all of the health care services required by
paragraph (e) of this section.
Positive pressure respirator means a respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering
exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) means an air-purifying respirator that uses a blower to force the
ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet covering.
Pressure demand respirator means a positive pressure atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits
breathing air to the facepiece when the positive pressure is reduced inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the
individual’s response to the test agent.
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an assessment of the adequacy of respirator fit by numerically
measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator.
Respiratory inlet covering means that portion of a respirator that forms the protective barrier between the
user’s respiratory tract and an air-purifying device or breathing air source, or both. It may be a
facepiece, helmet, hood, suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with nose clamp.
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the
breathing air source is designed to be carried by the user.
Service life means the period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory equipment
provides adequate protection to the wearer.
36
Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the
source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user.
Tight-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that forms a complete seal with the face.
User seal check means an action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly
seated to the face.
4.
PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
GENERAL
Areas of
Responsibility - Three areas of responsibility are central to the implementation of the Exposure
Control Plan at Louisiana State University and they include:
a.
Occupational and Environmental Safety will manage and support the Respiratory Protection
Program. This includes:
i.
coordinating implementation of the Respiratory Protection Program;
ii.
providing consultation for respirator selection;
iii. revising, updating and improving the Respiratory Protection Program when necessary; and
iv. conducting periodic program evaluations to make sure that the Respiratory Protection
Program is properly implemented and that employees are using respirators properly
b.
Deans, Directors, Department Chairs, Principal Investigators, Managers and Supervisors
i.
are responsible for compliance in their areas;
ii.
must have a written respirator program specific to the hazards in their area;
iii. must identify and provide training and/or information to all employees who use respirators;
iv. must maintain an up-to-date list of LSU personnel requiring training
v.
must maintain appropriate training records;
vi. and must ensure that the respiratory protection program is followed.
c.
Employees are responsible for following the Respiratory Protection Program. They must know:
i.
why respirator is necessary and how improper fit effects respirator performance;
ii.
what limitations and capabilities of respirators are;
iii. how to use respirator in emergency situations including when respirator malfunctions;
iv. how to inspect and use respirators and check respirator seals
v.
how to maintain and store respirators
vi. which medical signs may limit effective use of respirator
vii. general regulatory requirements
5.
VOLUNTARY USE
Voluntary respirator use applies if the
employees are not exposed to hazardous agents above the permissible exposure limits, they
are not emergency responders, or they are not required by the organization. Voluntary use
of respirators is encouraged by Louisiana State University to prevent inhalation of small
amounts of potentially harmful agents that are not considered to be at hazardous levels as
defined by OSHA. If the responsible person (see Sec. 4.b) decides that respirator use is
permitted, that person must ensure that the voluntary user is given the information in
Appendix D of this program (“Information for Employees Using Respirators When Not
Required Under the Standard”); and implement those elements of a written program that
ensure the medical evaluation (Sec. 7) is accomplished, and that the respirator is cleaned,
37
stored, and maintained so that its use does not present a health hazard to the employee. The
requirement for a written program does not include employees using filtering facepiece
respirators (dust masks).
6.
RESPIRATOR SELECTION
Respirator use is work place specific.
Respirators shall be assigned to individuals based upon the following:
a.
Job requirements and tasks which the individual will perform.
b.
Hazardous agents to which individual is potentially exposed. OES should be contacted prior to
selection of respirators to assist in potential hazard evaluation. It may be advisable to conduct
monitoring for workplace hazards. A respirator is never considered the primary method of hazard
control where engineering and work practice controls are feasible.
c.
Physical/ chemical state of the potential inhalation hazard.
d.
Immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH) conditions, including oxygen deficiencies which
may exist during the tasks to be performed.
e.
Emergency situations which may occur during respirator use.
7.
MEDICAL EVALUATION
a.
A medical evaluation is required of those individuals required to wear a respirator, and
recommended for those individuals using a respirator on a voluntary basis. Prior to fit testing each
individual must be provided a medical evaluation by the Student Health Center physician (or their
personal physician). Questionnaires are available at the Student Health Center which contain key
questions which must be answered prior to respirator use approval by the physician (see Appendix C
of the attachment). The department supervisor must receive approval in writing from the physician
prior to permitting the employee to use a respirator.
b.
If employees are using dust masks voluntarily to prevent inhalation of nuisance dust, supervisors are
required only to provide the employee with the information found in Appendix D of the attachment.
A medical evaluation is not necessary.
8.
FIT TESTING
Before using a respirator an
employee must be fit tested with the same make, model, style, and size of respirator that
they will be wearing.
a.
A qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quantitative fit test (QNFT) according to Appendix A of the
attachment must be used.
b.
Air supplied or powered air purifying (PAPR) respirators must also use the fit test techniques of
Appendix A of the attachment by adapting the facepieces to negative air respirators or using an
identical negative air respirator as a surrogate.
9.
USE OF
RESPIRATORS
a.
Respirators must be worn such that inhaled air does not leak at the facepiece seal during use.
i.
This means that employees shall not have facial hair or any other condition which would
38
prevent a good seal at the face and the employee shall not remove or adjust the facepiece
during use so as to cause air to leak into the facepiece.
b.
ii.
Glasses shall not be worn in a manner that would interfere with the seal of the facepiece.
iii.
Employees shall perform a user seal check each time that they put on the respirator according
to Appendix B-1 of the attachment. (Not required for dust masks).
The person in charge of the operation/task must manage the respirator program to ensure continuing
respirator effectiveness by:
i.
Maintaining surveillance of the work area conditions and the degree of employee exposure or
stress. When a change is noticed which may affect the respirator effectiveness management
should contact OES to re-evaluate the work area respirator program.
ii.
Ensuring that employees leave the respirator use area:
1) to wash their faces and respirator facepieces as necessary to prevent eye or skin irritation
from respirator use; or
2) if the employee detects vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance, or
leakage of the facepiece; or
3) to replace the respirator or filter, cartridge, or canister elements.
iii.
c.
Replacing or repairing defective respirators or respirator components if the employee detects
gas breakthrough or other respirator problems mentioned above.
For respirator use in IDLH atmospheres the following rules must be followed:
Note: Entry into IDLH or suspected IDLH atmospheres is permitted only in situations where serious
safety and environmental threats exist.
i.
At least one employee must be located outside the IDLH atmosphere.
ii.
The employee(s) inside and the employee(s) outside the IDLH atmosphere must maintain
visual, voice, or signal line communication.
iii.
The employee(s) outside the IDLH atmosphere are trained to provide effective emergency
rescue.
iv.
The University is notified when the employee(s) outside the IDLH atmosphere enter the IDLH
atmosphere to provided emergency rescue.
v.
The employer or designee provides necessary assistance to the situation once notified of the
emergency rescue.
vi.
The employee(s) outside the IDLH atmosphere are provided with
1) positive pressure or pressure demand SCBA or SAR.
2) a plan for retrieval must be developed and include appropriate retrieval equipment
10.
a.
MAINTENANCE AND CARE OF RESPIRATORS
The person in charge of the operation/task must provide for cleaning and disinfecting, storage,
inspection, and repair of respirators. The procedures are covered in Appendix B-2 of the attachment.
Cleaning and inspection shall be at the following intervals:
i.
Respirators issued exclusively to one employee shall be cleaned and disinfected as often as
39
necessary to be maintained in a sanitary condition;
b.
ii.
Respirators issued to more than one employee shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use;
and
iii.
Respirators for emergency use shall be checked and disinfected after each use; and
iv.
Respirators used in fit testing and training shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use.
Respirators shall be stored as follows:
i.
To protect from damage, contamination, dust, sunlight, extreme temperatures, excessive
moisture, and damaging chemicals as well as to prevent deformation of the facepiece and
exhalation valve.
ii.
In addition emergency respirators shall be:
1) kept accessible to the work area;
2) Have storage places clearly marked as containing emergency respirators; and
3) Stored as required by the manufacturer
c.
Management shall ensure
i.
that respirators are inspected as follows:
1) All respirators used in routine situations are inspected before each use and during
cleaning;
2) Emergency respirators are inspected at least monthly and before and after each use; and
3) Emergency escape-only respirators shall be inspected before being carried into the
workplace for use.
ii.
that inspections include:
1)
A check of respirator function, tightness of connections, and the condition of the
various parts including, but not limited to, the facepiece, head straps, valves, connecting
tube, and cartridges, canisters or filters; and
2) A check of elastomeric parts for pliability and signs of deterioration.
iii.
In addition to the above requirements self-contained breathing apparatus shall be inspected
monthly. Air and oxygen cylinders shall be maintained in a fully charged state and shall be
recharged when the pressure falls to 90% of the manufacturer’s recommended pressure level.
The regulator and warning devices shall be inspected for proper function.
iv.
that inspections for respirators maintained for emergency use shall:
1) Certify the respirator by documenting the date the inspection was performed, the name (or
signature) of the person who made the inspection, the findings, required remedial action,
and a serial number or other means of identifying the inspected respirator; and
2) Provide this information on a tag or label that is attached to the storage compartment for
the respirator, is kept with the respirator, or is included in inspection reports stored as
paper or electronic files. This information shall be maintained until replaced following a
subsequent certification.
d.
Repairs shall be made in accordance with the following procedures:
40
i.
Repairs or adjustments to respirators are to be made only by persons appropriately trained to
perform such operations and shall use only the respirator manufacturer’s NIOSH-approved
parts designed for the respirator;
ii.
Repairs shall be made according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications
for the type and extent of repairs to be performed; and
iii.
Reducing and admission valves, regulators, and alarms shall be adjusted or repaired only by
the manufacturer or a technician trained by the manufacturer.
11.
a.
BREATHING AIR QUALITY AND USE
Compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for respiration shall comply
with the following specifications:
i.
Compressed and liquid oxygen shall meet the United States Pharmacopoeia requirements for
medical or breathing oxygen; and
ii.
Compressed breathing air shall meet at least the requirements for Type 1-Grade D breathing
air described in ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G–
7.1–1989, to include:
1) Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5– 23.5%;
2) Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air or less;
3) Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less;
4) Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less; and
5) Lack of noticeable odor.
iii.
Cylinders used to supply breathing air to respirators shall meet the following requirements:
1) Cylinders are tested and maintained as prescribed in the Shipping Container Specification
Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR part 173 and part 178);
2) Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of analysis from the supplier that
the breathing air meets the requirements for Type 1—Grade D breathing air; and
3) The moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of ´50 F (´45.6 C) at 1
atmosphere pressure.
iv.
Compressors used to supply breathing air to respirators shall be constructed and situated so as
to:
1) Prevent entry of contaminated air into the air-supply system;
2) Minimize moisture content so that the dew point at 1 atmosphere pressure is 10 degrees F
(5.56 C) below the ambient temperature;
3) Have suitable in-line air-purifying sorbent beds and filters to further ensure breathing air
quality. Sorbent beds and filters shall be maintained and replaced or refurbished
periodically following the manufacturer’s instructions.
4) Have a tag containing the most recent change date and the signature of the person
authorized by the employer to perform the change. The tag shall be maintained at the
compressor.
v.
For compressors that are not oil-lubricated, carbon monoxide levels in the breathing air shall
41
not exceed 10 ppm.
vi.
For oil-lubricated compressors, a high-temperature or carbon monoxide alarm, or both, shall
be used to monitor carbon monoxide levels. If only high-temperature alarms are used, the air
supply shall be monitored at intervals sufficient to prevent carbon monoxide in the breathing
air from exceeding 10 ppm.
vii.
Breathing air couplings are to be incompatible with outlets for nonrespirable worksite air or
other gas systems. No asphyxiating substance shall be introduced into breathing air lines.
viii. Breathing gas containers marked in accordance with the NIOSH respirator certification
standard, 42 CFR part 84, shall be used.
12.
IDENTIFICATION OF FILTERS, CARTRIDGES, AND CANISTERS
All filters, cartridges and canisters used in the workplace shall be labeled and color coded
with the NIOSH approval label and that the label is not removed and remains legible.
13.
TRAINING AND INFORMATION
Effective training must be provided to employees who are required to use respirators. The
training must be comprehensive, understandable, and recur annually, and more often if
necessary. Employees who wear respirators when not required by this section or by the
employer to do so must be provided the basic information on respirators in Appendix D of
the attachment.
a.
Each employee must be trained in and demonstrate knowledge of at least the following:
i.
Why the respirator is necessary and how improper fit, usage, or maintenance can compromise
the protective effect of the respirator;
ii.
What the limitations and capabilities of the respirator are;
iii.
How to use the respirator effectively in emergency situations, including situations in which
the respirator malfunctions;
iv.
How to inspect, put on and remove, use, and check the seals of the respirator;
v.
What the procedures are for maintenance and storage of the respirator;
vi.
How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the effective use of
respirators; and
vii.
The general requirements of this section.
b.
The employer shall provide the training prior to requiring the employee to use a respirator in the
workplace.
c.
An employer who is able to demonstrate that a new employee has received training within the last 12
months that addresses the elements specified in paragraph (a)(i) through (vii) above is not required
to repeat such training provided that, as required by paragraph (a), the employee can demonstrate
knowledge of those element(s). Previous training not repeated initially must be provided no later
than 12 months from the date of the previous training.
d.
Retraining shall be administered annually, and when the following situations occur:
i.
Changes in the workplace or the type of respirator render previous training obsolete;
42
ii.
Inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge or use of the respirator indicate that the employee
has not retained the requisite understanding or skill; or
iii.
Any other situation arises in which retraining appears necessary to ensure safe respirator use.
e.
The basic advisory information on respirators, as presented in Appendix D of the attachment, shall
be provided by the employer in any written or oral format, to employees who wear respirators when
such use is not required by this section or by the employer.
14.
PROGRAM EVALUATION
OES will conduct evaluations of the workplace to ensure that the respiratory protection
program is being properly implemented, and to consult employees to ensure that they are
using the respirators properly. Any problems that are identified during this assessment shall
be corrected.
15.
RECORDKEEPING
The person in charge of the operation/task must establish and retain written information
regarding medical evaluations, fit testing, and the respirator program.
a.
Medical evaluation. Records of medical evaluations required by this section must be retained and
made available.
b.
Fit testing.
i.
The employer shall establish a record of the qualitative and quantitative fit tests administered
to an employee including:
1)
The name or identification of the employee tested;
2)
Type of fit test performed;
3)
Specific make, model, style, and size of respirator tested;
4)
Date of test; and
5)
The pass/fail results for QLFTs or the fit factor and strip chart recording or other
recording of the test results for QNFTs.
ii.
Fit test records shall be retained for respirator users until the next fit test is administered.
iii.
A written copy of the current respirator program shall be retained by the employer.
iv.
Written materials required to be retained under this paragraph shall be made available upon
request to affected employees and to the Assistant Secretary or designee for examination and
copying.
43
Respirator Appendix A
Part I. OSHA-Accepted Fit Test Protocols
A. Fit Testing Procedures—General Requirements
The employer shall conduct fit testing using the following procedures. The requirements in this appendix apply to all OSHAaccepted fit test methods, both QLFT and QNFT.
1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick the most acceptable respirator from a sufficient number of respirator models and sizes
so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user.
2. Prior to the selection process, the test subject shall be shown how to put on a respirator, how it should be positioned on the
face, how to set strap tension and how to determine an acceptable fit. A mirror shall be available to assist the subject in
evaluating the fit and positioning of the respirator. This instruction may not constitute the subject’s formal training on respirator
use, because it is only a review.
3. The test subject shall be informed that he/she is being asked to select the respirator that provides the most acceptable fit. Each
respirator represents a different size and shape, and if fitted and used properly, will provide adequate protection.
4. The test subject shall be instructed to hold each chosen facepiece up to the face and eliminate those that obviously do not give
an acceptable fit.
5. The more acceptable facepieces are noted in case the one selected proves unacceptable; the most comfortable mask is donned
and worn at least five minutes to assess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort can be given by discussing the points in the
following item A.6. If the test subject is not familiar with using a particular respirator, the test subject shall be directed to don the
mask several times and to adjust the straps each time to become adept at setting proper tension on the straps.
6. Assessment of comfort shall include a review of the following points with the test subject and allowing the test subject
adequate time to determine the comfort of the respirator:
(a) Position of the mask on the nose
(b) Room for eye protection
(c) Room to talk
(d) Position of mask on face and cheeks
7. The following criteria shall be used to help determine the adequacy of the respirator fit:
(a) Chin properly placed;
(b) Adequate strap tension, not overly tightened;
(c) Fit across nose bridge;
(d) Respirator of proper size to span distance from nose to chin;
(e) Tendency of respirator to slip;
(f) Self-observation in mirror to evaluate fit and respirator position.
8. The test subject shall conduct a user seal check, either the negative and positive pressure seal checks described in Appendix B–
1 of this section or those recommended by the respirator manufacturer which provide equivalent protection to the procedures in
Appendix B–1. Before conducting the negative and positive pressure checks, the subject shall be told to seat the mask on the face
by moving the head from side-to-side and up and down slowly while taking in a few slow deep breaths. Another facepiece shall
be selected and retested if the test subject fails the user seal check tests.
9. The test shall not be conducted if there is any hair growth between the skin and the facepiece sealing surface, such as stubble
beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns which cross the respirator sealing surface. Any type of apparel which interferes with
a satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed.
10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in breathing during the tests, she or he shall be referred to a physician or other licensed
health care professional, as appropriate, to determine whether the test subject can wear a respirator while performing her or his
duties.
11. If the employee finds the fit of the respirator unacceptable, the test subject shall be given the opportunity to select a different
respirator and to be retested.
12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the commencement of the fit test, the test subject shall be given a description of the fit test and the
test subject’s responsibilities during the test procedure. The description of the process shall include a description of the test
exercises that the subject will be performing. The respirator to be tested shall be worn for at least 5 minutes before the start of the
fit test.
13. The fit test shall be performed while the test subject is wearing any applicable safety equipment that may be worn during
actual respirator use which could interfere with respirator fit.
14. Test Exercises. (a) The following test exercises are to be performed for all fit testing methods prescribed in this appendix,
except for the CNP method. A separate fit testing exercise regimen is contained in the CNP protocol. The test subject shall
perform exercises, in the test environment, in the following manner:
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally.
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply, taking caution so as not to
hyperventilate.
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her head from side to side between the extreme
positions on each side. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side.
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his/her head up and down. The subject shall be
Respirator Appendix A
instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling).
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject
Page
4444
can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song.
Rainbow Passage
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the air, they act like a prism and form a rainbow. The rainbow is a division of white light
into many beautiful colors. These take the shape of a long round arch, with its path high above, and its two ends apparently
beyond the horizon. There is, according to legend, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People look, but no one ever finds it. When a
man looks for something beyond reach, his friends say he is looking for the pot of gold at the end of the rainbow.
(6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to QNFT testing; it is not performed for
QLFT) (7) Bending over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be
substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud type QNFT or QLFT units that do not permit bending over
at the waist.
(8) Normal breathing. Same as exercise (1).
(b) Each test exercise shall be performed for one minute except for the grimace exercise which shall be performed for 15 seconds.
The test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol.
If it has become unacceptable, another model of respirator shall be tried. The respirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test
exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the test, and the fit test must be repeated.
B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols
1. General
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QLFT are able to prepare test solutions, calibrate equipment and
perform tests properly, recognize invalid tests, and ensure that test equipment is in proper working order.
(b) The employer shall ensure that QLFT equipment is kept clean and well maintained so as to operate within the parameters for
which it was designed.
2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol
Note: This protocol is not appropriate to use for the fit testing of particulate respirators. If used to fit test particulate respirators,
the respirator must be equipped with an organic vapor filter.
(a) Odor Threshold Screening Odor threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine if
the individual tested can detect the odor of isoamyl acetate at low levels.
(1) Three 1 liter glass jars with metal lids are required.
(2) Odor-free water (e.g., distilled or spring water) at approximately 25 C (77 F) shall be used for the solutions.
(3) The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known at isopentyl acetate) stock solution is prepared by adding 1 ml of pure IAA to 800 ml
of odor-free water in a 1 liter jar, closing the lid and shaking for 30 seconds. A new solution shall be prepared at least weekly.
(4) The screening test shall be conducted in a room separate from the room used for actual fit testing. The two rooms shall be
well-ventilated to prevent the odor of IAA from becoming evident in the general room air where testing takes place.
(5) The odor test solution is prepared in a second jar by placing 0.4 ml of the stock solution into 500 ml of odor-free water using
a clean dropper or pipette. The solution shall be shaken for 30 seconds and allowed to stand for two to three minutes so that the
IAA concentration above the liquid may reach equilibrium. This solution shall be used for only one day.
(6) A test blank shall be prepared in a third jar by adding 500 cc of odor-free water.
(7) The odor test and test blank jar lids shall be labeled (e.g., 1 and 2) for jar identification. Labels shall be placed on the lids so
that they can be peeled off periodically and switched to maintain the integrity of the test.
(8) The following instruction shall be typed on a card and placed on the table in front of the two test jars (i.e., 1 and 2): ‘‘The
purpose of this test is to determine if you can smell banana oil at a low concentration. The two bottles in front of you contain
water. One of these bottles also contains a small amount of banana oil. Be sure the covers are on tight, then shake each bottle for
two seconds. Unscrew the lid of each bottle, one at a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle. Indicate to the test conductor
which bottle contains banana oil.’’
(9) The mixtures used in the IAA odor detection test shall be prepared in an area separate from where the test is performed, in
order to prevent olfactory fatigue in the subject.
(10) If the test subject is unable to correctly identify the jar containing the odor test solution, the IAA qualitative fit test shall not
be performed.
(11) If the test subject correctly identifies the jar containing the odor test solution, the test subject may proceed to respirator
selection and fit testing.
(b) Isoamyl Acetate Fit Test
(1) The fit test chamber shall be a clear 55- gallon drum liner suspended inverted over a 2-foot diameter frame so that the top of
the chamber is about 6 inches above the test subject’s head. If no drum liner is available, a similar chamber shall be constructed
using
plastic sheeting. The inside top center of the chamber shall have a small hook attached.
(2) Each respirator used for the fitting and fit testing shall be equipped with organic vapor cartridges or offer protection against
Respirator Appendix A
organic vapors.
(3) After selecting, donning, and properly adjusting a respirator, the test subject shall wear it to the fit testing room. This room
shall be separate from the room used for odor threshold screening and respirator selection, and shall be well-ventilated, as by an
exhaust fan or lab hood, to prevent general room contamination.
45
(4) A copy of the test exercises and any prepared text from which the subject is to read shall be taped to the inside of the test
chamber.
(5) Upon entering the test chamber, the test subject shall be given a 6-inch by 5-inch piece of paper towel, or other porous,
absorbent, single-ply material, folded in half and wetted with 0.75 ml of pure IAA. The test subject shall hang the wet towel on
the hook at the top of the chamber. An IAA test swab or ampule may be substituted for the IAA wetted paper towel provided it
has been demonstrated that the alternative IAA source will generate an IAA test atmosphere with a concentration equivalent to
that generated by the paper towel method.
(6) Allow two minutes for the IAA test concentration to stabilize before starting the fit test exercises. This would be an
appropriate time to talk with the test subject; to explain the fit test, the importance of his/ her cooperation, and the purpose for the
test exercises; or to demonstrate some of the exercises.
(7) If at any time during the test, the subject detects the banana-like odor of IAA, the test is failed. The subject shall quickly exit
from the test chamber and leave the test area to avoid olfactory fatigue.
(8) If the test is failed, the subject shall return to the selection room and remove the respirator. The test subject shall repeat the
odor sensitivity test, select and put on another respirator, return to the test area and again begin the fit test procedure described in
(b) (1) through (7) above. The process continues until a respirator that fits well has been found. Should the odor sensitivity test
be failed, the subject shall wait at least 5 minutes before retesting. Odor sensitivity will usually have returned by this time.
(9) If the subject passes the test, the efficiency of the test procedure shall be demonstrated by having the subject break the
respirator face seal and take a breath before exiting the chamber.
(10) When the test subject leaves the chamber, the subject shall remove the saturated towel and return it to the person conducting
the test, so that there is no significant IAA concentration buildup in the chamber during subsequent tests. The used towels shall
be kept in a self-sealing plastic bag to keep the test area from being contaminated.
3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol
The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) Taste threshold screening. The saccharin taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to
determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of saccharin.
(1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing, subjects shall wear an enclosure about the head and shoulders that is
approximately 12 inches in diameter by 14 inches tall with at least the front portion clear and that allows free movements of the
head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M hood assembly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15
combined, is adequate.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 3 ¤4 -inch (1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject’s nose and mouth area to accommodate the
nebulizer nozzle.
(3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the threshold screening test, the test subject shall breathe through
his/her slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is instructed to report when he/she detects a sweet taste.
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test conductor shall spray the threshold
check solution into the enclosure. The nozzle is directed away from the nose and mouth of the person. This nebulizer shall be
clearly marked to distinguish it from the fit test solution nebulizer.
(5) The threshold check solution is prepared by dissolving 0.83 gram of sodium saccharin USP in 100 ml of warm water. It can
be prepared by putting 1 ml of the fit test solution (see (b)(5) below) in 100 ml of distilled water.
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so that it collapses completely, then released and allowed to
fully expand.
(7) Ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test subject is asked whether the saccharin can be tasted. If the test subject
reports tasting the sweet taste during the ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten
regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the
saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste during the second ten squeezes, the screening test is
completed. The taste threshold is noted as twenty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the
saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste during the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is
completed. The taste threshold is noted as thirty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes required to solicit a taste response.
(11) If the saccharin is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable to taste saccharin and may not perform the
saccharin fit test. Note to paragraph 3. (a): If the test subject eats or drinks something sweet before the screening test, he/she may
be unable to taste the weak saccharin solution.
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be asked to take note of the taste for reference in the fit test.
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at a time in the nebulizer body.
(14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken dry, and refilled at least each morning and afternoon or at least
Respirator Appendix A
every four hours.
(b) Saccharin solution aerosol fit test procedure.
(1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15 minutes before the test.
(2) The fit test uses the same enclosure described in 3. (a) above.
(3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the respirator selected in section I. A. of this appendix. The respirator
46
shall be properly adjusted and equipped with a particulate filter(s).
(4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used to spray the fit test solution into the
enclosure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the screening test solution nebulizer.
(5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 83 grams of sodium saccharin to 100 ml of warm water.
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through the slightly open mouth with tongue extended, and report if he/she tastes the
sweet taste of saccharin.
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the enclosure and an initial concentration of saccharin fit test solution is
sprayed into the enclosure using the same number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes
required to elicit a taste response as noted during the screening test. A minimum of 10 squeezes is required.
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished using one half the original number of squeezes used initially
(e.g., 5, 10 or 15).
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any time during the fit test the taste of saccharin is detected. If the
test subject does not report tasting the saccharin, the test is passed.
(11) If the taste of saccharin is detected, the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A different respirator shall be tried
and the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold screening and fit testing).
(12) Since the nebulizer has a tendency to clog during use, the test operator must make periodic checks of the nebulizer to ensure
that it is not clogged. If clogging is found at the end of the test session, the test is invalid.
4. Bitrex TM (Denatonium Benzoate) Solution Aerosol Qualitative Fit Test Protocol
The Bitrex TM (Denatonium benzoate) solution aerosol QLFT protocol uses the published saccharin test protocol because that
protocol is widely accepted. Bitrex is routinely used as a taste aversion agent in household liquids which children should not be
drinking and is endorsed by the American Medical Association, the National Safety Council, and the American Association of
Poison Control Centers. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of
the screening test.
(a) Taste Threshold Screening. The Bitrex taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to
determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of Bitrex.
(1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing, subjects shall wear an enclosure about the head and shoulders that is
approximately 12 inches (30.5 cm) in diameter by 14 inches (35.6 cm) tall. The front portion of the enclosure shall be clear from
the respirator and allow free movement of the head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M hood
assembly, parts #14 and #15 combined, is adequate.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 3 ¤4 inch (1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject’s nose and mouth area to accommodate the
nebulizer nozzle.
(3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the threshold screening test, the test subject shall breathe through his
or her slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is instructed to report when he/she detects a bitter taste.
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test conductor shall spray the Threshold
Check Solution into the enclosure. This Nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the fit test solution nebulizer.
(5) The Threshold Check Solution is prepared by adding 13.5 milligrams of Bitrex to 100 ml of 5% salt (NaCl) solution in
distilled water.
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so that the bulb collapses completely, and is then released and
allowed to fully expand.
(7) An initial ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test subject is asked whether the Bitrex can be tasted. If the test
subject reports tasting the bitter taste during the ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten
regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the Bitrex
is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during the second ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The
taste threshold is noted as twenty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the
Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is
completed. The taste threshold is noted as thirty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes required to solicit a taste response.
(11) If the Bitrex is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable to taste Bitrex and may not perform the Bitrex
fit test.
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be asked to take note of the taste for reference in the fit test.
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at a time in the nebulizer body.
Respirator Appendix A
(14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken to dry, and refilled at least each morning and afternoon or at least
every four hours.
(b) Bitrex Solution Aerosol Fit Test Procedure.
(1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15 minutes before the test.
(2) The fit test uses the same enclosure as that described in 4. (a) above.
(3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the respirator selected according to section I. A. of this appendix. The
respirator shall be properly adjusted and equipped with any type particulate filter(s).
47
(4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used to spray the fit test solution into the
enclosure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the screening test solution nebulizer.
(5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 337.5 mg of Bitrex to 200 ml of a 5% salt (NaCl) solution in warm water.
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through his or her slightly open mouth with tongue extended, and be instructed to
report if he/she tastes the bitter taste of Bitrex..
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the enclosure and an initial concentration of the fit test solution is
sprayed into the enclosure using the same number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes
required to elicit a taste response as noted during the screening test.
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished using one half the number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5,
10 or 15).
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any time during the fit test the taste of Bitrex is detected. If the test
subject does not report tasting the Bitrex, the test is passed.
(11) If the taste of Bitrex is detected, the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A different respirator shall be tried and
the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold screening and fit testing).
5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) Protocol
This qualitative fit test uses a person’s response to the irritating chemicals released in the ‘‘smoke’’ produced by a stannic
chloride ventilation smoke tube to detect leakage into the respirator.
(a) General Requirements and Precautions
(1) The respirator to be tested shall be equipped with high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or P100 series filter(s).
(2) Only stannic chloride smoke tubes shall be used for this protocol.
(3) No form of test enclosure or hood for the test subject shall be used.
(4) The smoke can be irritating to the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages. The test conductor shall take precautions to minimize the
test subject’s exposure to irritant smoke. Sensitivity varies, and certain individuals may respond to a greater degree to irritant
smoke. Care shall be taken when performing the sensitivity screening checks that determine whether the test subject can detect
irritant smoke to use only the minimum amount of smoke necessary to elicit a response from the test subject.
(5) The fit test shall be performed in an area with adequate ventilation to prevent exposure of the person conducting the fit test
or the build-up of irritant smoke in the general atmosphere.
(b) Sensitivity Screening Check
The person to be tested must demonstrate his or her ability to detect a weak concentration of the irritant smoke.
(1) The test operator shall break both ends of a ventilation smoke tube containing stannic chloride, and attach one end of the
smoke tube to a low flow air pump set to deliver 200 milliliters per minute, or an aspirator squeeze bulb. The test operator shall
cover the other end of the smoke tube with a short piece of tubing to prevent potential injury from the jagged end of the smoke
tube.
(2) The test operator shall advise the test subject that the smoke can be irritating to the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages and
instruct the subject to keep his/her eyes closed while the test is performed.
(3) The test subject shall be allowed to smell a weak concentration of the irritant smoke before the respirator is donned to become
familiar with its irritating properties and to determine if he/she can detect the irritating properties of the smoke. The test operator
shall carefully direct a small amount of the irritant smoke in the test subject’s direction to determine that he/she can detect it.
(c) Irritant Smoke Fit Test Procedure
(1) The person being fit tested shall don the respirator without assistance, and perform the required user seal check(s).
(2) The test subject shall be instructed to keep his/her eyes closed.
(3) The test operator shall direct the stream of irritant smoke from the smoke tube toward the faceseal area of the test subject,
using the low flow pump or the squeeze bulb. The test operator shall begin at least 12 inches from the facepiece and move the
smoke stream around the whole perimeter of the mask. The operator shall gradually make two more passes around the perimeter
of the mask, moving to within six inches of the respirator.
(4) If the person being tested has not had an involuntary response and/or detected the irritant smoke, proceed with the test
exercises.
(5) The exercises identified in section I.A. 14. of this appendix shall be performed by the test subject while the respirator seal is
being continually challenged by the smoke, directed around the perimeter of the respirator at a distance of six inches.
(6) If the person being fit tested reports detecting the irritant smoke at any time, the test is failed. The person being retested
Respirator Appendix A
must repeat the entire sensitivity check and fit test procedure.
(7) Each test subject passing the irritant smoke test without evidence of a response (involuntary cough, irritation) shall be given a
second sensitivity screening check, with the smoke from the same smoke tube used during the fit test, once the respirator has
been removed, to determine whether he/she still reacts to the smoke. Failure to evoke a response shall void the fit test.
(8) If a response is produced during this second sensitivity check, then the fit test is passed.
C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols
The following quantitative fit testing procedures have been demonstrated to be acceptable: Quantitative fit testing using a nonhazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium
chloride) generated in a test chamber, and employing instrumentation to quantify the fit of the respirator; Quantitative fit testing
48
using ambient aerosol as the test agent and appropriate instrumentation (condensation nuclei counter) to quantify the respirator
fit; Quantitative fit testing using controlled negative pressure and appropriate instrumentation to measure the volumetric leak rate
of a facepiece to quantify the respirator fit.
1. General
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QNFT are able to calibrate equipment and perform tests properly,
recognize invalid tests, calculate fit factors properly and ensure that test equipment is in proper working order.
(b) The employer shall ensure that QNFT equipment is kept clean, and is maintained and calibrated according to the
manufacturer’s instructions so as to operate at the parameters for which it was designed.
2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol
(a) Apparatus.
(1) Instrumentation. Aerosol generation, dilution, and measurement systems using particulates (corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400
[PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS] or sodium chloride) as test aerosols shall be used for quantitative fit testing.
(2) Test chamber. The test chamber shall be large enough to permit all test subjects to perform freely all required exercises
without disturbing the test agent concentration or the measurement apparatus. The test chamber shall be equipped and
constructed so that the test agent is effectively isolated from the ambient air, yet uniform in concentration throughout the
chamber.
(3) When testing air-purifying respirators, the normal filter or cartridge element shall be replaced with a high efficiency
particulate air (HEPA) or P100 series filter supplied by the same manufacturer.
(4) The sampling instrument shall be selected so that a computer record or strip chart record may be made of the test showing the
rise and fall of the test agent concentration with each inspiration and expiration at fit factors of at least 2,000. Integrators or
computers that integrate the amount of test agent penetration leakage into the respirator for each exercise may be used provided a
record of the readings is made.
(5) The combination of substitute air-purifying elements, test agent and test agent concentration shall be such that the test subject
is not exposed in excess of an established exposure limit for the test agent at any time during the testing process, based upon the
length of the exposure and the exposure limit duration.
(6) The sampling port on the test specimen respirator shall be placed and constructed so that no leakage occurs around the port
(e.g., where the respirator is probed), a free air flow is allowed into the sampling line at all times, and there is no interference
with the fit or performance of the respirator. The in-mask sampling device (probe) shall be designed and used so that the air
sample is drawn from the breathing zone of the test subject, midway between the nose and mouth and with the probe extending
into the facepiece cavity at least 1/4 inch.
(7) The test setup shall permit the person administering the test to observe the test subject inside the chamber during the test.
(8) The equipment generating the test atmosphere shall maintain the concentration of test agent constant to within a 10 percent
variation for the duration of the test.
(9) The time lag (interval between an event and the recording of the event on the strip chart or computer or integrator) shall be
kept to a minimum. There shall be a clear association between the occurrence of an event and its being recorded.
(10) The sampling line tubing for the test chamber atmosphere and for the respirator sampling port shall be of equal diameter and
of the same material. The length of the two lines shall be equal.
(11) The exhaust flow from the test chamber shall pass through an appropriate filter (i.e., high efficiency particulate or P100
series filter) before release.
(12) When sodium chloride aerosol is used, the relative humidity inside the test chamber shall not exceed 50 percent.
(13) The limitations of instrument detection shall be taken into account when determining the fit factor.
(14) Test respirators shall be maintained in proper working order and be inspected regularly for deficiencies such as cracks or
missing valves and gaskets.
(b) Procedural Requirements.
(1) When performing the initial user seal check using a positive or negative pressure check, the sampling line shall be crimped
closed in order to avoid air pressure leakage during either of these pressure checks.
(2) The use of an abbreviated screening QLFT test is optional. Such a test may be utilized in order to quickly identify poor fitting
respirators that passed the positive and/or negative pressure test and reduce the amount of QNFT time. The use of the CNC
QNFT instrument in the count mode is another optional method to obtain a quick estimate of fit and eliminate poor fitting
respirators before going on to perform a full QNFT.
Respirator Appendix A
(3) A reasonably stable test agent concentration shall be measured in the test chamber prior to testing. For canopy or shower
curtain types of test units, the determination of the test agent’s stability may be established after the test subject has entered the
test environment.
(4) Immediately after the subject enters the test chamber, the test agent concentration inside the respirator shall be measured to
ensure that the peak penetration does not exceed 5 percent for a half mask or 1 percent for a full facepiece respirator.
(5) A stable test agent concentration shall be obtained prior to the actual start of testing.
(6) Respirator restraining straps shall not be over-tightened for testing. The straps shall be adjusted by the wearer without
assistance from other persons to give a reasonably comfortable fit typical of normal use. The respirator shall not be adjusted once
the fit test exercises begin.
(7) The test shall be terminated whenever any single peak penetration exceeds 5 percent for half masks and 1 percent for full
facepiece respirators. The test subject shall be refitted and retested.
49
(8) Calculation of fit factors.
(i) The fit factor shall be determined for the quantitative fit test by taking the ratio of the average chamber concentration to the
concentration measured inside the respirator for each test exercise except the grimace exercise.
(ii) The average test chamber concentration shall be calculated as the arithmetic average of the concentration measured before
and after each test (i.e., 7 exercises) or the arithmetic average of the concentration measured before and after each exercise or the
true average measured continuously during the respirator sample.
(iii) The concentration of the challenge agent inside the respirator shall be determined by one of the following methods:
(A) Average peak penetration method means the method of determining test agent penetration into the respirator utilizing a strip
chart recorder, integrator, or computer. The agent penetration is determined by an average of the peak heights on the graph or by
computer integration, for each exercise except the grimace exercise. Integrators or computers that calculate the actual test agent
penetration into the respirator for each exercise will also be considered to meet the requirements of the average peak penetration
method.
(B) Maximum peak penetration method means the method of determining test agent penetration in the respirator as determined
by strip chart recordings of the test. The highest peak penetration for a given exercise is taken to be representative of average
penetration into the respirator for that exercise.
(C) Integration by calculation of the area under the individual peak for each exercise except the grimace exercise. This includes
computerized integration.
(D) The calculation of the overall fit factor using individual exercise fit factors involves first converting the exercise fit factors to
penetration values, determining the average, and then converting that result back to a fit factor. This procedure is described in the
following equation:
Overall Fit Factor = Number of exercises / (1/ff1 + 1/ff2 + 1/ff3 + 1/ff4 + 1/ff5 + 1/ff6 + 1/ff7 + 1/ff8)
Where ff1, ff2, ff3, etc. are the fit factors for exercises 1, 2, 3, etc.
(9) The test subject shall not be permitted to wear a half mask or quarter facepiece respirator unless a minimum fit factor of 100
is obtained, or a full facepiece respirator unless a minimum fit factor of 500 is obtained.
(10) Filters used for quantitative fit testing shall be replaced whenever increased breathing resistance is encountered, or when the
test agent has altered the integrity of the filter media.
3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol.
The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing (Portacount TM ) protocol quantitatively fit tests
respirators with the use of a probe. The probed respirator is only used for quantitative fit tests. A probed respirator has a special
sampling device, installed on the respirator, that allows the probe to sample the air from inside the mask. A probed respirator is
required for each make, style, model, and size that the employer uses and can be obtained from the respirator manufacturer or
distributor. The CNC instrument manufacturer, TSI Inc., also provides probe attachments (TSI sampling adapters) that permit fit
testing in an employee’s own respirator. A minimum fit factor pass level of at least 100 is necessary for a half-mask respirator
and a minimum fit factor pass level of at least 500 is required for a full facepiece negative pressure respirator. The entire
screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) Portacount Fit Test Requirements.
(1) Check the respirator to make sure the respirator is fitted with a high-efficiency filter and that the sampling probe and line are
properly attached to the facepiece.
(2) Instruct the person to be tested to don the respirator for five minutes before the fit test starts. This purges the ambient particles
trapped inside the respirator and permits the wearer to make certain the respirator is comfortable. This individual shall already
have been trained on how to wear the respirator properly.
(3) Check the following conditions for the adequacy of the respirator fit: Chin properly placed; Adequate strap tension, not
overly tightened; Fit across nose bridge; Respirator of proper size to span distance from nose to chin; Tendency of the respirator
to slip; Self-observation in a mirror to evaluate fit and respirator position.
(4) Have the person wearing the respirator do a user seal check. If leakage is detected, determine the cause. If leakage is from a
poorly fitting facepiece, try another size of the same model respirator, or another model of respirator.
Respirator Appendix A
(5) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operating the Portacount and proceed with the test.
(6) The test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
(7) After the test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon
completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of respirator shall be tried.
(b) Portacount Test Instrument.
(1) The Portacount will automatically stop and calculate the overall fit factor for the entire set of exercises. The overall fit factor
is what counts. The Pass or Fail message will indicate whether or not the test was successful. If the test was a Pass, the fit test is
over.
(2) Since the pass or fail criterion of the Portacount is user programmable, the test operator shall ensure that the pass or fail
criterion meet the requirements for minimum respirator performance in this Appendix.
(3) A record of the test needs to be kept on file, assuming the fit test was successful. The record must contain the test subject’s
name; overall fit factor; make, model, style, and size of respirator used; and date tested.
50
4. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative fit testing protocol.
The CNP protocol provides an alternative to aerosol fit test methods. The CNP fit test method technology is based on exhausting
air from a temporarily sealed respirator facepiece to generate and then maintain a constant negative pressure inside the facepiece.
The rate of air exhaust is controlled so that a constant negative pressure is maintained in the respirator during the fit test. The
level of pressure is selected to replicate the mean inspiratory pressure that causes leakage into the respirator under normal use
conditions. With pressure held constant, air flow out of the respirator is equal to air flow into the respirator. Therefore,
measurement of the exhaust stream that is required to hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed respirator constant
yields a direct measure of leakage air flow into the respirator. The CNP fit test method measures leak rates through the facepiece
as a method for determining the facepiece fit for negative pressure respirators. The CNP instrument manufacturer Dynatech
Nevada also provides attachments (sampling manifolds) that replace the filter cartridges to permit fit testing in an employee’s
own respirator. To perform the test, the test subject closes his or her mouth and holds his/her breath, after which an air pump
removes air from the respirator facepiece at a pre-selected constant pressure. The facepiece fit is expressed as the leak rate
through the facepiece, expressed as milliliters per minute. The quality and validity of the CNP fit tests are determined by the
degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks the test pressure during the system measurement time of approximately five seconds.
Instantaneous feedback in the form of a real-time pressure trace of the in-mask pressure is provided and used to determine test
validity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass level of 100 is necessary for a half-mask respirator and a minimum fit factor of at
least 500 is required for a full facepiece respirator. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test
subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) CNP Fit Test Requirements.
(1) The instrument shall have a non-adjustable test pressure of 15.0 mm water pressure.
(2) The CNP system defaults selected for test pressure shall be set at—1.5 mm of water (-0.58 inches of water) and the modeled
inspiratory flow rate shall be 53.8 liters per minute for performing fit tests.
(Note: CNP systems have built-in capability to conduct fit testing that is specific to unique work rate, mask, and gender situations
that might apply in a specific workplace. Use of system default values, which were selected to represent respirator wear with
medium cartridge resistance at a low-moderate work rate, will allow inter-test comparison of the respirator fit.)
(3) The individual who conducts the CNP fit testing shall be thoroughly trained to perform the test.
(4) The respirator filter or cartridge needs to be replaced with the CNP test manifold. The inhalation valve downstream from the
manifold either needs to be temporarily removed or propped open.
(5) The test subject shall be trained to hold his or her breath for at least 20 seconds.
(6) The test subject shall don the test respirator without any assistance from the individual who conducts the CNP fit test.
(7) The QNFT protocol shall be followed according to section I. C. 1. of this appendix with an exception for the CNP test
exercises.
(b) CNP Test Exercises.
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1 minute. After the
normal breathing exercise, the subject needs to hold head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test
measurement.
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply for 1 minute, being careful not to
hyperventilate. After the deep breathing exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath
for 10 seconds during test measurement.
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his or her head from side to side between the
extreme positions on each side for 1 minute. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each
side. After the turning head side to side exercise, the subject needs to hold head full left and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds
during test measurement. Next, the subject needs to hold head full right and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test
measurement.
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his or her head up and down for 1 minute. The
subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling). After the moving head up and
down exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head full up and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
Next, the subject shall hold his or her head full down and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
Respirator Appendix A
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject
can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song for 1
minute. After the talking exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds
during the test measurement.
(6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning for 15 seconds.
(7) Bending Over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he or she were to touch his or her toes for 1 minute. Jogging in
place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud-type QNFT units that prohibit bending at the
waist. After the bending over exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10
seconds during the test measurement.
(8) Normal Breathing. The test subject shall remove and re-don the respirator within a one-minute period. Then, in a normal
standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1 minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the
subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement. After the
test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion
51
of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of a respirator shall be tried.
(c) CNP Test Instrument.
(1) The test instrument shall have an effective audio warning device when the test subject fails to hold his or her breath during
the test. The test shall be terminated whenever the test subject failed to hold his or her breath. The test subject may be refitted and
retested.
(2) A record of the test shall be kept on file, assuming the fit test was successful. The record must contain the test subject’s name;
overall fit factor; make, model, style and size of respirator used; and date tested.
Part II. New Fit Test Protocols
A. Any person may submit to OSHA an application for approval of a new fit test protocol. If the application meets the following
criteria, OSHA will initiate a rulemaking proceeding under section 6(b)(7) of the OSH Act to determine whether to list
the new protocol as an approved protocol in this Appendix A.
B. The application must include a detailed description of the proposed new fit test protocol. This application must be supported
by either:
1. A test report prepared by an independent government research laboratory (e.g., Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, Los
Alamos National Laboratory, the National Institute for Standards and Technology) stating that the laboratory has tested the
protocol and had found it to be accurate and reliable; or
2. An article that has been published in a peer-reviewed industrial hygiene journal describing the protocol and explaining how
test data support the protocol’s accuracy and reliability.
C. If OSHA determines that additional information is required before the Agency commences a rulemaking proceeding under this
section, OSHA will so notify the applicant and afford the applicant the opportunity to submit the supplemental information.
Initiation of a rulemaking proceeding will be deferred until OSHA has received and evaluated the supplemental information.
52
Respirator Appendix B–1
User Seal Check Procedures (Mandatory)
The individual who uses a tight-fitting respirator is to perform a user seal check to ensure that an
adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is put on. Either the positive and negative
pressure checks listed in this appendix, or the respirator manufacturer’s recommended user seal
check method shall be used. User seal checks are not substitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit
tests.
I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure Checks
A. Positive pressure check.
Close off the exhalation valve and exhale gently into the facepiece. The face fit is considered
satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the facepiece without any evidence
of outward leakage of air at the seal. For most respirators this method of leak testing requires the
wearer to first remove the exhalation valve cover before closing off the exhalation valve and then
carefully replacing it after the test.
B. Negative pressure check.
Close off the inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) by covering with the palm of the hand(s)
or by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently so that the facepiece collapses slightly, and hold
the breath for ten seconds. The design of the inlet opening of some cartridges cannot be
effectively covered with the palm of the hand. The test can be performed by covering the inlet
opening of the cartridge with a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the facepiece remains in its slightly
collapsed condition and no inward leakage of air is detected, the tightness of the respirator is
considered satisfactory.
II. Manufacturer’s Recommended User Seal Check Procedures
The respirator manufacturer’s recommended procedures for performing a user seal check may be
used instead of the positive and/or negative pressure check procedures provided that the
employer demonstrates that the manufacturer’s procedures are equally effective.
53
Respirator Appendix B–2
Respirator Cleaning Procedures (Mandatory)
These procedures are provided for employer use when cleaning respirators. They are general in
nature, and the employer as an alternative may use the cleaning recommendations provided by
the manufacturer of the respirators used by their employees, provided such procedures are as
effective as those listed here in Appendix B– 2. Equivalent effectiveness simply means that the
procedures used must accomplish the objectives set forth in Appendix B–2, i.e., must ensure that
the respirator is properly cleaned and disinfected in a manner that prevents damage to the
respirator and does not cause harm to the user.
I. Procedures for Cleaning Respirators
A. Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters. Disassemble facepieces by removing speaking
diaphragms, demand and pressure-demand valve assemblies, hoses, or any components
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard or repair any defective parts.
B. Wash components in warm (43 C [110 F] maximum) water with a mild detergent or with a
cleaner recommended by the manufacturer. A stiff bristle (not wire) brush may be used to
facilitate the removal of dirt.
C. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 C [110 F] maximum), preferably running
water. Drain.
D. When the cleaner used does not contain a disinfecting agent, respirator components should be
immersed for two minutes in one of the following:
1. Hypochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlorine) made by adding approximately one milliliter of
laundry bleach to one liter of water at 43 C (110 F); or,
2. Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm iodine) made by adding approximately 0.8 milliliters
of tincture of iodine (6–8 grams ammonium and/or potassium iodide/100 cc of 45%
alcohol) to one liter of water at 43 C (110 F); or,
3. Other commercially available cleansers of equivalent disinfectant quality when used as
directed, if their use is recommended or approved by the respirator manufacturer.
E. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 C [110 F] maximum), preferably running
water. Drain. The importance of thorough rinsing cannot be overemphasized. Detergents or
disinfectants that dry on facepieces may result in dermatitis. In addition, some disinfectants
may cause deterioration of rubber or corrosion of metal parts if not completely removed.
F. Components should be hand-dried with a clean lint-free cloth or air-dried.
G. Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters, cartridges, and canisters where necessary.
H. Test the respirator to ensure that all components work properly.
54
Respirator Appendix C to § 1910.134:
Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 through 9 below must be answered by every
employee who has been selected to use any type of respirator (please circle ‘‘yes’’ or ‘‘no’’).
OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire (Mandatory)
To the employer: Answers to questions in Section 1, and to question 9 in Section 2 of Part A,
do not require a medical examination.
1. Do you currently smoke tobacco, or have you smoked tobacco
in the last month:
To the employee:
Yes/No
2. Have you ever had any of the following conditions?
Can you read (circle one): Yes/No
Your employer must allow you to answer this questionnaire during normal working hours, or
at a time and place that is convenient to you. To maintain your confidentiality, your employer
or supervisor must not look at or review your answers, and your employer must tell you how
to deliver or send this questionnaire to the health care professional who will review it.
Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The following information must be provided by every
employee who has been selected to use any type of respirator (please print).
a. Seizures (fits):
Yes/No
b. Diabetes (sugar disease):
Yes/No
c. Allergic reactions that interfere with your breathing:
Yes/No
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places):
Yes/No
e. Trouble smelling odors:
Yes/No
3. Have you ever had any of the following pulmonary or lung problems?
1. Today’s date:
2. Your name:
3. Your age (to nearest year):
4. Sex (circle one):
Male/ Female
5. Your height:
ft.
6. Your weight:
in.
lbs.
7. Your job title:
8. A phone number where you can be reached by the health care professional who
reviews this questionnaire (include the Area Code):
a. Asbestosis:
Yes/No
b. Asthma:
Yes/No
c. Chronic bronchitis:
Yes/No
d. Emphysema:
Yes/No
e. Pneumonia:
Yes/No
f. Tuberculosis:
Yes/No
g. Silicosis:
Yes/No
h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung):
Yes/No
9. The best time to phone you at this number:
i. Lung cancer: Yes/No
10. Has your employer told you how to contact the health care professional who will
review this questionnaire (circle one):
Yes/No
j. Broken ribs:
Yes/No
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries:
Yes/No
11. Check the type of respirator you will use (you can check more than one category):
l. Any other lung problem that you’ve been told about:
Yes/No
a.
b.
N, R, or P disposable respirator (filter-mask, non-cartridge type only).
Other type (for example, half- or full-facepiece type, powered-air
purifying, supplied-air, self-contained breathing apparatus).
12. Have you worn a respirator (circle one):
a. Shortness of breath:
Yes/No
b. Shortness of breath when walking fast on level ground or walking up
Yes/No
a slight hill or incline:
If ‘‘yes,’’ what type(s):
c. Shortness of breath when walking with other people at an ordinary pace
on level ground:
4. Do you currently have any of the following symptoms of pulmonary or lung illness?
Yes/No
d. Have to stop for breath when walking at your own pace on level ground:
Yes/No
55
Yes/No
e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not related to eating:
Appendix C
e. Shortness of breath when washing or dressing yourself:
Yes/No
f. Shortness of breath that interferes with your job:
Yes/No
g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick sputum):
Yes/No
h. Coughing that wakes you early in the morning:
Yes/No
i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you are lying down:
Yes/No
j. Coughing up blood in the last month:
Yes/No
k. Wheezing:
Yes/No
l. Wheezing that interferes with your job:
Yes/No
m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply:
Yes/No
Yes/No
f. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to heart or circulation
problems:
Yes/No
7. Do you currently take medication for any of the following problems?
a. Breathing or lung problems:
Yes/No
b. Heart trouble:
Yes/No
c. Blood pressure:
Yes/No
d. Seizures (fits):
Yes/No
8. If you’ve used a respirator, have you ever had any of the following problems? (If
you’ve never used a respirator, check the following space and go to question 9:)
n. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to lung problems: Yes/No
5. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart problems?
a. Eye irritation:
Yes/No
b. Skin allergies or rashes:
Yes/No
c. Anxiety:
Yes/No
a. Heart attack:
Yes/No
d. General weakness or fatigue:
Yes/No
b. Stroke:
Yes/No
e. Any other problem that interferes with your use of a respirator:
Yes/No
c. Angina:
Yes/No
d. Heart failure:
Yes/No
e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused by walking):
Yes/No
f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregularly):
Yes/No
g. High blood pressure:
Yes/No
h. Any other heart problem that you’ve been told about:
Yes/No
9. Would you like to talk to the health care professional who will review this
questionnaire about your answers to this questionnaire:
Yes/No
Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered by every employee who has been selected to use
either a full-facepiece respirator or a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). For
employees who have been selected to use other types of respirators, answering these questions
is voluntary.
10. Have you ever lost vision in either eye (temporarily or permanently):
Yes/No
11. Do you currently have any of the following vision problems?
6. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart symptoms?
a. Frequent pain or tightness in your chest:
Yes/No
a. Wear contact lenses:
Yes/No
b. Pain or tightness in your chest during physical activity:
Yes/No
b. Wear glasses:
Yes/No
c. Pain or tightness in your chest that interferes with your job:
Yes/No
c. Color blind:
Yes/No
e. Any other eye or vision problem:
d. In the past two years, have you noticed your heart skipping
or missing a beat:
13. Do you currently have any of the following hearing problems?
Yes/No
a. Difficulty hearing:
Yes/No
b. Wear a hearing aid:
Yes/No
c. Any other hearing or ear problem:
Yes/ No
14. Have you ever had a back injury:
12. Have you ever had an injury to your ears, including a broken ear drum:
Yes/ No
Yes/No
a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, legs, or feet:
Yes/No
b. Back pain:
Yes/No
Appendix C
Yes/No
c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and legs:
15. Do you currently have any of the following musculoskeletal problems?
56
Yes/No
d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward or backward at the waist:
Yes/No
b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting):
Yes/No
e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or down:
Yes/No
c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or welding this material):
Yes/No
f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to side:
Yes/No
d. Beryllium:
Yes/No
g. Difficulty bending at your knees:
Yes/No
e. Aluminum:
Yes/No
h. Difficulty squatting to the ground:
Yes/ No
f. Coal (for example, mining):
Yes/No
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder carrying more than 25 lbs:
Yes/No
g. Iron:
Yes/No
h. Tin:
Yes/No
i. Dusty environments:
Yes/No
j. Any other hazardous exposures:
Yes/No
j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem that interferes with using a respirator:
Yes/No
Part B Any of the following questions, and other questions not listed, may be added to the
questionnaire at the discretion of the health care professional who will review the
questionnaire.
If ‘‘yes,’’ describe these exposures:
1. In your present job, are you working at high altitudes (over 5,000 feet) or in a place
that has lower than normal amounts of oxygen:
Yes/No
If ‘‘yes,’’ do you have feelings of dizziness, shortness of breath, pounding in your
chest, or other symptoms when you’re working under these conditions: Yes/No
2. At work or at home, have you ever been exposed to hazardous solvents, hazardous
airborne chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or dust), or have you come into skin
contact with hazardous chemicals:
Yes/No
4. List any second jobs or side businesses you have:
If ‘‘yes,’’ name the chemicals if you know them:
5. List your previous occupations:
6. List your current and previous hobbies:
3. Have you ever worked with any of the materials, or under any of the conditions, listed
below:
7. Have you been in the military services?
a. Asbestos:
Yes/No
If ‘‘yes,’’ were you exposed to biological or chemical agents (either in training or
combat):
Yes/No
8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT team?
Yes/No
9. Other than medications for breathing and lung problems, heart trouble, blood
pressure, and seizures mentioned earlier in this questionnaire, are you taking any
other medications for any reason (including over-the-counter medications):
Yes/No
Yes/No
a. HEPA Filters:
Yes/No
b. Canisters (for example, gas masks):
Yes/ No
c. Cartridges:
Yes/No
Appendix C
11. How often are you expected to use the respirator(s) (circle ‘‘yes’’ or ‘‘no’’ for all
answers that apply to you)?:
If ‘‘yes,’’ name the medications if you know them: _
10. Will you be using any of the following items with your respirator(s)?
57
a. Escape only (no rescue):
Yes/No
b. Emergency rescue only:
Yes/No
c. Less than 5 hours per week:
Yes/No
d. Less than 2 hours per day:
Yes/No
e. 2 to 4 hours per day:
Yes/No
f. Over 4 hours per day:
Yes/No
13. Will you be wearing protective clothing and/or equipment (other than the respirator)
when you’re using your respirator:
Yes/No
If ‘‘yes,’’ describe this protective clothing and/or equipment:
12. During the period you are using the respirator(s), is your work effort:
a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour):
Yes/ No
14. Will you be working under hot conditions (temperature exceeding 77 F): Yes/No
If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last during the average shift: _____ hrs.
_____ mins. Examples of a light work effort are sitting while writing,
typing, drafting, or performing light assembly work; or standing while
operating a drill press (1–3 lbs.) or controlling machines.
b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour):
Yes/No
mins.
Examples of moderate work effort are sitting while nailing or filing; driving
a truck or bus in urban traffic; standing while drilling, nailing, performing
assembly work, or transferring a moderate load (about 35 lbs.) at trunk
level; walking on a level surface about 2 mph or down a 5-degree grade
about 3 mph; or pushing a wheelbarrow with a heavy load (about 100 lbs.)
on a level surface.
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour):
Yes/No
16. Describe the work you’ll be doing while you’re using your respirator(s):
17. Describe any special or hazardous conditions you might encounter when you’re using
your respirator(s) (for example, confined spaces, life-threatening gases):
If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last during the average shift:
hrs.
15. Will you be working under humid conditions:
18. Provide the following information, if you know it, for each toxic substance that you’ll
be exposed to when you’re using your respirator(s):
Name of the first toxic substance:
Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:
Duration of exposure per shift
Yes/ No
If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last during the average shift: _____ hrs.
_____ mins. Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy load (about 50 lbs.)
from the floor to your waist or shoulder; working on a loading dock;
shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chipping castings; walking up an 8degree grade about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy load (about 50 lbs.).
Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:
Duration of exposure per shift:
The name of any other toxic substances that you’ll be exposed to while using your
respirator:
19. Describe any special responsibilities you’ll have while using your respirator(s) that
may affect the safety and well-being of others (for example, rescue, security):
58
Name of the second toxic substance:
Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:
Duration of exposure per shift:
Name of the third toxic substance:
59
Respirator Appendix D
Information for Employees Using Respirators When Not Required Under the Standard
Respirators are an effective method of protection against designated hazards when properly selected and
worn. Respirator use is encouraged, even when exposures are below the exposure limit, to provide an
additional level of comfort and protection for workers. However, if a respirator is used improperly or not
kept clean, the respirator itself can become a hazard to the worker. Sometimes, workers may wear
respirators to avoid exposures to hazards, even if the amount of hazardous substance does not exceed the
limits set by OSHA standards. If your employer provides respirators for your voluntary use, of if you
provide your own respirator, you need to take certain precautions to be sure that the respirator itself does
not present a hazard.
You should do the following:
1. Read and heed all instructions provided by the manufacturer on use, maintenance, cleaning and care, and
warnings regarding the respirators limitations.
2. Choose respirators certified for use to protect against the contaminant of concern. NIOSH, the National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services,
certifies respirators. A label or statement of certification should appear on the respirator or respirator
packaging. It will tell you what the respirator is designed for and how much it will protect you.
3. Do not wear your respirator into atmospheres containing contaminants for which your respirator is not
designed to protect against. For example, a respirator designed to filter dust particles will not protect you
against gases, vapors, or very small solid particles of fumes or smoke.
4. Keep track of your respirator so that you do not mistakenly use someone else’s respirator.
60
I.
SCAFFOLDING APPENDIX
1.
OUTRIGGER SCAFFOLD
a.
Outrigger beams shall extend not more than 6 feet beyond the face of the building. The inboard end of outrigger
beams, measured from the fulcrum point to the extreme point of support, shall be not less than one and one-half
times the outboard end in length. The beams shall rest on edge, the sides shall be plumb, and the edges shall be
horizontal. The fulcrum point of the beam shall rest on a secure bearing at least 6 inches in each horizontal
dimension. The beam shall be secured in place against movement and shall be securely braced at the fulcrum
point against tipping.
b.
The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be securely supported either by means of struts bearing against sills
in contact with the overhead beams or ceiling, or by means of tension members secured to the floor joists
underfoot, or by both if necessary. The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be secured against tipping and the
entire supporting structure shall be securely braced in both directions to prevent any horizontal movement.
c.
Unless outrigger scaffolds are designed by a licensed professional engineer, they shall be constructed and
erected in accordance with table D-16. Outrigger scaffolds designed by a registered professional engineer shall
be constructed and erected in accordance with such design. A copy of the detailed drawings and specifications
showing the sizes and spacing of members shall be kept on the job.
d.
Planking shall be laid tight and shall extend to within 3 inches of the building wall. Planking shall be nailed or
bolted to outriggers.
e.
Where there is danger of material falling from the scaffold, a wire mesh or other enclosure shall be provided
between the guardrail and the toeboard.
f.
Where additional working levels are required to be supported by the outrigger method, the plans and
specifications of the outrigger and scaffolding structure shall be designed by a registered professional engineer.
2.
MASONS' ADJUSTABLE MULTIPLE-POINT SUSPENSION SCAFFOLDS
a.
The scaffold shall be capable of sustaining a working load of 50 pounds per square foot and shall not be loaded
in excess of that figure.
b.
The scaffold shall be provided with hoisting machines that meet the requirements of a nationally recognized
testing laboratory. Refer to 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
TABLE D-16 - MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF
OUTRIGGER SCAFFOLDS
Light duty
Medium duty
Maximum scaffold load.
25 p.s.f.
50 p.s.f.
Outrigger size
2 x 10 in.
3 x 10 in.
Maximum outrigger spacing
10 ft. 0 in.
6 ft. 0 in.
Planking
2 x 9 in.
2 x 9 in.
Guardrail
2 x 4 in.
2 x 4 in.
Guardrail uprights
2 x 4 in.
2 x 4 in.
Toeboards (minimum)
4 in.
4 in.
61
c.
The platform shall be supported by wire ropes in conformity with this section, suspended from overhead
outrigger beams.
d.
The scaffold outrigger beams shall consist of structural metal securely fastened or anchored to the frame or floor
system of the building or structure.
e.
Each outrigger beam shall be equivalent in strength to at least a standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound steel I-beam, be at
least 15 feet long, and shall not project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the bearing point.
f.
Where the overhang exceeds 6 feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be composed of stronger beams or multiple
beams and be installed in accordance with approved designs and instructions.
g.
If channel iron outrigger beams are used in place of I-beams, they shall be securely fastened together with the
flanges turned out.
h.
All outrigger beams shall be set and maintained with their webs into vertical position.
i.
A stop bolt shall be placed at each end of every outrigger beam.
j.
The outrigger beam shall rest on suitable wood-bearing blocks.
k.
All parts of the scaffold such as bolts, nuts, fittings, clamps, wire rope, and outrigger beams and their fastenings,
shall be maintained in sound and good working condition and shall be inspected before each installation and
periodically thereafter.
l.
The free end of the suspension wire ropes shall be equipped with proper size thimbles and be secured by
splicing or other equivalent means. The running ends shall be securely attached to the hoisting drum and at least
four turns of rope shall at all times remain on the drum.
m.
Where a single outrigger beam is used, the steel shackles or clevises with which the wire ropes are attached to
the outrigger beams shall be placed directly over the hoisting drums.
n.
The scaffold platform shall be equivalent in strength to at least 2-inch planking.
o.
Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high,
with a mid-rail, when required, of 1 x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with this section.
p.
Overhead protection shall be provided on the scaffold, not more than 9 feet above the platform, consisting of
2-inch planking or material of equivalent strength laid tight, when men are at work on the scaffold and an
overhead hazard exists.
q.
Each scaffold shall be installed or relocated in accordance with designs and instructions, of a registered
professional engineer, and supervised by a competent, designated person.
3.
TWO-POINT SUSPENSION SCAFFOLDS (SWINGING SCAFFOLDS)
a.
Two-point suspension scaffold platforms shall be not less than 20 inches no more than 36 inches wide overall.
The platform shall be securely fastened to the hangers by U-bolts or by other equivalent means.
b.
The hangers of two-point suspension scaffolds shall be made of wrought iron, mild steel, or other equivalent
material having a cross-sectional area capable of sustaining four times the maximum intended load, and shall be
designed with a support for guardrail, intermediate rail, and toeboard.
c.
When hoisting machines are used on two-point suspension scaffolds, such machines shall be of a design tested
and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to 1910.7 for definition of nationally
recognized testing laboratory.
d.
The roof irons or hooks shall be of wrought iron, mild steel, or other equivalent material of proper size and
design, securely installed and anchored. Tie-backs of three-fourth inch manila rope or the equivalent shall serve
62
as a secondary means of anchorage, installed at right angles to the face of the building whenever possible and
secured to a structurally sound portion of the building.
e.
Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high,
with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height.
f.
Two-point suspension scaffolds shall be suspended by wire or fiber ropes.
g.
The blocks for fiber ropes shall be of standard 6-inch size, consisting of at least one double and one single
block. The sheaves of all blocks shall fit the size of rope used.
h.
All wire ropes, fiber ropes, slings, hangers, platforms, and other supporting parts shall be inspected before every
installation. Periodic inspections shall be made while the scaffold is in use.
i.
On suspension scaffolds designed for a working load of 500 pounds no more than two men shall be permitted to
work at one time. On suspension scaffolds with a working load of 750 pounds, no more than three men shall be
permitted to work at one time. Each workman shall be protected by a safety lifebelt attached to a lifeline. The
lifeline shall be securely attached to substantial members of the structure (not scaffold), or to securely rigged
lines, which will safely suspend the workman in case of a fall.
j.
Where acid solutions are used, fiber ropes are not permitted unless acid-proof.
k.
Two-point suspension scaffolds shall be securely lashed to the building or structure to prevent them from
swaying. Window cleaners' anchors shall not be used for this purpose.
l.
The platform of every two-point suspension scaffold shall be one of the following types:
m.
The side stringer of ladder-type platforms shall be clear straight-grained spruce or materials of equivalent
strength and durability. The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak, ash, or hickory, at least 1 1/8 inch in
diameter, with seven-eighth inch tenons mortised into the side stringers at least seven-eighth inch. The stringers
shall be tied together with the tie rods not less than one-quarter inch in diameter, passing through the stringers
and riveted up tight against washers on both ends. The flooring strips shall be spaced not more than five-eighth
inch apart except at the side rails where the space may be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be constructed in
accordance with table D-17.
n.
Plank-type platforms shall be composed of not less than nominal 2 x 8-inch unspliced planks, properly cleated
together on the underside starting 6 inches from each end; intervals in between shall not exceed 4 feet. The
plank-type platform shall not extend beyond the hangers more than 18 inches. A bar or other effective means
shall be securely fastened to the platform at each end to prevent its slipping off the hanger. The span between
hangers for plank-type platforms shall not exceed 10 feet.
o.
Beam platforms shall have side stringers of lumber not less than 2 x 6 inches set on edge. The span between
hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when beam platforms are used. The flooring shall be supported on 2- and
6-inch crossbeams, laid flat and set into the upper edge of the stringers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more
than 4 feet, securely nailed in place. The flooring shall be of 1- x 6-inch material properly nailed. Floorboards
shall not be spaced more than one-half inch apart.
TABLE D-17 - SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform (feet)
12
14 & 16
18 & 20
22 & 24
Side stringers, minimum
cross section (finished
sizes):
63
28 & 30
at ends (in.) 1 3/4 x 2 3/4
1 3/4 x 2 3/4
1 3/4 x 3
1 3/4 x 3
1 3/4 x 3 ½
at middle (in.) 1 3/4 x 3 3/4
1 3/4 x 3 3/4
1 1/4 x 4
1 3/4 x 4 1/4
1 3/4 x 5
Reinforcing strip
(minimum)
A 1/8 x 7/8-in, steel reinforcing strip or its equivalent shall be attached to the side or
underside full length.
Rungs
Rungs shall be 1 1/8-in. minimum, diameter with at least 7/8-in. diameter tenons, and the
maximum spacing shall be 12 in. center to center.
Tie rods:
Number (minimum)
3
4
4
5
6
Diameter (minimum)
1/4 in
1/4 in
1/4 in
1/4 in
1/4 in
½ x 2 3/4
½ x 2 3/4
½ x 2 3/4
½ x 2 3/4
½ x 2 3/4
Flooring, minimum
finished size (in.)
4.
STONE SETTERS' ADJUSTABLE MULTIPLE-POINT
SUSPENSION SCAFFOLDS
a.
The scaffold shall be capable of sustaining a working load of 25 pounds per square foot and shall not be
overloaded. Scaffolds shall not be used for storage of stone or other heavy materials.
b.
The hoisting machine and its supports shall be of a type tested and listed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory. Refer to 1910.399(a)(77) for definition of listed, and 1910.7 for nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
c.
The platform shall be securely fastened to the hangers by U-bolts or other equivalent means.
d.
The scaffold unit shall be suspended from metal outriggers, iron brackets, wire rope slings, or iron hooks which
will safely support the maximum intended load.
e.
Outriggers when used shall be set with their webs in a vertical position, securely anchored to the building or
structure and provided with stop bolts at each end.
f.
The scaffold shall be supported by wire rope conforming with this section, suspended from overhead supports.
g.
The free ends of the suspension wire ropes shall be equipped with proper size thimbles, secured by splicing or
other equivalent means. The running ends shall be securely attached to the hoisting drum and at least four turns
of rope shall remain on the drum at all times.
h.
Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high,
with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height.
i.
When two or more scaffolds are used on a building or structure they shall not be bridged one to the other but
shall be maintained at even height with platforms butting closely.
j.
Each scaffold shall be installed or relocated in accordance with designs and instructions of a registered
professional engineer, and such installation or relocation shall be supervised by a competent designated person.
5.
SINGLE-POINT ADJUSTABLE
SUSPENSION SCAFFOLDS
64
a.
The scaffolding, including power units or manually operated winches, shall be a type tested and listed by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to 1910.399(a)(77) for definition of listed, and 1910.7 for
nationally recognized testing laboratory.
b.
All power-operated gears and brakes shall be enclosed.
c.
In addition to the normal operating brake, all-power driven units must have an emergency brake which engages
automatically when the normal speed of descent is exceeded.
d.
Guards, mid-rails, and toeboards shall completely enclose the cage or basket. Guardrails shall be no less than 2
by 4 inches or the equivalent installed no less than 36 inches nor more than 42 inches above the platform.
Mid-rails shall be 1 by 6 inches or the equivalent; installed equidistant between the guardrail and the platform.
Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
e.
The hoisting machines, cables, and equipment shall be regularly serviced and inspected after each installation
and every 30 days thereafter.
f.
The units may be combined to form a two-point suspension scaffold.
g.
The supporting. cable shall be straight for its entire length, and the operator shall not sway the basket and fix the
cable to any intermediate points to change his original path of travel.
h.
Equipment shall be maintained and used in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.
6.
BOATSWAIN'S CHAIRS
a.
The chair seat shall be not less than 12 by 24 inches, and of 1-inch thickness. The seat shall be reinforced on the
underside to prevent the board from splitting.
b.
The two fiber rope seat slings shall be of 5/8-inch diameter, reeved through the four seat holes so as to cross
each other on the underside of the seat.
c.
Seat slings shall be of at least 3/8-inch wire rope when a workman is conducting a heat producing process such
as gas or arc welding.
d.
The workman shall be protected by a safety life belt attached to a lifeline. The lifeline shall be securely attached
to substantial members of the structure (not scaffold), or to securely rigged lines, which will safely suspend the
worker in case of a fall.
e.
The tackle shall consist of correct size ball bearing or bushed blocks and properly spliced 5/8-inch diameter
first-grade manila rope.
f.
The roof irons, hooks, or the object to which the tackle is anchored shall be securely installed. Tiebacks when
used shall be installed at right angles to the face of the building and securely fastened to a chimney
7.
CARPENTERS' BRACKET SCAFFOLDS
a.
The brackets shall consist of a triangular wood frame not less than 2 by 3 inches in cross section, or of metal of
equivalent strength. Each member shall be properly fitted and securely joined.
b.
Each bracket shall be attached to the structure by means of one of the following:
i.
A bolt no less than five-eighths inch in diameter which shall extend through the inside of the
building wall.
ii.
A metal stud attachment device
iii.
Welding to steel tanks
iv.
Hooking over a well-secured and adequately strong supporting member.
v.
The brackets shall be spaced no more than 10 feet apart.
65
c.
No more than two persons shall occupy any given 10 feet of a bracket scaffold at any one time. Tools and
materials shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the occupancy.
d.
The platform shall consist of not less than two 2- by 9-inch nominal size planks extending not more than 18
inches or less than 6 inches beyond each end support.
e.
Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high,
with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards. shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height.
8.
BRICKLAYERS' SQUARE SCAFFOLDS
a.
The squares shall not exceed 5 feet in width and 5 feet in height.
b.
Members shall be not less than those specified in Table D-18.
c.
The squares shall be reinforced on both sides of each corner with 1- by 6-inch gusset pieces. They shall also
have braces 1 by 8 inches on both sides running from center to center of each member, or other means to secure
equivalent strength and rigidity.
d.
The squares shall be set not more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaffolds, and not more than 8 feet apart for
light duty scaffolds. Bracing 1 x 8 inches, extending from the bottom of each square to the top of the next
square, shall be provided on both front and rear sides of the scaffold.
TABLE D-18 - MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR BRICKLAYERS' SQUARE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS
Members
Dimensions (Inches)
Bearers or horizontal members
2 by 6
Legs
2 by 6
Braces at corners
1 by 6
Braces diagonally from center frame
1 by 8
e.
Platform Planks shall be at least 2- by 9-inch nominal size. The ends of the planks shall overlap the bearers of
the squares and each plank shall be supported by not less than three squares.
f.
Bricklayers' square scaffolds shall not exceed three tiers in height and shall be so constructed and arranged that
one square shall rest directly above the other. The upper tiers shall stand on a continuous row of planks laid
across the next lower tier and be nailed down or otherwise secured to prevent displacement.
g.
Scaffolds shall be level and set upon a firm foundation.
9.
HORSE SCAFFOLDS
a.
Horse scaffolds shall not be constructed or arranged more than two tiers or 10 feet in height.
b.
The members of the horses shall be not less than those specified in Table D-19.
c.
Horses shall be spaced not more than 5 feet for medium duty and not more than 8 feet for light duty.
d.
When arranged in tiers, each horse shall be placed directly over the horse in the tier below.
e.
On all scaffolds arranged in tiers the legs shall be nailed down to the planks to prevent displacement or thrust
66
and each tier shall be substantially cross braced.
TABLE D-19 - MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR HORSE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS
Members
Dimensions (Inches)
Horizontal members or bearers
3 by 4
Legs
1 1/4 by 4 ½
Longitudinal brace between legs
1 by 6
Gusset brace at top of legs
1 by 8
Half diagonal braces
1 1/4 by 4 ½
f.
Horses or parts which have become weak or defective shall not be used.
g.
Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high
with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent and toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of this section.
10.
NEEDLE BEAM SCAFFOLD
a.
Wood needle beams shall be in accordance with this section, and shall be not less than 4 by 6 inches in size,
with the greater dimension placed in a vertical direction. Metal beams or the equivalent conforming to this
section may be used.
b.
Ropes or hangers shall be provided for supports. The span between supports on the needle beam shall not
exceed 10 feet for 4- by 6-inch timbers. Rope supports shall be equivalent in strength to 1-inch diameter
first-grade manila rope.
c.
The ropes shall be attached to the needle beams by a scaffold hitch or a properly made eye splice. The loose end
of the rope shall be tied by a bowline knot or by a round turn and one-half hitch.
d.
The platform span between the needle beams shall not exceed 8 feet when using 2-inch scaffold plank. For
spans greater than 8 feet, platforms shall be designed based on design requirements for the special span. The
overhang of each end of the platform planks shall be not less than 1 foot and not more than 18 inches.
e.
When one needle beam is higher than the other or when the platform is not level the platform shall be secured
against slipping.
f.
All unattached tools, bolts, and nuts used on needle beam scaffolds shall be kept in suitable containers.
g.
One end of a needle beam scaffold may be supported by a permanent structural member conforming to this
section.
h.
Each man working on a needle beam scaffold 20 feet or more above the ground or floor and working with both
hands, shall be protected by a safety life belt attached to a lifeline. The lifeline shall be securely attached to
substantial members of the structure (not scaffold), or to securely rigged lines, which will safely suspend the
workman in case of a fall.
11.
PLASTERERS', DECORATORS', AND LARGE AREA SCAFFOLDS
67
a.
Plasterers', decorators', lathers'; and ceiling workers' inside scaffolds shall be constructed in accordance with the
general requirements set forth for independent wood pole scaffolds.
b.
Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high,
with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height.
c.
All platform planks shall be laid with the edges close together.
d.
When independent pole scaffold platforms are erected in sections, such sections shall be provided with
connecting runways equipped with substantial guardrails.
12.
INTERIOR HUNG SCAFFOLDS
a.
The suspended steel wire rope shall conform to this section. Wire may be used providing the strength
requirements of this section are met.
b.
For hanging wood scaffolds, the following minimum nominal size material is recommended:
i.
Supporting bearers 2 by 9 inches on edge.
ii.
Planking 2 by 9 inches or 2 by 10 inches, with maximum span 7 feet for heavy duty and 10 feet for light
duty or medium duty.
iii.
Steel tube and coupler members may be used for hanging scaffolds with both types of scaffold designed
to sustain a uniform distributed working load up to heavy duty scaffold loads with a safety factor of four.
iv.
When a hanging scaffold is supported by means of wire rope, such wire rope shall be wrapped at least
twice around the supporting members and twice around the bearers of the scaffold, with each end of the
wire rope secured by at least three standard wire-rope clips.
c.
All overhead supporting members shall be inspected and checked for strength before the scaffold is erected.
d.
Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high,
with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height.
13.
LADDER-JACK SCAFFOLDS
a.
All ladder-jack scaffolds shall be limited to light duty and shall not exceed a height of 20 feet above the floor or
ground.
b.
All ladders used in connection with ladder-jack scaffolds shall be heavy-duty ladders and shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with 1910.25 and 1910.26.
c.
The ladder jack shall be so designed and constructed that it will bear on the side rails in addition to the ladder
rungs, or if bearing on rungs only, the bearing area shall be at least 10 inches on each rung.
d.
Ladders used in conjunction with ladder jacks shall be so placed, fastened, held, or equipped with devices so as
to prevent slipping.
e.
The wood platform planks shall be not less than 2 inches nominal in thickness. Both metal and wood platform
planks shall overlap the bearing surface not less than 12 inches. The span between supports for wood shall not
exceed 8 feet. Platform width shall be not less than 18 inches.
f.
Not more than two persons shall occupy any given 8 feet of any ladder-jack scaffold at any one time.
14. WINDOW-JACK SCAFFOLDS
a.
Window-jack scaffolds shall be used only for the purpose of working at the window opening through which the
68
jack is placed.
b.
Window jacks shall not be used to support planks placed between one window jack and another or for other
elements of scaffolding.
c.
Window-jack scaffolds shall be provided with suitable guardrails unless safety belts with lifelines are attached
and provided for the workman. Window-jack scaffolds shall be used by one man only.
15.
ROOFING BRACKETS
a.
Roofing brackets shall be constructed to fit the pitch of the roof.
b.
Brackets shall be secured in place by nailing in addition to the pointed metal projections. The nails shall be
driven full length into the roof. When rope supports are used, they shall consist of first-grade manila of at least
three-quarter-inch diameter, or equivalent.
c.
A substantial catch platform shall be installed below the working area of roofs more than 20 feet from the
ground to eaves with a slope greater than 3 inches in 12 inches without a parapet. In width the platform shall
extend 2 feet beyond the projection of the eaves and shall be provided with a safety rail, mid-rail, and toeboard.
This provision shall not apply where employees engaged in work upon such roofs are protected by a safety belt
attached to a lifeline.
16.
CRAWLING BOARD OR CHICKEN LADDERS
a.
Crawling boards shall be not less than 10 inches wide and 1 inch thick, having cleats 1 x 1 1/2 inches. The
cleats shall be equal in length to the width of the board and spaced at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches.
Nails shall be driven through and clinched on the underside. The crawling board shall extend from the ridge
pole to the eaves when used in connection with roof construction, repair, or maintenance.
b.
A firmly fastened lifeline of at least three-quarter-inch rope shall be strung beside each crawling board for a
handhold.
c.
Crawling boards shall be secured to the roof by means of adequate ridge hooks or equivalent effective means.
17.
FLOAT OR SHIP SCAFFOLDS
a.
Float or ship scaffolds shall support not more than three men and a few light tools, such as those needed for
riveting, bolting, and welding. They shall be constructed in accordance with this section, unless substitute
designs and materials provide equivalent strength, stability, and safety.
b.
The platform shall be not less than 3 feet wide and 6 feet long, made of three-quarter-inch plywood, equivalent
to American Plywood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exterior.
c.
Under the platform, there shall be two supporting bearers made from 2- x 4-inch, or 1- x 10-inch rough, selected
lumber, or better. They shall be free of knots or other flaws and project 6 inches beyond the platform on both
sides. The ends of the platform shall extend about 6 inches beyond the outer edges of the bearers. Each bearer
shall be securely fastened to the platform.
d.
An edging of wood not less than 3/4 x 1 1/2 inches, or equivalent, shall be placed around all sides of the
platform to prevent tools from rolling off.
e.
Supporting ropes shall be 1-inch diameter manila rope or equivalent, free from deterioration, chemical damage,
flaws, or other imperfections. Rope connections shall be such that the platform cannot shift or slip. If two ropes
are used with each float, each of the two supporting ropes shall be hitched around one end of a bearer and pass
under the platforms to the other end of the bearer where it is hitched again, leaving sufficient rope at each end
for the supporting ties.
f.
Each workman shall be protected by a safety lifebelt attached to a lifeline. The lifeline shall be securely attached
to substantial members of the structure (not scaffold), or to securely rigged lines, which will safely suspend the
69
workman in case of a fall.
70
J.
BASIC CRANE HAND SIGNALS
- Raise Hoist
With forearm vertical,
forefinger pointing up,
move hand in small
horizontal circles.
- Lower Hoist
With arm extended
downward, forefinger
pointing down, move
hand in small horizontal
circles.
- Bridge Travel
Arm extended forward,
hand open and slightly
raised, make pushing
motion in direction of
travel.
- Trolley Travel
Palm up, fingers closed,
thumb pointing in
direction of motion, jerk
hand horizontally.
- Stop
Arm extended, palm
down, hold position
rigidly.
- Emergency Stop
Arm extended, palm
down, move hand
rapidly right and left.
- Multiple Trolleys Hold
up one finger for block
marked "1", and two
fingers for block marked
"2". Regular signals
follow.
- Move Slowly Use one
hand to give any motion
signal and place other
hand motionless in front
of hand giving motion
signal (hoist slowly is
shown).
71
Magnet is
DisconnectedCrane
operator spreads both
hands apart, palms up.
The crane operator should only take commands
from only one designated person, but, the
command of "stop" should be adhered when given
by any person.
K.
GUIDELINES FOR EXTENSION CORD USE
Many questions have arisen regarding the restrictions on extension cords on campus. The
following guidelines should be used by students and staff to assure that the extension cords in use
do not violate good safety practices or fire codes. The National Electric Code (NEC) is the
primary document that provides guidance in the use of extension cords. These guidelines are
based on the NEC.
1.
IN DORMITORIES AND OFFICE SETTINGS:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Extension cords which have the UL label are approved, so long as the size and use is appropriate.
Two and three conductor extension cords must have a minimum conductor size of 16 AWG copper.
Extension cords are normally rated in amps, and must be used within the ampere rating. (Compare
the amp rating of the appliance with the rating of the cord)
Three pronged (three conductor) extension cords must be used when connecting electrical items that
have three pronged plugins.
Extension cords must not be run under rugs, mattresses, through doorways or windows, and must be
protected from damage at all times.
Three prong adaptors are not to be used with two conductor extension cords on the female end of the
cord. Adaptors used on the wall outlet must be installed with a metal screw installed in the outlet.
(Contact Facility Services for these installations)
Splicing and “home repairs” of extension cords are not permitted unless performed by Facility
Services. Insulation, strength and conductor size must not be compromised.
Cords used in wet and/or outdoor locations should be protected by ground fault circuit interrupters.
ON MAINTENANCE AND CONSTRUCTION SITES:
Extension cords with an equipment grounding conductor must be used at all times.
Extension cords must be protected from damage, and not run through doorways or windows where
the doors or windows may close, causing damage to the cord.
Extension cords must be plugged into a circuit protected by a ground fault circuit interrupter on wet
or outdoor construction and maintenance sites, or have the ground circuit checked for continuity in
an assured grounding conductor program.
Extension cords should be a minimum of 16 AWG and be rated for the equipment in use. The
following is a guide that might be helpful in selecting the cord:
72
Extension Cord Ampere Rating
Wire Size
(Copper)
e.
f.
Single Phase Two and Three
Conductor Cords
Three Phase Cords
16AWG
13 amps
10 amps
14AWG
18 amps
15 amps
12AWG
25 amps
20 amps
10AWG
30 amps
25 amps
8AWG
40 amps
35 amps
6AWG
55 amps
45 amps
4AWG
70 amps
60 amps
2AWG
95 amps
80 amps
Splicing extension cords must be done in such a way that the insulation and conductivity of the wires
are not compromised.
Extension cords should not be run through water or allowed to have connections that may be
exposed to puddling water.
73
L.
SAFE DRIVER PROGRAM
LSU Main Campus
The LSU main campus will follow the guidelines for a driver safety program as outlined in
the Loss Prevention Manual of the State Office of Risk Management. The University's Executive
Director, Public Safety and Risk Management assumes the role of the State Office of Risk
Management on the LSU campus. The following administrative procedures should be followed in
carrying out this program.
Driver Record Checks
Driver record checks are required to be made annually on staff and faculty drivers, including
student workers, who drive state vehicles or personal vehicles on state business. In order for this
to be accomplished, department heads must submit form DA2054 (Authorization and Driving
History Form) on a yearly basis to the Property Management Office on drivers in their
departments who are expected to drive on a routine basis. Property Management will then submit
a listing of the drivers to the Office of Motor Vehicles to obtain driver history records for evaluation.
Forms do not have to be supplied for students or employees who may only be asked to drive in
emergency or non-recurring circumstances. In these cases the supervisor must assure that the
driver possesses a valid driver's license for the type vehicle to be driven prior to authorizing the
driving assignment.
On new employees, the hiring supervisor must determine the new employee's driving status
based on the job description and assure that the driving record is obtained, reviewed and attached
prior to sending form DA2054 to Property Management. The state will provide the driver's driving
history if the LSU supervisor submits a request with the following information on LSU letterhead to
the Office of Motor Vehicles, PO Box 64886, Baton Rouge, LA 70896:
Full Name of Driver
Driver's License Number
Date of Birth
Social Security Number
Upon reviewing the driving record and discovering that a driver is a "high risk driver," the Property
Management Office or department head will immediately send the information to the Executive
Director, Public Safety and Risk Management for a final determination on driving status.
A "high risk driver" ,who, under the State Office of Risk Management guidelines should be
prohibited from driving on University business, is defined as:
 An individual who has three or more convictions, guilty pleas and/or nolo contendere pleas for
moving violations in a single year, or
 An individual who has a single conviction, guilty plea or nolo contendere plea for operating a
vehicle while intoxicated, hit and run driving, vehicular negligent injury, reckless operation of a
vehicle or similar violation within a single year.
Note: Other situations may exist where individuals should not drive for safety reasons.
Under such circumstances driving privileges may be withheld by supervisors until the
problem is resolved.
Defensive Driving Training
Defensive driving training must be provided to employees who will drive state vehicles on a
regular, routine basis. Departments which have such drivers include the Facility Services
Department, the Athletic Department, Stores, Residential Life, LSU Police, and Parking, Traffic
and Transportation, and other similar groups. The training is free of charge and is provided
through the State Office of Risk Management (ORM). ORM will provide "train the trainer" sessions
74
for the departments when they want their own instructors trained. Department heads are
responsible for obtaining this training for new drivers, and for assuring that the training is repeated
every 3 years. The defensive driving training may be scheduled as part of follow-up action when a
driver has a preventable accident, or when driving performance or history reveals a need for
additional training.
Records of this training must be kept by the departments. Training assistance can be obtained
from the LSU Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety (OES).
Accident Reporting and Investigations
Vehicle accidents must be reported and investigated in a timely manner using form DA2041.
Copies of this form may be obtained from the LSU Office of Public Safety and Risk Management.
Program Approval _____________________________________________
Durham, Executive Director
Date__________
75
Gary
M.
WATER VESSEL OPERATOR SAFETY PROGRAM
LSU Main Campus
The LSU main campus will follow the guidelines for a water vessel operator safety program as outlined in
the Loss Prevention Manual of the State Office of Risk Management. The University’s Executive Director of
Public Safety and Risk Management assumes the role of the State Office of Risk Management on the LSU
campus. The following administrative procedures should be followed in carrying out this program.
Types of Water Vessel Operators
There are two types of water vessel operators, occasional and routine. Routine operators are defined as:
Individuals whose job duties requires them to operate a water vessels on a frequent basis such as once per
week.
Occasional operators are defined as:
Individuals whose normal job duties does not require them to operate vessels on a frequent bases but may
operate vessels on an infrequent bases.
Water Vessel Operator Record Checks
Water vessel operator record checks are required to be made on faculty, staff, and students who operate
water vessels on an occasional or routine basis while on state / university business. In order for this to be
accomplished, department heads must submit a Vessel Authorization / Operator History Form on a yearly
basis to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety for operators in their departments who are
expected to operate water vessels on an occasional or routine basis. The Office of Occupational and
Environmental Safety will then submit a listing of the drivers to the Department of Wildlife and Fisheries to
obtain water vessel operator history records for evaluation.On current and new faculty, staff, and students,
the supervisor must determine the water vessel operating status based on the faculty, staff, or student’s job
description and vessel operation capabilities / skill level. The supervisor must also assure that the operator
history is obtained and reviewed by sending the a copy of the Vessel Authorization / Operator History Form
to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety. The Department of Wildlife and Fisheries will
provide the operator’s history if the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety submits a request on
LSU letterhead to the Louisiana Department of Wildlife and Fisheries, PO Box 98000, Baton Rouge, LA
70898-9000: A high risk water vessel operator is defined as:
An individual who has three or more convictions, guilty pleas and/or nolo contendere pleas for vessel
violations or An individual who has a single conviction, guilty plea or nolo contendere plea for operating a
vessel while intoxicated, hit and run operation, vessel negligent injury, reckless operation of a vessel or
similar violation, within a one year period.
Upon reviewing the operator history and discovering that a water vessel operator is a high risk operator, the
Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety will send the information to the Executive Director of
Public Safety and Risk Management for a determination on vessel operating status.
Safe Water Vessel Operation Training Safe Water Vessel Operation Training must be provided to
employees who will operate water vessels on a routine basis. Departments which have such operators
include most departments residing under the Center for Coastal, Energy, and Environmental Resources
(CCEER). The training is free of charge and is provided through the Department of Wildlife and Fisheries
and coordinated by the Office of Occupation and Environmental Safety. Department heads are responsible
for obtaining this training for water vessel operators, and for assuring that the training is repeated every 3
years. The training may also be scheduled as part of follow-up action when a operator has a preventable
accident, or when operator performance or history reveals a need for additional training.
Records of this training must be kept by the departments. Training assistance can be obtained from the
Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
Accident Reporting and Investigations
76
A water vessel accident is defined as:
A collision, accident, or other casualty involving a water vessel. A vessel is considered to be involved in an
boating accident whenever the occurrence results in damage by or to the vessel or its equipment, in injury or
loss of life to any person or in the disappearance of any person from on board under circumstances that
indicate the possibility of death or injury. A boating accident includes, but is not limited to, capsizing,
collision, foundering, flooding, fire, explosion and disappearance of a vessel other than by theft.
A water vessel accident must be reported and investigated in a timely manner using a Boating Accident
Form and an Accident / Incident Investigation Form that can be obtained from the LSU Office of Risk
Management.
77
N.
FORMS
78
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR LABS WHERE INFECTIOUS AGENTS AND
RECOMBINANT DNA RESEARCH IS PERFORMED
This Checklist is to be used for research labs using infectious agents and/or recombinant DNA.
For fire hazards, this checklist assumes that the lab is classified as a Class C lab for NFPA compliance. Class A and
Class B (NFPA classification) lab units are higher hazard labs that must have special considerations in construction
and operation.
Item
YES
NO*
Description
BIOLOGICAL SAFETY
1
Have all people involved in the experiments or research been trained in the
procedures to be used? Are training records available and adequate?
2
Are only authorized personnel permitted in the labs where infectious agents
and/or recombinant DNA work is conducted? Are tours conducted only by the
Director or PI or their designee?
3
Are emergency procedures in writing and understood by all?
4
Are infectious agents and recombinant DNA experiments confined to the
designated laboratory areas?
5
Is there an approved "Request for Approval of the Use of Recombinant DNA"
and "Addendum to Recombinant DNA Use Form" (as needed) on file for each
protocol?
6
Are research related accidents, significant problems or violations of the NIH
guidelines reported to the IBRDS Committee and the Office of Recombinant
DNA Activities as required by NIH guidelines?
7
Is a copy of the NIH/CDC guidelines readily available for reference along with
a copy of the University "Manual for Investigators Using Infectious Agents and
Recombinant DNA in Research" ?
8
Is the lab ventilation properly set up in accordance with the requirements using
negative air pressure and laminar flow to assure containment of agents or other
experiment emissions?
OES-004-96
79
Comments
FIRE AND EXPLOSION SAFETY (A "Laboratory Unit" consists of the rooms used for lab work and administration,
but rooms must be contiguous. It can range in size from a single room to an entire floor or building.)
1
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are not used, is the amount of Class
I, II and III flammables in the lab unit less than the maximums per 100 sq. ft.
shown below?
RESEARCH LABS TEACHING LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 2 gallons
1 gallon
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------4 gallons
2 gallons
2
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are used, is the amount of
Class I, II, and III flammables in the lab unit less than the maximums per 100
sq. ft. shown below?
RESEARCH LABS TEACHING LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 4 gallons
2 gallons
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------8 gallons
4 gallons
3
Is the total quantity of flammables in the laboratory unit less than the values
below? Note: Use one half of these values for a teaching lab.
Class I totals
Class I, II, III tot.
SPRINKLERED
NO SPRINKLERS
No safety cans/cabinets
150 gallons
75 gallons
With safety cans/cabinets 300 gallons
150 gallons
No safety cans/cabinets
With safety cans/cabinets
300 gallons
400 gallons
150 gallons
200 gallons
4
During daily use is the storage of class I & II liquids limited to 10 gallons when
located outside of a storage cabinet? 60 gallons for class III liquids? 25 gallons
for class I & II liquids when stored in safety cans outside of storage cabinets?
5
Are flammable liquids containerized properly according to the table below?
CONTAINER TYPE
Glass
Metal
Safety Can
Polyethylene
6
IA
1pt
1gal
2gal
1gal
FLAMMABLE CLASS
IB
IC
1qt
1gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
II
1gal
5gal
5gal
60gal
III
1gal
5gal
5gal
60gal
Are flammable liquid storage cabinets being used properly? FLAMMABLE
CLASS
Class I, II total
Class I, II, III total
MAX. STORAGE CAPACITY
60 gallons
120 gallons
7
Are containers of materials that may become hazardous upon prolonged storage
(ether, tetrahydrofuran, etc.) dated when first opened? Is the material evaluated
every six months for continued safe use?
8
Is sprinkler head clearance of 18" in the clear maintained in all lab unit areas?
9
Are penetrations in the fire rated ceilings, floors and walls of your lab unit
OES-004-96
80
sealed to prevent smoke, fire and vapors from escaping to other areas?
10
Are floor openings sealed or curbed to prevent spillage into other rooms below?
11
Is a second means of exit provided when one or more of the following
conditions exists?

Explosion hazard blocks escape or access to work area.

Lab work area exceeds 1000 sq. ft.

A hood is located adjacent to the primary means of exit access.

A compressed gas cylinder (larger than lecture bottle size) is in use that
contains a gas that is flammable or has a health hazard rating of 3 or 4,
and could prevent safe egress in case of accidental release of
contents.

A cryogenic container is in use that contains a gas that is flammable or
has a health rating of 3 or 4, and could prevent safe egress in case of
accidental release of contents.
12
Is furniture arranged so that a means of access to an exit can be reached easily
from any point? Are hallways and exits clear of obstructions?
13
Is an evacuation and emergency action plan available for employees in the unit?
Are Exit signs visible and functioning?
14
If fire doors are not self closing, are they closed?
15
Is a portable fire extinguisher located within 25 feet of your lab unit?
16
Is access to lab units where explosion hazards exist restricted to only those
necessary for the work?
17
Are compressed gas cylinders with a health hazard rating of 3 or 4 (and a rating
of 2 where no physiological warning properties exist) kept inside a continuously
mechanically ventilated hood or other enclosure with no more than 3 cylinders
per hood or enclosure?
18
Are there no more than 6 compressed gas cylinders (10x50 in.) per 500 sq. ft. (3
in a non sprinklered space) of flammable gases/oxygen, no more than 3 liquified
flammable gas cylinders (9x30 in.) per 500 sq. ft.
(2 cylinders in non sprinklered space), and no more than 3 cylinders (4x15in.)
of health hazard rating of 3 or 4?
19
Are compressed gas cylinders capped when not in use and secured at all times?
20
Are cylinders that are not necessary for current use stored outside the work area
in a safe location?
GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1
Is a laboratory safety coordinator appointed for each department?
2
Are all chemical shipments dated when received and when opened?
OES-004-96
81
3
Is there an inventory of chemicals with the suspect or known carcinogens
identified?
4
Are chemical Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) available in the laboratory?
5
Are chemicals stored by hazard classification and compatibility?
6
Is all laboratory equipment periodically inspected for defects?
7
Is protective equipment, such as gloves, face shields, etc., provided and used by
lab personnel as called for on the MSDS?
8
Are electrical outlets grounded? Where work with portable tools and/or cords is
in a wet area, are ground fault interrupters used (unless the tools are double
insulated)?
9
Are extension cords used only in temporary situations where the use will not
exceed 90 days or the life of the experiment? Are they adequately sized for the
electrical current and protected against damage? (The minimum size for an
extension cord is #16AWG.)
10
Are all original and subsequent containers of chemicals and other agents
labeled/identified, with precautionary information provided? Are the storage
cabinets and other storage areas also labeled in the same manner?
11
Are entrances to laboratory units, laboratory work areas, storage areas, and
associated facilities identified by signs to warn emergency response personnel of
unusual or severe hazards not directly related to the fire hazard of contents?
12
Are written standard operating procedures that incorporate safety requirements
such as personal protective equipment, etc., used?
13
Is regular surveillance for abnormal conditions made on unattended or
automatic laboratory operations involving hazardous chemicals?
14
Are emergency eye wash/showers available to those exposed to chemical
accidents?
15
Are emergency telephone numbers prominently posted on telephones?
16
Are lab unit workers trained in safety requirements such as fire extinguishers,
first aid, etc.?
* "NO" answers must be accompanied by comments that explain corrective action needed
Report completed by:
Title:
Laboratory Room # :
Building:
OES-004-96
82
Date of Report:
OES-004-96
83
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
BUILDING INSPECTION CHECKLIST FOR FIRE AND GENERAL SAFETY
This Checklist is to be used for building inspections by building coordinators and faculty members when fire and
general safety is being checked. The inspection form is designed to prompt the inspector to observe for the conditions
listed and respond in the "yes" column if everything is in order. Any "no" answer should be accompanied by an
explanation in the "comments" column to assist in identifying and correcting the problem.
Please Note: Laboratories must be inspected using the appropriate laboratory checklist.
Item
YES
NO*
Description
MEANS OF EGRESS (Corridors and passageways to exits, including the exit)
1
Are stair handrails in place on both sides of staircase and in good condition? Are
stair treads in good condition?
2
Are corridors and exits free and clear of all obstructions, with room furniture
arranged to provide easy access to the exit?
3
Do exit doors swing in the direction of exit travel with panic hardware properly
attached and in good working order (no sticking, etc.)?
4
Will fire doors and exit doors close and latch completely? Are fire doors kept
closed? (Fire doors are those which have a "fire rating", which is shown on a
label located on the door frame and on the back edge of the door, normally near
the top of the door)
5
Are exits properly marked and illuminated? Are passageways adequately
illuminated with all bulbs working?
6
Is an emergency lighting system inspection on file and current?
FIRE PROTECTION
1
Are all fire extinguishers in place and charged.
2
Is fire alarm system, including smoke and/or heat detectors, operable and able to
be heard throughout the building (current inspection on file)?
3
Are fire evacuation plans posted throughout and in good condition?
4
Are labs, storage areas, kitchens, and equipment rooms fire rated rooms?
5
Is sprinkler head clearance of 18" maintained (nothing stacked, installed or
84
Comments
(Be Specific!)**
stored within 18 inches of the heads)?
ELECTRICAL
1
Are extension cords used in place of permanent wiring only in temporary
situations? Are they adequately sized for the electrical current, protected against
damage, and equipped with factory or Facility Services installed receptacles (the
minimum size for an extension cord is #16AWG.)?
2
All electrical cords and extension cords are in good shape with no fraying,
swelling, splicing or patches?
3
Where work with portable tools and/or cords is in a wet area, are ground fault
interrupters used (unless the tools are double insulated)?
4
Do all electrical junction and switch and receptacle boxes have covers that are
closed tightly? Are switches labeled where their purpose is not obvious?
5
Are circuit breakers labeled as to their function and all covers complete (no
blanks) and in place?
GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1
Emergency phone numbers posted on telephones?
2
Janitor closets, equipment rooms, and stairwells free of general storage? Are
flammables, other than small quantities for research, instruction or maintenance
activities, stored in fire rated cabinets or approved storage?
3
Housekeeping at time of inspection adequate? Are attic areas clear of storage?
4
Floors in good condition with no loose tiles or other tripping hazards?
5
Outdoor grassy areas, sidewalks, stairs and parking lots in safe condition?
6
Indoor air quality -- Is the air free from irritating or nuisance odors? Are walls,
and other areas free from mildew, mold and excessive dusts?
OTHER CONDITIONS THAT REQUIRE ATTENTION:
* "NO" answers must be accompanied by comments that explain corrective action needed.
** Specific location, room #, equipment number, etc.
Report completed by:
Title:
Date:
Building:
85
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR RESEARCH LABS (CLASS A)
This Checklist is to be used for Class A (High Hazard) labs that are used in research. Please note that Class A
laboratory units cannot be used for instructional purposes.
(A "Laboratory Unit" consists of the rooms used for lab work and administration, but rooms must be contiguous. It
can range in size from a single room to an entire floor or building.)
Item
YES
NO*
Description
Comments
FIRE AND EXPLOSION SAFETY
1
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are not used, is the amount of Class
I, II and III flammables in the lab unit less than the maximums per 100 sq. ft.
shown below?
RESEARCH LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 10 gallons
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------20 gallons
2
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are used, is the amount of
Class I, II, and III flammables in the lab unit less than the maximums per 100
sq. ft. shown below?
RESEARCH LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 20 gallons
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------40 gallons
3
Is the total quantity of flammables in the laboratory unit less than the values
below?
Class I totals
Class I, II, III tot.
SPRINKLERED
NO SPRINKLERS
No safety cans/cabinets
600 gallons
300 gallons
With safety cans/cabinets 1200 gallons
600 gallons
No safety cans/cabinets
600 gallons
With safety cans/cabinets 1600 gallons
400 gallons
800 gallons
4
During daily use is the storage of class I & II liquids limited to 10 gallons when
located outside of a storage cabinet? 60 gallons for class III liquids? 25 gallons
for class I & II liquids when stored in safety cans outside of storage cabinets?
5
Are flammable liquids containerized properly according to the table below?
CONTAINER TYPE
Glass
Metal
Safety Can
OES-003-96
Rev. 9/97
IA
1pt
1gal
2gal
FLAMMABLE CLASS
IB
IC
1qt
1gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
86
II
1gal
5gal
5gal
III
1gal
5gal
5gal
Polyethylene
6
1gal
5gal
5gal
60gal
60gal
Are flammable liquid storage cabinets being used properly? FLAMMABLE
CLASS
Class I, II total
Class I, II, III total
MAX. STORAGE CAPACITY
60 gallons
120 gallons
7
Are containers of materials that may become hazardous upon prolonged storage
(ether, tetrahydrofuran, etc.) dated when first opened? Is the material evaluated
every six months for continued safe use?
8
Is sprinkler head clearance of 18" in the clear maintained in all lab unit areas?
9
Are penetrations in the fire rated ceilings, floors and walls of your lab unit
sealed to prevent smoke, fire and vapors from escaping to other areas?
10
Are floor openings sealed or curbed to prevent spillage into other rooms below?
11
Is a second means of exit provided when one or more of the following
conditions exists?

Explosion hazard blocks escape or access to work area.

Lab work area exceeds 1000 sq. ft.

A hood is located adjacent to the primary means of exit access.

A compressed gas cylinder (larger than lecture bottle size) is in use that
contains a gas that is flammable or has a health hazard rating of 3 or 4,
and could prevent safe egress in case of accidental release of
contents.

A cryogenic container is in use that contains a gas that is flammable or
has a health rating of 3 or 4, and could prevent safe egress in case of
accidental release of contents.
12
Is furniture arranged so that a means of access to an exit can be reached easily
from any point? Are hallways and exits clear of obstructions?
13
Is an evacuation and emergency action plan available for employees in the unit?
Are Exit signs visible and functioning?
14
If fire doors are not self closing, are they closed?
15
Is a portable fire extinguisher located within 25 feet of your lab unit?
16
Is access to lab units where explosion hazards exist restricted to only those
necessary for the work?
17
Are compressed gas cylinders with a health hazard rating of 3 or 4 (and a rating
of 2 where no physiological warning properties exist) kept inside a continuously
mechanically ventilated hood or other enclosure with no more than 3 cylinders
per hood or enclosure?
18
Are there no more than 6 compressed gas cylinders (10x50 in.) per 500 sq. ft. (3
in a non sprinklered space) of flammable gases/oxygen, no more than 3 liquified
flammable gas cylinders (9x30 in.) per 500 sq. ft.
(2 cylinders in non sprinklered space), and no more than 3 cylinders (4x15in.)
of health hazard rating of 3 or 4?
OES-003-96
Rev. 9/97
87
19
Are compressed gas cylinders capped when not in use and secured at all times?
20
Are cylinders that are not necessary for current use stored outside the work area
in a safe location?
GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1
Is a laboratory safety coordinator appointed for each department?
2
Are all chemical shipments dated when received and when opened?
3
Is there an inventory of chemicals with the suspect or known carcinogens
identified?
4
Are chemical Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) available in the laboratory?
5
Are chemicals stored by hazard classification and compatibility? Are hazardous
chemicals stored in the open in the laboratory work area kept to the minimum
necessary for the work being done?
6
Is all laboratory equipment periodically inspected for defects?
7
Is protective equipment, such as gloves, face shields, etc., provided and used by
lab personnel as called for on the MSDS?
8
Are electrical outlets grounded? Where work with portable tools and/or cords is
in a wet area, are ground fault interrupters used (unless the tools are double
insulated)?
9
Are extension cords used only in temporary situations where the use will not
exceed 90 days or the life of the experiment? Are they adequately sized for the
electrical current and protected against damage? (The minimum size for an
extension cord is #16AWG.)
10
Are all original and subsequent containers of chemicals and other agents
labeled/identified, with precautionary information provided? Are the storage
cabinets and other storage areas also labeled in the same manner?
11
Are entrances to laboratory units, laboratory work areas, storage areas, and
associated facilities identified by signs to warn emergency response personnel of
unusual or severe hazards not directly related to the fire hazard of contents?
12
Are written standard operating procedures that incorporate safety requirements
such as personal protective equipment, etc., used?
13
Is regular surveillance for abnormal conditions made on unattended or
automatic laboratory operations involving hazardous chemicals?
14
Are emergency eye wash/showers available to those exposed to chemical
accidents?
15
Are emergency telephone numbers prominently posted on telephones?
16
Are lab unit workers trained in safety requirements such as fire extinguishers,
first aid, etc.?
OES-003-96
Rev. 9/97
88
* "NO" answers must be accompanied by comments that explain corrective action needed
Report completed by:
Title:
Laboratory Room # :
Building:
Date of Report:
OES-003-96
Rev. 9/97
89
Construction and Fire Protection Requirements for Laboratory Units
The fire hazard classification allowable for each laboratory depends on the design and construction of the building
in which the laboratory is housed. The construction requirements are the minimum permitted and do not exclude
the use of construction with greater fire resistance. The following information is exerted from Subpart 45 of the
NFPA Fire Code.
Construction And Fire Protection Requirements For Laboratory Units
Non sprinklered Laboratory Units
Lab
Unit
Fire
Hazar
d
Class
Area Of Lab.
Unit Square
Feet
Class
A
Construction Types
I and II
Construction Types III, IV,
and V
Sprinklered Lab
Units
Any Construction Type
Fire
Separatio
n from
Non- Lab
Areas
Fire Sep.
from Lab
Units of
Equal or
Lower
Hazard
Classification
Fire
Separation
from NonLaboratory
Areas
Fire Sep. from
Lab Units of
Equal or
Lower Hazard
Classification
Fire Sep.
from Nonlaboratory
Areas
Fire Sep.
from Lab
Units of
Equal or
Lower
Hazard
Classificatio
n
Under 1000
1001-2000
2001-5000
5001-10,000
10,001 or
more
One
Hour
One
Hour
Two
Hour
N/A
N/A
One Hour
One Hour
One Hour
N/A
N/A
Two Hours
One Hour
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
One Hour
One Hour
One Hour
One Hour
N/A
NC;LC
NC;LC
NC;LC
NC;LC
N/A
Class
B
Under
20,000
20,000 or
more
One
Hour
N/A
NC; LC
N/A
One Hour
N/A
One Hour
N/A
NC; LC
N/A
NC; LC
N/A
Class
C
Under
10,000
10,000 or
more
One
Hour
One
Hour
NC; LC
NC; LC
One Hour
One Hour
NC; LC
One Hour
NC; LC
NC; LC
NC; LC
NC; LC
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note: In this table N/A represents laboratory units that are not allowed under a particular construction type. For
example, a Class A lab that has an area of 10,001 square feet or more is not allowed under any of the protection
requirements for laboratories.
Noncombustible Material (NC). A material that, in the form in which it is used and under the conditions
anticipated, will not ignite, burn, support combustion, or release flammable vapors when subjected to fire or heat.
Materials are considered noncombustible if successfully tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
Limited Combustible (LC). As applied to a building construction material, means a material;
(1) that does not comply with the definition of a noncombustible material
(2) that, in the form in which it is used, has a potential heat value not exceeding 3500 Btu per lb (8141 kJ/kg)
OES-003-96
Rev. 9/97
90
(3) That complies with one of the following paragraphs, (a) or (b).
(a) Materials having;
- a structural base of noncombustible material
- a surfacing not exceeding a thickness of 1/8 an inch (3.2 mm)
- surfacing with a flame spread rating equal to or less than 50
(b) Materials in the form and thickness used, other than as described in (a);
- must exhibit no evidence of continued progressive combustion
- must have a flame spread rating less than 25
- must be of such composition that surfaces exposed by cutting through the material on any plane would not have
a flame spread greater than 25 or exhibit evidence of continued progressive combustion
Classification of Construction Types
Basic types of construction are Types I, II, III, IV, and V. Each basic type, except for Type IV, includes two or
more subclasses differentiated by a three-digit arabic number. The arabic numbers designate the fire endurance
rating requirements for certain structural elements as follows:
First Arabic Number. Exterior bearing walls.
Second Arabic Number. Structural frame or columns and girders, supporting loads for more than one floor.
Third Arabic Number. Floor construction.
OES-003-96
Rev. 9/97
91
Fire Resistance Requirements in hours for Type I through Type V Construction
Type I
Type II
Type III
443
332
222
111
xterior Bearing Walls
upporting more than one floor
olumns, or other bearing walls
upporting one floor only.......
upporting a roof only..........
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
nterior Bearing Walls
upporting more than one floor,
olumns, or other bearing walls.
upporting one floor only........
upporting a roof only............
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
Columns
upporting more than one floor,
earing walls, or columns........
upporting one floor only........
upporting a roof only............
4
3
3
3
2
2
eams, Girders, Trusses, &
Arches
upporting more than one floor,
earing walls, or columns........
upporting one floor only........
upporting a roof only............
4
3
3
loor Construction
Roof Construction
xterior Nonbearing Walls
000
Type IV
2HH
Type V
211
200
111
000
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
H
H
H
1
1
1
0
0
0
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
H
H
H
1
1
1
0
0
0
3
2
2
1
0
1
0
H
1
0
2
1.5
1
1
0
1
0
H
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note: Any bold number or letter in the table is a member that is permitted to be of approved combustible material.
"H" indicates heavy timber members.
OES-003-96
Rev. 9/97
92
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR RESEARCH and TEACHING LABS (CLASS C)
This Checklist is to be used for Class C labs that are used for instruction and in research. Please note that
there are several differences in the checklist requirements between research and teaching (instructional)
labs that must be considered. Also, Class A and Class B lab units are higher hazard labs that must have
special considerations in construction and operation. These higher hazard labs are not covered in this
checklist. If your lab has more flammables than permitted in Class C labs, it will have to be reclassified to
one of the higher classifications, and may result in the State Fire Marshal prohibiting occupancy of the lab
under the current conditions. It is very important to maintain the labs as Class C labs in order to prevent
disruption of research and instruction.
(A "Laboratory Unit" consists of the rooms used for lab work and administration, but rooms must be
contiguous. It can range in size from a single room to an entire floor or building.)
Item
YES
NO*
Description
Comments
FIRE AND EXPLOSION SAFETY
1
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are not used, is the amount of
Class I, II and III flammables in the lab unit less than the maximums per
100 sq. ft. shown below?
RESEARCH LABS TEACHING LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 2 gallons
1 gallon
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------4 gallons
2 gallons
2
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are used, is the amount of
Class I, II, and III flammables in the lab unit less than the maximums per
100 sq. ft. shown below?
RESEARCH LABS TEACHING LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 4 gallons
2 gallons
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------8 gallons
4 gallons
3
Is the total quantity of flammables in the laboratory unit less than the
values below? Note: Use one half of these values for a teaching lab.
Class I totals
Class I, II, III tot.
4
SPRINKLERED
NO SPRINKLERS
No safety cans/cabinets
150 gallons
75 gallons
With safety cans/cabinets 300 gallons
150 gallons
No safety cans/cabinets
With safety cans/cabinets
300 gallons
400 gallons
150 gallons
200 gallons
During daily use is the storage of class I & II liquids limited to 10
gallons when located outside of a storage cabinet? 60 gallons for class
III liquids? 25 gallons for class I & II liquids when stored in safety cans
outside of storage cabinets?
OES - 001 - 01
93
Are flammable liquids containerized properly according to the table
below?
CONTAINER TYPE
Glass
Metal
Safety Can
Polyethylene
IA
1pt
1gal
2gal
1gal
FLAMMABLE CLASS
IB
IC
1qt
1gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
II
1gal
5gal
5gal
60gal
III
1gal
5gal
5gal
60gal
Are flammable liquid storage cabinets being used properly?
FLAMMABLE CLASS
Class I, II total
Class I, II, III total
MAX. STORAGE CAPACITY
60 gallons
120 gallons
Are containers of materials that may become hazardous upon prolonged
storage (ether, tetrahydrofuran, etc.) dated when first opened? Is the
material evaluated every six months for continued safe use?
Is sprinkler head clearance of 18" in the clear maintained in all lab unit
areas?
Are penetrations in the fire rated ceilings, floors and walls of your lab
unit sealed to prevent smoke, fire and vapors from escaping to other
areas?
0
Are floor openings sealed or curbed to prevent spillage into other rooms
below?
1
Is a second means of exit provided when one or more of the following
conditions exists?

Explosion hazard blocks escape or access to work area.

Lab work area exceeds 1000 sq. ft.

A hood is located adjacent to the primary means of exit access.

A compressed gas cylinder (larger than lecture bottle size) is in
use that contains a gas that is flammable or has a health hazard
rating of 3 or 4, and could prevent safe egress in case of
accidental release of contents.

A cryogenic container is in use that contains a gas that is
flammable or has a health rating of 3 or 4, and could prevent
safe egress in case of accidental release of contents.
2
Is furniture arranged so that a means of access to an exit can be reached
easily from any point? Are hallways and exits clear of obstructions?
3
Is an evacuation and emergency action plan available for employees in
the unit? Are Exit signs visible and functioning?
4
If fire doors are not self closing, are they closed?
5
Is a portable fire extinguisher located within 25 feet of your lab unit?
6
Is access to lab units where explosion hazards exist restricted to only
OES - 001 - 01
94
those necessary for the work?
17
Are compressed gas cylinders with a health hazard rating of 3 or 4 (and a
rating of 2 where no physiological warning properties exist) kept inside a
continuously mechanically ventilated hood or other enclosure with no
more than 3 cylinders per hood or enclosure?
18
Are there no more than 6 compressed gas cylinders (10x50 in.) per 500
sq. ft. (3 in a nonsprinklered space) of flammable gases/oxygen, no more
than 3 liquified flammable gas cylinders (9x30 in.) per 500 sq. ft.
(2 cylinders in nonsprinklered space), and no more than 3 cylinders
(4x15in.) of health hazard rating of 3 or 4?
19
Are compressed gas cylinders capped when not in use and secured at all
times?
20
Are cylinders that are not necessary for current use stored outside the
work area in a safe location?
GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1
Is a laboratory safety coordinator appointed for each department?
2
Are all chemical shipments dated when received and when opened?
3
Is there an inventory of chemicals with the suspect or known
carcinogens identified?
4
Are chemical Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) available in the
laboratory?
5
Are chemicals stored by hazard classification and compatibility?
6
Is all laboratory equipment periodically inspected for defects?
7
Is protective equipment, such as gloves, face shields, etc., provided and
used by lab personnel as called for on the MSDS?
8
Are electrical outlets grounded? Where work with portable tools and/or
cords is in a wet area, are ground fault interrupters used (unless the tools
are double insulated)?
9
Are extension cords used only in temporary situations where the use will
not exceed 90 days or the life of the experiment? Are they adequately
sized for the electrical current and protected against damage? (The
minimum size for an extension cord is #16AWG.)
10
Are all original and subsequent containers of chemicals and other agents
labeled/identified, with precautionary information provided? Are the
storage cabinets and other storage areas also labeled in the same
manner?
11
Are entrances to laboratory units, laboratory work areas, storage areas,
OES - 001 - 01
95
and associated facilities identified by signs to warn emergency response
personnel of unusual or severe hazards not directly related to the fire
hazard of contents?
2
Are written standard operating procedures that incorporate safety
requirements such as personal protective equipment, etc., used?
3
Is regular surveillance for abnormal conditions made on unattended or
automatic laboratory operations involving hazardous chemicals?
4
Are emergency eye wash/showers available to those exposed to chemical
accidents?
5
Are emergency telephone numbers prominently posted on telephones?
6
Have lab unit workers been trained in the following safety requirements:
Emergency Procedures, MSDSs, Personal Protection Equipment, and
Good Laboratory Practices?
7
Are chemical fume hood sashes kept closed when not in use ?
* "NO" answers must be accompanied by comments that explain corrective action needed. Work
Orders should be placed with Facility Services by the Building Coordinator. OES will assist with
corrective actions when specifically requested by the Building Coordinator or Laboratory
Coordinator.
Report completed by:
Title:
Laboratory Room # :
Building:
Date of Report:
OES - 001 - 01
96
Laboratory Safety Training Documentation
The following laboratory staff has received the safety training as listed in Item 16 of the
Laboratory Inspection Checklist and agree to follow all University Laboratory Safety requirements while
working in a campus laboratory.
Print Name
OES - 001 - 01
Signature
97
Date
CONFINED SPACE PERMIT
LSU Occupational and Environmental Safety
(This permit/checklist is to be used when entering permit required confined spaces)
1.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Location of Confined Space:
Date/Time:
Purpose of Entry:
Duration
Authorized by:
Expires On:
SAFETY MEASURES CHECKLIST
2.
Measures for isolating & equipment
yes
no
Measures for isolating & equipment
yes
Isolation procedure completed
Self-contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)
Line(s) Broken - Capped - Blanked
Air-Line Respirators w/Emergency-Escape
Purge - Flush and Vent
Air-Purifying Respirators and Cartridges
Ventilation (natural or forced)
First Aid Equipment
Secure Area (Post and Flag)
Communications Equipment & Procedures
Full Body Harness w/ "D" Ring
Protective Clothing
Tripod Emergency Rescue Unit
Head/Eye/Hearing Protection (Circle applicable)
Lifelines
Hot Work Permit Required
Fire Extinguishers
MSDS Reviewed
Lighting (Explosion-Proof)
Personnel Briefed on Entry
ATMOSPHERE MONITORING
3.
TEST(S) TO BE
TAKEN
YES
NO
Acceptable
Entry Conditions
TEST 1
DATE
DATE/TIME/
READING
Oxygen
19.5-23.5%
Combustible Gas
Below 10% LEL
CO
Below 35 ppm
Known Toxic
Consult OES
Individuals Conducting Test (names)
2. _________________________
4.
TEST 2
TIME
READ
ING
DATE
TEST 3
TIME
READ
ING
DATE
TIME
1. ________________________
3. ________________________
INSTRUMENTS
Instrument Used
Identification Number
1.
2.
3.
5.
no
DECLASSIFICATION TO NON PERMIT-REQUIRED ENTRY (OPTIONAL)
FOLLOWING REQUIRED EVALUATION AND MONITORING, THIS SPACE IS DECLASSIFIED TO A NON-PERMIT ENTRY.
SIGNATURE OF FOREMAN
DATE:
TERMINATION OF PERMIT
PERMIT CANCELED ON:
/
LOCATION:
6.
DATE
/
BY:
TIME
SIGNATURE OF FOREMAN
98
READ
ING
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING THE CONFINED SPACE PERMIT
1.
Permit must be completed with black or blue ink only, no pencil.
2.
Permit must be legible and in English.
3.
Every blank item must be filled in with the appropriate information or N/A for not applicable.
4.
Times can be AM/PM or based on the 24-hour clock.
5.
Persons identified by name should be by both first name and last name. Identifiers should be used whenever
necessary, such as the last four digits of the social security number whenever the person's identity can be
confused with others, such as Steve Smith, 4269.
6.
Signatures must be legible or the printed full name of the signee included.
7.
Users of this permit must preserve this document for a period of one year and must protect it from becoming
damaged or defaced in the course of its use.
8.
Atmospheric monitoring for specific chemical substance such as H 2S ,ammonia, chlorine or others, must be
recorded in Section 3 and the specific levels indicted with the appropriate date.
Section 1:
1.
Location of Confined Space - Be specific and describe area to be entered.
2.
Purpose of Entry - Describe work or activity to be performed in the confined area in specific terms.
3.
Authorized by - Specific person authorizing the work activity to be performed.
4.
Date/Time - Day, month, year of permit completion and the time of issuance in twenty-four hour clock or using AM
and PM.
5.
Duration - The length of time in hours and minutes that the permit will be in effect after which the permit will expire
or be canceled. Another permit may be issued if needed.
6.
Expires on - Date and time the permit is believed to expire and no longer be in effect.
Section 2:
Self-explanatory - Additional items may be added as safety features or activities if deemed necessary or important by
the job supervisor. Each block must be checked "yes" or "no".
Section 3:
Any atmospheric monitoring performed in order to evaluate the atmosphere of the confined are must be documented
here in addition to the date and time performed.
Section 4:
The specific instruments used to test the atmosphere must be described and identified here. The individual conducting
the testing is recorded above block 4.
Section 5:
This section is completed when the confined space is declassified to a non-permit entry. The person in charge fills in
the required information after required steps to declassify have been taken.
Section 6:
The date and time the permit is canceled or expires is noted in this section along with person's name.
Section 7:
The list of authorized attendants names will be listed here
Section 8:
This list of authorized entrants names, time in and time out will be listed here.
99
AUTHORIZED ATTENDANTS
7.
NAME
NAME
NAME
NAME
AUTHORIZED ENTRANTS
8.
NAME
TIME IN
TIME
OUT
100
NAME
TIME IN
TIME
OUT
101
DUTIES CHECKLIST
The authorized entrant is required to:
·
Know the hazards of the entry.
·
Alert the attendant when any condition is noted that might cause the entrant to be aborted.
·
Exit the space immediately when conditions exist that require exit (such as alarms, notifications
from the attendant, etc.)
The attendant is required to:
·
Know the hazards of the entry.
·
Know the potential behavioral effects of the hazards anticipated in the entry.
·
Maintain a count of entrants into the space.
·
Remain outside of the space until relieved by another attendant (this includes rescue
operations).
·
Communicate with the entrant as necessary.
·
Monitor the activities inside and outside of the space to determine if the entry can be conducted
safely.
·
Make sure only authorized entrants enter the space. (Notify supervision immediately of any
attempt.)
The entry supervision is required to:
·
Know the hazards that may be faced with the entry.
·
Verify that all entries that are required have been made on the permit for the entry.
·
Terminate the entry if necessary.
·
Verify that rescue services are available.
·
Remove unauthorized individuals who attempt to enter the space.
Rescue personnel are required to:
·
Know how to use appropriate equipment such as PPE, and rescue equipment.
·
Have had CPR and First Aid training.
·
Have performed a practice rescue in the last 12 months.
102
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
BUILDING INSPECTION CHECKLIST FOR FIRE WATCH PERSONNEL
This Checklist is to be used for building inspections by FIRE WATCH personnel when observing for fire
hazards. The inspection form is designed to prompt the inspector to observe for the conditions listed and
respond in the "yes" column if everything is in order. Any "no" answer should be accompanied by an
explanation in the "comments" column to assist in identifying and correcting the problem. The form
should be completed at the end of the work shift and recorded with the fire watch files. Items which need
immediate correction should be corrected on the spot by the fire watcher or by contacting the responsible
party. Use of this form should not in any way delay sounding the fire alarm or starting an evacuation for a
fire.
Building:_______________________________________
Item
YES
NO*
Description
Comments
(Be Specific!)**
1
Are corridors and exits free and clear of all obstructions, with room
furniture arranged to provide easy access to the exit?
2
Are exit doors in good working order (no sticking, etc.)? Will fire
doors and exit doors close and latch completely?
3
Are exits properly marked and illuminated? Are passageways
adequately illuminated with all bulbs working?
4
Are all fire extinguishers in place and charged.
5
Are fire evacuation plans posted throughout and in good condition?
6
Are doors on labs, storage areas, kitchens, and equipment rooms kept
closed? (Office doors normally do not have to be closed when the
office is occupied.)
7
If building is sprinklered, is sprinkler head clearance of 18"
maintained (nothing stacked, installed or stored within 18 inches of
the heads)?
OES-003-96
103
8
All electrical cords and extension cords are in good shape with no
fraying, swelling, splicing or patches? Are they routed so as to avoid
tripping hazards or damage to the cords?
9
Do electrical junction and switch and receptacle boxes have covers
that are closed tightly?
10
Emergency phone numbers posted on telephones?
11
Janitor closets, equipment rooms, and stairwells free of general
storage? Are flammables, other than small quantities for research,
instruction or maintenance activities, stored in fire rated cabinets or
approved storage rooms or cabinets?
12
Housekeeping at time of inspection adequate?
13
Floors in corridors or exit paths in good condition with no loose tiles
or other tripping hazards?
OTHER CONDITIONS THAT REQUIRE ATTENTION:
* "NO" answers must be accompanied by comments that explain corrective action needed.
** Specific location, room #, equipment number, etc.
Report completed by:
Initials:
(Print name)
Routing instructions:
OES-003-96
104
Date:
Shift:
Turn this form in to your supervisor or the building coordinator. If a log is being kept on the fire
watch, you may also have to sign the log.
OES-005-96
105
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
HAZARD LOG
This Hazard Log is to be maintained to assure that reported hazards are corrected in a timely manner, and
to assure that the employees and others who may be exposed to the hazard are warned. Hazards that are
documented in inspections are not listed in this log.
Hazard
No.
Date
Reported
Date
Corrected
Description of Hazard
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
106
Nature of
warnings issued
Hazard
No.
(Cont’d)
Date
Reported
Date
Corrected
Description of Hazard
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
107
Nature of
warnings issued
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR RESEARCH and TEACHING LABS (CLASS C)
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LABS
This Checklist is for Class C (NFPA CLASSIFICATION) labs that are used for instruction and in
research. Please note that there are several differences in the checklist requirements between research
and teaching (instructional) labs that must be considered. Also, Class A and Class B lab units are higher
hazard labs that must have special considerations in construction and operation. These higher hazard
labs are not covered in this checklist. If your lab has more flammables than permitted in Class C labs, it
will have to be reclassified to one of the higher classifications. Check with the Office of Occupational
and Environmental Safety if your flammable liquid totals exceed the maximums shown in this checklist.
(A "Laboratory Unit" consists of the rooms used for lab work and administration, but rooms must be
contiguous. It can range in size from a single room to an entire floor or building.)
Item
YES
NO*
Description
1
Are floor surfaces free of tripping/slipping hazards caused
by broken tiles, wet surfaces, or other problems?
2
If grounds are associated with the lab, are they in safe
condition with no holes, broken pavement, or protrusions
that create hazards?
3
Where stairs are used by lab personnel, are they safe with
no missing or worn treads and clear of storage or debris?
4
Are partitions, where installed, set up with emergency
egress considered so that no interference is present?
5
Are all electrical equipment items used in test or experiment
setups adequately grounded to prevent electric shock?
(Grounding is normally set up through the third conductor
in the cord sets or three wire conductor cables.)
6
Where activity with portable tools and/or cords is in a wet
area, are ground fault circuit interrupters used (unless the
tools are double insulated)?
7
Are fuse and breaker boxes labeled with the identity of
circuits served? Are fuse box doors closed?
8
Are extension cords or temporary wiring adequately sized
to carry the expected electrical load (wattage)?
9
Are first aid kits available and their whereabouts known by
all personnel?
108
Comments
10
Where caustics or acids used, are eye washes/safety showers
available and serviceable?
11
Are new students/instructors trained in safety procedures
upon assignment to the lab? Before new experiments with
injury potential are set up, are students/researchers briefed
on the hazards, and methods to guard against them
discussed?
12
Are fire extinguishers located within 25' of your shop? Are
they mounted and of the proper type for the location?
13
Are evacuation plans posted? Have emergency procedures
been discussed with students/instructors?
14
Is sprinkler head clearance of 18" maintained all around?
15
Do manual alarms (pull stations), emergency lights, and
heat/smoke detection system appear to be in working
order? Are exit lights unobstructed? Are both bulbs lit?
16
Are power tools in good condition (cords, housing)? Are
they UL approved? If not double insulated, is the 3rd
prong intact?
17
Are hand tools in good condition with no burrs or
mushroomed heads?
18
Are all tools properly stored when not in use?
19
Is proper personal protective equipment available and used
at all times? Are students/instructors trained to use PPE as
tasks or procedures change?
20
Are respirators being worn if the work requires their use?
21
Is there adequate aisle space and turning room for power
and hand trucks? Are speed limits posted?
22
Are the rated capacities on cranes and hoists visible and
adhered to? Are the hooks in good condition and not
stretched?
23
Are all cables, ropes, slings and chains in good condition
with no fraying, bends or kinks in cables or ropes and no
stretching in chains, cables or ropes?
24
If a fork lift is in use, is the area properly ventilated? Are
safe operating instructions posted? Are all
flammable/combustible materials kept away from charging
equipment?
109
25
Are all belts, pulleys, gears, shafts, points of operation, and
nip points guarded? Are push sticks available where
necessary? Are all oil/grease spills/leaks cleaned up
immediately?
26
Is the lockout/tagout program being followed?
27
Are aisle lines for machines and worker spaces painted and
adhered to? Lines around stock areas?
28
Are all areas such as painting, welding, cutting, battery
charging, storage and chemical handling posted against
smoking?
29
Are proper lifting techniques being followed?
30
Are flammable liquid storage cabinets being utilized for the
storage of flammable materials (paints, solvents, oils, etc.)?
31
Are parts washers used? If so, are all safety devices
functional?
32
Are all original and subsequent containers of hazardous
materials labeled with precautionary information? Are all
storage cabinets and other storage areas also labeled in the
same manner?
33
Are chemical stored by hazard class and compatibility?
34
Are Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) available in each
lab?
35
Are compressed gas cylinders with a health hazard of 3 or 4
kept inside a continuously mechanically ventilated hood or
other enclosure with no more than 3 cylinders per
enclosure?
36
Are there no more than 6 compressed gas cylinders (10x50
in.) of flammble gas or oxygen per 500 sq. ft. (3 in
nonsprinklered space); no more than 3 liquified flammble
gas cylinders (9x30 in.) per 500 sq. ft. (2 in non-sprinklered
space); and no more than 3 cylinders (4x15 in.) of health
hazard rating 3 or 4?
37
Are compressed gas cylinders capped when not in use and
secured at all times?
38
Is there an up-dated chemical inventory of hazardous
materials?
39
Are standard operating procedures used to identify known
110
hazards? Are prescribed safety guidelines followed?
40
Are all compressors and other pressurization equipment
(air or hydraulic) regularly inspected for safety defects such
as tank integrety, check value function, pressure guage
function, hose condition, etc.?
41
In areas where hazardous vapors, dusts, and/or fumes are
generated (fume hoods, welding hoods, canopy hoods, etc.)
is local ventilation used?
42
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are not used, is
the amount of Class I, II and III flammables in the lab unit
less than the maximums per 100 sq. ft. shown below?
RESEARCH
TEACHING
LABS
LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 2 gallons
1 gallon
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------4 gallons
2
gallons
43
Where storage cabinets and/or safety cans are used, is the
amount of Class I, II, and III flammables in the lab unit less
than the maximums per 100 sq. ft. shown below?
RESEARCH
TEACHING
LABS
LABS
Class I (Flash Point « 73, Boiling Pt.«100F)------ 4 gallons
2
gallons
Class I, II, and III (Flash Pts. « 73- 200F)---------8 gallons
4 gallons
44
Is the total quantity of flammables in the laboratory unit less
than the values below? Note: Use one half of these values
for a teaching lab.
SPRINKLERED
SPRINKLERS
Class I totals
gallons
gallons
Class I, II, III tot.
gallons
NO
No safety cans/cabinets
150 gallon
75
With safety cans/cabinets
300 gallons
150
No safety cans/cabinets
300 gallons
With safety cans/cabinets
400 gallons
150
200
gallons
45
During daily use, is the storage of class I & II liquids
limited to 10 gallons when located outside of a storage
cabinet? 60 gallons for class III liquids? 25 gallons for
class I & II liquids when stored in safety cans outside of
storage cabinets?
111
46
Are flammable liquids containerized properly according to
the table below?
CONTAINER TYPE
IA
III
Glass
1gal
Metal
5gal
Safety Can
5gal
Polyethylene
60gal
47
1pt
1qt
1gal
1gal
1gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
2gal
5gal
5gal
5gal
1gal
5gal
5gal
60gal
Are flammable liquid storage cabinets being used properly?
FLAMMABLE CLASS
Class I, II total
Class I, II, III total
48
FLAMMABLE CLASS
IB
IC
II
MAX. STORAGE CAPACITY
60 gallons
120 gallons
Is a second means of exit provided when one or more of the
following conditions exists?
 Explosion hazard blocks escape or access to work area.
 Lab work area exceeds 1000 sq. ft.
 A hood is located adjacent to the primary means of exit
access.
 A compressed gas cylinder (larger than lecture bottle
size) is in use that contains a gas that is flammable or
has a health hazard rating of 3 or 4, and could prevent
safe egress in case of accidental release of contents.
 A cryogenic container is in use that contains a gas that
is flammable or has a health rating of 3 or 4, and
could prevent safe egress in case of accidental release
of contents.
* "NO" answers must be accompanied by comments that explain corrective action needed
Report completed by:
Title:
Laboratory Room # :
Building:
Date of Report:
112
LSU
OFFICE OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
EXIT ACCESS/CORRIDOR MODIFICATION REQUEST
An approved request must be on file for all items that are placed in an exit access/corridor that is not
part of the building as shown in the architectural design. This request must also be made to permit
any existing article to remain in a corridor or other exit access way. An item may not be placed in
any LSU building exit access/corridor prior to approval of this request.
Note: Route this request to the Office of Occupational and Environmental Safety.
DATE OF
REQUEST:
_______________
CONTACT PERSON FOR
THIS REQUEST:
______________________
BUILDING NAME:
_______________________________
Brief description of the alteration or modification requested and justification for the change:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________
Sketch showing proposed location(s) of item(s):
Approvals:
Signature*
Date
Initiator:
Department Head
Facility Development
Code Coordinator
Occ. and Env. Safety
*Indicates approval of the request. All signatures must be entered prior to approval by OES.
113
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT REVIEW
OCCUPATIONAL & ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
(504) 388-5640
Project Title:
Facility Development Requirements
1.
Plans and specifications for new construction and/or renovation must be approved by the State
Fire Marshal.
2.
Notify OES of all prebid and preconstruction meetings (Rm126,PublicSafetyBldg)
3.
Specifications must require that LSU students, faculty, and staff not be exposed to any
harmful construction debris or hazardous materials. (ie, lead-based paint, asbestos, dust,
noise, vapors, etc.) Specifications shall also include a requirement that on job sites where
contaminants generated by construction may enter adjacent occupied building space; the
contractor shall erect a containment system sufficient to protect LSU faculty, staff, and students
from exposure. The containment system shall also be subject to approval by LSU Facility/Safety
personnel
4.
All construction plans delivered to contractor shall include notification of the location of asbestos
containing material (ACM) to remain, that has been removed, or that will be removed.
5.
A notification form shall be issued that informs the contractor when asbestos abatement has
been completed in the construction area. The form will be generated by the office of the Director
of Facility Maintenance and will be posted by the contractor on the job site.
6.
Insure that project specifications include requirements that contractor will comply with OSHA
regulations on job site.
7.
On electrical construction or renovations involving high voltage lines, a one line diagram should
be prepared for the feed coming into the building and provided to Energy Services for future use
in troubleshooting and work.
Contractor Requirements
8.
9.
Contractors must send a copy of the site safety plan (Written documentation of a working and
active employee safety program as defined by the OSHA Construction Standard), along with the
site safety supervisors name and a 24 hour phone number, to the OES office.
The construction site must be restricted to unauthorized personnel. High hazard areas
involving machinery, hot work, roofing kettles, overhead work, excavations, etc. shall be barricaded and
114
10.
The contractor shall make available the Material Safety Data Sheet for any hazardous material
used or stored on the campus. A copy of the MSDS will be sent to OES for review prior to the
project start date.
11.
Any injury requiring medical attention which occurs on site must be reported to OES, and
the cont
12.
Activities involving utility lines shall be closely coordinated with Energy Services to avoid
outages
13.
Contractors shall be responsible for the proper disposal of waste materials. (Solid Waste,
Hazardous Waste, etc.) Any Regulated Hazardous Waste shipped off campus by a
contract
14.
Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with Water and Air Quality Standards as they
relate to unauthorized releases or emissions of regulated substances into the environment. (storm
drains, bayous, etc.)
15.
When applicable Underground Storage Tank(UST) Regulations set forth by the LADEQ shall be
followed. The involves both installation and removal activities.
Reviewed by: Michael Hooks
Title:
Assistant Director, OES
Date:
OES-4-98
115
O.
HAZMAT RESPONSE LEVELS
Level 1: Minor spill in work or lab area controlled and cleaned up by workers or lab personnel. No response by
University OES or University Police
Level 2: Moderate spill which causes work area personnel to be unable to control and/or clean up. Such may
include accidents where large areas in the work area are impacted by debris or chemicals. LSU OES will
control activities with assistance from University police and perform gross cleanup. Where injuries are
involved, City EMS will be called by University police if needed. (Refer to NOTE under Level 3 if a serious
injury is involved.)
Level 3: Large spill which is not a threat to the public and is contained or limited to the campus. Such spill may
require evacuation of buildings under the direction of LSU Police. Baton Rouge Hazmat will be called to
assist or take control where there is need for analytical assistance, site assessment and / or manpower. Hazmat
will assume role of Incident Commander with assistance from OES and University supervision/faculty.
NOTE: The Louisiana State Police Right to Know Unit and the Baton Rouge Fire Department Hazmat Unit will be
contacted if there is a hazardous materials release with:
a.) an injury with hospitalization, or a fatality, or
b.) a fire or explosion which potentially threatens off site personnel, or
c.) a release of a hazardous material in an amount which exceeds the reportable quantity (check with OES for
quantities), and which may get offsite.
Level 4: An event where a major portion of the campus is affected or the spill is a threat to the neighboring
community or the environment. In this event, City Hazmat and State Police will be notified to assume
incident commander status and coordinate activities of all concerned. Such an event would include train
derailment, tanker truck accident, pipeline rupture, plane crash, major fire involving hazardous materials, etc.
All other agencies will work in conjunction with the State Police.
NOTE: Containers of chemicals or chemical mixtures that may be unstable or sensitive to movement may have to
be handled as a bomb. In such cases, OES will work through University Police to have the Baton Rouge City
Police Bomb Squad respond.
116
P.
OPERATIONAL SAFETY & LOSS PREVENTION PLAN
This serves as the master document addressing the sixteen point operational safety plan required by the ORM. Each
component of the plan is addressed below and references the location of specific program components.
1. Management Safety Policy Statement
Policy Statement #19 is the University Safety Policy. The statement outlines the University commitment to
safety, assigns responsibilities, and designates the Office of Occupational & Environmental Safety to develop,
implement, and evaluate safety and environmental compliance programs. The Policy also establishes the
University Safety Committee to provide the administration with recommendations that will enhance the safety
programs. P.S. 19 is signed by the Chancellor and is available to all LSU employees via the Internet, as well
as, the requirement that all departments have current copies of all Policy Statement on file.
2. Assignment of Safety Responsibility
The assignment of safety responsibility is provided in P. S. 19 and the University Safety Manual. Safety
responsibility is assigned to Vice Chancellors, Deans, Directors, & Department Heads who will implement
safety programs in their areas of responsibility. The policy address accountability as well. OES is assigned the
role of provider and coordinator.
3. Inspection Program
The inspection programs operated by the University include the following:
- Building Inspections
- Laboratory Inspections (Class A & C)
- Fume Hood Inspections
- Grounds Inspections
- Fire Watch Inspections
- Biosafety Laboratory Checklist
- Fraternity & Sorority Health Inspections
- Fire Extinguishers
- Fire Alarms Systems
- Building Sprinkler Systems
- Lighting Surveys
These Inspections are carried out by various university personnel responsible for implementing corrective
action when needed. Inspection frequency ranges from quarterly to annually. Inspection records are kept by
OES and the department responsible. LSUPD patrols the campus on a 24 hour basis.
4. Job Safety Analysis
Job Safety Analysis are performed for tasks/operations which shows a higher than normal accident rate. As
with the Accident Investigation Program, those accident which cause serious injury/lost time or significant
property damage shall be reviewed with a JSA.
5. Investigation Program
Accident investigations are the responsibility of the supervisor of the work unit involved. The “Occupational
Accident or Illness Report”(attached) is used to document accidents. This report is distributed by Human
Resources Management. Accidents involving serious injury (doctors care) or significant property damage are
investigated by OES in cooperation with the department involved. Accident records and trends analysis are
complied by OES and reported on an annual basis.
6. Safety Meetings
117
LSU - BR is classified as a Class B agency. Therefore, safety meeting are required on a quarterly basis. OES
has adapted this component to fit the academic calender used by the university. Academic areas considered to
be low risk are require to have safety meeting every semester. (Fall, Spring, and Summer) High risk areas
(Facility Services) are required to have safety meeting on a monthly basis. This is mandated by the University
Safety Manual. (Attached)
7. Safety Rules
The University has several sets of written safety rules. The University Safety Manual serves as the general
resources for safety and environmental procedures and regulations. The Chemical Hygiene Plan outlines
safety procedures for all campus laboratories. Policy Statement 18 serves as the Emergency Preparedness
Plan for the university. Each of these written documents has been created to insure compliance with OSHA,
DEQ, and State Fire Marshall rules and regulations.
8. Safety Training
University employees have access to safety training provided by OES. Training programs include the
following:
- Laboratory Safety
- Engineering Shop Safety
- Asbestos Awareness
- Hazard Communication
- Defensive Driving
- First Aid / CPR
- Lead Hazard Awareness
Employees also receive specific training on proper work procedures including safety procedures form
departmental supervisors. This training takes place upon initial employment, after job reclassification, and
when new procedures or equipment is introduced.
9. Record Keeping
Document pertaining to safety related actions are kept by OES and the departments. Those records kept and
analyzed by OES include the following:
- Accident Reports
- Inspection Reports
- Accident Investigation Reports
- JSAs
- Safety Training Documents
- Safety Meeting Records
These documents are evaluated, analyzed, and reported on a annual basis.
10. First Aid
The two primary sources of first aid for university employees are the Student Health Center(SHC) and the
LSU Police Department(LSUPD). The SHC is staffed by several full time nurses and doctors. Injured
employees may be treated there when injured on the job. All LSU police officers are trained in first responder
CPR and first aid techniques. LSUPD is staffed on campus 24 hours. Also, a BRCFD station is located just
north of campus on Highland Road with trained paramedics on call. OES offers first aid and CPR training to
university employees. All training includes information on Blood borne Pathogens. First Aid kits are
recommend in all departments.
118
11. Housekeeping Program
The university maintains a Building Services group which insure clean and uncluttered areas. A Property
Control group insure the proper handling of unused or discarded equipment. Also, Building Coordinators are
responsible for inspecting the building on a quarterly basis to eliminate safety and fire hazards from
uncontrolled sources.
12. Hazard Control Program
The University maintains a hazard control program in several ways. Inspection programs, outlined earlier in
this document, are used to recognize, evaluate, and correct hazards.
All university employees who work with or around hazardous materials or hazardous waste receive specific
training on the hazards present, proper work procedures, and protective equipment. This is outlined as part of
the Chemical Hygiene Plan in labs or Hazard Communication Training in other areas. OES also runs the
Hazardous Waste Program. The program insures compliance with State and Federal RCRA Rules.
13. Boiler and Machinery Program
The Facility Services Department is responsible for the Boiler and Machinery Program. Facility personnel are
trained in the operation of the boilers on campus which provide steams for campus heat and power. The
inspection of these boilers is completed by the State Fire Marshall’s Office and the insurance agency hold our
policy. Facility Service also has inspection programs for priority pieces of equipment. Such as, fire alarms
systems, sprinkler systems, emergency power systems, etc..
14. Driver Safety Program
The Driver Safety Program consists of Defensive Driver Training, Record keeping, Accident
Investigations/Reporting, and Vehicle Inspections. All University employees who regularly drive campus
vehicles or regularly drive for campus related business will be given the Defensive Driving Training Course.
Several instructors for this course work on campus in OES, LSUPD, and Facility Services. Driving records are
checked by the Property Control group and accident investigation are performed using the DA2041 Form. All
state vehicles are inspected by trained state inspectors.
15. Water Vessel Operator Safety Program
All water vessels own by the university are used by the Coastal Studies and Environmental Studies
Departments. The Center for Coastal, Energy, & Environmental Resources (CCEER) maintains a water vessel
maintenance department. University employees are trained in the proper use of the vessels and water safety
issues as mandated by the US Coast Guard and Wildlife and Fisheries. . The vessels are regularly inspected by
the department. All records are kept by CCEER and other department as involved.
16. Misc.
Other safety programs used by the university but not listed specifically in the sixteen point program include the
following:
- Substance Abuse and Drug Testing Program (Safety and Security)
- Disability Programs (ADA Compliance in construction)
- Violence in the Workplace (LSUPD)
119